Samsung TV & AV 3D TV TV UN50ES6350F - Coréee du Sud - Mode d'emploi - Manuel de l'utilisateur - Manuels SAMSUNG sur FNAC.COM  - Liste des manuels utilisateur Samsung

- Revenir à l'accueil

 

 

 

상세설명

등록일 descending

언어

파일descending

User Manual 2012.09.10 ENGLISH 1.87 MB
fileDown
User Manual 2012.09.10 한국어 6.42 MB
fileDown
Skype Guide 2012.09.10 한국어 3.01 MB
fileDown

http://www.samsung.com/sec/support/model/UN50ES6350F-downloads

COMMANDER un produit SAMSUNG sur FNAC.COM 

 

Liste des manuels APPLEListe des produits Sony Liste des produits Dell Liste des Manuels Samsung Listes des Manuels Konica Minolta

Manuels Utilisateurs Samsung :

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-TC220W-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9001-M8-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-Wi-Fi-GT-P5110-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels-Mode-d-emploi

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-S-Advance-GT-I9070P-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE40C750-LE40C750R2W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32ES5500-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-UE32ES5500W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A676-LE40A676A1M-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5230-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40EH5300W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46B651-LE46B651T3W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22D5010NW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi%203.6-Noir-8GoYP-GS1CB-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH5000-ZF-LED-32-FULL-HD-UE32EH5000W-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-blanc-SFR-GT-N7000-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-7.0-Wi-FiGT-P3110-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P7300-M16-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-noir-SFRGT-N7000-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS63C7700-PS63C7700YS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE50ES6900S-ZF-Slim-LED-50-SMART-TV-3D-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55D6300SS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D6500WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE46D6500VS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A676-LE32A676A1M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS63C7700-PS63C7700YS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE55D6200TS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES6540S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D6750WS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C450E1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40C530-LE40C530F1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6750WS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40B6000-UE40B6000VW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A556P1F-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C6710-UE46C6710US-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C5100QW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C530-PS50C530C1W-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-14-Serie-5-ULTRA-530U4B-NP530U4B-S01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-DV90-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-Refrigerateur-DP-A306-L-Silver-RT37GBSS-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-Refrigerateur-DP-A306-L-Silver-RT37GBSS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-460DR-2-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT45JSTS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME32B-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Refrigerateur-une-porte-RZ90HAWW-Samsung-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT41MASW-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P6800-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-C24B550U-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-Lave-linge-EcoBubble-12kg-1400tours-WF1124XBC-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Ampli-Tuner-AV-HW-E551-ZF-Barre-de-son-Format-46-Convertible-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9305-Phone-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-AF2FR-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV24PSBN-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C630K1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C630K1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37B6000VW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A466-LE40A466C2M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A676-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXDUH112EE-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B651T3P-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-Samsung-S5220GT-S5220-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-900X4C-NP900X4C-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT59NBPN-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9305-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S27B750V-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Refrigerateur-une-porte-RZ90HAWW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME75B-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT59PMSW-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-13-3Serie-9-900X3A-NP900X3A-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME40B-Manuels

Samsung-SGH-D500-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Manuels

Samsung-Table-induction-3-foyers-7-2-KW-CTN463NC01-CTN463NC01-XEF-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HAWW-Refrigerateur-une-porte-Monochrome-Manuels

Samsung-UE40D6510WS-Manuels

Samsung-ML-2160-Imprimante-Monochrome-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME46B-Manuels

Samsung-LE37A466-LE37A466C2M-Manuels

Samsung-UE32EH4003W-Manuels

Samsung-LE32D460C9H-Manuels

Samsung-LE40B551A6W-Manuels

Samsung-Zephyr-AQV09YWAN-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-GT-P5100-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels

Samsung-S22B350B-Manuels

Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Note-II-GT-N7100-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9300-Manuels

SAMSUNG/SAMSUNG-DV90-Manuels

Samsung-GT-N8000-Manuels

Samsung-AQV12KBBN-Pologne-Manuels

Samsung-ML-2165W-Roumanie-Manuels

Samsung-Notebook-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z5C-S01-NP700Z5C-S01DE-Manuels

Samsung-Player-One-noir-Open-market-GT-S5230-Manuels

Samsung-LE32E420E2W-Manuels

Samsung-910MP-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL-noir-Open-market-GT-I9003-M4-Manuels

Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-Pro-gris-Open-market-GT-B7510-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Gio-noir-SFR-GT-S5660-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Spica-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5700-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7610-noir-Open-market-GT-B7610-Manuels

Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels

Samsung-LE32C650-LE32C650L1W-Manuels

Samsung-LE26D450G1W-Manuels

Samsung-N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels

Samsung-N150-NP-N150-Manuels

Samsung-NP20-NP20FK02BG-SEF-Manuels

Samsung-GT-S5570_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_110726_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9300_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.2_120725_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-LE32D400E1W-Manuels

Samsung-Gainable-Slim-MH026FEEA-Manuels

Samsung-CW21Z573N-Manuels

Samsung-40-UE40D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE46C8700-UE46C8790XS-Manuels

Samsung-UE32D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3D-UE46ES6300S-Manuels

Samsung-2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1-Manuels

Samsung-NS140SDXEA-Manuels

Samsung-MH050FXEA2B-Manuels

Samsung-UE75ES9000S-Slim-LED-75-SMART-Interaction-3D-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HAWW-Manuels

Samsung-GT-P6200-Manuels

Samsung-Refrigerateur-1porteA-350-L-Blanc-RR82FHSW-Manuels

Samsung-UE26EH4000-ZF-LED-26-HD-TV-UE26EH4000W-Manuels

Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9DVBEU4E-ENG-Manuel

Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_111130_Screen-Manuel

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuel

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuels

Samsung-GT-S5360-Manuels

Samsung-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4-0-Blanc-8Go-YP-G1CW-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-551-noir-Open-marketGT-I5510-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Note-10-1-GT-N8000-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-LTE-SC-03D-JP-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-Note-SC-05D-JP-Manuels

Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R530-JA02FR-Manuels

Samsung-UE40C6000-UE40C6000RW-Manuels

Samsung-Congelateur-1porteA-277-L-Blanc-RZ80FHSW-Manuels

Samsung-GT-B5310-Manuels

Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-GT-B5310-Manuels

Samsung-32-LE32D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LCD-TV-Manuels

Samsung-46-UE46D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE55ES6560S-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE46ES8000S-Manuels

Samsung-UE55ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-TV-3D-UE55ES6300S-Manuels

Samsung-AQV18UGAX-Manuels

Samsung-UE50EH5300W-Manuels

Samsung-LE46A676-LE46A676A1M-Manuels

Samsung-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels

Samsung-CW21Z503N-Manuels

Samsung-AQ18UGFN-Manuels

Samsung-Refrigerateur-DP-A275-L-Blanc-RT34GBSW-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES6100W-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HASX-Manuels

Samsung-LE40S71B-Manuels

Samsung-UE32ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3DUE32ES6710S-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-noir-Open-market-GT-S5830-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-GT-P1000-GT-P1000-M16-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7330-noir-Open-market-GT-B7330-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Lite-noir-Orange-GT-B7300-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT-I9100-Manuels

Samsung-Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFRGT-I8000-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFR-GT-I8000-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-7-noir-Open-market-GT-I8700-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-noir-Bouygues-GT-I7500-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-mini-gris-Open-market-GT-S5570-Manuels

Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1FR-Manuels

17,3" Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S01FR - Manuels

40", UE40D6500WXZF, série 6, SMART TV, 3D, FULL HD, LED TV - UE40D6500VS - Manuels

CLX-3185FW Manuels

Galaxy Ace GT-S5830

Galaxy S II GT-I9100

Galaxy Tab 8.9 GT-P7310/M16

Galaxy Tab 10.1 GT-P7500/M16

Galaxy YGT-S5360

LE32C350 LE32C350D1W

LE40C630 LE40C630K1W

MM-C330D

MM-D330D

Micro-chaîne, MM-D330DWXZF, série 3 - MM-D330 - Manuels

N145Plus - NP-N145P - Manuels

N150 - NP-N150 - Manuels

RSH5UEPN

SGH-F490

Samsung Galaxy Ace noir - Open market - GT-S5830 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S II noir - Open market - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S III - GT-I9300 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S noir - Open market - GT-I9000 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy NoteGT-N7000

Samsung Galaxy SGT-I9000

Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S03FR - Manuels

T23A550 T23A550

UE40D6500ZF UE40D6500VS

UE55ES8000/ZF, Slim LED 55", SMART INTERACTION, 3D - UE55ES8000S - Manuels

Wave 575 GT-S5750E

Wave II GT-S8530

16/4ppm Imprimante laser couleur CLP-310 Manuels

16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3170FN Manuels

16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3185FW Manuels Samsung

16/4ppm Multifonction laser couleur CLX-3185 Manuels Samsung

samsung-Wave-II-noir-Open-market-GT-S8530-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-noir-Open-market-GT-S8500-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-M-noir-Open-market-GT-S7250-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-578-noir-Open-market-GT-S5780-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-533-noir-Open-market-GT-S5330-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-3-noir-Open-market-GT-S8600-Manuels

Samsung-Player-HD-noir-Open-market-GT-I8910-Manuels

Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels

Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-W-noir-Open-market-GT-I8350-Manuels

PRODUITS SAMSUNG :
Belkin Chargeur Secteur pour Samsung Galaxy S
Belkin Coque pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noire Translucide
Belkin Etui cuir Verve Folio pour Samsung Galaxy S II
Belkin Etui Pouch pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir
Belkin Kit de Charge Secteur + Automobile pour Samsung Galaxy S
Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy S3
Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Anti-reflets
Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran Screen Guard pour Samsung Galaxy SII - Transparentes
Belkin Micro-Chargeur allume-cigares pour Samsung Galaxy S
Belkin Protection d'écran Screen Guard pour Samsung Galaxy SII - Confidentialité 360°
Câble Omenex Plug & Phone pour Samsung
Câble Omenex Plug & Phone pour Samsung
Coque semi-rigide glossy noire pour Samsung Galaxy S II
Déclencheur sans Fil Hahnel combi TF pour Canon/Pentax/Samsung
Enceintes iLuv iSM524 noir pour Samsung Galaxy Tab
Etui-Brassard Belkin DualFit pour Samsung Galaxy S II
Etui Samsung CC9S70B noir
Fnac chargeur secteur POWY pour Samsung SGH-D800
G-Mobility Pack confort pour Samsung Galaxy SII i9100
Imprimante Samsung CLX-3185FN - Ethernet
Kensington Etui pliant pour Samsung Galaxy Tab
Le Tanneur Etui cuir Pouch pour Samsung Galaxy S11 I9100 - Noir
Lunettes 3D actives Samsung SSG-4100GB
Modelabs 2 protections écran pour Samsung Galaxy ACE S5830
Modelabs Lot de 2 protections d'écran One Touch pour Samsung Galaxy Y S5360 - Transparentes
Modelabs Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy Note - Transparentes
Muvit Adaptateur Jack 3,5 mm pour Samsung (ancienne connectique)
Muvit Coque à rabat Agenda pour Samsung Galaxy Note - Noire
Muvit Coque Doodle Coeur pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S
Muvit Coque Doodle Extraterrestres pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S
Muvit Coque Doodle Rose pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S
Muvit Coque silicone pour Samsung Galaxy Ace
Muvit Coque silicone pour Samsung Galaxy - Noire
Muvit Etui Clapet pour Samsung I9100 - Noir
Muvit Etui Slim Clapet pour Samsung Galaxy Note
Muvit Housse Minigel pour Samsung Galaxy - Noire
Muvit Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung nexus S - 1 Miroir/1 Secret
Muvit Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung S5830
Muvit Pack Accessoires pour Samsung S5830
Muvit Sticker Carbone pour Samsung I9100
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Ibiza
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love London
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love New-York
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Paris
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Tokyo
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - United Kingdom
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - USA
QDOS Coque Cubic pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100
QDOS Coque Steel 4 pour Samsung Galaxy S II
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste
Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD
Samsung B5722 Double SIM
Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles
Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310
Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB
Samsung batterie IA-BP420E
Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST
Samsung batterie SLB-10A
Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS
Samsung BD-E5300
Samsung BD-E5500 3D
Samsung BD-E6100 3D
Samsung BD-E8300 3D
Samsung BD-ES5000
Samsung BD-ES6000 3D
Samsung C3050 Stratus
Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1"
Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung
Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100
Samsung CB20A12
Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir
Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB
Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir
Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung CLP-C300A
Samsung CLP-K300A
Samsung CLP-M300A
Samsung CLP-Y300A
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0
Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet
Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung Coque pour Galaxy S3 - Blanche
Samsung Coque pour Galaxy S3 - Noire
Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go - 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 512 Go - 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go - 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series
Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX
Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 + Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 + Sennheiser RS170
Samsung DP7000A3B-A01FR 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0
Samsung DP700A3B-S02FR 23" LED Tactile
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose
Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi
Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi + Etui
Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi
Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi + Etui
Samsung E1150 - Silver
Samsung ES90 Noir
Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir
Samsung Etui coque pour Samsung Galaxy Y S5360 - Noir
Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir
Samsung Etui rabat pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir
Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S
Samsung EX1
Samsung Flash SEF15A
Samsung Flash SEF20A
Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Android)
Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android)
Samsung Galaxy Note
Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy Note - Dark Blue
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir
Samsung Galaxy S3 (I9300) - Blanc Marbre
Samsung Galaxy S3 (I9300) - Bleu Galet
Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 4,2" 16 Go
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Blanc Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Blanc Wifi + HP Housse Mini Sleeve 10,2" pour Netbook et Tablette - Ocean Drive
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Noir Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet
Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 10,1" 16 Go - Argent
Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 10,1" 16 Go - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 7.0" LED 8 Go
Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Android)
Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Android)
Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir
Samsung Graveur Externe BluRay SE-506AB
Samsung HMX-F80 Noir
Samsung HMX-Q20 Noir
Samsung HMX-QF20 Noir
Samsung HMX-W350 Noir (tout terrain) + Kit Accessoires Sport + micro SDHC 8 Go
Samsung HMX-W350 Rouge (tout terrain) + Kit Accessoires Sport + micro SDHC 8 Go
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1"
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung HT-D330
Samsung HT-D350
Samsung HT-D4500
Samsung HT-D5000 3D
Samsung HT-E4200 3D
Samsung HT-E4500 3D
Samsung HT-E5200 3D
Samsung HT-E5530 3D
Samsung HT-ES4200 3D
Samsung HT-ES6200 3D
Samsung HT-ES8200 3D
Samsung HW-E350
Samsung HW-E450
Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android)
Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1"
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220
Samsung kit HDMI
Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm
Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm
Samsung LE32E420
Samsung LE40D503
Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500
Samsung ML-2010D3
Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi
Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung MLT-D1052S
Samsung MLT-D1082S
Samsung MLT-D1092S
Samsung MM-D430D
Samsung MM-E320
Samsung MV800 Noir
Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir
Samsung NP300E7A-S09FR 17,3" LED
Samsung NP700Z5C 15.6" LED
Samsung NP-RC730-S07FR 17.3"LED
Samsung NX1000 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS
Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8
Samsung NX 50 - 200 mm f/4.0 - 5.6 ED OIS II i-Fonction; Dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200
Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100
Samsung Pack HMX-F800 Noir : Caméscope HD + Etui + Carte SDHC 4 Go
Samsung Pack HMX-Q200 Noir : Caméscope Full HD + Etui + Carte SDHC 4 Go
Samsung PC portable NP300E5A-S0AFR 15.6"LED
Samsung PL210 Noir
Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go
Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal
Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante
Samsung PS43E450
Samsung PS43E490 3D
Samsung PS43E490 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung PS51E450
Samsung PS51E490 3D
Samsung PS51E530
Samsung Q3 noir 4 Go
Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go
Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED
Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes
Samsung S19A100N Moniteur 18,5" - Flat Panel Display
Samsung S22B150N 21,5" LED
Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED
Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D
Samsung S23B350H 23" LED
Samsung S23B550V Moniteur 23" LED
Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED
Samsung S27B350H 27" LED
Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi
Samsung SCX-4200A
Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0
Samsung SE-218BB graveur DVD externe ultra slim USB 2.0
Samsung SLB07A pour ST50
Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000
Samsung ST200F Noir - WiFi
Samsung ST200F Rouge - WiFi
Samsung ST200F Violet - WiFi
Samsung ST65 Noir
Samsung ST65 Rouge
Samsung ST66 Noir
Samsung ST77 Blanc
Samsung ST77 Noir
Samsung ST77 Rouge
Samsung ST77 Violet
Samsung ST88 Noir
Samsung station d'accueil
Samsung station d'accueil HD2
Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR
Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED
Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED
Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D
Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX
Samsung T22A300 21.5" Tuner TNT HD
Samsung T22B300EW 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung T24B301 24" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung T27A550 27" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir
Samsung UE19ES4000 LED
Samsung UE22ES5000 LED
Samsung UE22ES5410 LED
Samsung UE26EH4000 LED
Samsung UE26EH4500 LED
Samsung UE32EH4000 LED
Samsung UE32EH5000 LED
Samsung UE32ES5500 LED
Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE37ES5500 LED
Samsung UE40D5000 LED
Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D
Samsung UE40EH5000 LED
Samsung UE40ES5500 LED
Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D
Samsung UE46EH5000 LED
Samsung UE46ES5500 LED
Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE46ES8000 LED 3D
Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung UE60ES6100 LED 3D
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" - Aluminium + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" LED USB 3.0 - Aluminium
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" LED USB 3.0 - Aluminium+ Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise
Samsung Ultrabook NP530U3C 13,3" HD LED - Série 5 Ultra - Marron
Samsung Ultrabook NP530U3C 13,3" HD LED - Série 5 Ultra - Rose
Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10
Samsung Wave 575
Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi
Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi
Samsung WB690 Noir
Samsung WB700 Noir
Samsung WB850F Noir - WiFi - GPS
Samsung WMN250M accroche murale
Samsung XE700T1A-A02FR 11,6" 64 Go SSD
Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go
Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose
Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go
Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go
Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go
Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go
Samyang 14 mm f/2.8 Aspherical IF ED UMC; Monture Samsung NX
Samyang 35 mm f/1.4 AS UMC; Monture Samsung NX
Samyang Fish-eye 8 mm f/3.5 Aspherical IF MC; Monture Samsung Type NX
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 3,6" 8 Go
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 3,6" 8 Go + Casque weSC Conga Matte noir
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 4,2" 8 Go
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 5" 8 Go
T'nB Coque Clip On pour Samsung Galaxy SII - New York
Toner Samsung CLT-C4072S - Cyan
Toner Samsung CLT-C4092S Cyan
Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S - Noir
Toner Samsung CLT-K4092S Noir
Toner Samsung CLT-M4072S - Magenta
Toner Samsung CLT-M4092S Magenta
Toner Samsung CLT-P4092C - Pack de 4 Toners
Toner Samsung CLT-Y4072S - Jaune
Toner Samsung CLT-Y4092S Jaune
Toner Samsung MLT-D1042S - Noir
We Digital by Samsung - Silver We 1 To USB 2.0
We Digital by Samsung - Silver WE 2 To USB 2.0
Xqisit Coque iPlate Glossy pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanche
Xqisit Coque iPlate Style pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Transparente/Blanche
Xqisit Coque iPlate Style pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Transparente/Noire
Xqisit Coque Soft Grip pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanche
Xqisit Coque Soft Grip pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noire
Xqisit Etui Flipcover pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanc
Xqisit Etui Flipcover pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir

Samsung - Aspirateur robot Navibot SR8845

Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86G0 gris foncé/fuchsia

Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac SC4780 noir

Samsung - Four micro-ondes MW73B - blanc

SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 36 L - Micro ondes 36 L - CP1395ES

SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 42 L - Micro ondes 42 L - CQ1570U

Samsung - Micro-ondes combiné CE117PT-B

SAMSUNG - Micro-ondes Grill simultané GS89F-1SP

Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED

Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste

Samsung Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86H0 gris clair/bleu

Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD

Samsung B5722 Double SIM

Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles

Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310

Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB

Samsung batterie IA-BP420E

Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST

Samsung batterie SLB-10A

Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS

Samsung BD-E5300

Samsung BD-E5500 3D

Samsung BD-E8300 3D

Samsung C3050 Stratus

Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1"

Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung

Samsung Caméra additionnelle de vidéosurveillance SEB-1015RWP EX

Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100

Samsung CB20A12

Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir

Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB

Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir

Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB

Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLP-325 WiFi

Samsung CLP-325 WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0

Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet

Samsung CLP-C300A

Samsung CLP-K300A

Samsung CLP-M300A

Samsung CLP-Y300A

Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi

Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0

Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet

Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet

Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung Coque silicone Croisillons pour nexus S

Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128D 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series

Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX

Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0

Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel

Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose

Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi

Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi

Samsung E1150 - Silver

Samsung E2550

Samsung EcoBlue SC61E0 bleu azur

Samsung ES30 Noir

Samsung ES30 Noir + Carte SD 2 Go

Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir

Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir

Samsung Etui flap en cuir pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - Noir

Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S

Samsung Flash SEF15A

Samsung Flash SEF20A

Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android)

Samsung Galaxy Note

Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc

Samsung Galaxy Note - Rose

Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc

Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir 16 Go 3G

Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi

Samsung Galaxy Xcover s5690 (sous Androïd) - Smartphone Samsung Solide certifié IP67

Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir

Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1"

Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9"

Samsung HT-D330

Samsung HT-D350

Samsung HT-D423

Samsung HT-D4500

Samsung HT-D5000 3D

Samsung HT-E4200 3D

Samsung HT-E4500 3D

Samsung HT-E5200 3D

Samsung HT-ES6200 3D WiFi

Samsung HW-E450

Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android)

Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1"

Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX

Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220

Samsung Kit Etui + Clavier Bluetooth pour Galaxy Tab 10,1" - Brun foncé

Samsung kit HDMI

Samsung kit HDMI

Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm

Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm

Samsung LE40D550

Samsung Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Galaxy S2 - Transparente/Miroir

Samsung Lot de 2 Protections d'écran pour i9000 Galaxy S

Samsung Lunettes 3D SSG-3050GB

SAMSUNG ME106V-SX

Samsung ME82V Micro-onde monofonction

SAMSUNG ME82V-SX

SAMSUNG Micro ondes MW87Y

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE117APT B

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE137NEMX

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes FW113T002

Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500

Samsung ML-2010D3

Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi

Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet

Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung MLT-D1052S

Samsung MLT-D1082S

Samsung MLT-D1092S

Samsung MM-D430D

Samsung MV800 Noir

Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir

Samsung NP300E7A-S03FR 17,3" LED

Samsung NP700Z5A-S02FR 15,6" LED

Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS + Flash SEF-8A NG8

Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8

Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200

Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100

Samsung Pack étui cuir + chargeur + protection d'écran pour Galaxy S

Samsung PL170 Noir

Samsung PL210 Noir

Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go

Samsung PL90 Noir et Rouge

Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal

Samsung Player Mini C3300 - Noir

Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante

Samsung PS43D450

Samsung PS43E450

Samsung PS43E490 3D

Samsung PS51E450

Samsung PS51E490 3D

Samsung PS59D530

Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go

Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED

Samsung RC730-S06FR 17,3" LED

Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes

Samsung S22A300B 21,5" TFT

Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED

Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D

Samsung S23B350H 23" LED

Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED

Samsung S27B350H 27" LED

Samsung SC4340 noir ébène

Samsung SC4790 - Aspirateur sans sac - traineau - rouge

Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions

Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions

Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet

Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi

Samsung SCX-4200A

Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung SE-084D graveur DVD externe slim USB 2.0

Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0

Samsung SLB07A pour ST50

Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000

Samsung ST65 Noir

Samsung ST65 Rouge

Samsung station d'accueil

Samsung station d'accueil HD2

Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 10,1"

Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9"

Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR

Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED

Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED

Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D

Samsung SyncMaster S24A350H 24" LED

Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD

Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX

Samsung T22A350 21,5" LED Tuner TNT

Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir

Samsung UE19D4010 LED

Samsung UE19ES4000 LED

Samsung UE22ES5000 LED

Samsung UE22ES5410 LED

Samsung UE26EH4000 LED

Samsung UE26EH4500 LED

Samsung UE32D5000 LED

Samsung UE32EH4000 LED

Samsung UE32EH5000 LED

Samsung UE32ES5500 LED

Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc

Samsung UE40D5000 LED

Samsung UE40D5710 LED

Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D

Samsung UE40EH5000 LED

Samsung UE40ES5500 LED

Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D

Samsung UE46EH5000 LED

Samsung UE46ES5500 LED

Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc

Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir

Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10

Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi

Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi

Samsung WB700 Noir

Samsung WB750 Noir

Samsung WIS09ABGN LinkStick WLAN-Adapter

Samsung WMN250M accroche murale

Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go

Samsung YP-F3 noir 2 Go

Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go

Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go

Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose

Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go

Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go

Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go

Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go

http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-N7000ZBESFR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120809172648710/GT-N7000_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120716_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120611165201603/GT-P3110_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120608_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-N7000RWASFR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201203/20120329200748757/GT-N7000_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.1_120126_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111216180827802/GT-N7000_UM_EU_Gingerbread_Eng_Rev.1.1_111104_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120809173956440/GT-P7510_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120809_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111205085630494/GT-P7510_UM_Orange_Honeycomb_Fre_Rev.1.0_111202_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201207/20120713085451049/GT-P7510_UM_EU_Icecream_Eng_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-P7510FKAXEF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120802111559199/GT-I9070P_UM_Orange_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120629_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201205/20120517111406195/GT-I9070P_UM_EU_Gingerbread_Eng_Rev.1.0_120510_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120802111559199/GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201204/20120424154452484/GT-P3100_UM_EU_Icecream_Eng_Rev.1.0_120424_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201209/20120917105131603/GT-P3100_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120801_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-P5110TSAXEF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120810190309322/GT-P5110_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120808_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120614144504602/GT-P5110_UM_EU_Icecream_Eng_Rev.1.0_120614_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-I5800DKABOG-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201008/20100809184447671/GT-I5800_UM_Open_Fre_Rev.1.0_100722_cms.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201009/20100907222536765/GT-I5800_QSG_Open_Eng_Rev.1.1_100907a_cms.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201105/20110525183942011/GT-I5800_QSG_EU_Froyo_Eng_UK_Rev.1.1_110525_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201105/20110525175249448/GT-I5800_QSG_EU_Froyo_Eng_Rev.1.1_110525_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201105/20110530173657729/GT-I5800_UM_Open_Froyo_Fre_Rev.1.1_110527_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-I9001HKDFTM-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111212155049797/GT-I9001_UM_EU_Gingerbread_Eng_Rev.1.3_111212_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LF22TOWHBDN/EN-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201211/20121102145205481/BN68-03899A-04.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121108171138109/BN46-00315A-Fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121108171138109/BN46-00315A-Eng.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP550P5C-T04FR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121113125618982/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121113125618982/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE32D5720RSXZF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201105/20110517143435031/[UD5700-XN]BN68-03506F-03L04-0427.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111216084511364/Web_W_X6DVBEUA_Fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111216084511364/Web_W_X6DVBEUA_Eng.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-I9000RWYSFR-downloads Skype™ Skype 시작하기 2 기존 계정으로 로그인하기 3 얼굴 인식으로 로그인하기 4 얼굴 등록하기 5 새로운 계정 생성하기 6 화면 표시 7 연락처 등록하기 8 전화 걸기 9 전화 받기 10 통화목록 11 Skype 옵션 12 음성 및 모션 인식 13 * 본 매뉴얼에 사용된 이미지 및 색상은 사전 예고 없이 변경될 수 있습니다.2 Skype 시작하기 Skype™를 이용하여 음성 및 영상 통화를 할 수 있습니다. O SMART HUB 기능을 통해 사용 가능합니다. ✎ 참고 x 삼성 웹 캠은 USB 허브를 이용하지 않고 TV에 바로 연결하시기 바랍니다. x 웹 캠이 정상적으로 작동하지 않을 경우에는 TV 전원을 껐다 다시 켠 후 Skype를 재실행 하시기 바랍니다. x TV 전원이 꺼진 상태에서는 Skype™ 사용이 불가능합니다. x 주변이 시끄러우면 통화 품질에 좋지 않은 영향을 줄 수 있습니다. x 무선 네트워크를 사용할 경우 통화 품질이 떨어질 수 있습니다. x Skype™ 소프트웨어를 사용하려면, Skype™ 사용자 라이선스 계약(Skypecom/legal/eula) 및 Skype™ 서비스 약관(Skypecom/legal/tos), Skype™ 개인정보 보호 정책(Skypecom/legal/privacy/general)에 명시된 제한사항을 준수해야 합니다. x Skype를 삭제하면 저장된 정보(통화목록 및 메뉴 설정 값)도 함께 삭제됩니다. x Skype™ 사용 관련 자세한 정보는 www.Skype.com 에서 확인하실 수 있습니다. x TV에서 Skype를 사용하려면 우선 네트워크 설정을 해야 합니다. 본 매뉴얼의 설정 방법을 참고하시기 바랍니다. x TV 시청 중이거나 Skype™ 어플리케이션 사용 중에 전화가 걸려오면 벨이 울립니다. x Skype를 사용하기 위해서는 카메라가 필요합니다. 카메라를 내장하지 않은 모델은 삼성 TV 카메라를 구입하여 사용하시기 바랍니다. x 2010년형 TV 카메라의 경우 2012년 출시된 삼성 TV와는 호환되지 않습니다. x 윈도우 기반 PC의 경우 Skype™ 버전 4.2 이상만 지원됩니다. x 매킨토시 PC의 경우 Skype™ 버전 5.0 이상만 지원됩니다. x Linux 기반 PC에서는 지원되지 않습니다.3 Skype에 오신것을 환영합니다! 로그인하기 계정 생성 R 복귀 Skype에 오신것을 환영합니다! Skypex이름 비밀번호 Skypex실행시x자동x로그인x하기 TV가x켜질x때x자동x로그인x하기 로그인하기 얼굴 인식 모드 [확인]키를x누르십시오 [확인]키를x누르십시오 기존 계정으로 로그인하기 2 Skype 이름과x비밀번호를x 입력하세요. Skype 이름과x비밀번호는x키패드를x이용하여x입력x합니다. 3 로그인하기를x누르세요. 1 로그인하기를x누르세요. TV에서 Skype를 처음 실행할 경우, Skype 이름과 비밀번호를 입력하여야 합니다. 또는 계정 생성 메뉴를 이용해 새로운 계정을 만들어 로그인 할 수도 있습니다. 로그인이 되지 않을 경우에는 네트워크 연결 상태를 확인하세요. Skypex이름을x입력하세요. Skype 이름 전체 삭제 삭제 한칸띄움 숫자자판 설정 확인 취소 17/324 Skype에 오신것을 환영합니다! Skype 이름 비밀번호 Skype 실행시 자동 로그인 하기 TV가 켜질 때 자동 로그인 하기 로그인하기 얼굴 인식 모드 [확인]키를 누르십시오 [확인]키를 누르십시오 R 복귀 Skype에 오신것을 환영합니다! 얼굴 인식으로 로그인을 진행합니다. 얼굴을 TV 화면 정면으로 향해주세요. 비밀번호 모드 중지 R 복귀 얼굴 인식으로 로그인하기 x SMART Interaction (음성 및 모션 인식)을 지원되는 TV에서는 얼굴 인식을 이용하여 Skype 로그인을 할 수 있습니다. [ 얼굴 인식 로그인 기능 작동을 위해 제품에 귀하의 얼굴 이미지가 썸네일 형태로 저장됩니다. [ 얼굴 인식을 이용한 로그인은 비밀번호를 사용하는 로그인보다 보안에 취약할 수 있습니다. 1 얼굴 인식 모드를 누르세요. 2 얼굴 인식을 시작합니다. • TV 화면 정면으로 얼굴을 맞춰주세요. TV가 자동으로 얼굴을 인식하여 로그인합니다.5 얼굴 등록하기 설정 Skypex옵션 대화 통화목록 일반전화로 전화x걸기 연락처 Skype 크레딧 : 0 계정 관리 비밀번호x변경 등록된x얼굴x초기화 얼굴 등록 R 복귀 1 설정 → 계정 관리 → 얼굴 등록을x 선택하세요. 얼굴 등록 화면 중앙에 얼굴이 들어오도록 설정해 주세요. 중앙에 있는 4각형이 녹색으로 바뀔 때까지 기다려 주세요. 중지 R 복귀 2 얼굴x인식x화면이x나타납니다. • 화면 중앙에 얼굴이 들어오도록 설정해 주세요. • 중앙에 있는 사각형이 녹색으로 바뀔 때까지 기다려 주세요.6 Skype에 오신것을 환영합니다! 로그인하기 계정 생성 R 복귀 새로운 계정 생성하기 1 계정 생성을x누르세요. 새로운xSkypex계정x생성 SkypexNamex생성 비밀번호 Skype에서x사용할x이름을x만들어x보세요. 친구에게xSkypex이름을x알려주면x친구가x자신의x연락처에 추가해서x온라인에서x대화를x나눌x수x있습니다. 로그인하거나x계정x관리에x사용합니다. 이전 다음 R 복귀 비밀번호x저장 2 새로x만들xSkype Name 생성과x비밀번호를x 입력하세요. 3 성명과x이메일을x입력하세요. 새로운xSkypex계정x생성 성명 이메일 여기에x입력한x이름이x친구의x연락처에x표시됩니다. 계정에x엑세스가x안되거나x비밀번호를x잊어버린x경우xEmail이x필요합니다. 이전 다음 R 복귀 새로운xSkypex계정x생성 이용약관 동의 약관 보기 개인정보 취급방침 보기 긴급전화로 사용 불가. Skype는 일반적인 전화를 대체할 수 없으며, 긴급 전화로 사용할 수 없습니다. 네. 아래 내용을 읽었으며, 이에 동의합니다. 이전 동의 R 복귀 4 동의를x선택하세요. 각 항목을 선택하면 자세한 약관 내용을 확인할 수 있습니다. 7 영상 통화 음성 통화 1/1 페이지 연락처 대화하기 a 로그아웃 { 연락처 추가 R 복귀 대화 통화목록 일반전화로 전화 걸기 설정 Skype 크레딧 : 0 Echo / Sound Test Service 화면 표시 Skype™x사용자x이름, 온라인x상태,x기분을x나타내는x 메시지,x프로필x사진이x 표시됩니다. 연락처x목록이x표시됩니다. 영상 통화,x음성 통화,x대화 하기x중x 원하는x모드를x선택할x수x있습니다. Skypex크레딧 연락처, 대화, 통화목록, 일반전화로 전화 걸기, 설정 중 원하는 메뉴를 선택합니다. 메뉴를 선택한 상태에서 ENTERE 버튼을 누른 후 스크롤 해서 원하는 항목을 선택합니다. axx로그아웃:x로그아웃x합니다. {xx연락처 추가:xSkype™x연락처x또는x전화번호를x등록합니다. R 복귀 / 통화 종료:xx이전x메뉴로x이동합니다./ Skype™x어플리케이션을x종료합니다. 이x때x통화도x함께x종료됩니다.8 1/1 페이지 연락처 대화 통화목록 일반전화로 전화 걸기 설정 Skype 크레딧 : 0 Echo / Sound Test Service 대화하기 연락처x종류를x선택하세요. 연락처 추가 Skype 연락처 추가 전화번호 추가 R 복귀 영상 통화 음성 통화 1/1 페이지 연락처 대화하기 a 로그아웃 { 연락처 추가 R 복귀 대화 통화목록 일반전화로 전화 걸기 설정 Skype 크레딧 : 0 Echo / Sound Test Service 연락처 등록하기 1 { 연락처 추가를x누르세요. 2 원하는x항목을x선택하세요. • Skype 연락처 추가: 등록할 사람의 이름, Skype 사용자 이름 또는 이메일 주소를 입력하세요. • 전화번호 추가: 이름과 전화번호를 입력하세요.9 영상 통화 음성 통화 1/1 페이지 연락처 대화하기 a 로그아웃 { 연락처 추가 R 복귀 대화 통화목록 일반전화로 전화 걸기 설정 Skype 크레딧 : 0 Echo / Sound Test Service 1/1 페이지 연락처 대화 통화목록 일반전화로 전화 걸기 설정 Skype 크레딧 : 0 Echo / Sound Test Service 대화하기 전화 거는 중 취소 samsung_skype1 • 화면 표시 내용은 설명을 위해 그려진 것으로 실제의 모양과 부분적으로 다를 수 있습니다. 전화 걸기 1 영상 통화x또는 음성 통화를x선택하세요. 영상 통화 음성 통화 통화 시간 00:03:10 통화 종료 영상 통화 마이크 볼륨 대기 T 간편 메뉴 } 연락처 목록 R 복귀 통화x시간 00:00:42 통화 종료 카메라 끄기 마이크 볼륨 대기 T 간편 메뉴 b 전체 화면 } 연락처 목록 R 복귀10 통화 시간 00:00:42 통화 종료 카메라 끄기 마이크 볼륨 대기 T 간편 메뉴 b 전체 화면 } 연락처 목록 R 복귀 • 컨퍼런스콜 수신 중에는 비디오 메뉴를 사용할 수 없습니다. 통화 시간 00:03:10 통화 종료 영상 통화 마이크 볼륨 대기 T 간편 메뉴 } 연락처 목록 R 복귀 전화 받기 영상 통화 또는 음성 통화 중일 때  통화 종료 :x통화를x종료합니다.  카메라 끄기:x카메라를x끕니다.  마이크 볼륨:x마이크x음량을x조절합니다.  대기 / 재시작:x통화를x대기x/x재시작x합니다. ✎ 통화 대기 상태는 메시지를 통해 상대방에게 표시됩니다.  영상 통화:x영상x통화x모드로x전환합니다. x B (전체 화면):x전체x화면x모드로x전환합니다. x D (연락처 목록):x연락처x목록을x보여줍니다. samsung_skype1 님의 전화... 영상 통화 음성 통화 거절 영상 통화 음성 통화 통화를x거절합니다.11 프로필 보기 보이스메일x보내기 연락처x추가 차단 목록에서x삭제 로그아웃 R 복귀 영상 통화 페이지 통화목록 대화 연락처 일반전화로 전화 걸기 설정 Skype 크레딧 : 0 통화목록 통화목록의 각 항목 옆에는 아이콘이 표시됩니다. 아이콘 내용 수신 전화 발신 전화 부재중 전화 수신 보이스메일 부재중 보이스메일 수신 컨퍼런스콜 부재중 컨퍼런스콜 • 프로필 보기: 선택한 연락처 사용자의 프로필을 확인할 수 있습니다. • 보이스메일 보내기: 선택한 연락처로 보이스메일을 보낼 수 있습니다. • 연락처 추가: 선택한 사람을 연락처 목록에 추가합니다. 이 메뉴는 연락처 목록에 저장되어 있지 않은 사람에 한해 사용 가능합니다. • 차단: 선택한 사람의 연락을 차단합니다. • 목록에서 삭제: 선택한 항목을 통화목록에서 삭제할 수 있습니다. • 로그아웃: 로그아웃 합니다. ✎ 통화목록 저장 개수는 메모리 용량에 따라 제한될 수 있습니다. ✎ TV에 설정된 시간이 통화목록에 적용됩니다. 최근 통화 날짜 순으로 전화 통화 이력을 확인할 수 있습니다. 간편 메뉴12 설정 Skype 옵션 a 로그아웃 R 복귀 대화 통화목록 일반전화로 전화x걸기 연락처 온라인x상태x표시 프로필x설정 사진x변경 계정x관리 Skype 크레딧 : 0 일반 설정 Skype 옵션 R 복귀 비디오x설정 사생활보호x설정 차단된x연락처 착신통화x전환 보이스x메일 Skypex소개 TV가x시작할x때xxSkypex실행: 친구가x로그인할x경우x알림x메시지x표시: 끄기 끄기 Skype 옵션 1 설정 → Skype 옵션을x 선택하세요. 2 각x해당x항목을x설정할x수x있습니다. • 일반 설정: TV 전원이 켜지면 자동으로 Skype를 실행할지 여부를 선택합니다. • 비디오 설정: 비디오 관련 개인정보 설정 값을 조정합니다. 영상 전화 수신 허용 범위를 설정합니다. 모두에게 허용, 내 연락처 목록에 있는 사람에게만 허용, 허용하지 않음 중에서 원하는 항목을 선택하세요. • 사생활보호 설정: 전화 수신 허용 범위를 설정합니다. 누구든지 또는 내 연락처 목록에 있는 사람에게만 허용 중에서 원하는 항목을 선택하세요. • 차단된 연락처: 통화를 원하지 않는 사람의 Skype™ 사용자 이름이나 전화 번호를 입력해 전화 수신을 차단할 수 있습니다. 차단 연락처 목록이 이 창에 표시됩니다. 연락처 목록이나 통화 목록에서 원하는 연락처를 선택한 후 간편메뉴T 버튼을 눌러 번호를 차단할 수도 있습니다. • 착신통화 전환: 착신 전환할 전화 번호를 등록하면 Skype에 로그인 되어 있지 않은 상태에서도 Skype™ 계정으로 걸려오는 전화를 등록한 번호로 전환해 받을 수 있습니다. 국가를 선택한 후 전화 번호(지역번호 포함)를 입력하세요. 전환 시간을 입력하여 착신통화 전환이 이루어질 때까지 소요되는 시간을 설정할 수 있습니다. 이 기능을 사용하려면 www.Skype.com에서 Skype 크레딧을 구입해야 합니다. • 보이스메일: 부재중일 때 발신자가 음성 메시지를 남길 수 있는 기능입니다. Skype에 로그인하면 어디서든 음성 메시지를 확인할 수 있습니다. www. Skype.com에 접속한 후 Account를 클릭하면 자세한 내용 및 보이스메일 확인이 가능합니다. • Skype 소개: Skype™ 저작권 정보를 확인할 수 있습니다.13 음성 및 모션 인식 1 "하이 티비 (시작 명령어)"를x말한x후,x전화걸x사용자x 이름을x말하세요. x SMART Interaction (음성 및 모션 인식)을 지원하는 TV에서는 Skype에서 음성 및 모션 인식을 이용하여 통화 및 조작이 가능합니다. x 통화 중에는 음성 인식 기능을 사용할 수 없습니다. x 상대방 이름이 특수 문자를 포함한 경우나 단순 알파벳, 숫자 조합으로 되어있는 경우 등, 발음하기 어려운 이름은 인식이 안될 수 있습니다. 이름 변경 기능을 이용하여 발음하기 쉬운 새로운 이름으로 변경 후 사용할 수 있습니다. x 더 자세한 정보는 e-설명서 또는 사용자 설명서의 “Smart Interaction”을 참고하세요. 영상 통화 스마트 티비 하이x티비 음성 통화 1/1 페이지 Hello world! 대화하기 연락처 대화 통화목록 일반전화로 전화 걸기 설정 Skype 크레딧 : 0 Echox/xSoundxTestxService 전화걸 사용자 이름을 말하세요. a 취소 영상 통화 영상 통화 Smart TV HIxTV 음성 통화 음성 통화 1/1 페이지 Hello world! 대화하기 연락처 대화 통화목록 일반전화로 전화 걸기 설정 Skype 크레딧 : 0 Echox/xSoundxTestxService a 로그아웃 { 연락처 추가 T 간편 메뉴 R 취소 1/1 페이지 Hello world! 대화하기 연락처 대화 통화목록 일반전화로 전화 걸기 설정 Skype 크레딧 : 0 Echox/xSoundxTestxService 취소 전화 거는 중 취소 young470 3 영상통화x또는x음성통화를x말하면x 통화가x시작됩니다. 2 영상 통화, 음성 통화, 취소 중x 원하는x명령어를x말하세요. BN81-07665A-1015 본 제품은 대한민국에서만 사용하도록 만들어져 있으며, 해외에서는 품질을 보증하지 않습니다. (FOR KOREA UNIT STANDARD ONLY) "안전을 위한 주의사항" 사용자의 안전을 지키고 재산상의 손해 등을 막기 위한 내용입니다. 반드시 읽고 올바르게 사용해 주세요. 사용설명서 상의 그림은 설명을 위해 그려진 것으로 실제의 모양과 부분적으로 다를 수 있습니다. 고객지원 제품 사용 설명서 0_XTATSCE-cover.indd 1 2012-09-04 11:13:583 차례 1. 채널 메뉴 채널 메뉴 사용하기 .................... 5 채널 기억하기 .......................10 기타 기능 ...........................11 2. 기본 기능 화면 모드 변경하기 ...................12 화면 조정값 설정하기 .................12 화면 크기 변경하기 ...................13 부가 설정 변경하기 ...................14 TV를 모니터로 사용하기 ..............16 기본 음향 모드 변경하기...............17 음향 효과 변경하기 ...................17 3. 설정 기능 네트워크 연결하기....................19 유선 네트워크 설정하기 ...............22 무선 네트워크 설정하기 ...............23 네트워크 기기 관리하기 ...............26 시간 설정하기 .......................28 자녀 보호 기능 설정하기...............29 에코 절전 설정.......................30 키보드와 마우스로 TV 이용하기........31 TV와 Samsung Audio Device 연결하기............................32 기타 기능 ...........................33 고객지원 메뉴 .......................36 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 3 2012-09-04 9:23:364 차례 4. 고급 기능 입체영상 시청하기....................39 스마트 허브 .........................41 스마트 허브 화면 설정하기.............44 Samsung Apps 사용하기 ...........48 스마트 검색 .........................49 스마트 팁 NAVER...................50 패밀리 스토리 .......................52 피트니스............................53 키즈................................54 웹브라우저 ..........................56 Skype.............................59 TV 애플리케이션으로 에어컨 이용하기 ..59 AllShare Play .....................60 AllShare Play 이용하기 .............63 마이 리스트 (AllShare Play) .........63 동영상 (AllShare Play)..............64 사진 (AllShare Play) ...............66 음악 (AllShare Play) ...............68 녹화된 TV (AllShare Play) ..........70 타임시프트 ..........................72 DLNA 기능 사용하기.................73 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC).............75 5. 기타 기능 문제 해결 ...........................77 지원 자막 및 AllShare Play 형식 .....85 도난 방지용 켄싱턴 잠금 장치 ..........87 라이선스 정보 .......................88 화면 조정 메뉴 (OSD: On Screen Display) 구조 ...89 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 4 2012-09-04 9:23:375 채널 메뉴 사용하기 채널 ™ → 채널 채널을 등록하고 삭제할 수 있으며,선호채널을 설정하고 아날로그 채널의 이름을 변경할 수 있습니다. ● 전체: 수신되는 모든 채널을 보여줍니다. ● 등록된 채널: TV에 등록된 채널을 보여줍니다. 일반 리모컨의 채널목록 버튼을 눌렀을 때 나타납니다. ● 선호목록 1 ~ 선호목록 5: 설정할 수 있는 선호목록은 최대 5개입니다. 선호목록의 이름을 변경하려면, 리모컨을 이용해 각각의 선호목록에서 b를 선택하세요. ● 최근 시청: 가장 최근에 시청했던 채널을 보여줍니다. ● 최다 시청: 자주 시청한 채널을 보여줍니다. 채널에서 버튼 사용하기 ● b 삭제: 선택된 채널을 삭제합니다. ● ` 상세 정보: 선택된 채널의 상세 정보를 보여줍니다. ● k 페이지: 다음 페이지나 이전 페이지로 이동합니다. ● E 선택 / 선택 취소: 채널을 선택하거나 선택을 취소합니다. ● T 간편 메뉴: 설정 메뉴를 보여줍니다. ● R 복귀: 이전 메뉴로 돌아갑니다. 채널에서 간편 메뉴 사용하기 ● 등록 / 삭제: 채널 목록에서 채널을 등록하거나 삭제합니다. 리모컨의 채널 버튼을 이용하여 채널 변경 시 등록된 채널만 시청할 수 있습니다. ▼ 채널 등록하기 1 채널 화면에서 전체를 선택합니다. 2 전체 목록에서 회색으로 표시된 채널을 선택합니다. 선택한 채널 왼쪽에 c 마크가 나타납니다. ■ 하나 이상의 채널을 선택할 수 있습니다. ■ 선택을 취소하려면 선택한 채널을 다시 선택하세요. c 마크가 사라집니다. ■ 삭제된 채널은 회색으로 표시됩니다. 3 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 4 등록을 선택하세요. “선택한 채널이 등록되었습니다.”라는 메시지가 나타납니다. 확인을 선택하세요. ■ 등록은 삭제된 채널에서만 나타납니다. ■ 등록하거나 삭제할 수 있는 모든 채널은 전체 목록에서 볼 수 있습니다. 1. 채널 메뉴 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 5 2012-09-04 9:23:386 ▼ 채널 목록에서 채널 삭제하기 1 채널을 지우려면 왼쪽의 채널 목록을 선택하세요. 2 선택한 채널 목록에서 오른쪽으로 이동해 지우려는 채널을 선택하세요. 선택한 채널 왼쪽에 c 마크가 나타납니다. ■ 하나 이상의 채널을 선택할 수 있습니다. ■ 선택을 취소하려면 선택한 채널을 다시 선택하세요. c 마크가 사라집니다. 3 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 4 삭제를 선택하세요. “선택한 채널이 삭제되었습니다.”라는 메시지가 나타납니다. 확인을 선택하세요. ■ 채널을 바로 삭제하려면, 리모컨을 이용해 b를 선택하세요. ■ 최근 시청, 최다 시청, 선호목록의 채널을 삭제하면 해당 채널 목록에서 채널이 없어지지만 전체, 등록된 채널 목록에서는 삭제되지 않습니다. ● 선호목록 편집: 간편 메뉴를 실행해 즐겨보는 채널을 선호채널로 설정하거나, 선호채널 목록에서 채널을 삭제할 수 있습니다. ▼ 선호채널 설정하기 1 전체 또는 등록된 채널을 선택합니다. 2 선호목록에 등록하려는 채널을 선택하세요. 선택한 채널 왼쪽에 c 마크가 나타납니다. ■ 하나 이상의 채널을 선택할 수 있습니다. ■ 선택을 취소하려면 선택한 채널을 다시 선택하세요. c 마크가 사라집니다. 3 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 4 선호목록 편집을 선택하세요. 선호목록 편집 화면이 나타납니다. 5 리모컨을 이용해 a를 선택하면 선택된 채널이 선호목록으로 이동합니다. ■ 선호목록 편집 화면에서도 채널을 등록할 수 있습니다. ■ 5개의 선호목록에 채널을 등록할 수 있습니다. 선호목록을 변경하려면 리모컨을 이용해 }를 선택하세요. }를 선택할 때마다 선호목록이 변경됩니다. 6 확인을 선택하세요. 선택한 채널이 선호채널로 등록이 완료되며 선택한 선호목록에서 확인할 수 있습니다. 7 선호목록으로 설정된 채널은 “ ” 이 나타납니다. ▼ 선호목록 편집에서 컬러 버튼 사용하기 ● 선호목록 편집 화면의 왼쪽 등록된 채널 항목에서 다음의 기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. – a 등록: 선호목록으로 이동합니다. – } 선호목록 변경: 선호목록을 변경합니다. 리모컨을 이용해 }를 선택할 때마다 선호목록이 변경됩니다. – Ÿ이동: 리모컨을 이용해 번호를 입력하면, 입력한 채널로 이동합니다. – R 복귀: 이전 메뉴로 돌아갑니다. ● 선호목록 편집 화면의 오른쪽 선호목록 항목에서 다음의 기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. – a 삭제: 선택된 채널을 삭제합니다. 하나 이상의 채널을 선택해 동시에 삭제할 수 있습니다. 선택한 채널에는 c 마크가 나타납니다. – b 순서변경: 선호목록 채널의 순서를 변경합니다.z – E 완료: 순서변경이 완료됩니다. 순서 변경 기능을 이용할 때 나타납니다. – { 복사: 원하는 채널을 다른 선호목록에도 넣을 수 있습니다. – } 선호목록 변경: 선호목록을 변경합니다. 리모컨을 이용해 }를 선택할 때마다 선호목록이 변경됩니다. – Ÿ이동: 리모컨을 이용해 번호를 입력하면, 입력한 채널로 이동합니다. – R 복귀: 이전 메뉴로 돌아갑니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 6 2012-09-04 9:23:387 1. 채널 메뉴 ▼ 선호목록에서 채널 삭제하기 1 선호목록 1 ~ 선호목록 5 중 하나의 선호목록을 선택합니다. 2 선호목록에서 지우려는 채널을 선택합니다. 선택한 채널 왼쪽에 c 마크가 나타납니다. ■ 하나 이상의 채널을 선택할 수 있습니다. ■ 선택을 취소하려면 선택한 채널을 다시 선택하세요. c 마크가 사라집니다. 3 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 4 삭제를 선택하세요. “선택한 항목을 삭제하겠습니까?”라는 메시지가 나타납니다. 5 확인을 선택하세요. “선택한 항목이 삭제되었습니다.” 라는 메시지가 나타납니다. 선호목록의 채널을 바로 삭제하려면, 리모컨을 이용해 b 를 누르세요. ● 채널 잠금 설정: 자녀가 유해한 채널을 시청하지 못하도록 특정 채널의 시청을 제한할 수 있습니다. ■ 채널 잠금 기능을 켜기로 설정했을 때, 채널 잠금 설정을 사용할 수 있습니다. ■ 셋톱박스 등 외부기기로 HDMI, 컴포넌트, 외부입력에 연결하여 시청 중인 경우에는 해당 기능을 사용할 수 없습니다. ■ 초기 비밀번호는 “0-0-0-0”입니다. ● 채널 이름 변경: 채널의 이름은 5글자를 넘길 수 없습니다. 아날로그 채널에서만 설정할 수 있습니다. ● 전체 선택 / 선택 취소: 채널 목록에 있는 모든 채널을 선택합니다. / 선택한 모든 채널을 취소합니다. ▼ 채널 상태 표시 아이콘 ● : 아날로그 채널 ● : 선호목록으로 설정된 채널 ● : 채널 잠금이 설정된 채널 예약 관리 ™ → 예약 관리 원하는 날짜와 시간에 시청 예약 또는 녹화 예약을 설정할 수 있습니다. 먼저 현재 시간을 설정해야 합니다. 메뉴 → 시스템 → 시간 설정 → 현재 시간에서 설정할 수 있습니다. 시청 예약하기 1 예약 관리 화면에서 리모컨을 이용해 a를 선택하세요. 시청 예약을 선택하세요. 2 신호, 채널, 반복 및 시작 시간을 설정하세요 ● 신호: 원하는 방송 유형을 선택합니다. DTV 일반, DTV 유선, 일반, 유선을 선택할 수 있습니다. 방송 유형은 채널 메뉴(메뉴 → 채널 → DTV 채널 선택)에서 일반 방송, 유선 방송 선택에 따라 달라집니다. ● 채널: 원하는 채널을 설정합니다. 단, 등록된 채널에 등록된 채널만 선택할 수 있습니다. ● 반복: 한 번, 요일선택, 토~일, 월~금 또는 매일 중 원하는 주기를 설정할 수 있습니다. 선택한 요일에 c 마크가 나타납니다. 날짜: 원하는 날짜를 설정합니다. 날짜 설정은 반복 설정에서 한 번이 선택되었을 때 가능합니다. ● 시작 시간: 원하는 시작 시간을 설정할 수 있습니다. 3 원하는 설정을 완료한 후 확인을 선택하세요. 선택한 채널이 시청 예약됩니다. 예약 관리 화면에서 시청 예약 목록을 확인할 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 7 2012-09-04 9:23:398 녹화 예약하기 디지털 채널에서만 설정할 수 있습니다. 1 예약 관리 화면에서 리모컨을 이용해 a를 선택하세요. 녹화 예약을 선택하세요. ■ 녹화된 TV는 5,400rpm 이상 USB HDD 장치 연결을 권장합니다. 단, RAID 타입 USB HDD 는 지원하지 않습니다. ■ 장치 성능 검사를 완료한 USB 장치만 녹화 예약이 가능합니다. 2 신호, 채널, 반복, 날짜, 시작 시간 및 종료 시간을 설정하세요. ● 신호: DTV 일반, DTV 유선을 선택할 수 있습니다. ● 채널: 원하는 디지털 채널을 설정합니다. ● 반복: 한 번, 요일선택, 토~일, 월~금 또는 매일 중 원하는 주기를 설정할 수 있습니다. 선택한 요일에 c 마크가 나타납니다. 날짜: 원하는 날짜를 설정합니다. 날짜 설정은 반복 설정에서 한 번이 선택되었을 때 가능합니다. ● 시작 시간: 원하는 시작 시간을 설정할 수 있습니다. ● 종료 시간: 원하는 종료 시간으로 설정할 수 있습니다. 3 설정을 완료한 후 확인을 선택하세요. 선택한 채널과 시간에 녹화가 진행될 것입니다. ■ 예약 관리 화면에서 녹화 예약 목록을 확인할 수 있습니다 ■ 녹화할 수 있는 시간은 최대 360분입니다. ■ 녹화가 완료된 목록은 예약 관리 화면의 결과 목록 또는 ™ → AllShare Play → 녹화된 TV에서 확인할 수 있습니다. 시청 예약 및 녹화 예약 목록 삭제하기 1 예약 관리 화면에서 지우려는 항목을 선택하세요. 2 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 3 예약 취소를 선택하세요. “예약을 취소하겠습니까?” 라는 메시지가 나타납니다. 4 예를 선택하세요. 예약이 취소됩니다. 예약 목록에서 항목을 선택하고, 리모컨의 정보표시` 버튼을 누르세요. 상세정보 창이 나타납니다. 상세 정보 창에서 예약을 변경하거나 취소할 수 있습니다. 예약된 항목에서 간편메뉴T 버튼 사용하기 ● 예약 편집: 시청 및 녹화 예약의 세부 사항을 변경합니다. ● 예약 취소: 시청 및 녹화 예약을 취소합니다. ● 상세 정보: 시청 및 녹화 예약한 프로그램에 대한 정보를 확인하고, 예약 취소와 예약 편집을 할 수 있습니다. ● 편집 모드: 예약된 목록 중 예약 취소할 목록을 선택합니다. 선택한 항목 왼쪽에 c 마크가 나타납니다. ● 복귀: 이전 화면으로 돌아갑니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 8 2012-09-04 9:23:409 1. 채널 메뉴 채널 목록 채널 목록, 프로그램 세부 정보, 선호채널, 시청 및 녹화 예약된 방송을 확인할 수 있습니다. 1 리모컨을 이용해 채널목록 버튼을 누르세요. 채널 목록 화면이 나타납니다. 2 채널 및 채널 목록을 변경할 수 있습니다. ● 등록된 채널: 등록된 채널을 보여줍니다. ● 선호 목록 1 ~ 선호목록 5: 5개의 선호목록을 보여줍니다. 각각의 선호목록은 개별적으로 구성되어 있습니다. 단, 선호목록 안의 채널은 선호채널이 등록되어 있을 때에만 보여줍니다. ▼ 채널 목록에서 버튼 사용하기 ● a 신호: 원하는 방송 유형을 선택합니다. ● { 프로그램 보기 / 채널 보기: 프로그램 보기는 디지털 채널에서만 가능합니다. 채널 보기에서 디지털 채널을 선택했다면, 프로그램 보기를 선택할 수 있습니다. 해당 디지털 채널의 시간대 별 프로그램 정보를 확인할 수 있습니다. 다시 한번 { 를 선택하면 채널 보기로 전환됩니다. ● l r 채널 모드 / 채널: 선호 채널이 등록되었다면 채널 보기 화면에 등록된 채널 목록과 선호 채널 목록을 보여줍니다. / { 프로그램 보기 화면에서는 채널을 변경하지 않고, 다른 채널의 프로그램 정보를 확인할 수 있습니다. ● E 시청: 선택한 채널을 시청합니다. 프로그램 보기에서 다음 프로그램을 선택하면 시청 예약 또는 녹화 예약, 예약된 프로그램에 한하여 예약 취소 기능을 선택할 수 있습니다. 디지털 채널에서만 설정할 수 있습니다. ● k 페이지: 이전 또는 다음 목록으로 이동합니다. ▼ 채널 상태 표시 아이콘 ● : 아날로그 채널 ● : 시청 예약된 채널 ● : 녹화 예약된 채널 ● : 채널 잠금이 설정된 채널 채널 목록에서 시청 예약, 녹화 예약 이용하기 디지털 채널에서만 설정할 수 있습니다. 채널 목록에서 { 프로그램 보기를 이용해 시청 예약 또는 녹화 예약을 할 수 있습니다. 1 리모컨의 채널목록 버튼을 누르세요. 채널 목록 화면이 나타납니다. 2 원하는 디지털 채널을 선택하세요. 3 리모컨을 이용해 {를 선택하세요. 선택한 채널의 프로그램 목록이 나타납니다. 4 프로그램 목록에서 시청 예약 또는 녹화 예약할 프로그램을 선택하고 리모컨을 이용해 상세 정보를 선택하세요. 5 상세 정보 화면에서 시청 예약 또는 녹화 예약을 선택하세요. 선택된 프로그램을 시청 예약 또는 녹화 예약 설정을 합니다. 시청 예약 또는 녹화 예약을 취소하려면 1~4단계를 실행하여 예약 취소를 선택하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 9 2012-09-04 9:23:4010 방송 프로그램 정보 디지털 채널에서만 설정할 수 있습니다. 리모컨의 정보표시` 버튼을 누르세요. 현재 시청하는 방송 프로그램에 대한 정보 및 다음 프로그램 정보를 확인할 수 있습니다. ▼ 방송 프로그램 정보에서 버튼 사용하기 ● a 상세 정보: 현재 시청 중인 프로그램에 대해 시청 기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. 다음 방송을 선택하면 시청 예약 기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. 레코더 바로 녹화 기능과 녹화예약 기능에 대한 자세한 사항은 “고급 기능 → 녹화된 TV(AllShare Play)”를 참고하세요. ● l r: 현재 시청 중인 방송 프로그램 이후 프로그램에 대한 정보를 확인할 수 있습니다. 현재 시간이 설정되어 있고 방송 정보가 존재하는 경우에만 다음 방송이 표시됩니다. ▼ 채널 상태 표시 아이콘 ● : 시청 예약된 채널 ● : 녹화 예약된 채널 채널 기억하기 DTV 채널 선택 메뉴 → 채널 → DTV 채널 선택 디지털 방송을 수신할 방송 유형을 설정한 후에 채널 메뉴에서 채널을 기억하고 등록할 수 있습니다. 일반 방송, 유선 방송 선택하기 1 DTV 채널 선택 메뉴를 선택하세요. 2 TV에 수신되는 방송 유형을 선택하세요. 자동 채널 설정 메뉴 → 채널 → 자동 채널 설정 수신되는 모든 채널을 자동으로 검색하여 저장합니다. 자동 채널 설정 시작하기 1 자동 채널 설정 메뉴로 이동하세요. 2 시작을 선택하면 자동 채널 설정을 시작합니다. 3 채널 설정이 완료되면 확인을 선택하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 10 2012-09-04 9:23:4111 1. 채널 메뉴 3D 채널 보기 메뉴 → 채널 → 3D 채널 보기 (LED 5500 모델 미지원) 3D 전용 채널 시청 여부를 설정할 수 있습니다. 3D 채널이 보이지 않을 경우, 자동 채널 설정을 통해 3D 채널을 설정하세요. 현재 시청 중인 프로그램이 3D 방송을 지원할 경우, 화면 하단에 안내 메시지가 나옵니다. 안내 메시지에 따라 채널을 이동하여, 3D 방송을 시청하세요. 3D 채널 시청을 원하지 않는 경우에는 끄기를 선택하세요. 3D 채널 보기가 끄기 상태이면, 채널 목록, 방송 안내에서 3D 채널이 보이지 않습니다. 기타 기능 채널 미세 조정 메뉴 → 채널 → 채널 미세 조정 아날로그 채널에서만 설정할 수 있습니다. 화면 상태가 불안정할 때 화면을 깨끗하게 만들 수 있습니다. 화면이 깨끗해질 때까지 리모컨을 이용해 조정하세요. 조정이 완료되면 저장 또는 닫기를 선택합니다. ■ 채널 미세 조정으로 저장된 채널은 채널 숫자 오른쪽에 별표 “*” 모양이 나타납니다. ■ 미세 조정된 채널을 초기화하려면 채널 미세 조정 창에서 초기화를 선택하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 11 2012-09-04 9:23:4212 화면 모드 변경하기 화면 모드 메뉴 → 화면 → 화면 모드 영상물의 종류나 시청 환경에 맞추어 화면 모드를 최적의 상태로 선택할 수 있습니다. HDMI/DVI 케이블로 컴퓨터와 연결하여 모니터로 사용할 경우, 화면 모드는 표준 화면 또는 동영상 모드만 설정할 수 있습니다. ● 선명한 화면: TV를 시청할 때, 주변이 밝다면 이 모드를 선택하세요. 화면을 보다 선명하게 볼 수 있습니다. ● 표준 화면: 일반적으로 가정에서 시청하기에 적합한 표준 화면 모드입니다. ● 최적 화면 (LED TV에만 해당): 실물을 보는 듯 자연에 가깝고 눈에 편안한 화질로 볼 수 있습니다. ● 영화 화면: 영화를 볼 때 선택하세요. 주위가 어둡거나 눈이 피로할 때도 화면을 편안하게 볼 수 있습니다. ● 동영상 모드: 게임을 실행하거나, 동영상을 볼 때 선택하세요. 화면을 보다 생동감 있게 볼 수 있습니다. HDMI/DVI 케이블을 통해 TV와 컴퓨터가 연결되어 있을 때만 가능합니다. 화면 조정값 설정하기 백라이트 조정 (LED TV에만 해당) / 패널 밝기 조정 (PDP TV 에만 해당) 메뉴 → 화면 → 백라이트 조정 / 패널 밝기 조정 화소의 밝기를 조정합니다. 가장 큰 밝기는 20입니다. 명암 메뉴 → 화면 → 명암 명암을 조절합니다. 명암 대비가 100에 가까울 수록 차이가 커집니다. 밝기 메뉴 → 화면 → 밝기 화면 전체의 밝기를 조절합니다. 100에 가까울 수록 화면 전체가 밝아집니다. 백라이트 조정 / 패널 밝기 조정 만큼 효과적이지는 않습니다. 2. 기본 기능 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 12 2012-09-04 9:23:4313 2. 기본 기능 선명도 메뉴 → 화면 → 선명도 사물 윤곽의 선명도를 조절합니다. 100에 가까울수록 선명해집니다. 색농도 메뉴 → 화면 → 색농도 화면 전체의 색농도를 조절합니다. 100에 가까울수록 색이 짙어집니다. 색상 (녹/적) 메뉴 → 화면 → 색상(녹/적) 적 100에 가까울수록 빨간색이 짙어지고, 녹 100에 가까울수록 초록색이 짙어집니다. 화질 조정하기 1 조정하려는 설정 메뉴를 선택하면, 설정 값을 변경할 수 있는 슬라이드 바가 나타납니다. 2 리모컨을 이용해 설정 값을 변경하세요. ■ 설정 값을 변경하면 화면 메뉴도 변경됩니다. ■ 컴퓨터를 연결했을 때는 색농도와 색상 (녹/적)은 조정할 수 없습니다. ■ TV에 연결된 외부기기의 설정을 조정하고 저장할 수 있습니다. ■ 화면 밝기를 낮추면 전력 소모가 줄어듭니다. 화면 크기 변경하기 화면 조정 메뉴 → 화면 → 화면 조정 화면 크기, 비율 등 화면에 관한 설정을 할 수 있습니다. ● 화면 크기: 케이블 박스나 위성 수신기가 있다면 기기에 맞는 설정을 해주세요. 삼성전자는 TV화면 크기를 16:9로 사용할 것을 권장합니다. 16:9: DVD나 와이드 방송에 맞는 16:9 비율의 화면 크기입니다. 확대1: 상단과 측면을 잘라 적당히 확대합니다. 확대2: 확대 1 보다 더욱 확대한 화면을 보여줍니다. 와이드 맞춤: 화면의 비율을 확대하여 전체화면에 맞춰줍니다. 16:9 비율의 720p, 1080i에서 동작합니다. 4:3: 기본 4:3모드로 화면을 설정합니다. 4:3 화면 크기로 너무 오래 시청하지 마세요. 화면의 상, 하, 좌, 우에 표시되는 경계선 흔적 때문에 잔상 (화면 열화)이 발생할 수 있으며, 이러한 문제는 보증이 되지 않습니다. 원본 크기: 디지털 채널(1080i, 1080p) 또는 HDMI (720p / 1080i / 1080p), 컴포넌트 (1080i / 1080p)로 연결해서 보는 경우에 화면의 잘림 없이 원본 화면 상태로 보여주는 화면 크기입니다. 스마트뷰 1 (LED TV에만 해당): 16:9 화면을 50% 축소한 화면입니다. 스마트뷰 2 (LED TV에만 해당): 16:9 화면을 25% 축소한 화면입니다. ■ 스마트뷰 1은 HDMI 모드에서만 선택할 수 있으며, 스마트뷰 2는 디지털 채널 또는 HDMI 모드 시청 시 선택할 수 있습니다. ■ AllShare Play에서 동영상 콘텐츠를 재생할 때 화면 크기는 해상도에 따라 다를 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 13 2012-09-04 9:23:4514 ● 위치 선택: 화면의 위치를 조정할 수 있습니다. 확대1, 확대2, 와이드 맞춤, 원본 크기에서만 설정 가능합니다. 디지털 채널에서 원본 크기를 선택할 경우, 위치를 선택할 수 없습니다. ▼ 확대1, 확대2, 와이드 맞춤, 원본 크기에서 위치 설정하기 1 위치 선택을 선택하세요. 2 위치 선택 화면에서 위치 선택을 선택한 다음 리모컨을 이용해 화면을 상, 하로 움직여 원하는 위치를 선택합니다. 3 화면 이동이 완료된 후, 위치 선택을 선택하고 닫기를 선택하세요. 화면 위치를 초기화하려면 초기화를 선택합니다. ▼ 외부 입력에 따라 선택 가능한 화면 크기 입력 모드 화면 크기 아날로그 채널, 외부입력 16:9, 확대1, 확대2, 4:3 컴포넌트 (480i, 480p) 16:9, 확대1, 확대2, 4:3 컴포넌트 (720p) 16:9, 와이드 맞춤, 4:3 컴포넌트 (1080i, 1080p) 16:9, 와이드 맞춤, 4:3, 원본 크기 디지털 채널 (720p) 16:9, 와이드 맞춤, 4:3, 스마트뷰 2 (LED TV에만 해당) 디지털 채널 (1080i, 1080p) 16:9, 와이드 맞춤, 4:3, 원본 크기, 스마트뷰 2 (LED TV에만 해당) HDMI (720p, 1080i, 1080p) 16:9, 와이드 맞춤, 4:3, 원본 크기, 스마트뷰 1 (LED TV에만 해당), 스마트뷰 2 (LED TV에만 해당) ■ 외부 입력에 따라 화면 크기는 달라질 수 있습니다. ■ 선택한 모드에 따라 사용 가능한 설정이 달라질 수 있습니다. ■ HD(고화질): 16:9 - 1080i/1080p (1920x1080), 720p (1280x720) ■ TV 입력 단자에 연결한 외부기기 별로 설정을 조정하여 저장할 수 있습니다. 부가 설정 변경하기 고급 설정 메뉴 → 화면 → 고급 설정 색상, 명암 등을 세부 조정하여 원하는 화면을 만들 수 있습니다. ■ 고급 설정은 화면 모드가 표준 화면 또는 영화 화면으로 설정되어 있을 때 사용할 수 있습니다. ■ HDMI/DVI 케이블을 이용해 컴퓨터와 TV를 연결한 경우에는 화이트 밸런스와 감마 기능만 설정할 수 있습니다. ● 자동 명암 조정: 화면의 명암을 자동으로 조정합니다. ● 블랙 톤 조정: 검은 색의 농도를 조정해 화면의 깊이감을 향상시킵니다. ● 피부색 조정: 피부색을 조정할 수 있습니다. ● 색상 보정 기능: 색상과 색 농도를 조정하기 위해 영상신호의 빨간색, 초록색, 파란색 중 한가지를 선택하여 조정합니다. ● 색 재현 범위: 표현할 수 있는 다양한 색의 범위를 선택합니다. 색 재현 범위를 조정하려면 사용자 조정으로 설정하세요. (LED 5500 모델 미지원) ● 화이트 밸런스 (LED 5500, PDP 550 모델 미지원): 자연스러운 화면을 위해 색의 느낌을 조정합니다. R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset: 빨간색, 초록색, 파란색 등 각 색상의 명도를 조정합니다. R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: 빨간색, 초록색, 파란색 등 각 색상의 밝기를 조정합니다. 초기화: 화이트 밸런스를 기본 설정으로 초기화합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 14 2012-09-04 9:23:4515 2. 기본 기능 ● 10p 화이트 밸런스 (LED 5500, PDP 550 모델 미지원): 빨간색, 초록색, 파란색의 밝기를 10 개 구간으로 나누어서 각 구간의 화이트 밸런스를 조정합니다. ■ 화면 모드가 영화 화면으로 설정되었을 때 사용할 수 있습니다. ■ 일부 외부기기는 이 기능을 지원하지 않을 수 있습니다. 구간: 화면 조정 구간을 선택합니다. 빨간색: 빨간색 비율을 조정합니다. 초록색: 초록색 비율을 조정합니다. 파란색: 파란색 비율을 조정합니다. 초기화: 10p 화이트 밸런스를 기본 설정으로 초기화합니다. ● 감마: 영상의 중간 밝기를 조절합니다. ● 전문가 패턴 (LED 5500, PDP 550 모델 미지원): 표준 화질을 조정할 수 있는 전문가 패턴을 보여줍니다. 화면을 조정한 상태에서 메뉴 창이 사라지거나 화면 메뉴 외에 다른 메뉴 창이 활성화되면, 조정한 값이 저장된 후 전문가 패턴 창이 사라집니다. 끄기: 전문가 패턴 기능을 해제합니다. 패턴1: 밝은 부분과 어두운 부분을 조정하는 패턴입니다. 패턴2: 색 농도와 색상을 조정하는 패턴입니다. ■ 패턴1 또는 패턴2의 고급 설정으로 원하는 효과를 얻을 수 있습니다. ■ 전문가 패턴이 실행 중에는 소리가 나오지 않습니다. ■ 디지털 채널, 컴포넌트 또는 HDMI 모드일때만 사용할 수 있습니다. ● xvYCC (LED 5500, PDP 550 모델 미지원): HDMI 또는 컴포넌트 입력 단자에 연결한 DVD 플레이어와 같은 외부 기기로 영화를 볼 때 xvYCC 모드를 설정하여 세부묘사와 색 재현 범위를 개선합니다. ■ 화면 모드를 영화 화면으로 설정하고 외부 입력을 HDMI 또는 컴포넌트로 설정할 때 사용할 수 있습니다. ■ 일부 외부 기기는 이 기능을 지원하지 않을 수 있습니다. ● 모션 라이팅: 화면의 움직임에 따라 밝기를 조정하여 소비 전력을 줄여줍니다. ■ 표준 화면 모드에서만 가능합니다. ■ 입체영상 모드에서는 지원하지 않습니다. ■ 백라이트 조정 (LED TV에만 해당) / 패널 밝기 조정 (PDP TV 에만 해당), 명암 또는 밝기를 변경하면 모션 라이팅 설정은 자동으로 꺼집니다. 부가 설정 메뉴 → 화면 → 부가 설정 부가적인 화면 설정 기능을 사용하여 가장 알맞은 화면을 만들 수 있습니다. HDMI/DVI를 이용해 TV와 컴퓨터를 연결할 경우, 바탕색 조정만 사용할 수 있습니다. ● 바탕색 조정: 화면 바탕색의 느낌을 조절할 수 있습니다. ■ 화면 모드가 선명한 화면일 경우 따뜻하게1, 따뜻하게2는 선택할 수 없습니다. ■ TV 입력 단자에 연결된 각각의 외부 기기 설정을 조정하고 저장할 수 있습니다. ● 화면 잡음 제거: 수신 되는 방송 신호가 약할 때, 화면이 떨리거나 점선이 생기는 현상을 줄여 줍니다. 자동 시각화: 아날로그 채널로 바꿀 때 신호강도를 표시합니다. ■ 신호가 약할 때, 사용할 수 있는 설정을 최대한 선택하세요. ■ 아날로그 채널에서만 지원합니다. ■ 최상의 신호를 수신할 때 막대가 녹색이 됩니다. ● 동영상 잡음 제거: 동영상의 잡음을 제거하여 화질을 높여줍니다. ● HDMI 블랙 레벨: 블랙 레벨을 선택하여 화면의 깊이감을 조정합니다. HDMI 모드에서만 가능합니다. ● 필름모드: 영화 프로그램을 보기에 적합한 모드입니다. 필름 모드를 자동으로 설정하면 영화 프로그램을 시청하기 위한 최적의 화질 상태로 설정됩니다. TV, 외부입력, 컴포넌트(480i/1080i)와 HDMI(1080i)에서만 가능합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 15 2012-09-04 9:23:4616 ● Auto Motion Plus (LED 6350 모델 이상 지원): 움직임이 많은 영상에서 잔상과 화면 떨림을 제거합니다. 잔상 제거: 영상의 잔상 제거 레벨을 조절합니다. 화면 떨림 제거: 필름 영상의 화면 떨림 제거 레벨을 조정합니다. 초기화: 사용자 조정을 초기화합니다. ■ TV의 정보 화면에는 수신 비디오 신호 (60Hz) 의 해상도와 주파수가 표시됩니다.이 때 표시되는 주파수는 Auto Motion Plus 기능을 사용할 때 TV에 표시되는 주파수가 아닙니다. ■ Auto Motion Plus 설정이 사용자 조정으로 선택되었을 때만 잔상 제거, 화면 떨림 제거 기능을 사용할 수 있으며, 초기화를 사용하여 초기화할 수 있습니다. ■ Auto Motion Plus에서 기능 보기를 설정 하면 켰을 때와 껐을 때의 화면을 비교할 수 있습니다. ● 빠른 영상 모드(LED TV에만 해당): 움직임이 많은 장면에서 화면 밀림 현상을 없애 선명한 화면을 제공합니다. 선명한 화면, 표준 화면, 영화 화면 모드에서만 가능합니다. 화면 초기화 메뉴 → 화면 → 화면 초기화 화면 설정을 처음 상태로 초기화합니다. TV를 모니터로 사용하기 TV를 컴퓨터 모니터로 사용하기 컴퓨터 디스플레이 설정하기 (윈도우즈 7 기준) TV를 컴퓨터 모니터로 사용하려면 올바른 디스플레이 설정을 해야 합니다. ■ 윈도우즈의 버전과 비디오 카드에 따라 진행이 다를 수 있습니다. ■ 기본 정보는 대부분의 경우 공통으로 적용 됩니다. ( 만약 그렇지 않다면 컴퓨터 제조 업체 또는 삼성전자 매장에 문의하세요.) 1 윈도우즈 시작 메뉴에서 “제어판”을 클릭하세요. 2 “제어판” 창에서 “모양 및 테마”를 클릭하면 대화 창이 나타납니다. 3 “디스플레이”를 클릭하면 다른 대화 창이 나타납니다. 4 화면 대화 창의 "설정"을 클릭하세요. ● 설정 탭에서 정확한 해상도를 설정하세요. 최적 해상도는 1920 x 1080입니다. ● 디스플레이 설정 대화 상자에 수직 주파수 옵션이 있는 경우 그 정확한 값은 “60”, 즉 “60Hz”입니다. 수직 주파수 옵션이 없다면 “확인”을 클릭하고 대화 창을 종료합니다 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 16 2012-09-04 9:23:4717 2. 기본 기능 기본 음향 모드 변경하기 음향 모드 메뉴 → 음향 → 음향 모드 음악 감상, 영화 감상, 뉴스 시청 등의 상황에 맞게 음향 모드를 설정할 수 있습니다. 스피커 선택이 외부 스피커로 설정된 경우에는 음향 모드를 설정할 수 없습니다. ● 표준으로 들을 때: 일반적으로 어떤 영상물에나 잘 어울리는 음향 모드입니다. ● 음악을 들을 때: 살아있는 원음 그대로 감상할 수 있습니다. ● 영화를 볼 때: 영화를 볼 때 가장 적합한 음향을 제공합니다. (저음이 강조된 웅장한 음향을 즐기고자 할 때 선택하세요.) ● 뉴스를 들을 때: 또렷한 목소리를 듣고자 할 때 선택하세요. ● 실버: 난청자 및 고령자를 위한 청취모드 입니다. 음향 효과 변경하기 음향 효과 메뉴 → 음향 → 음향 효과 ■ 스피커 선택이 외부 스피커로 설정된 경우, 음향 효과를 설정할 수 없습니다. ■ 음향 모드가 표준으로 들을 때로 선택된 경우에만 설정할 수 있습니다. ● SRS TruSurround HD: 영화관이나 콘서트 홀에서처럼 생생한 입체음향을 즐길 수 있습니다. ● SRS TruDialog: 켜기를 선택하면, 배경음의 음량은 유지하면서 사람의 말소리를 강조합니다. ● 이퀄라이저: 좌우 스피커의 음량과 고음, 저음을 원하는 대로 조절할 수 있습니다. 리모컨을 이용해 슬라이더 바의 설정 값을 변경할 수 있습니다. 이퀄라이저를 초기화하려면 초기화를 선택한 후, 예를 선택하세요.종료하려면 닫기를 선택하세요. 음균형 좌/우: 오른쪽 및 왼쪽 스피커의 음균형을 조정합니다. 100Hz / 300Hz / 1kHz / 3kHz / 10kHz (대역폭 조정): 특정 대역폭 주파수의 레벨을 조정합니다. 초기화: 기본 설정으로 이퀄라이저를 초기화합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 17 2012-09-04 9:23:4718 방송 음성 설정 메뉴 → 음향 → 방송 음성 설정 ● 선호 언어 (디지털 채널에만 해당): 디지털 방송은 여러 개의 음성언어를 포함할 수 있으므로 자신이 듣고 싶은 방송 언어로 설정할 수 있습니다. 방송되는 언어에서만 선택할 수 있습니다. ● 스테레오 설정 (아날로그 채널에만 해당): 스테레오를 자동 또는 수동으로 설정합니다. ● 음성 다중 (아날로그 채널에만 해당): 방송은 하나 이상의 오디오 트랙을 전송할 수 있으며 방송 상황에 따라 음성 다중 기능을 선택합니다. 방송신호나 프로그램에 따라 달라질 수 있습니다. SPDIF 출력 메뉴 → 음향 → SPDIF 출력 SPDIF (Sony Philips Digital Interface)는 간섭과 왜곡을 줄일 수 있는 AV수신기와 홈시어터 같은 다양한 디지털 장치와 스피커에 디지털 오디오 출력을 제공합니다. ● 오디오 형식: 디지털 오디오 출력 (SPDIF) 형식을 선택할 수 있습니다. 디지털 오디오 출력 (SPDIF) 은 입력소스에 따라 달라질 수 있습니다. ● 지연시간 조정: TV에서 출력되는 소리를 AV 리시버와 같은 외부기기를 통해서 들을 때, TV 의 영상과 외부기기를 통해 나오는 소리 사이에 시간적 차이가 발생할 때 사용합니다. 지연시간 조정을 선택하면 설정 값을 조정할 수 있는 슬라이더 바가 나타납니다.리모컨을 이용해 조정하세요. (0~250ms) 스피커설정 메뉴 → 음향 → 스피커 설정 ● 스피커 선택: 방송이나 영화를 감상할 때, TV 에 내장된 스피커 대신 홈시어터의 스피커를 통해 소리를 들을 수 있습니다. 방송의 사운드 트랙을 들을 때 소리 반향이 생길 수 있습니다. 이런 현상이 나타나면 TV 스피커 설정을 외부 스피커로 선택하세요. ■ 스피커 선택이 외부 스피커로 선택된 경우, TV 스피커는 꺼집니다. 이런 경우 외부 스피커를 통해서만 들을 수 있습니다. 스피커 선택이 TV 스피커로 설정된 경우 TV 스피커와 외부 스피커 모두 들을 수 있습니다. ■ 스피커 선택을 외부 스피커로 설정하면 음량 버튼과 음소거 기능을 사용할 수 없으며 음향 설정 기능이 제한됩니다. ■ 비디오 신호가 없으면 TV 스피커와 외부 스피커는 음소거 됩니다. ● 자동 음량: 채널에 따라 음성 신호의 크기가 다르게 느껴지는 경우가 있습니다. 전 채널의 음량을 자동적으로 서로 비슷하게 맞춰줍니다. 보통: 다른 채널로 변경할 때 음량을 자동 조절합니다. 심야: 낮은 음량으로 자동 조절됩니다. 심야 모드는 음량을 낮춰 밤에 시청할 때 효과적입니다. 연결된 외부기기의 음량을 조정하려면 자동 음량 기능을 끄세요. 자동 음량이 보통이나 심야로 설정되어 있으면 외부기기의 음량을 조절할 수 없습니다. 음향 초기화 메뉴 → 음향 → 음향 초기화 모든 음향 설정을 기본값으로 초기화합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 18 2012-09-04 9:23:4819 네트워크 연결하기 유선 네트워크 연결하기 다음 세 가지 방식으로 TV와 인터넷을 연결할 수 있습니다. ▼ 외장형 모뎀을 사용하는 환경 벽면 단자 TV LAN 단자 모뎀 케이블 LAN 케이블 외장 모뎀 (ADSL/VDSL/케이블 TV) ▼ 외장형 모뎀과 IP 공유기를 사용하는 환경 벽면 단자 TV LAN 단자 모뎀 케이블 LAN 케이블 LAN 케이블 외장 모뎀 (ADSL/ VDSL/케이블 TV) IP 공유기 ▼ 벽면 LAN 단자에 직접 연결하여 사용하는 환경 벽면 단자 TV LAN 단자 LAN 케이블 ■ 동적 네트워크를 사용하는 경우에는 DHCP( 호스트 구성 프로토콜)를 지원하는 ADSL 모뎀이나 공유기를 사용해야 합니다. DHCP를 지원하는 모뎀 및 공유기는 인터넷을 접속하는 데 필요한 IP 주소, 서브넷 마스크, 게이트웨이, DNS 값을 자동으로 제공하므로, 수동으로 입력할 필요가 없습니다. 대부분의 가정용 네트워크는 동적 네트워크입니다. ■ 고정 IP 주소가 필요한 네트워크도 있습니다. 고정 IP 주소가 필요한 네트워크에서는 네트워크 연결을 설정할 때 TV의 네트워크 설정 화면에서 IP 주소,서브넷 마스크, 게이트웨이, DNS 값을 수동으로 입력해야 합니다. IP 주소, 서브넷 마스크, 게이트웨이, DNS 값은 인터넷 통신사(ISP)에 문의해서 확인하세요. ■ 고정 IP 주소가 필요한 네트워크에서는 DHCP를 지원하는 ADSL 모뎀을 사용할 수 있습니다. DHCP 를 지원하는 ADSL 모뎀을 통해 고정 IP 주소를 사용할 수도 있습니다. 3. 설정 기능 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 19 2012-09-04 9:23:5020 무선 네트워크 연결하기 (LED 5500, 6350, PDP 550 모델에만 해당) 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터(WIS09ABGN, WIS12ABGNX)를 이용해 TV와 무선 인터넷 공유기와 연결해 인터넷에 연결할 수 있습니다. 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터를 연결하기 전에, TV가 켜져 있는지 확인하세요. USB 허브나, USB 외장케이블을 통해 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터를 연결했을 경우, 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터가 인식되지 않을 수 있습니다. 무선 공유기 (DHCP 서버를 지원하는 공유기) 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터 벽면 LAN 단자 TV 뒷면 USB 단자 LAN 케이블 이 제품은 IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n 방식의 통신 프로토콜을 지원합니다. 삼성전자는 IEEE 802.11n 사용을 권장합니다. 네트워크 연결을 통해 동영상을 재생하면, 원활하게 재생되지 않을 수 있습니다. ■ 인터넷을 무선으로 연결하려면, 무선 IP 공유기 ( 라우터 또는 모뎀)에 TV를 연결해야 합니다. 무선 IP 공유기가 DHCP를 지원하면, DHCP나 고정 IP 주소를 사용하여 인터넷에 연결할 수 있습니다. ■ 무선 IP 공유기의 채널을 현재 사용하지 않는 채널로 선택하세요. 무선 IP 공유기에서 설정한 채널을 인근에 다른 장치가 사용하고 있는 경우, 간섭 통신 장애가 발생할 수 있습니다. ■ 다음의 무선 네트워크 보안 프로토콜만 지원합니다. - 인증모드: WEP, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK - 암호화 유형: WEP, TKIP, AES ■ 공유기를 Pure High-throughput (Greenfield) 802.11n 모드로 설정하고, 보안 암호화 유형을 WEP 또는 TKIP로 설정한 경우, 삼성 TV는 새로운 Wi-Fi 인증 표준에 따라 연결을 지원하지 않습니다. ■ 무선 라우터에서 WPS를 지원하는 경우에는 PBC 또는 PIN을 통해 네트워크에 연결할 수 있습니다. WPS는 두 모드에서 SSID 및 WPA 키를 모두 자동으로 구성합니다. ■ 인증되지 않은 무선 IP 공유기의 경우, TV에 연결할 수 없습니다. ■ 연결방법: 다음의 4가지 방법으로 무선 네트워크 연결을 설정할 수 있습니다. - 자동 설정 (자동 네트워크 탐색 기능을 이용) - 수동 설정 - WPS (PBC) - Plug & Access 참조 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터를 TV에 연결하면, 화질이 저하되거나 일부 채널에 전파 장애가 나타날 수 있습니다. 이 경우에는 다음 중 한 가지 방법으로 연결을 설정하거나, USB 케이블을 사용해서 무선 간섭을 받지 않는 장소에 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터를 연결하세요. ▼ 방법 1: USB 직각 어댑터로 연결하기 (LED 5500, PDP 550 모델에만 해당) USB 직각 어댑터를 사용해서 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터를 TV에 연결하세요. 1 USB 직각 어댑터를 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터에 연결하세요. 2 직각 어댑터의 다른쪽 끝을 USB (HDD 5V 1A) 단자에 연결하세요. 해당 이미지는 모델별로 다를 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 20 2012-09-04 9:23:5121 3. 설정 기능 ▼ 방법 2: 연장선으로 연결하기 (LED 5500, 6350, PDP 550 모델에만 해당) 연장 케이블을 이용해 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터를 TV 에 연결하세요. 1 연장선을 USB 1 (HDD 5V 1A) 단자에 연결하세요. 2 연장 케이블과 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터를 연결하세요. 3 양면 테이프를 사용해서 TV 뒷면 위쪽에 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터를 부착하세요. 해당 이미지는 모델별로 다를 수 있습니다. 무선 네트워크 연결하기 (LED 6400 모델 이상 해당) 표준 라우터나 모뎀으로 TV와 인터넷을 연결할 수 있습니다. 무선 공유기 (DHCP 서버를 지원하는 공유기) 벽면 LAN 단자 LAN 케이블 이 제품은 IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n 방식의 통신 프로토콜을 지원합니다. 삼성전자는 IEEE 802.11n 사용을 권장합니다. 네트워크 연결을 통해 동영상을 재생하면, 원활하게 재생되지 않을 수 있습니다. ■ 인터넷을 무선으로 연결하려면, 무선 IP 공유기 ( 라우터 또는 모뎀)에 TV를 연결해야 합니다. 무선 IP 공유기가 DHCP를 지원하면, DHCP나 고정 IP 주소를 사용하여 인터넷에 연결할 수 있습니다. ■ 무선 IP 공유기의 채널을 현재 사용하지 않는 채널로 선택하세요. 무선 IP 공유기에서 설정한 채널을 인근에 다른 장치가 사용하고 있는 경우, 간섭 통신 장애가 발생할 수 있습니다. ■ 다음의 무선 네트워크 보안 프로토콜만 지원합니다. - 인증모드: WEP, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK - 암호화 유형: WEP, TKIP, AES ■ 공유기를 Pure High-throughput (Greenfield) 802.11n 모드로 설정하고, 보안 암호화 유형을 WEP 또는 TKIP로 설정한 경우, 삼성 TV는 새로운 Wi-Fi 인증 표준에 따라 연결을 지원하지 않습니다. ■ 무선 라우터에서 WPS를 지원하는 경우에는 PBC 또는 PIN을 통해 네트워크에 연결할 수 있습니다. WPS는 두 모드에서 SSID 및 WPA 키를 모두 자동으로 구성합니다. ■ 인증되지 않은 무선 IP 공유기의 경우, TV에 연결할 수 없습니다. ■ 연결방법: 다음의 4가지 방법으로 무선 네트워크 연결을 설정할 수 있습니다. - 자동 설정 (자동 네트워크 탐색 기능을 이용) - 수동 설정 - WPS (PBC) - Plug & Access [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 21 2012-09-04 9:23:5222 유선 네트워크 설정하기 네트워크 설정 메뉴 → 네트워크 → 네트워크 설정 TV에 네트워크를 연결하여 스마트 허브, AllShare Play 등 다양한 인터넷 서비스 및 소프트웨어 업데이트를 사용할 수 있습니다. 자동 유선 네트워크 설정 DHCP를 지원하는 네트워크에 TV가 연결된 경우 자동으로 유선 네트워크 연결을 설정할 수 있습니다. LAN 케이블이 연결된 경우 바로 유선 네트워크를 연결하는 팝업 창이 나타납니다. ▼ 자동으로 유선 네트워크 설정하기 1 네트워크 설정 화면에서 시작을 선택하세요. 네트워크 설정을 시작합니다. (메뉴 → 네트워크 → 네트워크 설정) 2 네트워크 테스트 화면이 나타나면 네트워크 연결을 확인하세요. 네트워크 연결이 확인되면 “인터넷에 정상적으로 연결되었습니다. 인터넷 서비스 이용에 문제가 있을 경우에는 인터넷 서비스 제공업체에 문의하세요.”라는 메시지가 나타납니다. ■ 연결에 실패했을 경우, LAN 포트 연결을 확인하세요. ■ 자동으로 네트워크 정보를 가져오지 못하거나, 수동 IP를 설정하려면 “수동 네트워크 설정”으로 이동하세요. 수동 유선 네트워크 설정 고정 IP를 사용해야 하는 때에는 수동으로 유선 네트워크에 연결 할 수 있습니다. IP 주소, 서브넷 마스크, 게이트웨이, DNS 값은 인터넷 통신사(ISP)에 문의해서 확인하세요. ▼ 수동으로 유선 네트워크 설정하기 1 네트워크 설정 화면에서 시작을 누르세요. 네트워크 연결 화면이 나타납니다. (메뉴 → 네트워크 → 네트워크 설정) 2 중지를 선택하세요. 네트워크 검색이 중단됩니다. 네트워크 연결 화면에서 IP 설정을 선택하세요. IP 설정 화면이 나타납니다. 3 IP 설정 방법을 선택하고 IP 설정 방법을 수동 입력으로 설정하세요. 4 IP 주소 입력 창으로 이동한 후 IP 주소를 선택하세요. 5 리모컨을 이용해 첫 번째 항목에 IP 주소를 입력하세요. 입력이 완료되면 다음 항목으로 이동하세요. 6 다음 항목의 IP 주소를 입력이 완료되면 다음 항목으로 이동하세요. 7 각 IP 주소 입력 창에 리모컨을 이용해 IP 주소를 설정합니다. 숫자 입력을 잘못했을 때는 정확한 번호로 다시 입력하세요. 8 서브넷 마스크, 게이트웨이, DNS 서버 모두 같은 방법으로 입력합니다. 9 입력을 완료하면, 확인을 선택하세요. 네트워크 테스트 화면이 나타납니다. 연결이 확인되면 “ 인터넷에 정상적으로 연결되었습니다. 인터넷 서비스 이용에 문제가 있을 경우에는 인터넷 서비스 제공업체에 문의하세요.”라는 메시지가 나타납니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 22 2012-09-04 9:23:5323 3. 설정 기능 네트워크 상태 메뉴 → 네트워크 → 네트워크 상태 현재 네트워크와 인터넷 상태를 확인합니다. 유선 네트워크 연결에 실패했을 경우 ● 네트워크 케이블을 찾을 수 없습니다. 네트워크 케이블 연결을 확인하세요. 네트워크 케이블이 이미 연결된 경우에는 공유기의 전원이 켜져 있는지 확인하고 전원을 껐다 켜세요. ● IP를 자동으로 설정하지 못하였습니다. 자동 설정을 위해 다음을 확인하거나 IP 설정에서 수동으로 설정하세요. 공유기의 DHCP 서버 동작이 켜져 있는지 확인하고, 전원을 리셋해 보세요. 자세한 사항은 인터넷 통신사에 문의하세요. ● 네트워크에 연결할 수 없습니다. 다음 사항을 확인하세요. IP 설정에서 설정이 올바른지 확인하세요. DHCP 서버가 공유기에서 활성화 되어 있는지 확인하고 분리한 후 다시 꽂아주세요. 자세한 사항은 인터넷 통신사에 문의하세요. ● 내부망에는 연결되었으나 인터넷에 연결할 수 없습니다. 공유기 외부망 LAN 단자에 인터넷 LAN 케이블 연결 여부를 확인하세요. IP 설정에서 DNS 설정 값을 확인하세요. 문제가 지속될 경우, 인터넷 통신사에 문의하세요. ● 네트워크 설정에 성공하였으나 인터넷에 연결할 수 없습니다. 문제가 지속될 경우, 인터넷 통신사에 문의하세요. 무선 네트워크 설정하기 네트워크 설정 메뉴 → 네트워크 → 네트워크 설정 TV에 네트워크를 연결하여 스마트 허브, AllShare Play 등 다양한 인터넷 서비스를 이용할 수 있으며, 소프트웨어 업그레이드를 할 수 있습니다. 자동 무선 네트워크 설정 대부분의 무선 네트워크에서 보안을 설정할 수 있습니다. 보안이 설정된 무선 네트워크에 연결할 때, 일반적인 문자 또는 특정 길이의 단어와 숫자의 조합으로 구성된 보안키를 만들 수 있습니다. 수동이나 자동으로 네트워크를 연결할 때 이 방법을 사용하려면 문자열로 구성된 비밀번호를 입력해야 합니다. ▼ 자동 무선 네트워크 연결하기 1 네트워크 설정 화면에서 시작을 선택하세요. 네트워크 설정을 시작합니다. (메뉴 → 네트워크 → 네트워크 설정) 2 연결할 수 있는 무선 네트워크를 탐색합니다. 탐색이 끝나면 연결할 수 있는 네트워크들이 나타납니다. 3 연결하려는 네트워크를 선택하고 다음을 선택하세요. 연결하려는 무선 IP 공유기가 나타나지 않으면 네트워크 추가를 선택하고 네트워크 명 (SSID)과 보안키를 입력하세요. 4 화면에 보안키 입력 창이 나타나면 5단계로 이동하세요. 보안키 입력이 필요 없는 무선 공유기를 선택하려면 7단계로 이동하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 23 2012-09-04 9:23:5424 5 무선 공유기에 설정된 보안키를 입력하세요. ■ 보안키 (비밀번호 또는 PIN)를 리모컨을 이용하여 입력하세요. ■ 무선 공유기나 모뎀의 연결을 설정하는 화면에서 비밀번호를 확인할 수 있습니다. 6 보안키 입력을 완료하고 다음을 선택하세요. 7 네트워크 연결 화면이 나타나면, 확인을 선택하세요. 연결이 확인되면 “인터넷에 정상적으로 연결되었습니다. 인터넷 서비스 이용에 문제가 있을 경우에는 인터넷 서비스 제공업체에 문의하세요.”라는 메시지가 나타납니다. ■ 보안키가 정확하지 않을 경우 다시시도를 선택하거나 IP 설정을 선택하여 수동으로 네트워크를 설정합니다. ■ 수동으로 네트워크 연결을 설정하려면 IP 설정을 선택하여 수동으로 네트워크를 설정하세요. 수동 무선 네트워크 설정 고정 IP 주소를 요구하는 네트워크나 자동 네트워크 연결에 실패했을 때, 수동으로 무선 네트워크에 연결할 수 있습니다. IP 주소, 서브넷 마스크, 게이트웨이, DNS 값은 인터넷 통신사(ISP)에 문의해서 확인하세요. ▼ 수동으로 무선 네트워크 설정하기 1 네트워크 설정 화면에서 시작을 선택하면, 네트워크 설정을 시작합니다.(메뉴 → 네트워크 → 네트워크 설정) 2 연결 가능한 무선 네트워크를 탐색합니다. 탐색이 완료되면 연결할 수 있는 네트워크 목록을 보여줍니다. 3 네트워크 목록에서 연결할 네트워크를 선택하고 다음을 선택하세요. 무선 IP 공유기가 등록되지 않았으면 네트워크 추가를 선택하여 네트워크 명 (SSID)과 보안키를 입력합니다. 4 보안키 입력 창이 나타나면 5단계로 이동하세요. 보안키 입력이 필요 없는 무선 IP 공유기를 선택했으면 7단계로 이동하세요. 5 무선 공유기에 설정된 보안키를 입력하세요. ■ 보안키 (비밀번호 또는 PIN)를 리모컨을 이용하여 입력하세요. ■ IP 공유기나 모뎀의 연결을 설정하는 화면에서 비밀번호를 확인할 수 있습니다. 6 보안키 입력을 완료하고 다음을 선택하세요. 7 네트워크 연결 화면이 나타나면, 중지를 선택하세요. 연결 확인 취소 화면이 나타납니다. IP 설정을 선택하세요. IP 설정 화면이 나타납니다. 8 IP 설정 방법을 선택하고 IP 설정 방법을 수동 입력으로 설정하세요. 9 IP 주소 입력 창으로 이동한 후 IP 주소를 선택하세요. 10 리모컨을 이용해 첫 번째 항목에 IP 주소를 입력하세요. 입력이 완료되면 다음 항목으로 이동하세요. 11 다음 항목의 IP 주소를 입력이 완료되면 다음 항목으로 이동하세요. 12 각 IP 주소 입력 창에 리모컨을 이용해 IP 주소를 설정합니다. 숫자 입력을 잘못했을 때는 정확한 번호로 다시 입력하세요. 13 서브넷 마스크, 게이트웨이, DNS 서버 모두 같은 방법으로 입력합니다. 14 입력을 완료하면, 확인을 선택하세요. 네트워크 테스트 화면이 나타납니다. 연결이 확인되면 “ 인터넷에 정상적으로 연결되었습니다. 인터넷 서비스 이용에 문제가 있을 경우에는 인터넷 서비스 제공업체에 문의하세요.”라는 메시지가 나타납니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 24 2012-09-04 9:23:5425 3. 설정 기능 WPS(PBC) 네트워크 설정 WPS(PBC) 버튼이 있는 무선 공유기일 경우 WPS(PBC) 버튼을 이용하여 보다 쉽게 무선 네트워크에 연결할 수 있습니다. ▼ WPS(PBC)를 이용해 네트워크 연결하기 1 메뉴 → 네트워크 → 네트워크 설정네트워크 설정 화면에서 시작을 선택하세요. 2 연결할 수 있는 무선 네트워크를 탐색하고 연결 가능한 네트워크 목록이 나타납니다. 3 WPS(PBC)를 선택하세요. 4 2분 이내로 IP 공유기의 WPS(PBC) 버튼을 누르세요. 자동으로 필요한 모든 네트워크 설정 정보를 확보하고 네트워크에 연결합니다. 5 네트워크 연결 화면이 나타나고 네트워크 설정은 완료됩니다. Plug & Access 네트워크 설정 Plug & Access 기능으로 USB 장치를 이용해 삼성 무선 공유기와 TV를 쉽게 연결할 수 있습니다. 타사 무선 공유기가 Plug & Access를 지원하지 않으면, 다른 방법으로 연결해야 합니다. Plug & Access을 지원하는 기기는 인터넷 홈페이지 “http://www.samsung.com/sec”에서 확인할 수 있습니다. ▼ Plug & Access를 이용해 네트워크 연결하기 1 무선 공유기와 TV의 전원을 켜세요. 2 USB 장치를 삼성 무선 공유기에 연결하고 라우터의 LED 상태를 확인하세요. LED 부분이 깜박이면 켜진 상태입니다. 3 삼성 무선 공유기의 LED가 켜지면, USB 장치를 분리한 후, TV와 연결하세요. USB 장치에 연결 정보가 담겨 있습니다. 4 연결 설정이 자동으로 이루어 질 때까지 기다립니다. Plug & Access 연결이 실패하면 연결이 되지 않았음을 알리는 창이 나타납니다. 연결에 실패하면 무선 공유기를 초기화한 후, 1단계부터 다시 시도해보세요. 다른 연결 설정방법을 선택할 수 있습니다. 5 네트워크 연결 화면이 나타나면 네트워크 설정은 완료됩니다. 6 원하는 위치에 무선 공유기를 놓습니다. 무선 공유기의 설정 변경 또는 새로운 무선 공유기를 설치하려면 1단계에서 다시 시작하여 Plug & Access를 실행해야 합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 25 2012-09-04 9:23:5526 네트워크 상태 메뉴 → 네트워크 → 네트워크 상태 현재 네트워크와 인터넷 상태를 확인할 수 있습니다. 무선 네트워크에 실패했을 경우 ● 무선 네트워크 연결에 실패했습니다. 선택된 무선 공유기가 없습니다. 네트워크 설정에서 무선 공유기를 선택하세요. ● 무선 공유기에 연결할 수 없습니다. 다음 사항을 확인하세요. 무선 공유기의 전원이 켜져 있는지 확인하고 무선 공유기의 전원을 껐다가 다시 켜세요. 보안키가 설정된 경우 보안키를 정확히 입력했는지 확인하세요. ● IP를 자동으로 설정하지 못하였습니다. 자동 설정을 위해 다음을 확인하거나 IP 설정에서 수동으로 설정하세요. 무선 공유기의 DHCP 서버 기능이 켜져 있는지 확인하고 무선 공유기를 껐다가 다시 켜세요. 보안키가 설정된 경우 보안키를 정확히 입력했는지 확인하세요. 자세한 사항은 인터넷 통신사에 문의하세요. ● 네트워크에 연결할 수 없습니다. 다음 사항을 확인하세요. IP 설정에서 설정이 올바른지 확인하세요. 보안키가 설정된 경우 보안키를 정확히 입력했는지 확인하세요. 자세한 사항은 인터넷 통신사에 문의하세요. ● 내부망에는 연결되었으나 인터넷에 연결할 수 없습니다. IP 설정에서 DNS 설정 값을 확인하세요. 문제가 지속될 경우, 인터넷 통신사에 문의하세요. ● 네트워크 설정에 성공하였으나 인터넷에 연결할 수 없습니다. 인터넷 통신사에 문의하세요. 네트워크 기기 관리하기 Wi-Fi 다이렉트 메뉴 → 네트워크 → Wi-Fi 다이렉트 무선 공유기 없이 TV와 무선 모바일 기기를 직접 연결할 수 있습니다. ■ (LED 5500, 6350, PDP 550 모델에만 해당) 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터를 연결할 때 이 기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. ■ 이 기능은 모바일 기기가 Wi-Fi 다이렉트 기능을 지원해야 가능합니다. ▼ Wi-Fi 다이렉트 기능으로 모바일 기기와 연결하기 먼저 모바일 기기의 Wi-Fi 다이렉트 기능을 켜세요. 1 Wi-Fi 다이렉트 화면으로 이동하세요.(네트워크 → Wi-Fi 다이렉트) 2 먼저 모바일 기기의 Wi-Fi 다이렉트 기능을 켜세요. 원하는 Wi-Fi 기기를 선택하세요. - PBC (Push Button Configuration): 2 분 이내에 연결할 기기의 WPS(PBC) 버튼을 누르세요. 모든 네트워크 값이 자동으로 설정되고 네트워크에 연결됩니다. - PIN: Wi-Fi 기기에 표시된 PIN 번호를 입력하세요. 연결을 끊으려면 연결된 기기를 선택한 다음 해제를 선택하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 26 2012-09-04 9:23:5527 3. 설정 기능 소프트 AP 메뉴 → 네트워크 → 소프트 AP Wi-Fi 다이렉트 기능을 지원하지 않는 모바일 기기와 TV를 연결합니다. Wi-Fi 기기의 연결 옵션을 설정하세요. ● 소프트 AP 소프트 AP 기능을 켜거나 끕니다. 소프트 AP 기능을 사용하면 일반 Wi-Fi 단말기에서도 본 기기를 검색하여 연결할 수 있습니다. ● 보안키 리모컨으로 보안키를 수동으로 설정합니다. - 보안키는 8개 이상의 숫자로 구성해야 합니다. - 연결하고자 하는 기기에 생성된 보안키를 입력하세요. - 네트워크에 정상적으로 연결되지 않으면 보안키를 확인하세요. 잘못된 보안키는 오작동의 원인이 됩니다. ▼ 보안키 입력에서 컬러 버튼 사용하기 ● b 보안키 표시 보안키를 표시합니다. 보안키 표시 여부는 상단의 체크박스에 표시 됩니다. ● a 삭제 입력한 보안키를 한 글자씩 삭제합니다. ● { 한칸띄움 보안키 입력 시 글자와 글자 사이에 공백을 넣을 수 있습니다. ● R 복귀 보안키를 입력하기 전의 화면으로 돌아갑니다. AllShare 설정 메뉴 → 네트워크 → AllShare 설정 네트워크를 통한 미디어 기능을 사용할지 여부를 선택합니다. AllShare를 사용하려면 AllShare Play 부분의 "AllShare 설정하기"를 참조하세요. 장치명 메뉴 → 네트워크 → 장치명 수동으로 TV의 이름을 변경합니다. TV의 이름은 네트워크로 연결된 리모컨과 AllShare Play을 통해 이용하는 기기에서 확인할 수 있습니다. 화면에 키보드가 나타나면 리모컨을 이용해 수동으로 이름을 입력할 수 있습니다. 예를 들어 삼성 TV의 이름을 바꾸길 원하면 리모컨을 이용해 각각의 글자를 입력하고 완료를 선택합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 27 2012-09-04 9:23:5628 시간 설정하기 시간 설정 메뉴 → 시스템 → 시간 설정 리모컨의 정보표시` 버튼을 누르세요. 현재 시간을 확인할 수 있습니다. ● 현재 시간 현재의 연월일과 시간을 지정합니다. 전원 선을 분리하면 현재 시간을 다시 설정해야 합니다. ▼ 현재 시간 설정하기 1 현재 시간 화면으로 이동하세요. (시스템 → 시간 설정 → 현재 시간) 2 자동 또는 수동을 선택하세요. - 자동: 디지털 방송 정보를 통하여 수신되는 시간으로 현재 시간이 자동 설정됩니다. ■ 자동으로 시간을 맞추기 위해서는 TV에 연결된 케이블이나 안테나가 있어야 합니다. ■ 디지털 방송 정보에 의해 자동으로 설정되는 시간은 방송사 별로 차이가 있을 수 있습니다. ■ 방송사와 신호에 따라 자동으로 설정된 시간은 정확하지 않을 수 있습니다. 이러한 경우에는, 수동으로 시간을 설정하세요. - 수동: 현재 시간 설정이 활성화됩니다. 리모컨을 이용해 현재의 날짜와 시간 설정을 지정할 수 있습니다. 현재 시간 설정은 시간 설정 모드가 수동으로 설정된 경우에만 사용할 수 있습니다. ● 취침 예약 TV가 설정된 시간이 지나면 자동으로 꺼지도록 설정합니다. (30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180분) 리모컨을 이용해 원하는 시간을 선택합니다. 취소하려면 끄기로 설정하세요. ● 켜짐 시간 예약 설정한 날짜와 시간 설정에 자동으로 TV가 켜집니다. 켜짐 시간 예약은 3개까지 설정할 수 있습니다. (켜짐 시간 예약1, 켜짐 시간 예약2, 켜짐 시간 예약3) 현재 시간을 설정한 후에 켜짐 시간 예약을 이용할 수 있습니다. 설정: 끄기, 한 번, 매일, 월~금, 월~토, 토~일 또는 요일선택 중 선택하세요. 요일선택을 선택하면 켜짐 시간 예약을 원하는 요일 별로 설정할 수 있습니다. 선택한 요일에 c 마크가 나타납니다. 시간 설정: TV가 자동으로 켜질 시간을 설정합니다. 리모컨을 이용해 오전/오후, 시간과 분을 설정할 수 있습니다. 음량: 켜질 때의 음량을 설정하세요. 리모컨을 이용해 음량을 변경합니다. TV/외부입력: 정해진 시간에 TV가 켜질 때, 재생될 콘텐츠의 외부기기를 선택할 수 있습니다. 특정 채널이 나오도록 하거나 TV에 연결된 외부기기를 선택하여 콘텐츠(동영상, 음악 또는 사진 파일)를 재생하도록 설정할 수 있습니다. USB를 선택하기 전에, 먼저 TV에 USB 장치가 연결돼 있어야 합니다. 신호 (TV/외부입력을 TV로 설정했을 때): DTV 일반, DTV 유선, 일반, 유선을 선택할 수 있습니다. 채널 (TV/외부입력을 TV로 설정했을 때): 원하는 채널을 선택하세요. 음악 / 사진 (TV/외부입력을 USB로 설정했을 때): TV가 켜질 때 재생할 음악 또는 사진 파일이 있는 폴더를 USB 장치에서 선택합니다. 만약 둘 다 선택했다면, 선택한 음악을 재생하면서, 선택한 사진을 같이 보여줍니다. ■ USB 장치에 음악 파일이 없거나 음악 파일이 있는 폴더를 선택하지 않으면 켜짐 시간 예약 기능이 제대로 작동하지 않습니다. ■ USB에 사진 파일이 하나만 있으면 슬라이드 쇼를 재생할 수 없습니다. ■ 이름이 너무 긴 폴더는 선택할 수 없습니다. ■ USB마다 지정된 폴더가 다릅니다. 같은 종류의 USB를 하나 이상 사용할 경우, 각 USB에 지정된 폴더의 이름을 다르게 만들어 주세요. ■ 켜짐 시간 예약은 USB 메모리스틱과 멀티 카드 리더기의 사용을 권장합니다. MP3, PMP 또는 자체 배터리를 가지는 USB 장치는, 제조사별 사양에 따라 인식시간이 오래 걸리므로 켜짐 시간 예약 기능의 동작을 보장하지 않습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 28 2012-09-04 9:23:5729 3. 설정 기능 ● 꺼짐 시간 예약 원하는 날짜와 시간에 자동으로 TV가 꺼집니다. 꺼짐 시간 예약은 3개까지 설정할 수 있습니다. ( 꺼짐 시간 예약1, 켜짐 시간 예약2, 꺼짐 시간 예약 3) 현재 시간을 설정한 후에 꺼짐 시간 예약을 이용할 수 있습니다. 설정: 끄기, 한 번, 매일, 월~금, 월~토, 토~일 또는 요일선택 중 선택하세요. 요일선택을 선택하면 꺼짐 시간 예약을 원하는 요일 별로 설정할 수 있습니다. 선택한 요일에 c 마크가 나타납니다. 시간 설정: TV가 자동으로 꺼질 시간을 설정합니다. 리모컨을 이용해 오전/오후, 시간, 분을 수동으로 설정하세요. 자녀 보호 기능 설정하기 보안 설정 메뉴 → 시스템 → 보안 설정 어린이가 유해한 채널을 시청하지 못하도록 특정 채널의 시청을 제한합니다. 보안을 설정하거나 변경하려면 비밀 번호를 입력해야 합니다. ■ HDMI 또는 컴포넌트 모드에서는 보안 설정을 사용할 수 없습니다. ■ 초기 비밀번호는 "0-0-0-0"입니다. ● 채널 잠금 기능 채널 잠금 기능을 켜거나 끕니다. ● 비밀번호 변경 비밀번호 변경을 선택합니다. 리모컨을 이용해 설정할 새로운 비밀번호 4자리를 입력하고 재입력합니다. "비밀번호가 변경되었습니다."라는 메시지가 나타나면 닫기를 선택하세요. 새로운 비밀번호가 설정되었습니다. 채널 잠금 설정 하기 1 스마트 허브의 채널을 선택합니다. (™ → 채널) 2 채널 목록에서 잠금 기능을 설정할 채널을 선택하고, 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 선택하세요. 3 채널 잠금 설정을 선택하세요. 비밀번호 입력 창이 나타납니다. 4 비밀번호 4자리를 입력하세요. 채널 잠금 기능이 설정됩니다. 잠금 설정된 채널을 시청할 경우, 검은 화면에 “잠금 설정된 채널입니다.”라는 메시지가 나타납니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 29 2012-09-04 9:23:5730 채널 잠금 해제 하기 1 스마트 허브의 채널을 선택합니다. (™ → 채널) 2 잠금 설정된 채널에서 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 선택하세요. 3 채널 잠금 해제를 선택하세요. 4 비밀번호 입력 창이 나타납니다. 설정된 비밀번호를 입력하세요. 5 비밀번호 입력을 완료하면, 채널 잠금 기능이 해제됩니다. 비밀번호가 생각나지 않을 경우, 리모컨을 이용해 비밀번호를 초기화 할 수 있습니다. 비밀번호를 "0-0- 0-0"으로 초기화하려면 TV의 전원을 끈 상태에서 다음 순서대로 실행하세요. 조용히M → 8 → 2 → 4 → P (전원 켜기) 에코 절전 설정 에코 절전 설정 메뉴 → 시스템 → 에코 절전 설정 ● 절전 모드 TV 밝기를 조정하여 TV의 전력 소모를 줄일 수 있습니다. 화면 끄기를 선택하면 화면이 꺼지지만 음향은 계속 켜져 있습니다. 화면을 다시 보려면 음량 버튼을 제외한 다른 버튼을 누르세요. ● 에코 센서 에너지 절약을 위해 주변 밝기에 따라 밝기를 자동으로 조절합니다. 백라이트 (LED TV에만 해당) / 패널 밝기 조정 (PDP TV에만 해당) 항목을 조정하면 에코 센서가 꺼집니다. 최소 백라이트 (LED TV에만 해당) / 최소 패널 밝기 조정 (PDP TV에만 해당): 에코 센서 설정이 켜져 있는 경우 수동으로 화면의 최소 밝기를 조정할 수 있습니다. 에코 센서 설정이 켜져 있으면, 주변 조명 강도에 따라 디스플레이 밝기가 변경될 수 있습니다. (살짝 어두워지거나 밝아집니다.) 최소 백라이트 / 최소 패널 밝기 조정으로 화면의 최소 밝기를 조정할 수 있습니다. ● 무신호 전원 끄기 에너지 절약을 위해 특정 시간 동안 입력 신호가 없는 경우 자동으로 전원을 꺼주는 기능입니다. ● 자동 전원 끄기 과열을 방지하기 위해 4시간 동안 TV를 작동하지 않으면 자동으로 TV가 꺼집니다. 자동 전원 끄기가 끄기로 설정되어 있을 경우, TV를 작동하지 않아도 TV 전원이 계속 켜져 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 30 2012-09-04 9:23:5831 3. 설정 기능 동시 화면 메뉴 → 시스템 → 동시 화면 외부기기 또는 컴퓨터의 화면을 시청하면서 동시에 작은 화면으로 TV 채널을 시청할 수 있습니다. 예를 들어 블루레이 플레이어로 영화를 보면서 동시 화면 기능을 이용해 유선 방송을 시청할 수 있습니다. 스마트 허브 작동 중에는 동시 화면 기능을 사용할 수 없습니다. ● 동시 화면 설정 동시 화면기능을 켜거나 끕니다. ● 채널 부 화면의 채널을 선택합니다. ● 화면 크기 부 화면의 크기를 선택합니다. ● 위치 선택 부 화면의 위치를 선택합니다. ● 음향 선택 동시 화면 모드에서 듣기를 원하는 음향을 선택할 수 있습니다. ■ 동시 화면 모드로 TV를 시청하는 동안 TV를 끄면 동시 화면 기능은 해제됩니다. TV를 다시 켤 때 동시 화면 모드로 다시 설정해야 합니다. ■ 주 화면으로 게임이나 노래방 기능 사용할 때 동시화면의 화질이 나쁠 수 있습니다. ■ 동시 화면은 입체영상 시청 시 사용할 수 없습니다. ■ 동시 화면 설정: 외부기기 화면이 주 화면, TV 화면이 부 화면이 됩니다. - 주 화면: 컴포넌트, HDMI - 부 화면: TV 키보드와 마우스로 TV 이용하기 장치 관리자 메뉴 → 시스템 → 장치 관리자 본 기기에 연결된 입력장치의 연결을 설정합니다. 본 기기에 연결된 장치 목록을 확인하고 기능을 설정할 수 있습니다. USB HID 키보드와 마우스의 모델에 따라 호환되지 않을 수 있습니다. ● 키보드 설정 TV에 연결된 USB 또는 블루투스 키보드를 사용합니다. USB 키보드를 사용하려면, TV 뒷면의 USB 단자에 연결하세요. (LED 6350 모델 이상, PDP TV에만 해당) 블루투스 키보드를 사용하려면, 블루투스 기능을 이용해 연결하세요. 쿼티 키패드 화면이 웹 브라우저에 나타날 때만 사용 할 수 있습니다. 키보드 선택 연결된 키보드 중에서 사용할 키보드를 선택하세요. 한 개의 키보드만 사용할 수 있습니다. 블루투스 키보드 추가 (LED 6350 모델 이상, PDP TV에만 해당) 블루투스 키보드를 추가합니다. 키보드 옵션: 키보드 언어 및 타입 등 기본 옵션을 설정합니다. - 키보드 언어: 키보드 입력에 사용할 언어를 선택합니다. - 키보드 종류: 입력에 사용할 키보드 종류를 설정합니다. - 입력 언어 전환: 입력 언어를 전환하는 단축키를 선택합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 31 2012-09-04 9:23:5932 ● 마우스 설정 TV에 연결된 USB 또는 블루투스 마우스를 사용합니다. USB 마우스를 사용하려면, TV 뒷면의 USB 단자에 연결하세요. (LED 6350 모델 이상, PDP TV에만 해당) 블루투스 마우스를 사용하려면, 블루투스 기능을 이용해 연결하세요. 컴퓨터를 사용하듯이, 마우스를 이용해 TV의 메뉴를 선택할 수 있습니다. 마우스 선택 연결된 마우스 중에서 사용할 마우스를 선택하세요. 연결된 마우스 중에서 한 개의 마우스만 사용할 수 있습니다. 블루투스 마우스 추가 (LED 6350 모델 이상, PDP TV에만 해당) 블루투스 마우스를 추가합니다. 마우스 옵션 마우스 단추 및 휠의 기본 옵션을 설정합니다. - 기본 버튼: 마우스의 기본 기능(클릭, 선택)으로 사용할 버튼을 선택합니다. - 포인터 크기: 화면에 표시되는 마우스 포인터의 크기를 설정합니다. - 포인터 속도: 마우스 포인터의 이동 속도를 설정합니다. ▼ 마우스로 TV 메뉴 이용하기 1 TV에 USB 또는 블루투스 마우스를 연결하세요. 2 기본 버튼을 누르세요. 이동 화면이 나타납니다. 3 컴퓨터를 사용하듯이, 마우스를 이용해 TV의 메뉴를 선택할 수 있습니다. TV와 Samsung Audio Device 연결하기 SoundShare 설정 (LED 6350, PDP 550 모델 이상에만 해당) 메뉴 → 시스템 → 장치 관리자 → SoundShare 설정 TV와 Samsung Audio Device를 연결할 수 있습니다. Samsung Audio Device를 사용하려면 블루투스 기능을 이용하여 TV와 Audio 기기를 연결하세요. 이 기능을 이용하여 TV 사운드를 더 크고 명확하게 즐길 수 있습니다. ● 새 기기 추가 SoundShare 기능을 켜거나 끌 수 있습니다. 새 기기 추가 기능이 끄기로 설정되면, 새로운 기기의 연결 신호는 무시됩니다. ● 삼성 오디오 기기 목록 사용 / 사용 안함: 기기를 사용하거나 차단합니다. 목록에서 삭제: 목록에서 기기를 삭제합니다. 지원되는 삼성 오디오 기기 모델 - DA-E650 / E651 / E660 / E661 / E670 / E680 / E750 / E751 / E760 / E761 ■ 자세한 TV 페어링 사용방법은 홈페이지 "http:// www.samsung.com/sec"를 참조하세요. ■ 지역에 따라 해당 삼성 오디오 기기 모델이 판매되지 않을 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 32 2012-09-04 9:23:5933 3. 설정 기능 기타 기능 메뉴 언어 메뉴 → 시스템 → 메뉴 언어 선택한 언어로 메뉴를 볼 수 있습니다. 1 메뉴 언어를 선택하세요. 2 한국어 또는 English를 선택할 수 있습니다. 자막 메뉴 → 시스템 → 자막 ● 자막 자막 기능을 작동하거나 해제합니다. 자막이 제공되지 않는 경우는 자막이 보이지 않습니다. 컴포넌트, HDMI 모드에서는 자막 기능이 작동하지 않습니다. ● 자막 모드 목록에서 자막 모드를 선택합니다. 방송 프로그램에 따라 자막구현이 다를 수 있습니다. 방송 기본 / 영문 / 한글: 아날로그 채널에서 아날로그 자막을 선택할 수 있습니다. 한글 자막 모드에서 영문 자막 방송을 시청할 경우, 글자가 깨져 보일 수 있습니다. 이럴 경우에는 자막 모드를 영문으로 설정하세요 방송 기본 / 자막1 ~ 자막6: 디지털 채널에서 디지털 자막을 선택할 수 있습니다. 자막1에서 자막6까지 선택할 수 있습니다. ● 자막 표기 설정 다음의 설정을 조정할 수 있습니다. 크기: 방송 기본, 작게, 보통, 크게를 선택할 수 있습니다. 기본 설정은 방송 기본입니다. 자막 색상: 자막의 색상을 변경합니다. 방송 기본, 흰색, 검은색, 빨간색, 초록색, 파란색, 노란색, 보라색, 하늘색을 선택할 수 있습니다. 기본 설정은 검은색입니다. 배경 색상: 자막의 배경색을 변경합니다. 방송 기본, 흰색, 검은색, 빨간색, 초록색, 파란색, 노란색, 보라색, 하늘색을 선택할 수 있습니다. 기본 설정은 흰색입니다. 자막 투명도: 자막의 투명도를 변경합니다. 방송 기본, 투명하게, 반투명하게, 불투명하게를 선택할 수 있습니다. 배경 투명도: 자막의 배경 투명도를 변경합니다. 방송 기본, 투명하게, 반투명하게, 불투명하게를 선택할 수 있습니다. 방송 기본 설정으로 돌아가기: 크기, 자막 색상, 배경 색상, 자막 투명도, 배경 투명도의 설정 값을 초기화합니다. ■ 방송 프로그램에 따라 자막구현이 다를 수 있습니다. ■ 방송 기본 기능은 방송국에서 지정한 설정을 제공합니다. ■ 자막과 배경은 동일한 색상으로 설정할 수 없습니다. ■ 자막과 배경을 모두 투명하게 설정할 수 없습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 33 2012-09-04 9:24:0034 화면 보호 (PDP TV에만 해당) 메뉴 → 시스템 → 화면 보호 플라즈마 디스플레이(PDP) 화면의 잔상을 예방할 수 있습니다. 화면 보호 기능을 설정해 놓으세요. 이 제품에는 화면 열화 방지 기술이 갖춰져 있습니다. 수평 또는 수직 방향으로 화소들을 미세하게 이동하여 화면 잔상을 최소화할 수 있습니다. 화면 열화 방지를 위해 다음의 추가적인 기능을 이용할 수 있습니다. - 화소 이동 - 화면 보호 시간 - 스크롤 - 여백 채움 ● 화소 이동 PDP 화면에서 수평 또는 수직 방향으로 화소들을 미세하게 이동하여 화면 잔상을 최소화할 수 있습니다. ▼ 화소 이동을 최적으로 설정하려면 수평 이동 간격 - 사용 가능한 설정 값: 0 – 4 (pixels) - TV/HDMI/외부입력/컴포넌트의 최적 설정 값: 4 수직 이동 간격 - 사용 가능한 설정 값: 0 – 4 (pixels) - TV/HDMI/외부입력/컴포넌트의 최적 설정 값: 4 시간 설정 (분) - 사용 가능한 설정 값: 1 – 4 분 - TV/HDMI/외부입력/컴포넌트의 최적 설정 값: 4 분 ■ 화소 이동 값은 TV 크기(인치) 및 모드에 따라 다를 수 있습니다. ■ 화면 크기가 원본 크기일 경우 화소 이동을 선택할 수 없습니다. ● 화면 보호 시간 설정된 시간 동안 정지 영상이 지속될 경우, 잔상으로 인한 화면 열화를 방지하기 위해 TV의 화면 보호 기능이 동작합니다. ● 스크롤 일정시간 동안 PDP의 모든 픽셀을 패턴 형태로 이동하여 화면의 잔상을 제거해 줍니다. 장시간 정지 화면 시청 후, 이전 화면 혹은 기호 등의 잔상이 남아 있을 경우 이 기능을 사용하세요. ■ 화면의 잔상을 효과적으로 제거하려면 약 1시간 정도, 잔상 제거 기능을 실행해야 합니다. 잔상이 제거되지 않으면 다시 반복하세요. ■ 취소하려면, 리모컨에서 아무 키나 누르세요. ● 여백 채움 화면 크기를 4:3으로 설정하여 시청할 경우 화면의 양쪽에 여백이 생깁니다. 이 여백으로 인하여 화면에 잔상이 발생할 수 있으므로 흰색의 밝기를 조정하여 화면을 보호하세요. 화면 보호 시간 (LED TV에만 해당) 설정된 시간 동안 정지 영상이 지속될 경우, 잔상으로 인한 화면 열화를 방지하기 위해 TV의 화면 보호 기능이 동작합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 34 2012-09-04 9:24:0035 3. 설정 기능 일반 설정 메뉴 → 시스템 → 일반 설정 ● 게임 모드 TV 화면을 게임 모드에 적합하도록 설정할 수 있습니다. PlayStation™이나 Xbox™ 같은 게임기를 연결했을 때 이 기능을 이용하세요. ▼ 게임 모드 주의사항 및 제한사항 - TV와 게임기의 연결을 해제하여 다른 외부 기기를 연결하기 전에, 게임 모드를 끄기로 설정하세요. - 게임 모드에서 TV 화면은 약간 흔들릴 수 있습니다. ■ TV 시청 중에는 게임 모드가 지원되지 않습니다. ■ 게임기를 연결시킨 후에 게임 모드를 켜세요. 게임기를 연결하기 전에 게임 모드를 켜면 화질이 약간 떨어질 수 있습니다. ■ 게임 모드가 설정된 경우 화면 모드는 표준 화면이 되고 음향 모드는 자동으로 영화를 볼 때 모드로 변경됩니다. ● BD Wise BD Wise 기능을 지원하는 삼성 DVD나 블루레이 플레이어, 홈시어터를 연결하면, 색감이 부족한 DVD 타이틀도 블루레이 디스크처럼 풍부한 색감과 화질로 즐길 수 있습니다. BD Wise 기능을 켜면 화면이 자동으로 최적의 해상도로 변경됩니다. HDMI 케이블을 통해 BD Wise 기능을 지원하는 삼성 제품을 연결할 때 사용할 수 있습니다. ● 메뉴 투명도 메뉴 화면의 투명도를 설정할 수 있습니다. ● 동작음 리모컨이나 TV 동작 시 소리로 피드백을 주는 기능입니다. 기본적으로 제공되는 기능이며, 음량을 조절하거나 끌 수 있습니다. ● 패널 키 잠금 패널 키를 잠금 기능을 통해 컨트롤 메뉴 사용을 제한할 수 있습니다. 패널 키 잠금 기능을 켜기로 설정하면, 패널 키로 컨트롤 메뉴를 사용할 수 없습니다. ● 부팅로고 TV가 켜질 때 로고가 보여지는 것을 설정합니다. ● 라이트 효과 (LED 7100 모델에만 해당) TV 전면 아래 쪽에 있는 불빛을 켜거나 끌 수 있습니다. ■ 라이트 효과를 끄기로 설정하면 전력 소모를 줄일 수 있습니다. ■ 불빛의 색깔은 모델마다 다를 수 있습니다. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 메뉴 → 시스템 → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 다양한 AV 기기들로 구성된 환경에서 Anynet+ 메뉴를 통해 AV 기기들을 자동으로 제어함으로써, 사용자가 간편하게 TV를 통해 AV 기기들을 사용할 수 있도록 하는 AV 네트워크 시스템입니다. 기능 설정에 대한 자세한 내용은 “Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)” 내용을 참고하세요. DivX® 주문형 비디오 메뉴 → 시스템 → DivX® 주문형 비디오 Divx DRM이 적용된 동영상을 재생하기 위해서는 제품을 등록해야 합니다. TV에 등록 코드를 DivX 웹 사이트로 이동해서 등록을 완료하면 스마트 허브의 동영상 기능으로 VOD를 시청할 수 있습니다. DivX® VOD에 대한 자세한 내용은 "http://www. divx.com/vod"를 참고하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 35 2012-09-04 9:24:0136 고객지원 메뉴 e-설명서 메뉴 → 고객지원 → e-설명서 메뉴 → 고객지원 → e-설명서 TV에 저장되어 있는 사용자 설명서를 볼 수 있습니다. TV에 다양한 기능을 이용하는 방법을 숙지하려면 e- 설명서를 실행하세요. e-설명서 화면에 관한 자세한 내용은 제품 사용 설명서의 “e-설명서 사용 가이드”를 참조하세요. 자가진단 메뉴 → 고객지원 → 자가진단 ● 화질 테스트 영상 테스트를 실행합니다. 화면 상의 결함을 테스트하기 위해 고해상도의 그림이 나타납니다. 예: 테스트 영상이 나타나지 않거나 테스트 영상에 잡티나 왜곡이 있으면 예를 선택하세요. TV에 문제가 있을 수도 있습니다. 삼성 전자 서비스 센터에 지원을 요청하세요. 아니요: 테스트 영상이 잘 나오면 아니요를 선택하세요. 외부기기에 문제가 있을 수도 있습니다. 연결을 확인하세요. 문제가 지속될 경우, 방송 신호를 점검 하거나 외부기기의 사용자 설명서를 참조하세요. ● 음질 테스트 사운드 테스트를 실행합니다. 사운드에 문제가 있을 때 실행하세요. ■ 음질 테스트를 하기 전에 TV 스피커에서 아무 소리가 나지 않는다면 음향 메뉴에서 스피커 선택을 TV 스피커로 설정한 후에 다시 음질 테스트를 실행하세요. ■ 스피커 설정을 외부 스피커로 선택했거나 음소거된 경우에도 음질 테스트의 멜로디는 들을 수 있습니다. 예: 음질 테스트에서도 문제 증상이 계속된다면 예를 선택하세요. TV에 문제가 있을 수 있습니다. 삼성전자 서비스 센터에 연락하세요. TV에 문제가 있을 수 있습니다. 삼성전자 서비스센터에 지원을 요청하세요. 아니요: 테스트 음향이 정상일 경우, 외부기기의 문제일 수 있습니다. 연결을 확인하세요. 문제가 지속될 경우 외부기기의 사용자 설명서를 참조하세요. ● 디지털 신호 정보 (디지털 방송에서만) 디지털 신호 정보는 HD 채널의 신호 강도를 보여줍니다. 안테나를 조정하여 신호 강도를 높이고 HD 채널을 수신할 수 있습니다. ● 초기화 네트워크 설정을 제외한 모든 설정을 초기값으로 재설정합니다. ▼ 초기화 하기 1 초기화 메뉴로 이동하세요. (메뉴 → 고객지원 → 자가진단 → 초기화) 2 비밀번호 입력 창이 나타납니다. 리모컨을 이용해 비밀번호를 입력하세요. 3 비밀번호 입력을 마치면 “네트워크 설정을 제외한 모든 설정을 공장 초기값으로 설정합니다.”라는 메시지 창이 나타납니다. 4 예를 선택하세요. 모든 설정이 초기화됩니다. TV는 자동으로 꺼졌다 켜지며 초기 설정 화면이 나타납니다. 초기 설정에 대한 자세한 정보는 제품 사용 설명서를 참조하세요. ● 문제 해결 도움이 필요할 때 문제해결 가이드를 참조하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 36 2012-09-04 9:24:0237 3. 설정 기능 소프트웨어 업데이트 메뉴 → 고객지원 → 소프트웨어 업데이트 최신 소프트웨어를 최신 버전으로 업그레이드합니다. 현재버전: 현재 TV에 설치된 소프트웨어 버전입니다. 최신 버전 업그레이드 5가지 방법으로 업그레이드 할 수 있습니다. - USB로 업그레이드 - 인터넷으로 업그레이드 - 방송 신호로 업그레이드 - 저장된 파일 사용 - 대기모드 업그레이드 ■ 업그레이드를 진행하는 동안 TV를 끄지 않도록 주의하세요. 소프트웨어 업데이트가 완료되면 TV는 자동으로 꺼졌다 켜집니다. 소프트웨어 업데이트를 하면 영상 및 음향 설정은 초기화 됩니다. 업데이트 후에 쉽게 재설정할 수 있도록 설정 값을 메모해 놓는 것이 좋습니다. ▼ USB로 업그레이드 ● USB로 업그레이드하기 1 삼성전자 홈페이지 “http://www.samsung. com/sec”를 방문하세요. 2 최신 USB 소프트웨어 exe 파일을 컴퓨터에 다운로드하세요. 3 exe 폴더를 추출하세요. exe 파일과 같은 이름의 단일 폴더가 생성됩니다. 4 USB 플래시 드라이브에 폴더를 복사하세요. 5 TV를 켜고 USB 플래시 드라이브를 TV 뒷면의 USB 단자에 삽입합니다. 6 TV 메뉴의 고객지원 → 소프트웨어 업데이트로 이동하세요. 7 USB로 업그레이드를 선택하세요. 업그레이드가 완료되기 전에 USB 드라이브를 제거하지 않도록 주의하세요. ▼ 인터넷으로 업그레이드 인터넷으로 소프트웨어를 다운로드하여 업그레이드 합니다. 먼저 네트워크를 구성하여 인터넷에 연결돼 있어야 합니다. 네트워크 설정에 대한 자세한 설명은 "유선 또는 무선 네트워크 설정하기" 부분을 참조하세요. ● 인터넷으로 업그레이드 하기 1 인터넷으로 업그레이드를 선택하세요. 서버에 연결하는 메시지가 나타납니다. 2 다운로드가 가능한 소프트웨어가 있으면 진행 막대 팝업 창이 나타나고 다운로드를 시작합니다. 3 다운로드가 완료되면 다음 3가지 선택 질문 화면이 나타납니다. 지금 설치, 나중 설치, 또는 설치 안함 - 지금 설치를 선택하면 소프트웨어 업데이트를 시작합니다 자동으로 TV가 꺼졌다 켜집니다. - 나중 설치를 선택하거나 1분 안에 선택을 하지 않으면, 새로운 업데이트 소프트웨어를 TV에 저장합니다. 저장된 파일 사용 기능을 이용해 다음 기회에 소프트웨어를 업데이트할 수 있습니다. - 설치 안함을 선택하면 업데이트를 취소합니다. ▼ 방송 신호로 업그레이드 방송 신호로 소프트웨어를 다운로드 받아 업그레이드 합니다. ● 방송신호로 업그레이드 하기 1 방송신호로 업그레이드를 선택하세요. 2 업그레이드할 소프트웨어를 탐색합니다. TV 모델이나 방송 신호 강도에 따라 탐색하는데 약간의 시간이 필요할 수 있습니다. 3 탐색 후 업그레이드를 진행합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 37 2012-09-04 9:24:0238 ▼ 저장된 파일 사용 이전에 다운로드 했던 파일을 이용하여 업그레이드합니다. 대기 모드에서 파일을 다운로드하거나 바로 설치하지 않기를 선택했을 때 이용합니다. (다음 부분의 대기 모드로 업그레이드를 참조하세요) ● 저장된 파일로 업그레이드 하기 1 업그레이드 소프트웨어가 다운로드 되어있다면 저장된 파일 사용 화면의 오른쪽에서 소프트웨어 버전 정보를 확인할 수 있습니다. 2 저장된 파일 사용을 선택하세요. 3 업그레이드 진행 여부를 묻는 메시지가 나타납니다. 예를 선택하면 업그레이드를 시작합니다. 4 업그레이드가 완료되면 TV는 자동으로 꺼졌다 켜집니다. ▼ 대기모드 업그레이드 TV 전원이 대기모드 상태일 때, 새로운 소프트웨어를 다운로드 받을 수 있습니다. 대기모드에서 TV는 꺼지지만 인터넷 연결은 되어있습니다. 이 기능은 TV를 시청하지 않을 때 TV가 자동으로 소프트웨어를 업그레이드 할 수 있도록 해줍니다. TV가 내부적으로 켜져 있기 때문에 화면의 발광 현상이 있을 수 있습니다. 이러한 현상은 소프트웨어가 다운로드 되는 동안 1 시간 이상 지속할 수 있습니다. ● 대기모드 업그레이드 하기 소프트웨어 업데이트 메뉴에서 대기모드 업그레이드를 선택합니다. - 끄기: 끄기를 선택하면 새로운 소프트웨어 업그레이드가 가능할 때, 팝업 창을 통해 알려줍니다. - 45분 후 / 오전 06:00 / 오전 10:00 / 오후 02:00 / 오후 06:00: 원하는 시간에 방송 신호를 이용해 새로운 소프트웨어를 다운로드합니다. 반드시 인터넷에 연결돼야 대기모드 업그레이드를 할 수 있습니다. 고객지원 정보 메뉴 → 고객지원 → 고객지원 정보 TV가 제대로 작동하지 않거나 소프트웨어를 업그레이드하고 싶을 때 이 정보를 확인하세요. 제품에 대한 정보, 소프트웨어를 다운로드하는 방법을 알아볼 수 있습니다. 원격 진단 메뉴 → 고객지원 → 원격 진단 제품 정보를 확인하기 위해 삼성전자 콜 센터는 삼성제품을 원격으로 확인합니다. 원격 진단은 사용자 설정을 제어하고 문제를 해결할 수 있습니다. 본 기능은 서비스 이용 약관에 동의 후 이용할 수 있습니다. 스마트 허브 메뉴 → 고객지원 → 스마트 허브 스마트 허브를 통해 인터넷에 연결하여 인터넷과 멀티미디어 콘텐츠를 다양하게 즐길 수 있습니다. 스마트 허브 사용에 대한 자세한 정보는 e-설명서의 " 스마트 허브"를 참조하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 38 2012-09-04 9:24:0339 4. 고급 기능 입체영상 시청하기 입체영상 (LED 5500 모델 미지원) 메뉴 → 화면 → 입체영상 입체영상 콘텐츠를 시청할 수 있는 새롭고 흥미진진한 기능입니다. 이 기능을 제대로 즐기려면 삼성 입체영상 액티브 안경을 착용하여 3D 콘텐츠를 시청하셔야 합니다. 3D 방송 채널을 시청하려면 채널 → 3D 채널 보기가 켜기로 되어 있어야 합니다. FULL HD 3D의 구현 여부는 콘텐츠의 화질에 따라 달라질 수 있습니다. 입체영상 시청에 관한 중요한 건강 및 안전 정보 다음 안전 정보를 잘 읽고 숙지한 다음 입체영상 기능을 사용하세요. 경고 ■ 입체영상 시청 중 눈의 피로, 두통, 어지러움, 울렁거림과 같은 불편을 느낄 수 있습니다. 이와 같은 증상이 있을 경우 시청을 중단하고 안경을 벗은 후 휴식을 취해주세요. ■ 입체영상을 장시간 볼 경우 눈이 피로할 수 있습니다. 이 경우 시청을 중지하고, 3D 안경을 벗은 후 휴식을 취해주세요. ■ 특히 어린이가 입체영상을 시청하는 경우, 보호자는 어린이의 상태를 빈번히 점검해야 합니다. 불편한 증상을 보이면 즉시 시청을 중단시키고 휴식을 취하게 해주세요. ■ 3D 안경을 다른 용도(일반 안경, 선글라스, 보호용 고글 등)로 사용하지 마세요. ■ 걷거나 움직이면서 시청하지 마세요. 부딪히거나 넘어져서 다칠 수 있습니다. ● 입체영상 모드 입력되는 영상의 모드를 선택하여 입체영상을 감상합니다. 완벽한 입체영상 효과를 원하는 분은 3D 안경을 먼저 착용한 후, 아래와 같이 목록에서 최상의 입체영상 시청 체험을 지원하는 입체영상 모드를 선택하세요. 입체영상 모드 작동 Off 끄기 입체영상 모드를 해제합니다. 일반 일반 영상을 입체영상으로 변환합니다. 좌/우 좌/우 두 영상이 겹쳐 보이게 함으로써 입체감을 느낄 수 있습니다. 위/아래 위/아래 두 영상이 겹쳐 보이게 함으로써 입체감을 느낄 수 있습니다. ■ 입체영상은 입력 신호에 따라 달라질 수 있습니다. ■ 일부 파일 포맷은 “일반”을 지원하지 않을 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 39 2012-09-04 9:24:0540 ● 3D 시점: 입체영상의 멀고 가까운 정도를 설정합니다. ● 입체감: 입체영상의 입체감을 설정합니다. ● 좌/우 영상 변경: 좌, 우 영상을 변환합니다. ● 일반영상으로 보기: 입체영상을 일반영상으로 변환하여 감상합니다. 이 기능은 입체영상 모드가 “일반” 또는 “끄기” 일 때 사용할 수 없습니다. ● 3D 화면 최적화 (LED TV에만 해당): 최적의 입체감을 조정할 수 있습니다. 지원 해상도 (16:9 모드에서만) ▼ HDMI 3D 형식 해상도 주파수 (Hz) / 1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 29.97 / 30 / 59.94 / 60 Hz 프레임 패킹 1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 29.97 / 30 Hz ▼ 컴포넌트 해상도 주파수 (Hz) 1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 29.97 / 30 / 59.94 / 60 Hz ▼ 디지털 채널 해상도 주파수 (Hz) 1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60 Hz ▼ 동영상 / 사진 (AllShare Play) 기타 기능 부분의 "지원 자막 및 AllShare Play 형식" 을 참고하세요. 입체영상 시청하기 입력되는 영상의 형식에 따라 입체영상 모드를 사용하지 못할 수도 있습니다. 3D 안경의 전원을 켜고, 입체영상을 시청하세요. 1 입체영상 메뉴로 이동하세요. (메뉴 → 화면 → 입체영상) 2 입체영상 모드를 선택하세요. 입체영상 모드 화면이 나타납니다. 3 보고 싶은 입체영상 모드 설정을 선택하세요. 화면이 잠시 사라졌다가 선택한 입체영상 모드가 다시 나타납니다. 리모컨의 X 버튼을 눌러 입체영상 모드에 진입할 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 40 2012-09-04 9:24:0541 4. 고급 기능 입체영상 기능을 사용하기 전에... ● 스마트 허브에 진입할 경우, 입체영상 모드는 자동으로 해제됩니다. ● 입력 소스 전환 시, 해당 외부기기 연결할 경우, 설정된 입체영상 모드는 자동으로 저장됩니다. ● 화면 메뉴 기능 중 일부는 입체영상 모드에서 사용할 수 없습니다. ● 동시 화면은 입체영상 시청 시 사용할 수 없습니다. ● IR 타입의 삼성 3D 액티브 안경이나 타사의 3D 안경은 지원하지 않습니다. ● 전원을 켠 후 TV 초기 구동 시는 3D 화면의 좌/우 겹침 현상이 나타날 수 있습니다. 최적화되기 위해서는 약간의 시간이 필요할 수 있습니다. ● 근처에 다른 3D 제품이 켜져 있거나 다른 전자 기기가 가까이 있으면 3D 영상이 제대로 동작하지 않을 수 있습니다. 시청에 문제가 있으면 다른 전자 기기를 3D 안경과 최대한 멀리 두세요. ● 3D 화면과 눈높이를 맞추어 정면에서 시청하는 것을 권장합니다. 시야각이나 거리를 벗어나면 3D 영상으로 보이지 않을 수 있습니다. ● TV 화면 세로 길이의 3배 이상 떨어져서 시청할 것을 권장합니다. 스마트 허브 메뉴 → 고객지원 → 스마트 허브 스마트 허브를 이용하면, 인터넷을 통해 영화와 동영상을 감상할 수 있으며, TV를 통해 유료 또는 무료의 다양한 애플리케이션을 즐길 수 있습니다. 뉴스와 스포츠, 날씨, 증권, 지도, 사진, 게임 애플리케이션이 있습니다. 리모컨의 ™ 버튼을 이용하여 시작할 수 있습니다. 참고 ● 삼성전자는 서비스 제공자에 의해 발생한 스마트 허브 서비스의 중단에 대해 어떠한 법적 책임도 지지 않습니다. ● 일부 애플리케이션의 경우 영어로 제공될 수 있으며 사용자의 지역에 따라 내용이 달라질 수 있습니다. ● 스마트 허브의 더 많은 정보를 얻으려면 서비스 제공자의 웹 사이트를 방문하세요. ● 스마트 허브는 TV 화면에서 인터넷 콘텐츠를 즐길 수 있도록, 인터넷을 통해 데이터를 다운로드하고 처리합니다. 인터넷 연결이 불안정한 경우, 서비스가 지연되거나 중단될 수 있습니다. 또한 콘텐츠는 인터넷 환경에 따라 자동으로 종료될 수 있습니다. 이런 현상이 생기면 인터넷 연결을 확인하고 다시 실행하세요. ● 서비스 제공자의 사정에 따라 업데이트나 서비스가 중단될 수 있습니다. ● 스마트 허브의 콘텐츠는 서비스 제공자에 의해 사전예고 없이 변경될 수 있습니다. ● 스마트 허브의 서비스 내용은 사용자의 펌웨어 버전에 따라 다를 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 41 2012-09-04 9:24:0642 스마트 허브 시작하기 1 ™ 버튼을 누릅니다. 2 스마트 허브 화면이 나타납니다. 3 개인정보 보호 정책 화면이 나타납니다. 약관에 동의함을 선택하세요. 4 서비스 업데이트 화면이 나타나며 서비스와 애플리케이션 설치 화면이 나타납니다. 설치가 완료되면 종료합니다. 스마트 허브 화면에 애플리케이션과 다운로드된 서비스가 표시됩니다. 다운로드하는 데 시간이 걸릴 수 있습니다. ■ 설치하는 동안 스마트 허브를 잠시 종료할 수 있습니다. ■ 설치 후에 몇 개의 창이 나타날 수 있습니다. 창을 닫거나 없어질 때까지 기다립니다. 5 애플리케이션을 사용하려면 리모컨을 이용해 선택하세요. 숫자 키패드 사용하기 리모컨을 이용해 _를 선택하면 입력 항목을 한글, 영어 소문자, 영어 대문자, 숫자, 기호/아이콘 순으로 변경할 수 있습니다. 특정 스마트 허브 애플리케이션에서는 키패드 화면을 지원하지 않을 수도 있습니다. 1 “105Chang”을 입력하는 경우를 예로 들어 보겠습니다. 2 _를 세 번 선택해 한글에서 숫자로 입력 모드를 변경하세요. 3 1, 0, 5 를 차례대로 선택하세요. 4 _를 네 번 선택해 숫자에서 영어 대문자로 입력 모드를 변경하세요. 5 2 를 세 번 선택해 C를 입력하세요. 6 _를 네 번 선택해 영어 대문자에서 영어 소문자로 입력 모드를 변경하세요. 7 “Chang”의 나머지 글자를 입력하세요. 입력이 완료되면 확인을 선택하세요. 쿼티 키패드 사용하기 일부 스마트 허브 애플리케이션에서 키보드를 사용하는 것과 같은 방식으로 쿼티 키패드를 사용할 수 있습니다. ▼ 쿼티 키패드에서 컬러버튼 이용하기 ● a 전체 삭제 입력된 모든 글자를 삭제합니다. ● b 숫자자판 / 쿼티자판 숫자자판 또는 쿼티자판으로 전환합니다. 쿼티자판 모드로 설정이 되어있으면, USB 또는 블루투스 키보드를 TV에 연결하여 글자를 입력할 수 있습니다. ● { 한칸띄움 글자 입력 중 한 칸을 띄웁니다. ● T 설정 옵션 메뉴를 보여줍니다. 입력 언어: 한국어와 English 중에서 입력 언어를 선택하세요. XT9 문자 입력: 추천 단어 기능을 켜거나 끕니다. ● E 선택 선택한 글자를 입력합니다. ● R 복귀 이전 메뉴로 돌아갑니다. ● π이전 페이지 이전 기호/아이콘 모음을 보여줍니다. 키패드 화면이 기호/아이콘 모드일 때만 가능합니다. ● µ 다음 페이지 다음 기호/아이콘 모음을 보여줍니다. 키패드 화면이 기호/아이콘 모드일 때만 가능합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 42 2012-09-04 9:24:0643 4. 고급 기능 계정 생성하기 삼성 계정이 있으면, 더욱 편리하게 스마트 허브를 사용할 수 있습니다. ■ 이메일을 아이디로 사용해야 합니다. ■ 사용자 계정을 10개까지 등록할 수 있습니다. ▼ 삼성 계정 만들기 1 리모컨을 이용해 a를 선택하세요. 로그인 화면이 나타납니다. 2 계정 생성을 선택하세요. 계정 생성 화면이 나타납니다. 3 삼성 계정을 선택하세요. 입력 화면과 키패드가 나타납니다. 4 키패드를 이용하여 메일 주소를 입력합니다. 입력한 이메일 주소는 아이디가 됩니다. TV에 연결된 키보드가 있다면, 키보드를 이용해 이메일 주소를 입력하세요. 입력을 마치면 비밀번호를 입력하세요. 이메일 주소와 비밀번호를 입력한 후에 리모컨을 이용해 다음 단계를 실행하세요. 5 계정 입력을 완료하면 확인을 선택하세요. 다시 로그인 화면이 나타납니다. 6 비밀번호를 선택하세요. 비밀번호 입력 화면과 키패드가 나타납니다. 7 키패드를 이용해 비밀번호를 입력하세요. 비밀번호는 문자, 숫자, 기호를 조합하여 생성할 수 있습니다. 리모컨을 이용해 a를 선택하세요. 입력하는 비밀번호가 보이거나 숨겨집니다. 8 비밀번호 입력을 완료하면, 확인을 선택하세요. 9 비밀번호 확인을 선택하세요. 비밀번호 입력 화면과 키패드가 다시 나타납니다. 10 7, 8단계를 반복해서 실행하세요. 11 계정 생성을 선택하세요. 계정 생성을 확인하는 창이 나타납니다. 12 확인을 선택하세요. 서비스 사이트 아이디를 등록할 것인지를 묻는 창이 나타납니다. 13 확인을 선택하세요. 14 서비스 계정 연결 창이 나타납니다. 연결하려는 서비스를 선택하세요. 아이디와 비밀번호를 입력한 후 확인을 선택하세요. ■ 서비스 계정 연결을 하면 애플리케이션 이용을 보다 쉽게 할 수 있습니다. 자세한 사항은 스마트 허브 설정하기의 "설정" 부분을 참고하세요. ■ 기존 계정이 없거나 계정 연결을 원치 않으면 미등록을 선택하세요. 15 확인을 선택하세요. 스마트 TV 계정 창이 나타나면 로그인을 선택하세요. 로그인이 완료됩니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 43 2012-09-04 9:24:0744 스마트 허브 화면 설정하기 ● a 로그인 / 로그아웃 ▼ 스마트 허브 로그인 하기 1 스마트 허브 화면에서 리모컨을 이용하여 a를 선택하면 로그인 화면이 나타납니다. 2 삼성 계정에서 ^을 선택하세요. 계정 목록이 펼쳐집니다. 삼성 계정을 수동으로 입력하려면, 삼성 계정 입력란을 선택하세요. 키패드 화면이 나타납니다. 삼성 계정을 수동으로 입력할 수 있습니다. 입력을 완료했으면 4단계부터 실행하세요. 3 목록에서 로그인하려는 아이디를 선택하세요. 로그인 창이 다시 나타납니다. 4 비밀번호를 선택하세요. 비밀번호를 입력하는 창과 키패드가 나타납니다. 5 리모컨을 이용해 비밀번호를 입력하세요. 입력이 완료되면 확인을 선택하세요. ■ 자동으로 비밀번호를 기억하려면 계정 비밀번호 저장을 선택하세요. c 마크가 나타납니다. 아이디를 선택하거나 입력하면 비밀번호는 자동으로 입력됩니다. ■ 스마트 허브를 시작할 때 자동으로 로그인하려면 자동 로그인을 선택하세요. c 마크가 나타납니다. ■ 비밀번호를 잊어버렸다면 비밀번호를 초기화할 수 있습니다. 리모컨을 이용해 b를 선택하세요. 팝업 창이 나타납니다. 확인을 선택하면 비밀번호를 초기화하는 방법이 이메일로 전송됩니다. ● b 배경 설정 스마트 허브 화면에서 배경화면 이미지를 변경할 수 있습니다. ● { 계정 관리 서비스 계정 연결, 스마트허브 계정 삭제 및 탈퇴를 할 수 있습니다. 계정 관리에 대한 자세한 사항은 " 스마트 허브 설정하기"를 참고하세요 스마트 허브에 로그인되어 있을 때만 사용 가능합니다. 스마트 허브에서 간편 메뉴 이용하기 스마트 허브 화면에 나타난 아이콘과 폴더에 따라 아래의 일부 기능들은 사용할 수 없습니다. ● 로그인 / 로그아웃 스마트 허브에 로그인하거나 로그아웃합니다. ● 배경 설정 스마트 허브 화면의 배경화면을 바꿀 수 있습니다. ● 이동 화면의 애플리케이션이나 폴더의 위치를 바꿀 수 있습니다. ▼ 이동하기 1 애플리케이션이나 폴더를 선택한 후 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 2 이동을 선택하세요. 변경될 위치가 나타납니다. 3 리모컨을 이용해 아이콘을 원하는 위치로 이동시킬 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 44 2012-09-04 9:24:0745 4. 고급 기능 ● 폴더로 이동 애플리케이션을 폴더로 이동시킵니다. 스마트 허브에 폴더가 생성되었을 때에만 가능합니다. ▼ 폴더로 이동하기 1 이동시킬 애플리케이션을 선택하고 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 2 폴더로 이동을 선택하세요. 폴더로 이동 창이 열립니다. 3 리모컨을 이용해 폴더를 선택하세요. 이동되었다는 메시지가 나타나면 종료합니다. 애플리케이션이 폴더로 이동하였습니다. 폴더 안의 애플리케이션을 선택하여 스마트 허브 화면으로 이동시킬 수도 있습니다. ▼ 폴더 안의 애플리케이션 이용하기 1 스마트 허브 화면에서 폴더를 선택하면 폴더가 열립니다. 2 애플리케이션을 선택하세요. 애플리케이션 서비스가 시작됩니다. ● 삭제 스마트 허브에서 애플리케이션을 삭제합니다. ▼ 삭제하기 1 애플리케이션을 선택하세요. 2 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 3 삭제를 선택하세요. "선택한 항목을 삭제하겠습니까?"라는 메시지가 나타납니다. 4 확인을 선택하세요. 애플리케이션이 삭제됩니다. ● 잠금 설정 애플리케이션을 잠그면 비밀번호 없이 애플리케이션을 실행할 수 없습니다. 일부 애플리케이션에는 잠금 기능을 지원하지 않을 수 있습니다. ▼ 잠금 설정하기 1 애플리케이션을 선택하고 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 2 잠금 설정을 선택하세요. 비밀번호 입력 창이 나타납니다. 3 비밀번호를 입력하세요. 초기 비밀번호는 "0-0- 0-0"입니다. 4 서비스 잠금기능이 설정되었다는 메시지 창이 나타납니다. 잠금기능이 설정된 애플리케이션 아이콘에 잠금 표시가 나타납니다. ● 잠금 해제 일부 애플리케이션에는 잠금 기능을 지원하지 않을 수 있습니다. ▼ 잠금 해제하기 1 잠금 설정된 애플리케이션을 선택한 뒤 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 2 잠금 해제를 선택하세요. 비밀번호 입력 창이 나타납니다. 3 비밀번호를 입력합니다. 초기 비밀번호는 "0-0- 0-0" 입니다. 4 서비스 잠금 기능이 해제되었다는 메시지 창이 나타납니다. 잠금 설정된 애플리케이션 아이콘에 잠금 표시가 사라집니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 45 2012-09-04 9:24:0846 ● 새 폴더 새 폴더를 만들 수 있습니다. 새 폴더가 생기면 애플리케이션을 폴더 안으로 이동시킬 수 있습니다. ▼ 새 폴더 만들기 1 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 2 새 폴더를 선택하세요. 새 폴더 창과 키패드 화면이 나타납니다. 3 리모컨을 이용해 폴더 이름을 입력합니다. 4 쿼티 키패드 하단의 확인을 선택하세요. 새로운 폴더가 스마트 허브 화면에 만들어집니다. ● 폴더 이름 변경 폴더의 이름을 변경합니다. ▼ 폴더 이름 변경하기 1 폴더를 선택하고 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 2 폴더 이름 변경을 선택하세요. 폴더 이름을 변경하는 화면과 키패드 창이 나타납니다. 3 리모컨을 이용해 새로운 이름을 입력하세요. 4 확인을 선택하세요. 폴더 이름 변경 창이 닫히고 폴더의 이름이 변경됩니다. ● 정보 선택한 애플리케이션에 관한 세부 정보를 보여줍니다. 정보 화면에서 애플리케이션을 잠그거나 잠금을 해제할 수 있습니다. 스마트 허브 설정하기 설정 메뉴에서 계정 관리, 서비스 관리, 초기화 및 스마트 허브 정보 기능을 설정할 수 있습니다. 이 기능들을 이용하려면 스마트 허브에 삼성 계정으로 로그인되어 있어야 합니다. ▼ 설정 메뉴를 이용하기 1 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 2 설정을 선택하세요. 설정 창이 나타납니다. 3 원하는 항목을 선택하세요. ● 계정 관리 계정 관리 메뉴에서는 애플리케이션 계정을 등록할 수 있으며, 삼성 계정의 비밀번호를 변경하거나 계정을 삭제 또는 탈퇴할 수 있습니다. 서비스 계정 연결: 다운로드한 애플리케이션의 계정이 이미 있을 경우, 서비스 계정 연결에서 해당 애플리케이션의 사용자 계정을 연결합니다. 스마트 허브에 로그인하여 애플리케이션을 실행할 경우, 자동으로 로그인 되도록 설정할 수 있습니다. 계정 등록을 하기 전 해당 애플리케이션이 스마트 허브에 설치되어 있어야 합니다. ▼ 서비스 계정 연결 1 계정 관리 메뉴에서 서비스 계정 연결을 선택하세요. 서비스 계정 연결 창이 나타납니다. 2 삼성 계정과 연동하려는 애플리케이션을 선택하세요. 3 팝업 창이 나타나면 등록을 선택하세요. 4 리모컨을 이용해 아이디와 비밀번호를 입력한 후 확인을 선택하세요. 아이디와 비밀번호는 선택한 애플리케이션의 계정을 사용합니다. 5 아이디와 비밀번호를 올바르게 입력하면 “등록되었습니다.”라는 메시지가 나타납니다. 6 다른 서비스 계정을 추가하려면 2~4단계를 실행하세요. 7 계정 등록이 완료되면 확인을 선택하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 46 2012-09-04 9:24:0847 4. 고급 기능 계정 목록에서 삭제: 서비스 계정 연결에 등록된 모든 계정을 삭제합니다. 탈퇴: 스마트 허브에 등록된 삼성 계정을 탈퇴하고 스마트 허브의 설정된 모든 계정을 삭제합니다. ● 서비스 관리 티커 자동 실행: 티커 자동 실행 기능을 켜기로 설정하면, TV가 켜지면 자동으로 티커가 실행됩니다. 티커 서비스란 증권, 뉴스, 날씨 등 실시간으로 변경 되는 정보를 TV 화면에 띄워주는 기능입니다. 서비스를 실행하면 TV를 시청하면서 관심 있는 항목을 동시에 볼 수 있습니다. 티커 자동 실행을 설정하기 전에 스마트 허브에서 티커 애플리케이션을 다운로드 받아야 합니다. 푸시 알림 설정: 스마트 허브에 설치된 애플리케이션에서 새로운 정보가 있을 때, 해당 정보를 보여주는 기능입니다. TV를 시청하는 동안 알림 사항을 띄어주고, 세부 사항을 확인할 수 있도록 합니다. ● 초기화 다운로드한 모든 애플리케이션을 초기화하고 모든 사용자 계정과 설정을 삭제합니다. 스마트 허브의 설정을 초기화합니다. 처음 시작하는 것처럼 스마트 허브를 재시작합니다. 단, 스마트 허브 계정은 초기화되지 않습니다. 계정으로 로그인하려면 아이디와 비밀번호를 로그인 화면에서 입력하세요. ▼ 초기화하기 1 설정 메뉴에서 초기화를 선택하세요. 초기화 화면이 나타납니다. 2 비밀번호를 입력하세요. ■ 기본 비밀번호 설정은 “0-0-0-0” 입니다. ■ 직접 만든 비밀번호가 생각나지 않을 때 TV 의 전원을 끈 상태에서 다음 순서대로 리모컨 버튼을 누르면 “0-0-0-0”으로 비밀번호가 초기화됩니다. 조용히M → 8 → 2 → 4 → P (전원 켜기) 3 잠시 후 스마트 허브는 자동으로 초기화됩니다. 화면이 검은색으로 되었다가 스마트 허브 화면이 다시 나타납니다. 잠시 후 초기화가 시작됩니다. 4 초기화가 완료되면 "스마트 허브 시작하기"의 2 단계로 돌아가세요. ● 스마트 허브 정보 스마트 허브에 대한 정보를 보여줍니다. 상세정보: 스마트 허브의 버전, 메모리사용, 고유번호를 표시합니다. 삼성 서비스 이용약관: 삼성 서비스 이용약관을 표시합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 47 2012-09-04 9:24:0848 Samsung Apps 사용하기 ™ → Samsung Apps Samsung Apps는 삼성 TV/AV 기기에서 사용할 수 있는 부가 기능을 다운로드할 수 있는 온라인 매장입니다. 다운로드한 부가 기능으로 동영상, 음악, 사진, 게임, 유용한 정보 등 다양한 콘텐츠를 즐길 수 있습니다. 정기적으로 새로운 애플리케이션이 추가됩니다. ■ Samsung Apps를 이용하려면 인터넷TV 서비스 이용약관을 확인하고 동의해야 합니다. ■ 애플리케이션의 버전에 따라, 사용 방법은 달라질 수 있습니다. 이러한 경우, 화면에 나타나는 지침을 따르세요. Samsung Apps에서 버튼 사용하기 화면에 따라 사용할 수 있는 버튼은 달라질 수 있습니다. ● a 로그인 / 로그아웃 스마트 허브 계정을 로그인하거나 로그아웃 합니다. ● b 가격 필터 유료, 무료로 이용할 수 있는 애플리케이션과 전체 애플리케이션을 보여줍니다. ● { 정렬 애플리케이션을 추천, 이름, 날짜, 다운로드 순으로 정렬합니다. 인기 앱을 제외한 모든 카테고리에서 정렬 기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. ● } 보기 모드 리모컨을 이용해 }를 선택할 때마다 기본 모드와 미리 보기 모드를 전환하여 볼 수 있습니다. ● πµ 스크롤 이전 또는 다음 페이지로 이동합니다. ● T 간편 메뉴 부가 설정 메뉴를 보여줍니다. ● R 복귀 이전 메뉴로 돌아갑니다. 카테고리 별로 Samsung Apps 사용하기 사용할 수 있는 카테고리는 다음과 같습니다. ● 인기 앱 가장 인기 있는 애플리케이션을 보여줍니다. ● 동영상 영화, TV 쇼와 짧은 동영상을 제공합니다. ● 게임 다양한 게임을 제공합니다. ● 스포츠 경기 정보, 이미지, 짧은 동영상 등 다양한 스포츠 미디어를 보여줍니다. ● 라이프스타일 음악, 사진 관리 도구, SNS(Social Network Service) 등 다양한 생활 미디어 서비스를 제공합니다. ● 정보 뉴스, 주식, 날씨 등 다양한 정보 서비스를 제공합니다. ● 교육 어린이들에게 교육적인 애플리케이션이 제공됩니다. ● 나의 Apps 세부정보와 다운로드한 콘텐츠처럼 구입한 애플리케이션 목록이나 이미 설치한 애플리케이션, 사용 가능한 App 캐시 쿠폰에 대한 정보를 제공합니다. http://tv.samsungapps.com에서 캐시를 구매하여 애플리케이션을 구입할 수 있습니다. ● 도움말 Samsung Apps에 관한 궁금증이 있으면 이 부분을 확인하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 48 2012-09-04 9:24:0949 4. 고급 기능 Samsung Apps에서 애플리케이션 검색하기 TV에서 이용할 수 있는 다양한 콘텐츠를 검색합니다. 1 Samsung Apps 화면에서 Samsung Apps 검색을 선택하세요. 애플리케이션을 검색하는 창과 키패드 화면이 나타납니다. 2 리모컨을 이용해 키워드를 입력하세요. 3 입력을 완료하면, 쿼티 키패드 하단의 확인을 선택하세요. 4 검색 결과 화면이 나타날 때까지 기다리세요. 검색된 애플리케이션 화면에서 원하는 애플리케이션을 선택하세요. ■ 검색기록에서 이전 검색어를 찾을 수 있습니다. ■ TV에 연결된 마우스나 키보드가 있다면, 마우스를 이용해 Samsung Apps 검색 입력란을 선택할 수 있으며, 키보드를 이용해 키워드를 입력할 수 있습니다. 스마트 검색 ™ → 스마트 검색 다양한 소스(예 : Apps, AllShare)의 콘텐츠를 보다 쉽게 검색하고 이용할 수 있습니다. 1 스마트 허브 화면에서 검색을 하려면 스마트 검색을 선택하세요. 2 직접 용어를 검색하려면 "검색어를 입력하세요." 선택하세요. 키패드 화면이 나타납니다. 리모컨을 이용해 검색하려는 단어를 입력하세요. 리모컨을 이용해 원하는 카테고리를 선택하여 검색할 수 있습니다. 애플리케이션의 버전에 따라, 사용 방법은 달라질 수 있습니다. 이러한 경우, 화면에 나타나는 지침을 따르세요. 카테고리 별 검색 기능 사용하기 ● 인기 검색어 검색 목록에 있는 검색어를 선택하여 탐색할 수 있습니다. 검색 목록은 자주 탐색된 단어들을 보여줍니다. ● 인기 애플리케이션 애플리케이션 목록에서 애플리케이션을 검색할 수 있습니다. 애플리케이션 목록은 사용자들이 자주 다운받은 애플리케이션을 보여줍니다. ● 검색 내역 이전에 탐색한 검색 내역을 보여줍니다. 기능 버튼을 이용하여 검색하기 ● b 새로고침 검색 기능을 새로 고침 할 수 있습니다. ● T 간편 메뉴 스마트 검색 기능이나 검색 내역을 삭제하기 위한 일반적인 항목을 설정합니다. ● R 복귀 이전 메뉴로 돌아갑니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 49 2012-09-04 9:24:0950 검색에서 간편 메뉴 사용하기 ● 일반 설정 검색 추천: 검색어 추천기능을 켜거나 끕니다. 검색 범위: 검색 범위를 설정합니다. 초기설정은 모든 애플리케이션의 검색을 허용합니다. ▼ 검색 범위 설정하기 1 찾기 화면에서 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 2 일반 설정을 선택하세요. 3 검색 범위에서 애플리케이션을 선택하면 c 마크가 없어집니다. c 마크를 해제하면, 검색 범위에서 애플리케이션을 제외됩니다. 체크된 애플리케이션만이 검색 범위에 포함됩니다. 4 검색 범위 설정이 완료되면, 복귀R 버튼을 누릅니다. ● 검색 내역 검색 내역에서 검색어를 삭제할 수 있으며 전체 삭제를 선택하면 모든 검색 내역이 삭제됩니다. ▼ 검색 내역에서 키워드 삭제하기 1 스마트 검색 화면에서 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 2 검색 내역을 선택하세요. 3 키워드 목록에서 하나의 키워드를 선택합니다. 4 리모컨의 E 버튼을 누르세요. 키워드가 목록에서 삭제됩니다. 스마트 팁 NAVER ™ → 스마트 팁 NAVER 스마트 팁 NAVER를 이용하면 다양한 방법으로 현재 방송과 장면에 대한 연관 정보 및 실시간 핫 이슈를 확인할 수 있으며, 원하는 검색어를 TV를 시청하면서 바로 검색할 수 있습니다. ■ 현재 방송의 연관정보는 디지털 채널에서만 가능합니다. ■ 장면에 따라 키워드가 제공되지 않을 수 있습니다. 제공되는 키워드를 리모컨을 이용해 선택할 수 있습니다. ■ 이 기능을 이용하려면 인터넷에 연결되어 있어야 합니다. ■ 애플리케이션의 버전에 따라, 사용 방법은 달라질 수 있습니다. 이러한 경우, 화면에 나타나는 지침을 따르세요. 스마트 팁에서 컬러 버튼 이용하기 ● a 창 숨기기 하단의 스마트 팁 메뉴 바를 최소화합니다. 메뉴 바를 최소화하면 a 스마트 팁만 화면에 나타납니다. 일정 시간이 지나면 자동으로 메뉴 바가 최소화됩니다. ● b NAVER 검색 NAVER 검색 창과 숫자 키패드 화면이 나타납니다. 리모컨을 이용해 검색하려는 단어를 입력하세요. 단어를 입력하면 연관 검색어가 아래 목록에 나타납니다. 실시간 급상승 검색어, TV 인기검색어, 일간 급상승 검색어: 리모컨을 이용해 원하는 항목을 선택하세요. 검색 목록이 나타납니다. 리모컨을 이용해 b 검색하기를 선택하면 이전 검색 화면으로 돌아갑니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 50 2012-09-04 9:24:1051 4. 고급 기능 ● { 방송 글감 미투데이 창이 나타나며 이 기능을 통해 방송과 관련된 실시간 핫 이슈를 볼 수 있습니다. ▼ 방송 글감에서 컬러 버튼 사용하기 ● a 핫 이슈 더 보기 미투데이 창이 확장됩니다. 리모컨을 이용해 실시간 방송 글 목록을 확인할 수 있습니다. ● E 글 상세보기 미투데이 위젯이 실행됩니다. 미투데이 위젯이 설치되어 있지 않다면 설치할 것인지를 묻는 메시지 창이 나타납니다. 미투데이에 대한 자세한 사항은 Samsung Apps에서 확인하세요. ● R 복귀 이전 화면으로 돌아갑니다. ● T 부가 기능 북마크 관리: 주간 인기 북마크와 나의 북마크를 관리할 수 있습니다. 연관정보 카테고리 설정: 리모컨을 이용해 원하는 카테고리를 선택할 수 있습니다. 선택된 카테고리에는 c 표시가 나타납니다. 자동 실행 설정: TV가 켜질 때, 스마트 팁이 자동 실행되도록 설정하거나 해제합니다. ● E 상세보기 제공되는 키워드에 대한 정보를 자세히 확인할 수 있습니다. 상세보기를 한 번 더 선택하면 네이버 검색 목록이 나타납니다. 키워드가 제공될 때만 메뉴 바에 나타납니다. 제공되는 다수의 키워드를 리모컨을 이용해 선택할 수 있습니다. - } 북마크: 제공되는 키워드를 나의 북마크에 저장합니다. 북마크는 상세보기를 선택했을 때에만, 메뉴 바에 나타납니다. ● R 복귀 스마트 팁 메뉴 바를 최소화합니다. 복귀를 한 번 더 선택하면, 스마트팁을 종료할 것인지를 묻는 메시지 창이 나타납니다. 예 또는 아니오를 선택하세요. 네이버 검색 목록에서 컬러 버튼 사용하기 리모컨을 이용해 카테고리 별 검색 목록을 확인할 수 있습니다. ● b 검색하기 검색어 입력 창으로 이동합니다. 숫자 키패드 화면이 나타납니다. 다른 검색어를 입력할 수 있습니다. ● } 동시화면 동시화면을 설정하거나 해제합니다. 현재 시청 중인 방송이 나오며, 리모컨을 이용해 채널을 변경할 수 있습니다. ● R 복귀 네이버 검색 목록을 종료하고 네이버 검색 화면이 나타납니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 51 2012-09-04 9:24:1152 패밀리 스토리 ™ → 패밀리 스토리 패밀리 스토리 기능을 통해 가족과 함께 사진과 메시지, 이벤트 등을 함께 공유할 수 있습니다. 애플리케이션의 버전에 따라, 사용 방법은 달라질 수 있습니다. 이러한 경우, 화면에 나타나는 지침을 따르세요. ● 그룹 생성 가족 구성원 중 패밀리 스토리를 가장 처음 시작하는 사용자는 그룹을 생성하고 구성원을 초대할 수 있습니다. ● 멤버 초대 그룹을 생성한 후에, 가족의 사진과 이벤트를 함께 공유하기 위해, 가족 구성원을 초대할 수 있습니다. ● 그룹 가입 가족 구성원으로부터 패밀리 스토리 서비스에 초대를 받았다면, 그룹 가입을 선택하여 참여할 수 있습니다. 패밀리 그룹 생성하기 1 스마트 허브 화면에서 패밀리 스토리를 선택하세요. 2 그룹 생성을 선택하세요. 그룹생성과 초대 팝업 창이 나타납니다. 3 확인을 선택하세요. 패밀리 스토리 이용 약관이 나타납니다. 약관을 읽어보고 동의를 선택하세요. 패밀리 스토리를 이용하려면 이용 약관에 동의해야 합니다. 4 그룹 이름, 본인 이름, 본인 전화번호(-없이)를 리모컨으로 입력하세요. ■ 그룹 이미지나 사진을 등록하려면 이미지 박스를 선택하세요. TV와 연결된 기기 (예 : USB)에 저장된 사진 파일을 등록할 수 있습니다. ■ "*" 표시 항목은 필수 입력 항목입니다. 5 완료를 선택하세요. 그룹 생성이 완료됩니다. 다른 멤버를 그룹에 초대하려면 멤버 초대를 선택하세요. 패밀리 스토리로 이동하려면, 패밀리 스토리로 이동을 선택하세요. 멤버 초대를 선택했다면, 아래의 "구성원 초대하기" 4단계 과정부터 시작하세요. 구성원 초대하기 1 패밀리 스토리 그룹 화면에서 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행한 후 멤버 리스트를 선택하세요. 멤버 리스트가 화면에 나타납니다. 2 멤버 초대를 선택하세요. 초대 팝업 창이 나타납니다. 3 확인을 선택하세요. 멤버 초대 화면이 나타납니다. 4 “멤버에게 남길 메시지를 입력하세요.”를 선택하세요. 키패드 화면이 나타납니다. 5 리모컨을 이용해 멤버의 이름을 입력한 뒤에 완료를 선택하세요. 6 전화번호 혹은 삼성 계정 ID를 선택하세요. 7 리모컨을 이용해 멤버의 전화번호 혹은 삼성 계정 ID를 입력한 뒤에 완료를 선택하세요. 구성원을 더 추가하려면 멤버 추가를 선택하고 4~7 단계를 반복해서 실행하세요. 8 새로운 구성원 초대가 완료되었으면, 완료를 선택하세요. 멤버 초대 완료 화면이 나타납니다. 9 전화 번호를 이용해 구성원을 초대하려면, 4자리의 인증 번호를 생성해서 구성원에게 보내줍니다. 삼성 계정을 이용해 구성원을 초대하면, 이메일을 통해 초대장을 발송합니다. 완료하려면 확인을 선택하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 52 2012-09-04 9:24:1153 4. 고급 기능 초대 받은 코드를 이용해서 그룹에 참여하기 1 패밀리 스토리를 시작하고, 이용 약관에 동의합니다. 2 초대 유형에 대해 묻는 메시지가 나타납니다. 휴대폰을 통해 초대 받았다면, 인증번호를 선택하고, 삼성 계정을 통해 초대 받았다면 삼성 계정을 선택하세요. 3 삼성 계정을 선택했다면, 사용자의 패밀리 그룹으로부터 온 초대 목록이 나타납니다. 수락을 선택하세요. 초대된 그룹에 참여를 원치 않으면 차단을 선택하세요. 4 인증번호를 선택했다면, 리모컨을 통해 휴대 전화번호를 입력하세요. 완료를 선택하세요. 사용자의 패밀리 그룹으로부터 온 초대 목록이 나타납니다. 수락을 선택하세요. 초대된 그룹에 참여를 원치 않으면 차단을 선택하세요. 4자리의 인증 번호를 입력하고 완료를 선택하세요. 5 확인을 선택하세요. 패밀리 그룹에 참여가 완료됩니다. 피트니스 ™ → 피트니스 스마트 허브에서 제공되는 피트니스는 운동에 관련된 애플리케이션으로 당신의 건강을 관리해줍니다. ■ 피트니스를 사용하기 위해서는 스마트 허브에 로그인해야 합니다. ■ 애플리케이션의 버전에 따라, 사용 방법은 달라질 수 있습니다. 이러한 경우, 화면에 나타나는 지침을 따르세요. 운동을 시작하기 전에... ■ 운동을 시작하기 전에 워밍업을 하거나 스트레칭을 해 주세요. ■ 피곤, 통증, 현기증, 숨이 차는 등의 증상이 생기면 운동을 즉시 중지하세요. 프로필 생성하기 피트니스를 처음 시작하면 프로필을 생성해야 합니다. 피트니스 화면에서 프로필을 생성하세요. 피트니스 화면에서 프로필 만들기를 선택하세요. 팝업 메시지가 나타나면 프로필 만들기를 시작하세요. 1 이름: 이름과 성을 선택하세요. 키패드 화면이 나타나면 리모컨을 이용해 이름과 성을 입력하세요. 2 성별: 성별을 선택하세요. 3 생년월일: 생년월일을 입력합니다. 이 정보는 사용자에게 맞춤 서비스를 제공하는 데 이용됩니다. 4 단위: 원하는 단위를 선택하세요. 선택된 단위는 피트니스 전체에 적용됩니다. 5 키: 키를 입력하세요. 사용자의 체질량지수 (BMI - Body Mass Index)를 계산하는데 이용됩니다. 6 몸무게: 체중을 입력합니다. 사용자의 체질량지수 (BMI - Body Mass Index)를 계산하는 데 이용됩니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 53 2012-09-04 9:24:1254 7 완료: 프로필 생성이 완료됩니다. 화면에 프로필정보와 체질량지수가 표시됩니다. 피트니스를 시작하려면 피트니스 즐기기를 선택하세요. 카테고리 별로 피트니스 이용하기 ● 운동 운동 목표, 현재 상태와 권장 내용에 대한 정보를 제공합니다. ● 나의 기록 기본 신체 프로필과 이전에 했던 운동에 대한 정보를 제공합니다. 키즈 ™ → 키즈 스마트 허브에서 제공되며, 쉽고 빠르게 자녀 또는 교육에 관련된 애플리케이션이나 콘텐츠를 이용할 수 있습니다. 또한 사용자(부모)가 자녀를 지도하는 데 도움을 줍니다. 애플리케이션의 버전에 따라, 사용 방법은 달라질 수 있습니다. 이러한 경우, 화면에 나타나는 지침을 따르세요. 카테고리 별 키즈 이용하기 ● 키즈홈 추천 콘텐츠 및 애플리케이션을 보여줍니다. 애플리케이션이나 콘텐츠를 선택하면 바로 실행됩니다. ■ 콘텐츠 목록은 최대 40개까지입니다. ■ 콘텐츠 목록을 편집할 수 있습니다. 자세한 내용은 “내 콘텐츠”을 참조하세요. ■ 대부분의 콘텐츠는 Samsung Apps에서 다운로드 받을 수 있습니다. 화면의 지침을 따라주세요. 다운로드가 완료되면 키즈 애플리케이션이 다시 나타날 때까지 복귀R 버튼을 반복해서 누르세요. 콘텐츠나 애플리케이션을 선택하여 시작하세요. ● 스티커 북 자녀가 받은 스티커를 수집한 스티커 북을 보여줍니다. 또한 패밀리 스토리에서 공유할 수 있습니다. ▼ 아래의 방법을 통해 자녀에게 스티커를 줄 수 있습니다. - 부모님을 통해: 부모방 메뉴에서 스티커 선물하기를 이용해서 스티커를 선물합니다. - 자동으로: 콘텐츠를 시청하면 스티커를 줍니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 54 2012-09-04 9:24:1255 4. 고급 기능 ▼ 스티커 북 생성하기 1 새 스티커북 만들기를 선택하세요. 새 스티커북 만들기 화면이 나타납니다. 2 스티커 북의 이름을 리모컨으로 입력하세요. 입력이 완료되면 다음을 선택하세요. 3 스티커 북의 색을 선택하세요. 완료되면 다음을 선택하세요. 4 스티커 북 생성하기를 확인하세요. 이름을 변경하려면 편집을 선택하세요. 색을 바꾸려면 뒤로를 선택하세요. 5 완료를 선택하세요. 새로운 스티커 북이 생성됩니다. ■ 새로운 스티커 북을 최대 10개까지 만들 수 있습니다. ■ 새 스티커에서 새로운 스티커를 확인할 수 있습니다. 최근에 받은 스티커는 10개까지만 저장할 수 있습니다. ● 골라보기 자녀, 교육에 관한 애플리케이션 목록과 모든 콘텐츠 목록을 보여줍니다. 선택한 애플리케이션이나 콘텐츠가 설치되지 않았으면 해당 애플리케이션 또는 콘텐츠를 Samsung Apps에서 다운로드할 수 있는 화면으로 이동합니다. ▼ 골라보기 이용하기 1 골라보기 화면에서 원하는 문자를 선택하세요. 선택된 문자가 화면에 나타납니다. 2 재생하려는 콘텐츠를 선택하세요. - 동영상: 해당 문자의 동영상을 표시합니다. - 게임: 해당 문자의 게임을 표시합니다. - 이야기: 해당 문자의 책을 표시합니다. 3 선택된 콘텐츠의 세부정보 화면이 나타납니다. 콘텐츠를 재생할 수 있으며, 패밀리 스토리에서 공유하고 내 콘텐츠에 추가할 수 있으며, 내용에 등급을 제공합니다. 구입한 콘텐츠를 재생할 수 있습니다. 구매하지 않은 콘텐츠는 Samsung Apps을 통해 구매할 수 있습니다. ● 부모방 키즈홈을 편집하여 자녀에게 스티커를 주고, 사용 시간을 확인합니다. 또한, 알람을 설정할 수 있습니다. 내 콘텐츠 키즈홈에서 콘텐츠를 추가하거나 삭제할 수 있습니다. 추가된 콘텐츠만 키즈홈에 표시됩니다. ▼ 키즈홈에서 콘텐츠 추가, 삭제하기 1 부모방 화면에서 내 콘텐츠를 선택하세요. 내 콘텐츠 화면이 나타납니다. 내 콘텐츠는 골라보기를 통해서 추가한 콘텐츠를 포함합니다. 2 추가 또는 삭제하려는 콘텐츠를 선택하세요. 메시지 창이 나타납니다. 3 예를 선택하세요. 4 선택된 콘텐츠가 추가되거나 삭제됩니다. 스티커 선물하기 자녀가 착한 일을 했을 때 스티커를 줄 수 있습니다. ▼ 스티커 선물하기 1 부모방 화면에서 스티커 선물하기를 선택하세요. 스티커 선물하기 화면이 나타납니다. 2 스티커를 선택하세요. 메시지 창이 나타납니다. 3 예를 선택하세요. 4 스티커 북을 선택하고, 선물하기를 선택하세요. 스티커 북을 확인하려면 지금 확인을 선택하세요. 선택된 스티커 북에서 스티커를 확인할 수 있습니다. 5 자녀에게 선택한 스티커를 줍니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 55 2012-09-04 9:24:1356 시청기록 그래프를 통해 자녀의 애플리케이션 사용 시간을 확인할 수 있습니다. 또한 자녀의 콘텐츠 별 사용 시간을 확인할 수 있습니다. 날짜 또는 콘텐츠의 제목을 변경하세요. 알람 설정 자녀의 시청 시간을 설정할 수 있습니다. 시간이 종료되면 알람 창이 나타납니다. ▼ 시청 시간 설정하기 1 부모방 화면에서 알람 설정을 선택하세요.알람 설정 화면이 나타납니다. 2 타이머를 선택하세요. 3 원하는 시간을 선택하면, 알람이 설정됩니다. 웹브라우저 ™ → 웹브라우저 스마트 허브에서 제공되는 기능으로 TV에서 인터넷을 검색할 수 있습니다. 1 스마트 허브 화면에서 웹브라우저를 선택하세요. 웹브라우저 화면이 나타납니다. 2 컴퓨터에서와 같은 방법으로 인터넷을 검색합니다. 애플리케이션의 버전에 따라, 사용 방법은 달라질 수 있습니다. 이러한 경우, 화면에 나타나는 지침을 따르세요. 웹브라우저에서 컬러 버튼 사용하기 ● b 메뉴 바 화면 위의 제어판을 보이거나 숨깁니다. ● { 링크 컨트롤 / 포인터 컨트롤 링크 컨트롤 모드 또는 포인터 컨트롤 모드로 전환합니다. 포인터 컨트롤 모드에서는 컴퓨터를 사용하는 방식으로 포인터를 움직여 항목을 선택할 수 있습니다. 링크 컨트롤 모드에서는 링크와 링크 사이를 화면에 나타난 파란색 사각형을 리모컨의 방향키를 눌러서 움직일 수 있습니다. TV에 연결된 마우스가 있다면 포인터 컨트롤 모드를 사용하세요. 리모컨을 이용한다면, 링크 컨트롤 모드를 사용하세요. ■ 포인터 컨트롤 모드를 선택했다면, 간편 메뉴에서 리모컨을 이용해 항목을 선택할 수 없습니다. ■ 포인터 컨트롤 모드에서 리모컨의 방향키를 이용해 포인터를 움직일 수 있습니다. ● } 동시 화면 동시 화면을 켜거나 끕니다. 동시 화면 모드를 켜면 TV를 시청하면서 웹브라우저를 사용할 수 있습니다. ● π / µ 위 / 아래로 이동 페이지를 위, 아래로 스크롤 합니다. 커서가 링크 컨트롤로 설정되었을 때, 가능합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 56 2012-09-04 9:24:1357 4. 고급 기능 ● T 간편 메뉴 간편 메뉴를 표시합니다. 메뉴 바: 화면 위의 제어판을 보이거나 숨깁니다. 링크 컨트롤 / 포인터 컨트롤: 커서를 링크 컨트롤 모드 또는 포인터 컨트롤 모드로 전환합니다. 동시 화면: 동시 화면을 켜거나 끕니다. PIP 설정: 동시 화면의 위치를 설정하고 주 화면( 웹브라우저) 또는 부 화면(동시 화면 창)의 음향을 선택합니다. 즐겨찾기에 추가: 현재 페이지를 즐겨찾기에 추가합니다. ● R 복귀 웹브라우저를 종료합니다. 웹브라우저에서 메뉴 바 이용하기 웹브라우저 화면 상단에 여러 가지 아이콘이 있습니다. 이 아이콘으로 웹브라우저를 더 쉽게 사용할 수 있습니다. 화면 가장 왼쪽에 위치한 아이콘을 실행하려면 아래의 설명을 참고하세요. ● 뒤로 이전 페이지로 이동합니다. 저장된 이전 웹 페이지가 없으면 이동할 수 없습니다. ● 앞으로 URL이 저장되어 있을 때 다음 웹 페이지로 이동합니다. 저장된 페이지가 없으면 이동할 수 없습니다. ● 새로 고침 / 중지 현재 페이지를 새로 고침 하거나 현재 페이지 로딩을 정지합니다. ● 홈페이지 홈페이지로 지정한 인터넷 사이트로 이동합니다. ● 줌 50%, 75%, 100%, 125%, 150%, 200%, 300%, 화면에 맞추기 중, 원하는 화면의 크기를 선택할 수 있습니다. ● 즐겨찾기 즐겨찾기 화면을 표시합니다. 현재 페이지나 즐겨 찾는 페이지를 즐겨찾기 목록에 설정할 수 있습니다. 날짜, 이름 또는 방문 빈도 순 별로 분류할 수 있습니다. 분류를 설정하려면 오른쪽 상단의 정렬을 선택하세요. 주소 입력을 선택하면, 리모컨을 이용해 새로운 URL 주소를 입력할 수 있습니다. 페이지를 선택하면 옵션 팝업 창이 오른쪽에 나타납니다. 옵션 팝업 창에서 선택된 페이지를 편집하거나 즐겨찾기 목록에서 선택된 페이지를 삭제할 수 있습니다. ▼ 즐겨찾기에서 간편 메뉴 사용하기 ● 전체 삭제 즐겨찾기의 모든 목록을 삭제합니다. 즐겨찾기가 있을 때만 사용할 수 있습니다. ● 즐겨찾기에 추가 현재 페이지를 즐겨찾기로 설정합니다. ● 즐겨찾기 불러오기 TV에 연결된 USB 기기에서 즐겨찾기 파일을 가져올 수 있습니다. ● 즐겨찾기 내보내기 즐겨찾기 파일을 TV에 연결된 USB 기기에 내보낼 수 있습니다. ● 방문기록 방문기록 화면을 표시합니다. 이전에 방문했던 웹 페이지를 선택할 수 있습니다. 이름, 날짜, 방문 빈도 순 별로 분류할 수 있습니다. 분류하려면 오른쪽 상단에 있는 정렬을 선택하세요. 주소 입력을 선택하면, 리모컨을 이용해 새로운 URL 주소를 입력할 수 있습니다. 페이지를 선택하면 옵션 팝업 창이 나타납니다. 옵션 팝업 창에서 선택된 페이지를 방문기록에서 지우거나 즐겨찾기에 추가할 수 있습니다. 모든 방문기록을 지우려면, 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하고, 전체 삭제를 선택하세요. ● URL 입력 현재 페이지의 URL을 보여줍니다. URL 항목을 선택하면 URL 팝업 창이 나타납니다. 리모컨을 이용해 새로운 URL을 직접 입력할 수 있습니다. ● 창 목록 열려있는 창의 목록이나 이미지를 보여줍니다.( 창 목록) 목록에 새로운 페이지를 열 수 있고(새창 열기), 목록에 있는 페이지를 선택하여 열어볼 수 있으며, 한 페이지 또는 모든 페이지를 종료시킬 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 57 2012-09-04 9:24:1458 창 목록에서 간편 메뉴 사용하기 ● 새창 열기 새 웹브라우저를 엽니다. 설정된 홈페이지가 나타납니다. ● 전체 창 닫기 현재 열려있는 창 목록을 닫습니다. 창 목록을 모두 닫으면 자동적으로 새로운 브라우저를 엽니다. 설정된 홈페이지가 열립니다. 웹브라우저 설정하기 커서를 화면의 상단으로 이동시키고, 옵션 아이콘을 선택하세요. ● 읽기도구 웹 페이지를 읽기 쉽게 하기 위해 기본 문장을 확대합니다. ● 승인 사이트 자녀들이 부적절한 웹 페이지에 접속하는 것을 제한합니다. 등록된 웹 사이트에만 접속할 수 있도록 하는 기능입니다. 승인 사이트에 접속할 때마다 비밀번호 입력 화면이 나타나게 됩니다. 승인 사이트 기능: 승인 사이트 기능을 켜거나 끕니다. 승인 사이트 비밀번호 변경: 비밀번호를 변경합니다. 현재 페이지 추가: 현재 보고 있는 웹 페이지를 승인 사이트 목록에 추가할 수 있습니다. 승인 사이트 관리: 승인 사이트 목록을 추가하기 위해 URL을 입력할 수 있고, 승인 사이트 목록 중 일부를 삭제할 수도 있습니다. 승인 사이트 목록에 아무것도 없는 상태에서 승인 사이트 기능을 켜면, 어떤 인터넷 사이트도 접속할 수 없습니다. ● 사생활 보호 기능 켜기 / 끄기 사생활 보호 기능을 설정하거나 해제합니다. 사생활 보호 기능이 설정됐다면, 방문한 사이트의 URL 기록을 저장하지 않습니다. 사생활 보호 설정을 하려면, 사생활 보호 기능 켜기를 선택하세요. 사생활 보호 기능이 실행 중인 경우, 화면 상단의 URL 주소 앞 부분에 "중지" 아이콘이 나타납니다. 사생활 보호 기능을 해제하려면, 사생활 보호 기능 끄기를 선택하세요. ● 동시 화면 설정 동시 화면 기능을 구성할 수 있습니다. 동시 화면 위치: 보조 화면의 위치를 선택합니다. 음향 선택: 동시화면이 실행 중인 경우, 주 화면이나 부 화면의 소리를 선택합니다. ● 웹브라우저 설정 웹브라우저의 설정을 구성할 수 있습니다. 홈 설정: 홈 페이지를 지정할 수 있습니다. - 즐겨찾는 사이트: 가장 많이 방문한 URL 주소를 홈 페이지로 지정합니다. - 현재 페이지: 현재 페이지를 홈 페이지로 지정합니다. - 즐겨찾기: 즐겨 찾기 된 URL 주소를 홈페이지로 지정합니다. - 주소 입력: 사용자가 홈페이지로 지정하길 원하는 URL 주소를 입력합니다. 팝업 차단: 팝업 차단 기능을 설정하거나 해제합니다. 광고 차단: 광고와 특정 URL 주소의 광고를 차단할 수 있습니다. - 광고 차단: 광고 차단 기능을 설정하거나 해제합니다. - 현재 페이지 차단: 현재 페이지를 차단 목록에 추가합니다. - 차단 리스트 관리: 광고를 차단할 특정 웹 사이트의 URL 주소를 직접 입력하여 추가하거나 삭제할 수 있습니다. 일반 설정: 사용자의 개인 정보를 삭제할 수 있습니다. - 방문 기록 삭제: 웹 사이트 히스토리를 삭제합니다. - 인터넷 사용 정보 삭제: 쿠키 파일 같은 인터넷 접속 정보를 삭제합니다. - 설정 초기화: 웹브라우저를 초기화합니다. - 메뉴 바 자동 숨기기: 메뉴 바의 자동 숨김 기능을 설정하거나 해제합니다. 인코딩: 웹 페이지의 인코딩 설정을 자동 또는 수동으로 설정할 수 있습니다. - 자동선택: 웹 페이지에 대한 인코딩을 자동으로 설정하거나 해제합니다. - 설정: 웹 페이지에 대한 인코딩 설정을 수동으로 설정합니다. 인코딩 형식을 목록에서 선택합니다. 포인터: 커서가 포인터 모드로 설정될 경우, 커서의 움직임 속도를 설정할 수 있습니다. - 포인터 속도: 포인터 속도를 선택합니다. 웹브라우저 정보: 웹브라우저의 버전 정보를 확인할 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 58 2012-09-04 9:24:1459 4. 고급 기능 Skype ™ → Skype Skype는 전세계 사람들과 쉽고 재미있게 연락을 주고 받을 수 있도록 개발된 소프트웨어입니다. Skype를 통해 언제 어디서나 안부를 전하고 즐거움을 공유할 수 있습니다. Skype를 양쪽 사용자 모두 무료로 이용할 수 있습니다. 전 세계 사람들과 연락을 나누세요! Skype 애플리케이션을 설치한 후에 MoIP를 연결하여 사용하세요. 삼성 Skype 카메라를 별도 구매해야 Skype 기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. ■ 자세한 내용은 인터넷 홈페이지 "http://www. samsung.com/sec"에서 Skype 사용설명서를 다운로드하여 확인하세요. ■ 애플리케이션의 버전에 따라, 사용 방법은 달라질 수 있습니다. 이러한 경우, 화면에 나타나는 지침을 따르세요. [법적 고지사항] 삼성 스마트 허브 콘텐츠 서비스를 지원하는 제품의 다양한 기능과 가용 콘텐츠의 제약 때문에, 특정 기능, 부가 기능, 서비스를 이용할 수 없는 기기나 지역이 있을 수 있습니다. 스마트 허브의 일부 기능을 이용하려면 별도로 판매되는 추가 주변 기기나 회원 가입비가 필요할 수 있습니다. 특정 기기 정보와 가용 콘텐츠에 관한 자세한 내용은 "http://www.samsung.com/sec"에서 확인하세요. 스마트 허브를 통한 서비스 및 콘텐츠 가용성은 예고 없이 수시로 변경될 수 있습니다. TV 애플리케이션으로 에어컨 이용하기 ™ → 삼성 스마트 에어컨 삼성 스마트 에어컨 애플리케이션을 통해 TV를 보면서 음성인식 기능으로 가정에 있는 에어컨을 조정할 수 있습니다. 애플리케이션의 버전에 따라, 사용 방법은 달라질 수 있습니다. 이러한 경우, 화면에 나타나는 지침을 따르세요. 에어컨 등록 네트워크를 통해 TV와 연결된 에어컨을 선택할 수 있습니다. 1 TV와 에어컨이 같은 공유기에 연결되어 있는지 확인하세요. 2 TV에 연결된 에어컨을 검색합니다. 3 새로운 가전기기 확인 팝업 창이 나타납니다. 예를 선택하여 에어컨을 등록합니다. 4 검색된 에어컨 목록에서 예를 선택하여 애플리케이션을 실행합니다. 5 삼성 스마트 에어컨 화면에서 사용 중인 제품을 선택하세요. 사용 중인 에어컨이 화면에 없으면 b 다시 검색을 선택하세요. 6 사용 중인 제품을 선택하면, 인증요청을 시작합니다. 에어컨의 전원을 끈 후, 확인을 선택하세요. 인증을 시작합니다. 7 인증 팝업 창이 나타납니다. 인증을 위해 에어컨의 전원을 켜세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 59 2012-09-04 9:24:1560 8 “인증이 완료되면 음성(스마트톡)으로 에어컨을 운전 하실 수 있습니다.”라는 메시지가 화면에 나타납니다. 화면에서 사용 중인 에어컨을 선택하세요. ■ 사용 중인 제품이 화면에 없으면 b 다시 검색을 선택하세요. ■ 에어컨의 연결을 해제하여 사용하지 않으려면, { 에어컨 연결해제를 선택하세요. ■ 이전 단계로 가려면 R 뒤로를 선택하세요. 에어컨 사용하기 TV 화면에서 음성 인식 기능으로 에어컨을 사용할 수 있습니다. 1 음성 인식 기능이 켜기로 설정되어 있는 상태에서 시작 명령어 (하이 티비 / 스마트 티비)로 음성 인식을 시작합니다. 2 "에어컨"이라고 명령하세요. 명령어가 나타납니다. 3 원하는 명령어를 말하세요. 에어컨이 작동합니다. 에어컨 등록 해제하기 에어컨 사용을 중지하려면, { 에어컨 연결해제를 선택하세요. AllShare Play ™ → AllShare Play USB 대용량 저장 장치(MSC) 또는 컴퓨터에 저장된 사진, 음악 또는 동영상 파일을 감상할 수 있습니다. AllShare Play을 처음 실행하면 AllShare를 통해 이용할 수 있는 기능 목록 창이 나타납니다. 기능을 확인한 후, 다시 표시 안 함 또는 닫기를 선택하세요. ■ USB의 콘텐츠를 보려면 USB 장치를 TV의 USB 단자에 연결해야 합니다. ■ USB HDD를 사용하려면 파워 어댑터가 있는 USB HDD를 권장합니다. USB 장치 연결하기 1 TV를 켜세요. 2 TV의 USB 단자에 사진, 음악 및 동영상 파일이 있는 USB를 연결하세요. 3 USB가 TV에 연결되면 "새 장치 연결됨" 이라는 메시지 창이 나타납니다. 동영상, 사진, 음악 중 재생하려는 콘텐츠를 선택하세요. 연결된 장치가 하나일 경우 자동으로 USB의 파일을 표시합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 60 2012-09-04 9:24:1561 4. 고급 기능 USB 장치 제거하기 ▼ 방법 1: TV/외부입력s 버튼 이용하기 1 리모컨의 TV/외부입력s 버튼을 누르세요. 2 원하는 USB 장치를 선택한 뒤에 리모컨의 간편메뉴T 버튼을 누르세요. 간편 메뉴가 화면에 나타납니다. 3 USB안전제거를 선택한 뒤에 USB 장치 연결이 해제될 때까지 기다리세요. USB 장치 연결이 해제됩니다. ▼ 방법 2: AllShare Play 화면에서 제거하기 1 AllShare Play 화면으로 이동하세요(™ → AllShare Play) 2 마이 리스트를 제외한 다른 항목을 선택하고 리모컨의 E 버튼을 누르세요. 3 제거하려는 USB 장치를 선택하고 리모컨의 간편메뉴T 버튼을 누르세요. 간편 메뉴가 화면에 나타납니다. 4 USB안전제거를 선택한 뒤에 USB 장치 연결이 해제될 때까지 기다리세요. USB 장치 연결이 해제됩니다. USB안전제거 기능을 사용하여USB를 제거하는 것을 권장합니다. USB를 이용하여 AllShare Play 기능을 사용하기 전 확인 사항 주의 사항 ● 장치를 TV에 연결하기 전에, 데이터가 손상되거나 손실되지 않도록 파일을 백업하세요. 삼성전자는 데이터 파일의 손상, 손실에 대해 절대 책임을 지지 않습니다. ● 전용 USB (HDD 5V 1A) 단자에 USB HDD 장치를 연결하세요. ● 로딩 중에는 USB 장치를 분리하지 마세요. ● USB 확장 케이블을 사용하면, USB 장치를 인식할 수 없거나 장치에 담긴 파일을 읽지 못할 수 있습니다. ● TV에 연결한 USB 장치를 인식할 수 없으면, 장치의 파일 목록이 손상되었거나 파일 목록의 파일을 재생할 수 없는 상태입니다. 이러한 경우, USB 장치를 컴퓨터에 연결해서 장치를 포맷하고 연결 상태를 확인하세요. ● 스마트 허브를 실행할 때 컴퓨터에서 삭제한 파일이 여전히 나타나면 컴퓨터의 “휴지통 비우기” 기능으로 파일을 완전히 삭제해 주세요. ● 2TB 보다 큰 USB HDD는 지원하지 않습니다. ▼ AllShare Play을 이용할 수 있는 장치 ● 유형에 따라 TV와 호환되지 않는 USB 디지털 카메라 및 오디오 장치가 있을 수 있습니다. ● AllShare Play 기능은 USB MSC (Mass Storage Class) 장치만 지원합니다. MSC 는 대용량 저장장치 클래스 대량 전용 전송 장치입니다. MSC 장치의 종류에는 썸 드라이브, 플래시 카드 리더기, USB HDD 등이 있습니다. (USB 허브는 지원하지 않습니다.) 이러한 장치는 TV의 USB 단자에 직접 연결해야 합니다. ● PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol) 장치를 두 개 이상 연결한 경우에는 한 번에 하나만 사용할 수 있습니다. ● MSC 장치를 두 개 이상 연결한 경우, 일부 장치를 인식하지 못할 수 있습니다. 높은 전력(500mA 또는 5V)이 필요한 USB 장치는 지원하지 않을 수 있습니다. ● USB 장치를 연결하거나 사용할 때, 과열 경고 메시지가 표시되면, 장치를 인식하지 못하거나 장치가 제대로 작동하지 않을 수 있습니다. ● 화면 보호 시간에서 설정한 시간 동안 TV에 입력되는 신호가 없으면 화면 보호기가 실행됩니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 61 2012-09-04 9:24:1662 ● 일부 외장 하드 디스크 드라이브의 절전 모드는 TV 에 연결하면 자동으로 해제될 수 있습니다. ▼ 파일 시스템 및 형식 ● USB 기능이 불량 멀티미디어 파일로 인해 제대로 작동하지 않을 수 있습니다. ● MTP(Media Transfer Protocol)는 지원하지 않습니다. ● 파일 시스템은 FAT16, FAT32, NTFS를 지원합니다. ● AllShare Play 기능은 순차적 JPEG 형식 (Sequential JPEG format)을 지원합니다. 점진적 JPEG 형식(Progressive jpeg format) 은 지원하지 않습니다. ● 이미지 해상도가 높을수록 화면에 표시될 때까지 걸리는 시간이 길어집니다. ● 최대 JPEG 지원 해상도는 15360x8640 화소입니다. ● 지원하지 않거나 손상된 파일에는 "지원되지 않는 파일형식입니다."라는 메시지가 표시됩니다. ● 폴더 보기로 파일을 정렬하면 폴더마다 1000개까지 파일을 표시할 수 있습니다. ● USB 장치에 파일과 폴더가 8000여개 이상 있다면, 일부 파일 및 폴더는 열리지 않을 수 있습니다. ● 유료 사이트에서 다운로드한 DRM 적용 MP3 파일은 재생할 수 없습니다. DRM(Digital Rights Management: 디지털 저작권 관리)이란 콘텐츠 제공업체의 권한 및 이익 보호, 불법 콘텐츠 복제 방지, 청구 및 정산 관리 등을 포함하여, 통합적이며 종합적인 방식으로 콘텐츠의 생성, 배포, 관리를 지원하는 기술입니다. 네트워크 통해 컴퓨터와 연결하기 AllShare Play 모드에서 네트워크 연결을 통해 PC 에 저장된 사진, 음악, 동영상을 재생할 수 있습니다. ■ 네트워크 구성 방법에 대한 자세한 내용은 “유, 무선 네트워크 연결하기”를 참고하세요. ■ 컴퓨터에 있는 콘텐츠를 보려면 TV와 컴퓨터를 동일한 무선 공유기에 연결하고 “http://www. samsung.com/sec”를 방문하여 AllShare PC 소프트웨어를 다운로드 하세요. ■ TV와 컴퓨터가 동일한 네트워크 서브넷에 접속되어 있어야 합니다. IP 주소는 점으로 구분된 4개의 부분으로 구성됩니다. (IP 주소 111.222.333.444) 같은 서브넷에 접속된 TV와 컴퓨터의 IP 주소는 앞의 세 부분이 동일하며 마지막 부분만 다릅니다. (111.222.333.***) 네트워크를 통해 컴퓨터와 연결할 때 AllShare Play 에서 지원하지 않는 기능은 다음과 같습니다. ■ 배경 음악 켜기 및 배경 음악 설정 기능 ■ 사진, 음악 또는 동영상 폴더에 기본 설정으로 파일 정렬 - 동영상 재생 중 † 또는 … 기능 ■ DivX DRM은 지원하지 않습니다. ■ AllShare PC 소프트웨어는 윈도우즈 방화벽 프로그램의 허가를 받아야 합니다. ■ 네트워크 연결을 통해 AllShare Play 모드를 사용할 때에는 제공된 서버에 따라 다음과 같은 기능이 다릅니다. - 정렬 방법이 다를 수 있습니다. - 장면 탐색 기능을 지원하지 않을 수 있습니다. - 재시작 기능은 여러 사람이 사용할 수 없습니다. ( 재시작 기능은 최근 사용자가 마지막으로 재생을 중지한 지점만을 기억합니다.) - 탐색 기능은 콘텐츠 정보에 따라 작동하지 않을 수 있습니다. ■ 네트워크 연결을 통해 동영상 콘텐츠를 재생하면, 파일이 원활하게 재생되지 않을 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 62 2012-09-04 9:24:1663 4. 고급 기능 AllShare Play 이용하기 AllShare Play에서는 다음과 같은 서비스를 사용할 수 있습니다. 웹 스토리지 (Web storage), 소셜 서비스는 삼성 계정으로 로그인 후 사용할 수 있습니다. AllShare Play에서 다음과 같은 3가지 방법으로 다양한 콘텐츠를 재생할 수 있습니다. - USB 장치 이용하기: USB 장치에 있는 동영상, 음악, 사진 등을 재생할 수 있습니다. - DLNA 또는 웹 스토리지 이용하기: 홈 네트워크에 연결된 장치와 웹 스토리지 등에 있는 콘텐츠를 재생할 수 있습니다. - 소셜 서비스 이용하기: 패밀리 스토리, 페이스북 또는 피카사와 같은 소셜 서비스의 일부 콘텐츠를 즐길 수 있습니다. ■ 페이스북이나 피카사를 사용하려면, 먼저 스마트 허브에 해당 애플리케이션이 설치되어 있어야 합니다. ■ SugarSync, 페이스북 또는 피카사를 이용하려면, 먼저 해당 애플리케이션에 로그인해야합니다. 스마트 허브에서 해당 애플리케이션의 계정을 삼성 계정에 등록할 수 있습니다. 삼성 계정에 해당 애플리케이션 계정을 등록하려면 스마트 허브의 “스마트 허브 설정하기 (고급 설정 → 스마트 허브 화면 설정하기 → 스마트 허브 설정하기)”를 참조하세요. ■ 패밀리 스토리를 이용하려면 삼성 계정에 로그인해야 합니다. 최소 하나 이상의 그룹에 가입이 되어 있어야만 패밀리 스토리를 이용할 수 있습니다. ■ TV에 연결된 다른 장치에 원하는 콘텐츠를 전송할 수 있습니다. 콘텐츠 형식 지원 가능한 전송 장치 USB DLNA, SugarSync, 패밀리 스토리, 피카사, 페이스 북 DLNA USB SugarSync USB 패밀리 스토리 USB 피카사 USB 페이스북 USB 모바일 장치 USB 마이 리스트 (AllShare Play) ™ → AllShare Play → 마이 리스트 사용하고자 하는 콘텐츠를 쉽고 빠르게 이용할 수 있습니다. ● 최근 재생목록 최근에 재생했던 동영상, 사진 또는 음악파일을 표시합니다. 다시 재생하고 싶은 파일이 있을 때 이용하세요. ● 최근 신규목록 컴퓨터 또는 USB 장치에 저장된 파일 중 새롭게 업데이트 된 동영상, 사진이나 음악파일을 보여줍니다. 재생하려는 업데이트 파일이 있을 때 이용하세요. ● 재생 목록 USB 장치나 컴퓨터에 저장된 재생 목록 파일을 보여줍니다. 재생 목록을 재생하려면 재생 목록을 선택하세요. 선택된 재생목록이 바로 재생됩니다. 재생 목록 만들기 1 동영상, 사진, 음악 파일 목록에서 원하는 파일을 선택하세요. 2 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 재생 목록에 추가를 선택하세요. 3 추가하려는 파일을 선택하세요. c 마크가 나타납니다. 4 파일을 더 추가하려면 3단계를 실행하세요. ■ 목록에서 모든 파일을 선택하려면 전체 선택을 선택하세요. ■ 선택을 취소하려면, 선택한 파일을 한번 더 선택하세요. 5 선택을 완료하면, 추가를 선택하세요. 재생 목록에 추가 화면이 나타납니다. 6 새로 만들기를 선택하세요. 새로운 재생 목록 생성 화면이 나타납니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 63 2012-09-04 9:24:1764 7 리모컨을 이용해 재생목록의 이름을 입력하세요. 8 입력한 후 완료를 선택하면 새로운 재생목록이 만들어집니다. ▼ 재생 목록에 파일 추가하기 1 “재생 목록 만들기”의 1~4단계를 실행하세요. 2 추가할 파일을 선택하세요. 선택된 파일이 추가됩니다. ▼ 재생 목록에서 하나 이상의 파일 삭제하기 1 수정하려는 재생 목록을 선택하세요. 2 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 재생목록 수정을 선택하세요. 재생목록 수정 화면이 나타납니다. 3 삭제하려는 파일을 선택하세요. 선택한 파일에 c 마크가 나타납니다. 4 파일을 더 삭제하려면 3단계를 다시 실행하세요. 목록의 모든 파일을 선택하려면 전체 선택을 선택하세요. 선택을 취소하려면 파일을 다시 선택하세요. 5 제거를 선택하면 팝업 창이 나타납니다. 6 예를 선택하면 선택된 파일이 재생목록에서 삭제됩니다. 동영상 (AllShare Play) ™ → AllShare Play → 동영상 USB 장치 그리고(또는) 컴퓨터에 저장된 동영상 파일을 재생합니다. 자막과 코덱 형식에 대한 더 자세한 정보는 기타 정보 설명의 “지원 자막 및 AllShare Play 형식”을 참조하세요. ▼ 동영상 재생하기 1 AllShare Play 화면에서 동영상을 선택하세요. 2 재생하려는 기기를 선택하세요. 3 목록에서 재생하려는 동영상을 선택하세요. ■ 재생을 멈추면 다음 재생 시 멈춘 지점부터 재생됩니다. ■ 파일 이름이 재생시간과 함께 상단에 나타납니다. ■ 동영상 시간 정보를 알 수 없는 경우, 재생 시간 및 진행 표시줄이 표시되지 않습니다. ■ 재생 중에 되감기 및 빨리 감기 버튼을 3초 이상 누르면, 다음 동영상으로 이동할 수 있습니다. ▼ 동영상 재생 조정 버튼 ● † / … 리모컨을 이용해 † 또는 …를 선택하세요. 재생속도가 변경됩니다. († 1 / † 2 / † 3 / … 1 / … 2 / … 3) ● l r 현재 위치에서 이전 또는 이후로 이동합니다. ● ∑ 장면을 잠시 멈춥니다. - 일시 정지 모드에서 …를 선택하세요. …를 선택할 때마다 재생 속도가 „ 1/8 / „ 1/4 / „ 1/2 로 감소합니다. - 일시 정지 모드에서 ∑를 선택하세요. ∑를 선택할 때마다 새로운 프레임이 나타납니다. ■ 재생 속도를 보통으로 설정하려면 r를 선택하세요. ■ 일시 정지 모드에서는 음향이 재생되지 않습니다. ■ 일시 정지 모드에서는 재생 방향으로만 작동합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 64 2012-09-04 9:24:1765 4. 고급 기능 동영상에서 간편 메뉴 사용하기 ▼ 파일 목록 화면에서 다음의 기능을 설정할 수 있습니다. ● 보기 원하는 정렬 기준을 선택하여 목록을 정렬할 수 있습니다. ● 선택 재생 파일 목록에서 원하는 동영상 파일을 선택하여 재생할 수 있습니다. ● 보내기 동영상 파일을 웹 스토리지(Web storage) 또는 다른 장치로 보낼 수 있습니다. 보내기 기능을 이용하려면, 스마트 허브에 로그인이 되어 있어야 합니다. ● 로그인 / 로그아웃 사용자의 스마트 허브 계정에 로그인 또는 로그아웃 할 수 있습니다. ● 재생 목록에 추가 재생 목록을 만듭니다. 재생목록을 이용하면 듣고 싶은 동영상을 빠르고 간단하게 들을 수 있습니다. ● 재생 목록으로 이동 재생 목록 화면으로 이동합니다. ● 상세 정보 선택된 파일에 대한 세부정보를 보여줍니다. ▼ 재생 중 다음의 기능을 설정할 수 있습니다. ● 동영상 목록으로 이동 동영상 목록 화면으로 이동합니다. ● 처음부터 재생 동영상을 처음부터 다시 재생합니다. 동영상을 처음부터 재생하는 경우 메뉴가 활성화되지 않습니다. ● 장면 탐색 동영상이 재생되는 동안 사용자가 선택한 장면에서 시작하거나 감상하기 위해 장면 탐색 기능을 이용할 수 있습니다. 인덱스 정보가 손상되거나 지원되지 않는 경우 장면 탐색 기능을 사용할 수 없습니다. ● 타이틀 검색 다른 제목의 동영상으로 이동합니다. ● 시간 검색 리모컨을 이용해 재생 시간을 입력하거나 원하는 동영상을 검색합니다. ● 반복 모드 동영상 파일을 반복하여 재생할 수 있습니다. ● 화면 크기 화면 크기를 원하는 만큼 조정할 수 있습니다. ● 화면 모드 화면 모드를 변경할 수 있습니다. ● 음향 모드 음향 모드를 변경할 수 있습니다. ● 음성 언어 원하는 언어로 동영상을 감상할 수 있습니다. 여러 오디오 포맷을 지원하는 스트림형식의 파일을 재생할 때만 사용할 수 있습니다. ● 자막 자막을 끄거나 켤 수 있습니다. 자막 파일이 여러 언어를 지원할 경우, 자막 언어를 선택할 수 있습니다. ■ 동영상에 개별 자막 파일이 있는 경우에만 자막을 설정 할 수 있습니다. ■ 지원되는 자막 형식은 “기타 기능의 지원 자막 및 AllShare Play 형식” 부분을 참조하세요. ● 자막 설정 자막의 옵션을 설정합니다. ■ 동영상에 개별 자막 파일이 있는 경우에만 자막을 설정 할 수 있습니다. ■ 지원되는 자막 형식은 “기타 기능의 지원 자막 및 AllShare Play 형식” 부분을 참조하세요. ● 상세 정보 선택한 파일의 세부 정보를 보여줍니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 65 2012-09-04 9:24:1866 파일 목록 정렬하기 USB 기기가 아닌 웹 스토리지(Web storage)로 AllShare Play 기능을 사용할 때 보기 기능은 지원되지 않습니다. 1 파일 목록에서 파일을 정렬하려면 리모컨을 이용해 }를 선택하세요. 보기 화면이 나타납니다. 2 원하는 정렬 기준을 선택하세요. ● 폴더 보기 전체 폴더를 보여줍니다. 폴더를 선택하면 파일 이름과 썸네일을 보여줍니다. ● 타이틀 기호 / 숫자 / 알파벳 순서로 파일의 타이틀을 분류하고 표시합니다. ● 최근 순 최근 순으로 파일을 정렬하여 보여줍니다. ● 오래된 순 오래된 순으로 파일을 정렬하여 보여줍니다. 동영상 파일 보내기 동영상 파일을 웹 스토리지(Web storage) 또는 다른 기기에 보낼 수 있습니다. 보내기 기능을 이용하려면, 스마트 허브에 로그인이 되어 있어야 합니다. 1 파일 목록에서 동영상 파일을 보내려면 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행한 후에 보내기를 선택하세요. 2 보내고자 하는 동영상 파일을 선택하세요. c 마크가 나타납니다. 3 동영상 파일을 추가로 선택하려면 2단계를 다시 실행하세요. ■ 목록에 있는 모든 파일을 선택하려면, 전체 선택을 선택하세요. ■ 선택을 취소하려면, 선택한 파일을 한번 더 선택하세요. 4 선택이 완료되면, 보내기를 선택하세요. 보내기 화면이 나타납니다. 5 보내려는 기기를 선택한 후, 보내기를 선택하세요. 6 화면의 지시에 따르세요. 사진 (AllShare Play) ™ → AllShare Play → 사진 사진 보기 (또는 슬라이드 쇼) 지원되는 이미지 해상도 및 파일 형식에 대한 자세한 내용은 기타 기능 부분의 "지원 자막 및 AllShare Play 형식"을 참고하세요. 1 AllShare Play 화면에서 사진을 선택하세요. 2 재생하려는 기기를 선택하세요. 3 파일 목록에서 원하는 사진 파일을 선택하세요. 4 리모컨으로 ∂를 선택하세요. ■ 수동으로 사진을 바꾸려면 l 또는 r 버튼을 누르세요. ■ 슬라이드 쇼를 하는 동안 목록에 있는 모든 파일들이 순서대로 보여지며 선택한 파일부터 슬라이드 쇼를 시작합니다. ■ 슬라이드 쇼 또는 사진 파일을 보는 동안 같은 기기에 음악 파일이 있으면 배경 음악을 넣을 수 있습니다. ■ 배경 음악 로딩이 끝날 때까지 배경 음악을 바꿀 수 없습니다. ▼ 사진에서 재생 조정 버튼 이용하기 ● † / … 슬라이드 쇼의 속도를 설정합니다. (보통, 느리게, 빠르게) ● l / r 이전 또는 다음 사진으로 이동합니다. ● ∫ 파일 목록화면으로 돌아갑니다. ● ∂ 슬라이드 쇼를 시작합니다. ● ∑ 슬라이드 쇼를 일시 정지 합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 66 2012-09-04 9:24:1867 4. 고급 기능 사진에서 간편 메뉴 이용하기 ▼ 파일 목록 화면에서 다음의 기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. ● 보기 원하는 정렬 기준을 선택하여 목록을 정렬할 수 있습니다. ● 선택 재생 파일 목록에서 원하는 사진 파일을 선택하여 재생할 수 있습니다. ● 보내기 원하는 사진을 패밀리 스토리나 사진과 관련된 애플리케이션에 보낼 수 있습니다. 이 기능을 사용하려면 먼저 스마트 허브에 로그인해야 합니다. ● 로그인 / 로그아웃 사용자의 스마트 허브 계정에 로그인 또는 로그아웃 할 수 있습니다. ● 재생 목록에 추가 재생 목록을 만들 수 있습니다. 듣고 싶은 음악을 재생 목록에 추가하여 쉽고 빠르게 재생할 수 있습니다. ● 재생 목록으로 이동 재생 목록 화면으로 이동합니다. ● 상세 정보 선택된 파일에 대한 세부정보를 보여줍니다. ▼ 사진 파일을 재생할 때 아래의 기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. ● 사진 목록으로 이동 사진 목록 화면으로 이동합니다. ● 슬라이드 쇼 실행 / 슬라이드 쇼 중지 슬라이드 쇼를 시작하거나 정지합니다. 리모컨의 ∂ 또는 ∑ 버튼을 사용할 수 있습니다. ● 슬라이드 쇼 속도 슬라이드 쇼가 재생되는 동안 슬라이드 쇼의 속도를 선택할 수 있습니다. 리모컨을 이용해 † 또는 … 를 선택하세요. ● 배경 음악 켜기 / 배경 음악 끄기 배경 음악을 켜거나 끌 수 있습니다. ● 배경 음악 설정 슬라이드 쇼를 재생하거나 사진 파일을 볼 때 원하는 배경 음악을 선택하고 설정할 수 있습니다. ● 화면 모드 화면 모드를 변경할 수 있습니다. ● 음향 모드 음향 모드를 변경할 수 있습니다. 배경 음악이 설정되어 있을 때, 사용 가능한 기능입니다. ● 확대 이미지를 최대 4배까지 확대할 수 있습니다. ● 회전 이미지를 회전합니다. ● 상세 정보 선택한 사진 파일의 세부 정보를 보여줍니다. 파일 목록 보기 1 파일 목록에서 리모컨을 이용해 } 를 선택하세요. 보기 화면이 나타납니다. 2 원하는 정렬 기준을 선택하세요. ● 폴더 보기 전체 폴더를 보여줍니다. 폴더를 선택하여 파일 이름과 썸네일 이미지를 볼 수 있습니다. ● 타이틀 기호 / 숫자 / 알파벳 순서로 파일을 정렬하고 보여줍니다. ● 최근 순 최근 날짜부터 파일을 정렬하여 표시합니다. ● 오래된 순 오래된 날짜부터 파일을 정렬하여 표시합니다. ● 월 별 월별로 사진 파일을 정렬하여 표시합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 67 2012-09-04 9:24:1968 사진 보내기 사진을 패밀리 스토리나 다른 기기에 보낼 수 있습니다. 보내기 기능을 사용하려면, 스마트 허브에 로그인 되어 있어야 합니다. 1 예를 들어, 패밀리 스토리에 사진을 보낸다고 가정해 보겠습니다. 2 사진 파일을 보내려면, 파일 목록에서 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행한 후에 보내기를 선택하세요. 3 보내려는 사진 파일을 선택하세요. c 마크가 나타납니다. 4 추가로 파일을 선택하려면, 3단계를 실행하세요. ■ 목록에서 모든 파일을 선택하려면 전체 선택을 선택하세요. ■ 선택을 취소하려면, 선택한 파일을 한번 더 선택하세요. 5 선택이 완료되면, 보내기를 선택하세요. 보내기 화면이 나타납니다. 6 보내려고 하는 장치를 선택하세요. 7 공유를 위해 패밀리 그룹을 선택하세요. 팝업 창이 나타납니다. 8 선택한 패밀리 그룹에게 보낼 메시지를 입력하세요. 쿼티 키패드 화면에서 TV에 연결된 키보드를 사용해 메시지를 입력할 수 있습니다. 9 메시지 입력이 완료되면, 보내기를 선택하세요. 음악 (AllShare Play) ™ → AllShare Play → 음악 음악 재생하기 지원되는 음악 파일 형식에 대한 자세한 내용은 기타 기능 부분의 "지원 자막 및 AllShare Play 형식"을 참조하세요. 1 AllShare Play 화면에서 음악을 선택하세요. 2 재생하려는 장치를 선택하세요. 3 파일 목록에서 원하는 파일을 선택하거나, 리모컨을 이용해 ∂를 선택하세요. ■ 이전 페이지 또는 다음 페이지로 이동하려면 리모컨을 이용해 b 또는 {를 선택하세요. ■ 음악을 재생할 때 리모컨을 이용해 † 또는 … 를 선택하세요. 재생시간을 검색할 수 있습니다. ■ MP3 파일을 재생할 때 소리가 비정상적으로 들리면, 음향 메뉴의 이퀄라이저를 조정하세요. 이상 변조된 MP3 파일은 음향 문제를 일으킬 수 있습니다. ■ 재생 중에 되감기 및 빨리 감기 버튼을 3초 이상 누르면, 다음 곡으로 이동할 수 있습니다. ▼ 음악에서 재생 조정 버튼 사용하기 음악이 재생되는 동안 화면의 오른쪽 하단의 부가기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. ● 재생 / 일시 정지 음악을 재생하거나 일시 정지 할 수 있습니다. 리모컨을 이용해 ∂ 또는 ∑ 을 선택하세요. ● 반복 모드 음악 파일을 반복하여 재생할 수 있습니다. ● 셔플 모드 음악을 순차적으로 또는 무작위로 음악을 재생할 수 있습니다. ● 음향 모드 음향모드를 변경할 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 68 2012-09-04 9:24:2069 4. 고급 기능 음악에서 간편 메뉴 이용하기 ▼ 다음의 기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. ● 보기 원하는 정렬 기준을 선택하여 목록을 정렬할 수 있습니다. ● 선택 재생 파일 목록에서 재생하려는 음악 파일을 재생합니다. ● 보내기 원하는 음악 파일을 웹 스토리지(Web storage) 또는 다른 기기에 보낼 수 있습니다. 이 기능을 사용하려면 먼저 스마트 허브에 로그인해야 합니다. ● 로그인 / 로그아웃 사용자의 스마트 허브 계정에 로그인 또는 로그아웃 할 수 있습니다. ● 재생 목록에 추가 나만의 재생 목록을 만들 수 있습니다. 재생 목록을 이용하여 듣고자 하는 음악을 쉽고 빠르게 들을 수 있습니다. ● 재생 목록으로 이동 재생 목록 화면으로 이동합니다. ● 인코딩 원하는 언어로 인코딩 할 수 있습니다. ● 상세 정보 선택한 파일에 대한 세부 정보를 보여줍니다. 음악에서 선택한 음악 파일 재생하기 1 파일 목록에서 원하는 음악 파일을 선택하세요. 2 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행한 후, 선택 재생을 선택하세요. 3 추가하려는 파일을 선택하세요. c 마크가 나타납니다. 4 추가로 파일을 선택하려면, 3단계를 실행하세요. ■ 목록에서 모든 파일을 선택하려면 전체 선택을 선택하세요. ■ 선택을 취소하려면, 선택한 파일을 한번 더 선택하세요. 5 재생을 선택하세요. 선택된 음악 파일이 재생됩니다. 파일 목록 보기 USB 기기가 아닌 웹 스토리지(Web storage)로 AllShare Play 기능을 사용할 때 보기 기능은 지원되지 않습니다. 1 리모컨을 이용해 }를 선택하세요. 파일 목록에서 파일을 정렬합니다. 보기 화면이 나타납니다. 2 원하는 정렬기준을 선택하세요. ● 폴더 보기 전체 폴더를 보여줍니다. 폴더를 선택하면 파일 이름과 썸네일을 볼 수 있습니다. ● 타이틀 기호 / 숫자 / 알파벳 순서로 파일을 정렬하고 보여줍니다. ● 가수 가수의 이름을 알파벳, 가나다 순으로 음악 파일을 정렬합니다. ● 앨범 알파벳순의 앨범 별로 음악 파일을 정렬합니다. ● 장르 장르별로 음악 파일을 정렬합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 69 2012-09-04 9:24:2070 음악 파일 보내기 음악 파일을 웹 스토리지(Web storage) 또는 다른 기기에 보낼 수 있습니다. 보내기 기능을 이용하려면, 스마트 허브에 로그인이 되어 있어야 합니다. 1 파일 목록에서 동영상 파일을 보내려면 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행한 후에 보내기를 선택하세요. 2 보내고자 하는 음악 파일을 선택하세요. c 마크가 나타납니다. 3 음악 파일을 추가로 선택하려면 2단계를 다시 실행하세요. ■ 목록에 있는 모든 파일을 선택하려면, 전체 선택을 선택하세요. ■ 선택을 취소하려면, 선택한 파일을 한번 더 선택하세요. 4 선택이 완료되면, 보내기를 선택하세요. 보내기 화면이 나타납니다. 5 보내려는 기기를 선택한 후, 보내기를 선택하세요. 6 화면의 지시에 따르세요. 녹화된 TV (AllShare Play) ™ → AllShare Play → 녹화된 TV 녹화된 TV를 재생하기 전에 먼저 원하는 프로그램을 녹화해야 합니다. - 현재 방송중인 프로그램 녹화 - 녹화 예약 ■ 녹화된 TV를 사용하려면 5,400rpm 이상 USB HDD 장치 연결을 권장합니다. 단, RAID 타입 USB HDD는 지원하지 않습니다. ■ 장치 성능 검사를 완료한 USB 장치만 녹화 예약이 가능합니다. ▼ 녹화된 TV 장치 목록 화면에서 간편 메뉴 이용하기 (디지털 채널에서만) 녹화된 TV 장치 목록 화면에서 콘텐츠가 저장된 기기를 선택한 후 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 아래의 기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. 로그인 / 로그아웃: 스마트 허브에 로그인하거나 로그아웃 합니다. 장치 관리: 장치 포맷, 장치 검사, 장치 성능 검사를 할 수 있고, 녹화 기본 장치를 확인할 수 있습니다. - 장치 포맷: TV와 연결된 USB 저장 장치를 녹화된 TV 형식에 맞게 포맷합니다. - 장치 검사: 녹화된 TV 형식에 맞는 USB 저장 장치를 검사합니다. - 장치 성능 검사: TV와 연결된 USB 저장 장치로 녹화 및 타임시프트 기능을 이용할 수 있는지 장치의 성능을 검사합니다. - 녹화 기본 장치: TV와 연결된 USB 저장 장치가 여러 개인 경우, 녹화된 TV 프로그램을 저장할 장치를 설정할 수 있습니다. 상세 정보: 연결된 기기에 대한 세부 정보를 확인할 수 있습니다. USB안전제거: USB를 안전하게 제거합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 70 2012-09-04 9:24:2171 4. 고급 기능 현재 시청 중인 프로그램 녹화하기 (디지털 채널에서만) ▼ 현재 시청 중인 프로그램을 바로 녹화할 수 있습니다. 1 방송 시청 중, 녹화를 원하시면 ∏를 선택하세요. 2 화면 오른 쪽 상단에서 원하는 녹화 길이를 선택하고 확인을 선택하세요. 최대 녹화 길이는 360분입니다. 3 녹화를 마치면 ™ → AllShare Play → 녹화된 TV에서 확인할 수 있습니다. ▼ 방송 프로그램 정보에서 현재 시청 중인 프로그램을 바로 녹화하기 1 리모컨의 정보표시` 버튼을 누르세요. 2 a 상세 정보를 선택하세요. 3 현재 시청 중인 프로그램을 녹화하려면 레코더 바로 녹화를 선택하세요. ▼ 방송 프로그램 정보에서 다음 프로그램을 바로 녹화 예약하기 1 리모컨의 정보표시` 버튼을 누르세요. 2 리모컨의 l 또는 r 버튼을 눌러 다음 프로그램을 선택하세요. 3 a 상세 정보를 선택하세요. 4 녹화 예약을 선택하세요. 5 녹화 예약된 프로그램의 이름 앞에 아이콘이 나타납니다. 녹화된 TV 재생하기 ™ → AllShare Play → 녹화된 TV 녹화된 TV를 선택하고 녹화된 TV가 저장된 외부기기를 선택하세요. 화면에 저장된 콘텐츠가 최근 순으로 나타납니다. ▼ 녹화된 TV 목록 화면에서 버튼 이용하기 ● π µ 페이지 이동: 페이지를 이동할 수 있습니다. ● b 장치 관리: 장치 포맷, 장치 검사, 장치 성능 검사를 할 수 있고, 녹화 기본 장치를 확인할 수 있습니다. ● } 보기: 원하는 기준으로 정렬할 수 있습니다. ● E 재생: 선택한 콘텐츠를 재생합니다. ● T 간편 메뉴: 부가 설정 메뉴를 보여줍니다. ● R 복귀: 이전 화면으로 돌아갑니다. 녹화된 TV에서 간편 메뉴 사용하기 ▼ 파일 목록 화면에서 다음의 기능을 설정할 수 있습니다. ● 현재 그룹 재생: 선택된 그룹의 콘텐츠를 재생합니다. ● 보기: 원하는 기준으로 정렬합니다. ● 선택 재생: 원하는 콘텐츠를 선택하여 재생할 수 있습니다. 하나 이상 선택할 수 있으며 선택한 콘텐츠를 재생하거나 삭제할 수 있습니다. ● 삭제: 선택한 콘텐츠를 삭제합니다. ● 재생 목록에 추가: 선택한 콘텐츠를 재생목록에 추가합니다. ● 재생 목록으로 이동: 재생 목록으로 이동합니다. ● 잠금 설정/해제: 잠금을 설정하고 해제합니다. ● 장치 관리: 장치 포맷, 장치 검사, 장치 성능 검사를 할 수 있고, 녹화 기본 장치를 확인할 수 있습니다. ▼ 콘텐츠를 선택했을 때 추가로 설정할 수 있는 항목입니다. ● 이름 변경: 콘텐츠의 이름을 변경합니다. ● 상세 정보: 콘텐츠의 세부 정보를 보여줍니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 71 2012-09-04 9:24:2172 ▼ 재생 중 다음의 기능을 설정할 수 있습니다. ● 녹화 리스트로 이동: 녹화된 TV 목록으로 이동합니다. ● 처음부터 재생: 다시 처음부터 재생합니다. ● 장면 탐색: 원하는 장면을 선택합니다. ● 타이틀 검색: 콘텐츠의 제목을 선택하여 재생합니다. ● 시간 검색: 숫자를 입력하면 초, 분, 시간으로 재생위치를 선택할 수 있습니다. 리모컨의 l 또는 r 버튼을 누르세요. 되감기 및 빨리 감기를 할 수 있습니다. ● 반복 모드: 반복을 원하는 구간을 설정하거나 해제합니다. - 끄기: 반복을 설정하지 않습니다. - 타이틀: 지금 재생 중인 콘텐츠를 한번 재생하고 한 번 반복 합니다. - 전체: 모든 콘텐츠를 반복합니다. - 구간 반복: 원하는 구간을 설정하여 반복합니다. 재생 중에 구간 반복을 원하는 부분에서 기능을 실행한 후, 되돌릴 부분에서 한번 더 실행하세요. ● 화면 크기: 화면의 크기를 조정합니다. ● 화면 모드: 원하는 화면 모드를 선택합니다. ● 음향 모드: 음향 모드를 변경합니다. ● 상세 정보: 녹화된 콘텐츠의 제목 및 녹화 시간, 길이, 내용 등 세부정보를 보여줍니다. 타임시프트 현재 방송 중인 TV 프로그램을 마치 DVD처럼, 필요한 시점에서 일시 정지 시키고, 다시 보고 싶은 장면을 되돌려 볼 수 있습니다. 디지털 채널에서만 가능합니다. 타임시프트 기능 ▼ 일시 정지 기능으로 타임시프트 기능 시작하기 1 방송 시청 중 리모컨을 이용해 ∑을 선택하세요. 2 타임시프트 기능이 시작되면, 화면이 정지되며 타임시프트 진행막대가 나타납니다. 타임시프트 진행 막대 좌측에서 현재 타임시프트 상태를 확인할 수 있습니다. ▼ 타임시프트 및 녹화 기능을 사용하기 전에... 녹화한 영상은 콘텐츠 보호기술(DRM)이 적용되어 PC나 다른 TV에서 재생되지 않습니다. 또한 TV의 영상회로를 교체한 경우에도 재생되지 않습니다. 참고 ■ 5,400rpm 이상 USB HDD를 사용하시는 게 좋습니다. 단, RAID 타입 USB HDD는 지원하지 않습니다. ■ USB 저장 장치의 여유 공간 및 영상의 화질에 따라 녹화 및 타임시프트의 가용 시간이 다를 수 있습니다. ■ 타임시프트 기능을 최대로 사용할 때 영상을 일시 정지해도, 자동으로 재생될 수 있습니다. ■ 녹화 중, USB 장치의 여유 공간이 50MB 이하로 될 경우에는 녹화가 종료됩니다. ■ 재생 또는 타임시프트 실행 중 영상은 TV의 설정 값에 영향을 받습니다. ■ 녹화 중 입력 신호를 전환하면 전환이 일어날 때까지 화면이 검게 나옵니다. ■ 방송 안내 또는 채널에서 녹화 수행 시, 장치 성능 검사를 실패한 USB 장치인 경우 장치 포맷 및 장치 성능 검사를 다시 수행합니다. ■ 타임시프트 기능은 장치 성능 검사를 완료한 USB 장치가 연결된 경우에만 사용할 수 있습니다. ■ 현재 방송 중인 프로그램을 녹화하거나 녹화 예약으로 녹화를 할 경우, 녹화 시작 시간은 명령 수행 시간에 따라서 1~2초 차이가 날 수 있습니다. ■ TV 녹화용 USB 장치를 연결하면, 기존에 저장되어 있던 타임시프트 또는 녹화 파일 중 비정상적으로 저장된 파일은 자동으로 삭제됩니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 72 2012-09-04 9:24:2273 4. 고급 기능 ■ 녹화 중에 입력 신호를 전환하면 녹화는 계속 되지만 ∏를 선택할 수 없습니다. ■ 꺼짐 시간 예약, 자동 전원 끄기와 같은 기능이 설정되어 있을 때, 녹화가 진행 중이라면 녹화가 완료된 후에 TV가 꺼집니다. ▼ 재생 기능으로 타임시프트 기능 시작하기 1 방송 시청 중 리모컨을 이용해 ∂을 선택하세요. 2 타임시프트 기능이 시작되면, 타임시프트 진행막대가 나타납니다. 타임시프트 진행 막대 좌측에서 현재 타임시프트 상태를 확인할 수 있습니다. ▼ 타임시프트 기능 수행 중, 버튼 이용하기 ● † / … 리모컨을 이용해 † 또는 …를 선택할 때마다, 재생 속도가 다음과 같이 변경됩니다. († 1 † 2 → … † 6 † 7 / … 1 … 2 → … … 6 … 7) ● l r 20초 이전 또는 이후의 화면으로 이동합니다. ● ∑ 리모컨을 이용해 ∑를 선택하세요. 재생중인 화면을 일시 정지합니다. - 일시 정지된 화면에서 리모컨을 이용해 † 또는 …를 선택하세요. 재생속도가 다음과 같이 변경됩니다. (ƒ)1/8, (ƒ)1/4, (ƒ)1/2 / („)1/8, („)1/4, („)1/2 ● ∫ 과거 영상을 시청 중, 리모컨을 이용해 ∫를 선택하세요. 현재 방송 화면으로 이동합니다. 현재 방송 화면을 시청 중, 리모컨을 이용해 ∫ 를 선택하면, "타임시프트를 종료하겠습니까?" 라는 메시지 창이 나타나고, 확인을 선택하면 타임시프트를 종료합니다. ● 재생 속도를 정상 속도로 변경하려면, 리모컨을 이용해 ∂을 선택하세요. ■ 정지된 영상 탐색 중에는 소리가 재생되지 않습니다. ■ 정지된 영상은 재생 방향으로만 동작합니다. DLNA 기능 사용하기 ™ → AllShare Play TV와 휴대폰 또는 다른 기기가 동일한 네트워크에 연결되어 있을 경우, 휴대폰 또는 다른 기기에 저장된 미디어 콘텐츠(동영상, 사진, 음악 등)를 TV를 통해 재생할 수 있습니다. 더 자세한 설명은 홈페이지 “http://www. samsung.com/sec”를 방문하거나 삼성전자 서비스 센터에 문의하세요. 모바일 기기에 소프트웨어를 추가로 설치해야 할 수 있습니다. 자세한 내용은 각 기기의 사용설명서를 참조하세요. ■ 삼성 TV와 타사 DLNA 서버의 연결 중 동영상 재생할 경우, 호환성 문제가 발생할 수 있습니다. ■ AllShare Play은 삼성 TV와 연결되면 다음과 같은 삼성만의 차별화된 기능을 제공합니다. - 다양한 동영상 재생 (DivX, MP4, 3GPP, AVI, ASF, MKV, 등) - Video thumbnail 제공 - Bookmark 기능 (동영상 이어보기) - Auto-chaptering (장면 탐색) - Digital Content Management - 다양한 형식의 외부 자막 지원 (SRT, SMI, SUB, TXT, TTXT) - 파일명을 통한 검색 기능 - 기타 등등 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 73 2012-09-04 9:24:2274 AllShare 설정 메뉴 → 네트워크 → AllShare 설정 네트워크를 통해 TV와 연결된 스마트 폰 또는 태블릿과 같은 장치의 허용 여부를 설정합니다. 허용된 장치의 콘텐츠를 공유하거나 모바일 장치에 다운로드된 앱을 이용하여 본 기기를 제어할 수 있습니다. AllShare 설정 기능은 DLNA DMC를 지원하는 모든 장치에서 사용할 수 있습니다. ● 허용됨 / 차단됨: 기기를 허용하거나 차단합니다. ● 삭제: 목록에서 기기를 삭제합니다. 이 기능은 목록에서 모바일 기기의 이름만 삭제합니다. 삭제된 기기를 켜거나 TV에 연결하면, 목록에 다시 나타날 수 있습니다. DLNA 기능에 연결된 장치의 미디어 콘텐츠 재생하기 1 AllShare Play 화면에서 메뉴(동영상, 사진, 음악)를 선택하세요. 2 DLNA를 선택하세요. DLNA 기능을 통해 연결된 기기의 파일 목록이 나타납니다. 3 파일 목록에서 원하는 파일을 선택하면, 선택된 파일이 재생됩니다. 기기에 저장된 미디어 콘텐츠 재생하기 1 휴대폰이나 AllShare Play 기능을 지원하는 다른 장치를 연결한 후 장치의 미디어 콘텐츠를 재생합니다. TV화면 하단에 팝업 창이 나타납니다. 2 허용을 선택하면 장치와 연결됩니다. 장치의 미디어 콘텐츠를 TV에서 재생할 수 있습니다. AllShare 설정에서 연결할 수 있는 장치를 찾을 수 있습니다. ■ 휴대폰에서 전송된 미디어 콘텐츠 (동영상, 사진, 음악)가 TV에서 재생될 것이라는 알림 창이 나타납니다. 콘텐츠는 알림 창이 나타난 후 3초 후에 재생됩니다. - 알림 창이 나타났을 때, 알림 창을 닫으면 콘텐츠는 재생되지 않습니다. ■ 미디어 기능을 통해서 기기가 TV와 처음 연결되면, 경고 창이 나타납니다. 허용을 선택하세요. 허용을 선택하면 휴대폰과 TV를 자유롭게 접속하도록 하며, 콘텐츠를 재생하는 미디어 기능을 이용할 수 있습니다. ■ 휴대폰에서 미디어 콘텐츠 전송 기능을 끄려면, AllShare 설정에서 차단됨을 설정합니다. ■ 콘텐츠의 해상도와 파일 형식에 따라 TV에서 재생되지 않을 수 있습니다. ■ 일부 기능은 미디어 콘텐츠의 유형에 따라 작동하지 않을 수 있습니다. ■ 모바일 장치를 사용하여, 미디어를 제어할 수 있습니다. 더 자세한 사항은 각 모바일 장치의 사용 설명서를 참조하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 74 2012-09-04 9:24:2375 4. 고급 기능 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 메뉴 → 시스템 → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 다양한 AV 기기들로 구성된 환경에서 Anynet+ 메뉴를 통해 AV 기기들을 자동으로 제어함으로써, 사용자가 간편하게 TV를 통해 AV 기기들을 사용할 수 있도록 하는 AV 네트워크 시스템입니다. ■ TV 리모컨으로만 Anynet+ 기기를 제어할 수 있으며 TV의 패널 키로는 제어할 수 없습니다. ■ 특정 상황에서는 TV 리모컨이 작동하지 않을 수 있습니다. 이러한 경우, Anynet+ 기기를 다시 선택하세요. ■ 다른 제조업체의 제품은 Anynet+ 기능을 사용할 수 없습니다. ■ Anynet+의 외부기기 연결방법에 대한 설명은 기기의 사용 설명서를 참조하세요. HDMI케이블을 이용하여 Anynet+를 연결하세요. 일부 HDMI 케이블은 Anynet+ 기능을 지원하지 않을 수 있습니다. ■ Anynet+ 동작은 Anynet+ 를 지원하는 AV 기기가 전원 대기 또는 전원이 들어온 상태에서만 동작 합니다. ■ Anynet+를 지원하는 AV 기기들은 총 12대까지 연결됩니다. 단, 같은 종류의 기기는 3대까지만 연결할 수 있습니다. ■ 홈씨어터는 한 대만 연결할 수 있습니다. 홈씨어터를 연결하려면, 홈씨어터와 TV를 HDMI 케이블로 연결한 다음, - 옵티칼 케이블을 사용하여 TV의 디지털 음성 출력(옵티칼) 단자와 홈시어터의 디지털 오디오 입력 단자를 연결하세요. 홈 시어터의 전면 왼쪽 및 오른쪽 스피커와 서브우퍼에서만 소리가 들릴 것입니다. - 5.1채널 오디오를 들으려면 HDMI 케이블을 DVD, 위성박스에 연결하세요. 연결한 다음 DVD / 위성박스 (즉 Anynet 기기 1 또는 2)의 디지털 음성 출력 (옵티칼) 단자를 TV가 아닌 앰프 또는 홈시어터에 직접 연결하세요. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 메뉴 Anynet+ 메뉴는 TV에 연결된 Anynet+ 기기의 유형과 상태에 따라 다릅니다. ● TV 방송 보기 Anynet+ 모드가 TV 방송 모드로 변경됩니다. ● 기기 선택 Anynet+ 기기 목록을 표시합니다. ● (장치 이름) 메뉴 연결된 기기의 메뉴를 표시합니다. 예를 들어, DVD를 연결하면 DVD의 디스크 메뉴가 표시됩니다. ● (장치 이름) 간편 메뉴 연결된 기기의 도구 메뉴를 표시합니다. 예를 들어, DVD를 연결하면 DVD의 재생 메뉴가 표시됩니다. 일부 장치는 이 메뉴를 사용하지 못할 수 있습니다. ● (장치 이름) 타이틀 메뉴 연결된 기기의 타이틀 메뉴를 표시합니다. 예를 들어, DVD를 연결하면 DVD의 타이틀 메뉴가 표시됩니다. 일부 장치는 이 메뉴를 사용하지 못할 수 있습니다. ● 리시버 듣기 리시버를 통해 음향을 재생합니다. Anynet+ 기기 설정하기 ● Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Anynet+ 기능을 사용하려면 Anynet+ (HDMICEC)가 켜기로 설정되어 있어야 합니다. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 기능이 비활성화되면 Anynet+와 관련된 모든 기능을 이용할 수 없습니다. ● 자동 꺼짐 TV를 끌 때 Anynet+ 기기의 전원이 자동으로 꺼지도록 설정합니다. ■ 자동 꺼짐을 예로 설정하면, TV가 꺼질 때 동작 중이던 외부 기기도 같이 꺼집니다. ■ 기기에 따라 이 기능을 사용할 수 없는 기기도 있습니다. ● 리시버 듣기 TV 스피커 대신 홈 시어터와 같은 리시버를 통해 음향을 들을 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 75 2012-09-04 9:24:2376 Anynet+ 기기 전환하기 1 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)를 선택하세요. 2 기기 선택을 선택하세요. 원하는 기기를 찾을 수 없으면 기기 찾기를 선택하여 목록을 새로 고침하세요. 3 기기를 선택하고, 선택한 기기로 전환될 때까지 기다리세요. 선택한 기기로 전환할 수 있습니다. ■ 시스템 메뉴에서 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 를 켜기로 설정한 경우에만 기기 선택 메뉴가 나타납니다. ■ 선택한 기기로 전환하려면 최대 2분이 걸릴 수 있습니다. 전환 작동 중에는 작동을 취소할 수 없습니다. ■ TV/외부입력으로 외부 입력 모드를 선택한 경우에는 Anynet+ 기능을 사용할 수 없습니다. 반드시 기기 선택을 사용하여 Anynet+ 장치로 전환하세요. 리시버를 통해 듣기 TV 스피커 대신 홈시어터와 같은 리시버를 통해 음향을 들을 수 있습니다. 리시버로 음향을 들으려면 리시버 화면으로 이동하세요. 메뉴 → 시스템 → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) → 리시버 듣기 리시버 듣기에서 켜기를 선택하세요. ■ 오디오만 지원하는 리시버는 기기 선택에 나타나지 않을 수 있습니다. ■ 리시버의 옵티칼 입력 단자를 TV의 디지털 음성 출력(옵티칼) 단자에 제대로 연결해야만 리시버가 작동합니다. ■ 리시버(홈시어터)의 전원이 켜져 있으면, TV의 옵티칼 단자와 연결된 리시버로 소리를 들을 수 있습니다. TV에서 DTV(일반 방송) 신호를 방송하는 경우, TV에서 5.1채널 음향이 리시버로 송출됩니다. DVD와 같은 디지털 구성요소가 소스이고 HDMI를 통해 이 소스를 TV에 연결하면, 리시버에서 2채널 음향만 들립니다. ARC 기능 사용하기 (LED 6350 모델 이상, PDP TV에만 해당) 별도의 옵티칼 케이블 없이 HDMI 케이블로 연결한 리시버를 통해 사운드를 들으실 수 있습니다. ARC 기능을 이용하려면 리시버 듣기 화면으로 이동하세요. 메뉴 → 시스템 → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) → 리시버 듣기 리시버 듣기에서 켜기를 선택하세요. ■ ARC 기능을 사용하려면, HDMI-CEC 및 ARC 기능을 지원하는 리시버를 HDMI 입력 2 (ARC) 단자에 연결해야 합니다. ■ ARC 기능을 끄려면 리시버 듣기를 끄기로 설정하세요. TV에서는 ARC 신호를 계속 전송하지만 리시버는 신호 수신을 차단합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 76 2012-09-04 9:24:2477 5. 기타 기능 문제 해결 메뉴 → 고객지원 → e-설명서 → 기타 기능 문제 해결의 상세한 설명을 보려면 리모컨의 고객지원 버튼 또는 메뉴 → 고객지원 → e-설명서 → 기타 기능으로 진입하세요. 각각의 항목을 확인하고 문제를 해결하세요. 기타 문의 사항은 서비스 센터 또는 "http://www.samsung.com/sec"으로 문의하세요. 화면 먼저 화질 테스트를 실행하여 TV가 테스트 이미지를 제대로 표시하는지 확인합니다. (메뉴 → 고객지원 → 자가진단 → 화질 테스트) 테스트 이미지가 제대로 보여지면 외부입력이나 신호로 인해 화질이 안 좋을 수 있습니다. TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! 화면의 깜박거림과 흐림 본 제품의 화면이 간헐적으로 깜박거리고 밝지 않다면, 에코 센서나 에너지 절약 기능과 같은 자사의 효율적인 기능 중 일부를 해제해야 할 수도 있습니다. 리모컨으로 아래의 과정을 진행한다면, 이러한 기능들을 설정하거나 해제할 수 있습니다. ● 절전 모드: 메뉴 → 시스템 → 에코 절전 설정 → 절전 모드 ● 에코 센서: 메뉴 → 시스템 → 에코 절전 설정 → 에코 센서 컴포넌트 연결 / 화면 색상 본 제품의 화면 색상이나 흑백이 정확하지 않다면, 먼저 자가진단을 실행하세요. ● 자가진단: 메뉴 → 고객지원 → 자가진단 → 화질 테스트 테스트 결과 이상이 없다면, 다음의 사항을 확인하세요. ● TV의 영상 입력 단자와 비디오의 영상 출력 단자가 제대로 연결되어 있는지 확인하세요. ● 그 외의 연결을 확인해봅니다. TV와 비디오를 컴포넌트 케이블로 연결했다면, 컴포넌트 케이블의 연결 단자 Pb, Pr, Y가 각각 제대로 연결되어 있는지 확인해야 합니다. 화면 밝기 본 제품의 화면 색상은 정확하지만 밝기가 너무 어둡거나 밝다면, 수리를 요청하기 전에 몇 가지 설정들을 확인하세요. ● 메뉴의 화면으로 이동하여 백라이트 조정 LED TV에만 해당 / 패널 밝기 조정 PDP TV에만 해당 , 명암, 밝기, 선명도, 색농도, 색상 (녹/적) 등의 설정들을 조정해 보세요. Auto Motion Plus / 잔상 (LED 6350 모델 이상만 해당) TV 화면에 잔상이나 흐릿한 형체를 발견한다면, Auto Motion Plus 기능을 이용하여 해결할 수 있습니다. ● Auto Motion Plus: 화면 → 부가 설정 → Auto Motion Plus [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 77 2012-09-04 9:24:2578 TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! 전원 꺼짐 TV의 전원이 갑자기 꺼진다면, 시간 설정이나 에코 절전 설정의 무신호 전원 끄기를 확인하세요. 먼저 시간 설정이 설정되었는지 확인해보세요. 취침 예약은 사용자가 잠들었을 때, 에너지를 절약하기 위해 일정한 시간에 자동으로 꺼지도록 하는 기능입니다. ● 취침 예약: 메뉴 → 시스템 → 시간 설정 → 취침 예약 취침 예약이 설정되어 있지 않다면, 무신호 전원 끄기나 자동 전원 끄기 기능을 확인하세요. ● 무신호 전원 끄기: 메뉴 → 시스템 → 에코 절전 설정 → 무신호 전원 끄기 ● 자동 전원 끄기: 메뉴 → 시스템 → 에코 절전 설정 → 자동 전원 끄기 전원이 켜지지 않아요. TV가 켜지면, 화면이 나타나기 전에 리모컨 수신부의 불빛이 5차례 정도 깜박입니다. 본 제품에 전원을 켜는데 문제가 생겼다면, 서비스 요청을 하기 전에 몇 가지 사항을 확인하세요. 전원 코드, 리모컨 등의 기능에 문제가 없다면, 안테나 케이블 연결이 제대로 되어있지 않거나, 케이블 컨버터 또는 위성수신기가 꺼져 있을 것입니다. 안테나 케이블의 연결을 확인하거나 케이블 컨버터 또는 위성 수신기의 전원을 켜세요. 채널이 나오지 않아요. 초기 설정(메뉴 → 시스템 → 초기 설정)을 실행하거나 자동 채널 설정을 실행하세요. (메뉴 → 채널 → 자동 채널 설정) 매장에서만큼 TV 화질이 좋지 않아 보여요. 매장에서는 디지털 HD 채널을 보여줍니다. 아날로그 케이블이나 셋톱박스를 이용한다면, 디지털 셋톱박스로 업그레이드하세요. HDMI 또는 HD(High Definition) 화질을 제공하는 컴포넌트 케이블을 사용하십시오. 방송국 로고에 HD 표시가 있는 경우는 아날로그로 제작된 화면을 디지털로 전환한 화면이며 화질은 일반 화질입니다. True HD방송의 채널을 탐색하세요. ● 케이블/위성 가입자: 채널 라인업에서 HD 채널을 실행하세요. ● 일반/유선 안테나 연결: 자동 프로그램을 실행한 후 HD 채널을 시청하세요. 케이블/셋톱박스 비디오 출력 해상도를1080i로 또는 720p 로 조정하세요. 화면 왜곡 현상이 생겨요. 특히 스포츠나 액션영화 같은 빠르게 움직이는 화면에서 동영상 콘텐츠의 압축으로 인한 화면 왜곡 현상이 나타날 수 있습니다. 신호가 약하거나 좋지 않은 신호는 화면 왜곡을 유발할 수 있는데 이것은 이상증세가 아닙니다. TV 근처(1m 이내)의 휴대폰이 있다면, 아날로그와 디지털 채널의 화면에 노이즈가 발생할 수 있습니다. 제대로 된 색상으로 보이지 않아요. 컴포넌트 연결을 사용하고 있다면, 컴포넌트 케이블이 연결 단자와 제대로 연결되었는지 확인합니다. 잘못된 연결은 색상 및 화면이 나오지 않는 문제의 원인이 될 수 있습니다. 색감이 풍부하지 못하거나 화면이 충분히 밝지 않아요. TV 메뉴의 화면 설정을 조정하세요. (화면 모드 / 밝기 / 선명도 / 색농도) TV 메뉴의 절전 모드 설정을 조정하세요. (메뉴 → 시스템 → 에코 절전 설정 → 절전 모드) 현재 화면 설정을 초기화하세요.(메뉴 → 화면 → 화면 초기화) 화면 가장자리에 점선이 보여요. 만약 화면 크기가 원본 크기로 설정되어 있다면, 16:9로 변경하세요. 유선 방송/위성방송 수신기의 해상도를 변경하세요. 화면이 흑백으로 보여요. 컴포넌트 입력(외부입력 1)을 사용하고 있다면, 영상 케이블(노란색)을 TV의 컴포넌트 녹색 단자에 연결하세요. 채널을 변경할 경우, 화면이 멈추거나 왜곡, 지연돼요. TV가 유선 방송 수신기에 연결되었다면, 수신기를 초기화하세요. (전원 코드의 연결을 해제했다가 다시 연결하고 유선 방송 수신기가 다시 켜질 때까지 기다리세요. 20분 정도 소요됩니다.) 유선 방송 수신기의 출력 해상도를 1080i나 720p로 설정하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 78 2012-09-04 9:24:2579 5. 기타 기능 음향 먼저, TV의 오디오가 정상 작동하는지 확인하려면, 음질 테스트를 실행합니다. (메뉴 → 고객지원 → 자가진단 → 음질 테스트) 오디오가 정상 작동한다면, 음향 문제는 외부기기나 신호의 문제일 수 있습니다. TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! 소리가 나지 않거나 최대 음량이 잘 안 들려요. TV와 연결된 장치(유선/위성 수신기, DVD, Blu-ray 등)의 음량을 확인하세요. 화면은 잘 나오는데, 소리가 안 나와요. 음향 메뉴의 스피커 선택을 TV 스피커로 설정하세요. 외부기기를 사용하고 있다면, 외부 기기의 오디오 출력 설정을 확인하세요. (예를 들어, TV와 연결된 유선 방송 수신기가 HDMI 케이블로 연결된다면, 유선 방송 수신기의 오디오 설정을 HDMI로 변경해야 합니다.) HDMI/DVI 케이블을 사용한다면, 별도로 오디오 케이블이 필요합니다. TV에 헤드폰 단자가 있다면, 헤드폰 단자에 연결된 것이 없는지 확인합니다. 외부 기기의 연결을 해제하고 재부팅 후, 장치의 전원 케이블을 다시 연결하세요. 스피커에서 잡음이 생겨요. 케이블 연결을 확인해야 합니다. 영상 케이블이 오디오 입력과 제대로 연결 됐는지 확인하세요. 안테나나 유선 방송 연결의 경우, 신호 정보를 확인해야 합니다. 잡음의 원인은 낮은 신호 레벨 때문일 수 있습니다. 음질 테스트 기능을 실행하세요. (메뉴 → 고객지원 → 자가진단 → 음질 테스트) 입체영상 (LED 5500 모델 미지원) TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! 입체영상 안경이 제대로 작동하지 않아요. 입체안경의 전원이 켜져 있는지 확인하세요. 입체영상 안경이나 TV 주위에 다른 입체영상 제품이나 전자기기가 켜져 있을 경우, 입체영상 안경이 제대로 작동하지 않을 수 있습니다. 문제가 발생한다면, 전자기기를 입체안경으로부터 가능한 멀리 두세요. 입체영상이 제대로 보이지 않아요. 입체영상을 감상하는 최적의 거리는 화면 높이의 세 배 이상입니다. 화면과 같은 수준의 눈높이에서 시청할 것을 권장합니다. 입체안경의 배터리가 방전됐어요. 입체영상 안경을 사용하지 않는 동안은 전원을 꺼두세요. 입체영상 안경을 켜놓으면, 배터리의 수명은 짧아집니다. 안테나 (일반 / 유선) 연결 TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! 모든 채널이 수신되지 않아요. 동축케이블이 안전하게 연결되었는지 확인하세요. 채널 목록에 수신 가능한 채널을 추가하기 위해 자동 채널 설정을 실행하세요. 메뉴 → 채널 → 자동 채널 설정에서 시작을 선택하세요. 안테나의 위치가 정확한지 확인하세요. 디지털 채널에 자막이 안 나와요. 자막 설정 메뉴에서 확인하세요. 자막 모드를 변경해보세요. 일부 채널은 자막을 지원하지 않을 수도 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 79 2012-09-04 9:24:2580 TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! 화면이 왜곡됐어요. 화면 왜곡의 원인은 동영상 콘텐츠의 압축률 때문입니다. 스포츠나 액션 영화 같이 빠른 움직임의 영상에서 특히 잘 발생합니다. 신호가 약할 경우 화면 왜곡이 발생합니다. 이것은 제품의 결함은 아닙니다. 컴퓨터 연결 TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! "지원하지 않는 모드입니다."라는 메시지가 나타나요. 컴퓨터의 출력 해상도를 TV에서 지원하는 해상도로 맞춰주세요. 동영상은 재생되는데, 소리가 안 나와요. 컴퓨터를 HDMI로 연결했다면, 컴퓨터의 오디오 출력 설정을 확인하세요. 네트워크 연결 TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! 무선 네트워크 연결에 실패했어요. (LED 5500, 6350, PDP 550 모델만 해당) 무선 네트워크를 연결하려면 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터가 필요합니다. TV가 무선 IP 공유기에 연결되었는지 확인하세요. 네트워크를 통한 소프트웨어 업그레이드에 실패했어요. 연결을 확인하려면, 네트워크의 네트워크 상태를 실행합니다. 소프트웨어가 최신 버전이면 소프트웨어 업그레이드는 진행되지 않습니다. 기타 TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! 제품이 뜨거워요. 제품 특성상 장시간 시청 시 패널에서 열이 발생합니다. 패널의 열이 제품 상부의 통풍구로 방출되므로 장시간 사용시 제품 상단을 만졌을 때 사용자에 따라 뜨겁게 느낄 수 있으므로 주의하세요. 특히 어린이와 함께 시청 중에는 제품 상단을 만지지 않도록 보호자의 주의가 필요하며, 열이 발생하는 것은 제품의 결함이나 동작 사용상의 문제가 되는 것이 아니므로 안심하고 사용하세요. 자주색/녹색의 수평 막대가 흘러내리고 컴포넌트로 연결된 TV 스피커에서 잡음이 나요. 셋톱박스의 왼쪽과 오른쪽 오디오 연결을 해제합니다. 윙윙거리는 소리가 멈추지 않으면, 셋톱박스의 접지 문제입니다. 컴포넌트 케이블을 HDMI 케이블로 교체하세요. 화면이 전체화면으로 표시되지 않아요. HD 채널에서 일반 화질(4:3)의 콘텐츠가 재생되면 화면의 양쪽에 검은색 여백이 나타납니다. TV와 화면 비율의 다른 영화를 시청할 때, 위와 아래에 검은색 여백이 생겨납니다. 외부기기의 화면 크기 설정을 조정하거나 TV를 전체 화면으로 설정합니다. "지원하지 않는 모드입니다."라는 메시지가 나타났어요. TV에서 지원하는 해상도인지 확인하고, 이에 따라 외부기기의 출력 해상도를 조정하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 80 2012-09-04 9:24:2681 5. 기타 기능 TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! TV 메뉴에서 자막이 회색으로 표시돼요. TV와 연결된 외부기기가 HDMI나 컴포넌트로 연결되었다면, 자막 메뉴를 사용할 수 없습니다. 외부기기의 자막 기능은 활성화되어 있어야 합니다. TV에서 플라스틱 냄새가 나요. 제품의 결함이 아니며, 시간이 지나면서 사라집니다. TV의 디지털 신호 정보가 자가 진단 메뉴에서 활성화되지 않아요. 디지털 신호 정보 기능은 디지털 채널에서만 가능합니다. TV가 옆으로 기울었어요. TV의 기본 스탠드를 분리하고 재조립하세요. 채널 메뉴가 비활성화되었어요. 채널 메뉴는 외부입력이 TV일 때만 사용 가능합니다. 30분이 지난 후나 TV가 꺼질 때마다 설정된 값이 사라져요. TV가 매장모드로 설정돼 있다면, 30분마다 음향 및 화면 설정은 초기화됩니다. 초기 설정을 실행시켜 매장모드에서 가정모드로 설정을 변경하세요. 리모컨을 이용해 TV/외부입력을 선택하세요. TV를 선택한 다음, 메뉴 → 시스템 → 초기 설정을 실행하세요. 오디오나 비디오가 손실됐어요. 케이블 연결을 확인하고 다시 연결하세요. 지나치게 뻣뻣하거나 두꺼운 케이블은 비디오나 오디오의 손실을 가져올 수 있습니다. 케이블이 오랫동안 사용 가능한지, 신축성 있는지를 확인해 보세요. TV를 벽에 장착할 경우, 90도 커넥터로 이용해 케이블을 연결할 것을 권장합니다. TV의 가장자리를 가까이에서 바라보면, 작은 입자가 보여요. 제품 디자인의 일부이며, 결함이 아닙니다. 동시화면 메뉴가 비활성화되었어요. 동시화면 기능은 외부입력(HDMI, 컴포넌트)을 이용할 때 사용 가능합니다. POP (TV 내부 배너 광고)가 화면에 나타나요. 초기 설정 모드에서 가정모드를 선택하세요. 더 자세한 사항은 초기 설정 기능을 참조하세요. 제품에서 뚝뚝 소리가 나요. TV 외관의 기구적 수축, 팽창에 의해서 나타날 수 있는 현상입니다. 제품의 고장이 아니므로 안심하고 사용하세요. 제품에서 계속 소리가 나요. TV는 고속 스위칭 회로와 큰 전류를 사용하였으므로 화면 밝기의 변화에 따라 소음의 변화가 있어 기존의 TV와 비교해 일정 수준의 소음이 발생할 수 있습니다. 당사의 엄격한 관리 기준으로 관리되고 있으며, 제품의 성능 및 신뢰성과는 무관합니다. 일정 수준의 소음은 TV 자체의 특성이며 교환 및 환불의 대상이 아님을 양해하여 주시기 바랍니다. 화면 열화 문제 (PDP TV에만) 해당 플라즈마 디스플레이(PDP) 화면의 잔상을 예방할 수 있습니다. 화면 보호 기능을 설정해 놓으세요. 이 제품에는 화면 열화 방지 기술이 갖춰져 있습니다. PDP 화면에서 수평 또는 수직 방향으로 화소들을 미세하게 이동하여 화면 잔상을 최소화할 수 있습니다. 녹화 예약 / 타임시프트 (문제해결) TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! USB 저장 장치가 인식되지 않거나 장치포맷, 장치 테스트, 장치 성능 검사가 실패됩니다. USB 저장 장치의 사용설명서를 참조하여 저장이 가능한지 확인하세요. USB 저장 장치가 잠금으로 설정되어 있는지 확인하세요. 컴퓨터에 연결했을 때 USB 저장 장치가 포맷되었는지 확인하세요. USB 저장장치를 TV에 연결한 후 포맷하세요. (포맷은 실패할 수 있습니다.) 만약 장치 성능 검사나 포맷이 실패한다면 USB 저장 장치에 문제가 있거나 성능이 너무 낮기 때문입니다. 새로운 USB 저장 장치를 사용하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 81 2012-09-04 9:24:2682 TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! USB 저장 장치를 포맷하여 사용하라는 메시지가 나타납니다. USB 저장 장치가 잠금으로 설정되어 있는지 확인하세요. USB 복구 기능을 사용하여 USB 저장 장치를 복구 해 보세요. 녹화 예약 기능을 사용할 수 없습니다. USB 저장 장치가 연결되어 있는지 확인하세요. 방송 채널이 녹화 가능한 디지털 방송인지 확인하세요. 만약 방송신호가 약하거나 잡히지 않을 때에는 녹화기능은 자동으로 멈춥니다. 만약 USB 저장 장치의 남은 공간이 적을 경우 타임시프트 모드가 작동하지 않습니다. 성능 테스트가 실패하였다는 메시지가 나타나며, 녹화 예약 및 타임시프트 기능이 동작하지 않습니다. 녹화 기능을 지원하지 않는 낮은 성능의 USB 저장 장치를 사용할 경우 이러한 문제가 발생할 수 있습니다. USB HDD 저장장치의 사용을 권장합니다. USB HDD 저장 장치는 적어도 5,400 rpm 이상의 속도를 권장하지만, RAID 타입은 지원하지 않습니다. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) (문제해결) TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! Anynet+가 작동하지 않아요. 기기가 Anynet+ 기기인지 확인하세요. Anynet+ 시스템은 Anynet+ 기기만 지원합니다. 리시버(홈 시어터)는 하나만 연결할 수 있습니다. Anynet+ 기기의 전원 코드가 제대로 연결되어 있는지 확인하세요. Anynet+ 기기의 비디오/오디오/HDMI 케이블 연결 상태를 확인하세요. 시스템 메뉴에서 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)가 켜기로 설정되어 있는지 확인하세요. TV 리모컨이 TV 모드로 되어 있는지 확인하세요. 리모컨과 Anynet+가 호환되는지 확인하세요. 특정 상황에서는 Anynet+가 작동하지 않습니다. (채널 검색 중, 스마트 허브 또는 초기 설정 작동 중) HDMI 케이블을 연결하거나 제거할 때에는 반드시 기기를 다시 검색하거나 TV를 껐다가 다시 켜세요. Anynet+를 시작하고 싶어요. Anynet+ 장치가 TV에 제대로 연결되어 있는지 확인하고 시스템 메뉴에서 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)가 켜기로 설정되어 있는지 확인하세요. (메뉴 → 시스템 → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)) 확인을 마친 후, 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)를 선택하고 원하는 기기를 선택하세요. Anynet+를 종료하고 싶어요. Anynet+ 메뉴에서 TV 방송 보기를 선택하세요. 리모컨을 이용해 TV/외부입력을 선택하여, Anynet+ 기기가 아닌 다른 기기를 선택하세요. "Anynet+ 연결 설정 중…" 또는 "Anynet+ 기기 연결을 해제합니다." 라고 나와요. Anynet+를 구성 중이거나 시청 모드로 전환 중일 때에는 리모컨을 사용할 수 없습니다. Anynet+ 설정 또는 시청 모드로의 전환이 완료되면 리모컨을 사용하세요. Anynet+ 기기가 재생되지 않아요. 초기 설정이 진행 중이면 재생 기능을 사용할 수 없습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 82 2012-09-04 9:24:2683 5. 기타 기능 TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! 연결된 기기가 표시되지 않아요. Anynet+ 기능을 지원하는 기기인지 확인하세요. HDMI 케이블이 제대로 연결되어 있는지 확인하세요. 시스템 메뉴에서 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)가 켜기로 설정되어 있는지 확인하세요. (메뉴 → 시스템 → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)) Anynet+ 기기를 다시 검색하세요. HDMI 케이블로만 Anynet+ 기기를 연결할 수 있습니다. HDMI 케이블로 TV와 연결되었는지 확인하세요. Anynet+ 기능을 지원하지 않는 HDMI 케이블도 있을 수 있습니다. 전원이 차단되거나 HDMI 케이블 연결이 끊겨 연결이 종료되면, 기기 검색을 다시 실행하세요. TV 음향이 리시버를 통해 출력되지 않아요. 옵티칼 케이블을 사용하여 TV와 리시버를 연결하세요. ARC 기능을 사용하면 HDMI 입력 2 (ARC) 단자를 통해 디지털 음향을 출력할 수 있으며, ARC 기능을 지원하는 오디오 리시버에 TV를 연결한 경우에만 작동 할 수 있습니다. AllShare Play TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! 파일이 재생되지 않아요. 이런 현상은 콘텐츠의 비트레이트가 높아서 생기는 현상입니다. 일반적인 콘텐츠는 재생되지만, 일부는 재생이 원활하지 않을 수 있습니다. 스마트 허브 TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! 애플리케이션 콘텐츠가 영어로만 나와요. 설정된 언어를 바꿀 수 없나요? 애플리케이션 콘텐츠 언어는 사용자 인터페이스 언어와 다를 수 있습니다. 서비스 제공자에 따라 언어를 바꿀 수 있습니다. 애플리케이션이 작동하지 않아요. 서비스 제공자에게 확인하세요. 애플리케이션 서비스 제공 업체의 홈페이지에서 도움말을 참고하세요. 네트워크 오류가 발생했을 때, 설정 메뉴만 사용 가능해요. 네트워크 연결에 문제가 발생했다면, 인터넷 연결에 필요한 설정 메뉴를 제외한 다른 기능은 사용에 제한이 있을 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 83 2012-09-04 9:24:2684 웹브라우저 1 웹브라우저를 선택하세요. 웹브라우저는 컴퓨터와는 다르게 표시될 수 있습니다. 2 웹브라우저는 자바 응용프로그램과 호환되지 않습니다. 3 파일은 다운로드할 수 없습니다. 저장되지 않으며, 오류 메시지가 나타납니다. 4 특정 웹 사이트나 특정 기업에 의해 운영되는 웹브라우저는 접속이 차단될 수 있습니다. 5 플래시 동영상의 재생은 제한될 수 있습니다. 6 온라인 결재를 위한 전자상거래는 지원되지 않습니다. 7 페이지 일부분만을 스크롤 할 수 있는 웹 페이지에서 스크롤하게 되면, 문자의 손상을 가져올 수 있습니다. 8 ActiveX는 지원하지 않습니다. 9 일부 옵션은 링크 컨트롤 모드에서 접근할 수 없습니다. (포인터 컨트롤 모드로 전환하면 접근할 수 있습니다.) 10지원되는 폰트의 수가 제한되기 때문에 특정 문자는 보이지 않을 수 있습니다. 11 웹 페이지가 열리고 있는 중에는 원격 명령에 대한 응답이나 화면 표시가 지연될 수 있습니다. 12웹 페이지의 로딩은 일부 운영체제에서 지연되거나 중지될 수 있습니다. 13복사 및 붙여 넣기는 지원하지 않습니다. 14이메일이나 간단한 메시지를 작성할 경우, 일부 기능(폰트의 크기나 색상 변경)은 지원되지 않을 수 있습니다. 15저장할 수 있는 즐겨 찾기와 접속 기록의 수는 제한됩니다. 16동시에 열 수 있는 창의 최대 개수는 검색 조건이나 TV 모델에 따라 다릅니다. 17웹을 탐색하는 속도는 네트워크 환경에 따라 다릅니다. 18웹브라우저에서 동영상이 재생되면, 동시화면 기능은 자동으로 꺼집니다. 동시화면 기능의 중지 후에 동영상은 재생을 시작하지 않을 수 있으며, 웹 페이지를 새로 고침 해야 가능합니다. 19웹브라우저는 MP3 음악 파일만 재생 가능합니다. 20즐겨 찾기를 가져오거나 내보내는 기능은 특정 형식의 즐겨 찾기 파일과 호환됩니다. (호환되는 형식: Netscape-bookmarkfile- 1) 21즐겨 찾기를 가져오거나 내보내기 할 때, 폴더 구조는 포함하지 않습니다. 22 TV에 연결된 USB 기기에 즐겨찾기 파일을 내보낼 경우, 즐겨찾기 파일은 "Samsung SmartTV Bookmark” 폴더에 저장됩니다. 23현재 시간이 설정되어 있지 않으면, 히스토리 정보는 저장되지 않습니다. (메뉴 → 시스템 → 시간 설정 → 현재 시간) 24웹 사이트를 방문한 기록은 최근 순으로 저장되며, 가장 오래된 순서에 따라 삭제됩니다. 25특정 동영상이나 음악 콘텐츠는 지원되는 동영상/ 오디오 코덱 형식에 따라 플래시가 재생되는 동안 재생되지 않을 수 있습니다. 26동영상 창 안에서 화면 밝기의 갑작스런 변화는 정지된 화면의 주변 밝기에 영향을 줄 수 있습니다. (PDP TV에만 해당) 27쿼티 키패드 화면을 사용하면 동시화면은 자동으로 꺼집니다. (URL 입력 제외) [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 84 2012-09-04 9:24:2685 5. 기타 기능 지원 자막 및 AllShare Play 형식 자막 외부 - MPEG-4 timed text (.ttxt) - SAMI (.smi) - SubRip (.srt) - SubViewer (.sub) - Micro (.sub or .txt) - SubStation Alpha (.ssa) - Advanced SubStation Alpha (.ass) - Powerdivx (.psb) 내부 ● Xsub 컨테이너: AVI ● SubStation Alpha 컨테이너: MKV ● Advanced SubStation Alpha 컨테이너: MKV ● SubRip 컨테이너: MKV ● MPEG-4 timed text 컨테이너: MP4 지원되는 이미지 해상도 파일 확장자 형식 해상도 *.jpg *.jpeg JPEG 15360 x 8640 *.png PNG 1920 x 1080 *.bmp BMP 1920 x 1080 *.mpo MPO 15360 x 8640 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 85 2012-09-04 9:24:2686 지원되는 음악 파일 형식 파일 확장자 형식 코덱 참고 .mp3 MPEG MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 *.m4a *.mpa *.aac MPEG4 AAC *.flac FLAC FLAC 탐색 (점프) 기능은 지원하지 않습니다. 2채널까지 지원합니다. *.ogg OGG Vorbis 2채널까지 지원합니다. *.wma WMA WMA WMA 9, 10 Pro는 5.1 채널과 M2 프로필까지 지원합니다. (M0의 LBR 모드 제외) 동영상 코덱 파일 확장자 컨테이너 비디오 해상도 프레임 속도 (fps) 비트레이트 (Mbps) 오디오 코덱 *.avi *.mkv *.asf *.wmv *.mp4 *.3gp *.vro *.mpg *.mpeg *.ts *.tp *.trp *.mov *.flv *.vob *.svi *.m2ts *.mts *.divx AVI MKV ASF MP4 3GP VRO VOB PS TS DIVX 3.11/4.x/5.x/6.x 1920 x 1080 6 - 30 30 AC3 LPCM ADMPCM(IMA, MS) AAC HE-AAC WMA DD+ MPEG(MP3) DTS Core G.711(A-Law, μ-Law) MPEG4 SP/ASP H.264 BP/MP/HP Motion JPEG 640 x 480 8 Window Media Video v9 MPEG2 1920 x 1080 30 MPEG1 VP6 640 x 480 4 *.webm WebM VP8 1920 x 1080 6 - 30 8 Vorvis [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 86 2012-09-04 9:24:2787 5. 기타 기능 기타 제한사항 ■ 위 지원 코덱 중 일부 콘텐츠에 문제가 있는 경우 지원하지 않습니다. ■ 표준 비트 전송률/프레임 속도가 표에 나온 초당 프레임 속도보다 높으면 콘텐츠의 음향 또는 동영상이 작동하지 않습니다. ■ 색인 표에 오류가 있으면 찾기(건너뛰기) 기능이 지원되지 않습니다. ■ 네트워크 연결을 통해 비디오를 재생하면, 파일이 원활하게 재생되지 않을 수 있습니다. ■ 동영상의 비트레이트가 10Mbps를 초과하면 메뉴가 나타나는 데 시간이 오래 걸립니다. ■ 일부 USB/디지털 카메라 기기는 플레이어와 호환되지 않을 수 있습니다. 비디오 디코더 ● H.264, Level 4.1까지 지원합니다. ● H.264 FMO / ASO / RS, VC1 SP / MP / AP L4는 지원하지 않습니다. ● VP8, VP6를 제외한 모든 비디오 코덱의 경우: - 1280 x 720 이하: 최대 60 프레임 - 1280 x 720 이상: 최대 30 프레임 ● GMC는 지원하지 않습니다. ● SVAF 위/아래와 좌/우만을 지원합니다. 오디오 디코더 ● WMA 9, 10 Pro는 5.1 채널과 M2 프로필까지 지원합니다. (M0의 LBR 모드 제외) ● WMA 무손실 오디오는 지원하지 않습니다. ● Vorbis가 Webm 컨테이너에 있는 경우, 2 채널까지 지원합니다. 도난 방지용 켄싱턴 잠금 장치 켄싱턴 잠금 장치는 공공 장소에서 사용할 때 시스템을 물리적으로 고정하는 장치입니다 무게가 무거워 옮길 수 없는 물건에 케이블을 감은 후에 TV뒤의 캔싱턴 슬롯에 잠금 장치를 끼우세요. 켄싱턴 잠금 장치의 모양과 잠금 방법은 TV모델에 따라 다를 수 있습니다. 정확한 지침을 확인하려면 잠금 장치에 동봉된 사용설명서를 참조하세요. TV 뒤면에서 “K” 아이콘을 찾으세요. 켄싱턴 슬롯은 “K” 아이콘 옆에 있습니다. 제품을 잠그려면 다음 단계를 따르세요. 1 책상이나 의자같이 무겁고 고정된 물건에 켄싱턴 잠금 장치 케이블을 감으세요. 2 켄싱턴 잠금 장치 케이블의 고리쪽 끝 부분으로 잠금 장치쪽 끝 부분을 밀어 넣으세요. 3 제품의 켄싱턴 슬롯에 잠금 장치를 끼우세요. 4 잠금 장치를 잠그세요. ■ 이 내용은 일반적인 지침입니다. 정확한 지침을 확인하려면 잠금 장치에 동봉된 사용설명서를 참조하세요. ■ 잠금 장치는 별도로 구매해야 합니다. ■ 켄싱턴 잠금 장치 슬롯의 위치는 TV 모델에 따라 다를 수 있습니다. 1 2 <옵션> [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 87 2012-09-04 9:24:2788 라이선스 정보 DivX® 인증 제품으로 프리미엄 콘텐츠를 포함한 최대 HD 1080p DivX® 비디오 재생을 보증합니다. DivX®, DivX Certified® 및 관련 로고는 Rovi Coporation 또는 자회사의 상표이며 라이센스 계약 하에 사용됩니다. DivX 비디오에 관하여 DivX®는 Rovi Coporation의 자회사인 Dvix, LLC.에서 개발한 디지털 비디오 포맷입니다. 본 제품은 DivX에서 공식 인증한 제품으로 DivX 비디오를 재생할 수 있습니다. 자세한 정보 및 DviX 영상 변환 소프트웨어를 원하면 홈페이지(www.divx.com)에 방문하길 바랍니다. DivX Video-On-Demand에 관하여 DivX Video-On-Demand(VOD) 영화를 재생하기 위하여, 반드시 본 DivX Certified® 제품을 등록하십시오. 먼저 제품 설정 메뉴의 DivX VOD 섹션에서 등록 코드를 확인한 후, 제품 등록 절차 진행 시에 위와 동일한 코드 값을 입력하세요. DivX VOD와 제품 등록 절차에 대한 상세한 정보를 원하시면 웹 사이트 www.divx.com/vod에 방문하시기 바랍니다. TheaterSound HD, SRS and the symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. 돌비 래버러토리스의 허가를 얻어 제조한 제품입니다. 돌비 및 더블 D 심볼은 돌비 래버러토리스의 상표입니다. Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS 2.0+Digital Out is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. ⓒ DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. 오픈 소스 라이선스 사용고지 오픈소스를 사용한 제품의 경우, 오픈소스 라이선스는 제품 메뉴에서 확인하실 수 있습니다. The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 88 2012-09-04 9:24:2889 5. 기타 기능 화면 조정 메뉴 (OSD: On Screen Display) 구조 화면 화면 모드 ● 선명한 화면 ● 표준 화면 ● 최적 화면 (LED TV에만 해당) / 편안한 화면 (PDP TV에만 해당) ● 영화 화면 ● 동영상 모드 백라이트 조정 (LED TV) 패널 밝기 조정 (PDP TV) 명암 밝기 선명도 색농도 색상(녹/적) 화면 조정 ● 화면 크기 ● 위치 선택 입체영상 ● 입체 영상 모드 ● 3D 시점 ● 입체감 ● 좌/우 영상 변경 ● 3D 화면 최적화 (LED TV에만 해당) 고급 설정 ● 자동 명암 조정 ● 블랙 톤 조정 ● 피부색 조정 ● 색상 보정 기능 ● 색 재현 범위 (LED 5500 모델 미지원) ● 화이트 밸런스 ● 10p 화이트 밸런스 (LED 5500, PDP 550 모델 미지원) ● 감마 ● 전문가 패턴 (LED 5500, PDP 550 모델 미지원) ● xvYCC (LED 5500, PDP 550 모델 미지원) ● 모션 라이팅 부가 설정 ● 바탕색 조정 ● 화면 잡음 제거 ● 동영상 잡음 제거 ● HDMI 블랙 레벨 ● 필름 모드 ● Auto Motion Plus (LED 6350 모델 이상 지원) ● 빠른 영상 모드 (LED TV에만 해당) 화면 초기화 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 89 2012-09-04 9:24:2990 음향 채널 네트워크 DTV 채널 선택 ● 일반 방송 ● 유선 방송 자동 채널 선택 3D 채널 보기 채널 미세 조정 네트워크 설정 네트워크 상태 Wi-Fi 다이렉트 소프트 AP ● 소프트 AP ● 보안키 AllShare 설정 장치명 음향 모드 ● 표준으로 들을 때 ● 음악을 들을 때 ● 영화를 볼 때 ● 뉴스를 들을 때 ● 실버 음향 효과 ● SRS TruSurround HD ● SRS TruDialog ● 이퀄라이저 방송 음성 설정 ● 선호 언어 ● 스테레오 설정 ● 음성 다중 SPDIF 출력 ● 오디오 형식 ● 지연시간 조정 스피커 설정 ● 스피커 선택 ● 자동 음량 음향 초기화 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 90 2012-09-04 9:24:3091 5. 기타 기능 시스템 초기 설정 시간 설정 ● 현재 시간 ● 취침 예약 ● 켜짐 시간 예약 ● 꺼짐 시간 예약 메뉴 언어 ● 한국어 ● English 장치 관리자 ● 키보드 설정 ● 마우스 설정 ● SoundShare 설정 에코 절전 설정 ● 절전 모드 ● 에코 센서 ● 무신호 전원 끄기 ● 자동 전원 끄기 자막 ● 자막 ● 자막 모드 ● 자막 표기 설정 데이터 서비스 자동 실행 ● 끄기 ● 켜기 보안 설정 ● 채널 잠금 기능 ● 비밀번호 변경 동시 화면 ● 동시 화면 설정 ● 채널 ● 화면 크기 ● 위치 선택 ● 음향 선택 화면 보호 (PDP TV에만 해당) ● 화소이동 ● 스크롤 ● 여백 채움 화면 보호 시간 (LED TV에만 해당) 일반 설정 ● 게임 모드 ● BD Wise ● 메뉴 투명도 ● 동작음 ● 패널 키 잠금 ● 부팅 로고 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) ● Anynet+(HDMI-CEC) ● 자동 꺼짐 ● 리시버 듣기 DivX® 주문형 비디오 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 91 2012-09-04 9:24:3092 고객지원 스마트 허브 e-설명서 자가 진단 ● 화질 테스트 ● 음질 테스트 ● 디지털 신호 정보 ● 초기화 ● 문제 해결 소프트웨어 업데이트 ● USB로 업그레이드 ● 인터넷으로 업그레이드 ● 방송 신호로 업그레이드 ● 저장된 파일 사용 ● 대기모드 업그레이드 고객지원 정보 원격 진단 스마트 허브 채널 Samsung Apps 웹브라우저 TV/외부입력 패밀리 스토리 AllShare Play 방송 안내 피트니스 SKype 예약 관리 키즈 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 92 2012-09-04 9:24:30 E-MANUALPreference Feature • Connecting to the Network 106 • Setting up the Wired Network 121 • Setting up the Wireless Network 133 • Managing the Network Connected Devices 159 • Setting the Time 168 • Setting the Parental Controls 179 • Economical Solutions 184 • Picture In Picture (PIP) 188 • Using the TV with a Keyboard and a Mouse 193 • Connecting to the TV with a Samsung Audio Device 200 • Other Features 203 • Support Menu 224 Contents • Using the Channel Menu 1 • Memorizing Channels 44 • Other Features 49 Basic Feature • Changing the Preset Picture Mode 51 • Adjusting Picture Settings 55 • Changing the Picture Size 60 • Changing the Picture Options 69 • Using the TV with Your PC 88 • Changing the Preset Sound Mode 92 • Adjusting Sound Settings 94 ContentsAdvanced Features • Using the 3D function 248 • Smart Hub 263 • Customizing the Home Screen 282 • Using Samsung Apps 314 • Search 324 • Smart Tip NAVER 332 • Family Story 343 • Fitness 354 • Kids 360 • Web Browser 375 • Skype 403 • Using the Air Conditioner by the TV application 406 • AllShare Play 413 • Using the AllShare Play 433 • My List (In AllShare Play) 437 • Videos (In AllShare Play) 445 • Photos (In AllShare Play) 462 • Music (In AllShare Play) 477 • Recorded TV (AllShare Play) 490 • Timeshift 504 • Using the DLNA Function 517 • Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 527Other Information • Troubleshooting 544 • Picture (Troubleshooting) 546 • Sound (Troubleshooting) 564 • 3D (Troubleshooting) 568 • Antenna (Air / Cable) Connection (Troubleshooting) 571 • PC Connection (Troubleshooting) 574 • Network Connection (Troubleshooting) 575 • Others (Troubleshooting) 577 • Timer Recording / Timeshift Mode (Troubleshooting) 590 • Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) (Troubleshooting) 596 • AllShare Play (Troubleshooting) 604 • Smart Hub (Troubleshooting) 605 • Web Browser (Troubleshooting) 607 • Supported Subtitle and AllShare Play file formats 615 • Anti-theft Kensington Lock 624 • License 628Using the Channel Menu Channel ™ → Channel Using this function, you can add or delete channels, set favorite channels, edit the channel name for analog broadcasts. ● All Shows all channels. ● Added Ch. ChannelShows all added channels. These are the channels that appear when you press the 채널목록 button on your remote. ● Favorites 1 – Favorites 5 Shows all favorite channels, in up to five groups. Each group has separate channels. If the Highlight located in the Favorites 1 – Favorites 5 category, you can change the name of category by selecting b using your remote.● Recently Viewed Shows the most recently viewed channels. ● Mostly Viewed Shows the most frequently viewed channels. Using the colored and function buttons with the Channel – b Delete Delete the selected channel(s).– ` Information Displays details of the selected channel. – k Page Scrolls the channel list to the next or previous page. – E Select / Deselect Select or deselect a channel. – T Tools Displays the option menu. – R ReturnReturn to the previous menu. Using the Tools menu with Channel ● Add / Delete Delete a channel from or add a channel to the Channel list. To add a channel in Channel, follow these steps: 1. On the Channel screen, select the All category.2. Select a grayed out channel in the All category. A c mark appears to the left of the channel. N You can select more than one channel. N If you select the selected channel again, a c mark disappears. N A gray colored channel indicates the channel has been deleted. 3. Open the Tools menu using your remote.4. Select the Add. The message Added the selected channel(s). appears, and then select OK. N The Add menu option only appears for deleted channel. N All deleted channels will be shown on the All category. You add channels back to the Added Ch. category on the All category. To delete a channel in Channel, follow these steps: 1. If you want to delete a channel, select a category of the channel. 2. Select a channel in the category. A c mark appears to the left of the channel. N You can select more than one channel. N If you select the selected channel again, a c mark disappears. 3. Open the Tools menu using your remote. 4. Select the Delete. The message Deleted the selected channel(s). appears, and then select OK. N You can delete the selected channel immediately by selecting b using your remote. N When you delete a channel in the Recently Viewed, Mostly Viewed or Favorites category, the channel will disappear from the category list. But, the channel is not deleted. ● Edit Favorites Sets channels you watch frequently as favorites, or removes a channel from list of favorites using the Tools menu. To set channels as favorites, follow these steps: 1. Select the All or Added Ch. category. 2. Select a channel in the category. A c mark appears to the left of the channel. N You can select more than one channel. N If you select the selected channel again, a c mark disappears. 3. Open the Tools menu using your remote. 4. Select the Edit Favorites. The Edit Favorites screen appears. 5. Select a using your remote. The selected channel will be moved to the favorite group. N Also, you can select a channel in the Edit Favorites screen. N You can add a favorite channel to any one of the groups. To change favorites group, select } using your remote. Each time you select }, a favorites group will be changed. 6. When done, select OK. The channel is made as a favorite and is assigned to the favorite group you selected.N The TV displays the “ ” symbol next to the channel, indicating it is a favorite. Using the colored and function buttons with the Edit Favorites ● When the Highlight located in the Added Ch., you can use these options: – a Add Add selected channels to the favorites group. – } Change Fav. Change the favorites group. Each time you select } using your remote, a favorites group will be changed. – Ÿ Go to You can enter a channel number immediately using your remote. – R Return Return to the previous menu.● When the Highlight located in the favorites group, you can use these options: – a Delete Delete the selected channel. N You can select more than one channel and delete them at the same time. A selected channel is displayed with the c mark. – b Change order Change the favorites group list order. – E Done: Change order is completed. N Available only when select the Change order. – { Copy Copy a selected channel to other favorites groups. – } Change Fav. Change the favorites group. Each time you select } using your remote, a favorites group will be changed. – Ÿ Go to You can enter a channel number immediately using your remote. – R Return Return to the previous menu. To remove a channel from the list of favorites, follow these steps: 1. Select the favorites group category.2. Select a channel in the selected favorites group. A c mark appears to the left of the channel. N You can select more than one channel. N If you select the selected channel again, a c mark disappears. 3. Open the Tools menu using your remote. 4. Select Delete. The message Do you want to delete the selected item(s)?appears. 5. Select OK. The message Deleted the selected item(s). appears. N You can delete the selected channel from the list of favorites group immediately by selecting b using your remote. ● Lock Lock enables you to restrict your children from viewing a specific channel N If you select On for the Channel Lockoption, you can use the Lock option. N This function is not supported when you watch tv through an external device (e.g. Set-top box) connected with your TV via HDMI, Component, or AV port. N The default PIN number for a new TV set is “0-0-0-0”. ● Rename Channel (Appears only if you have selected an analog channel.) Lets you assign a name of up to five characters to an analog channel. ● Select All / Deselect All Select all channels in the list. / Deselect all channels you selected. Display Icons Used in the Channel screens : An analog channel. : A favorite channel. : A locked channel.Schedule Manager ™→ Schedule Manager You can set the Schedule Viewing or Schedule Recording on a day and at a time of your choice. N You must set the current time first using the Time → Clock function in System menu to use this function. To use the Schedule Viewing, follow these steps:1. On the Schedule Manager screen, select a using your remote. 2. Set Antenna, Channel, Repeat, and Start Time. ● Antenna Select the desired broadcasting signal. You can select DTV Air, DTV Cable, Air and Cable. ● Channel Select the desired channel. N You can only select memorized channels. ● Repeat Select Once, Manual, Sat~Sun, Mon~Fri or Everyday. If you select Manual, you can set the day you want. N The c mark indicates a day you’ ve selected. Date: You can set a desired date. N The Date is available only when you select Once in Repeat.● Start Time You can set the start time you want. 3. When done, select OK. The selected channel is scheduled for viewing. N On the Schedule Manager screen, you can check a list of Schedule Viewing. Schedule Recording (digital channels only) 1. Select a using the remote control in the Schedule Manager screen. Select Schedule Recording. N It is recommended connecting a USB HDD (min. 5,400rpm) for recording TV programs. However, RAID type USB HDDs are not supported. N Only USB devices that have completed the device performance test can be used for recording. 2. Set the Antenna, Channel, Repeat, Date, Start Time and the End Time. ● Antenna You can only select DTV Air, DTV Cable ● Channel Select a digital channel. ● Repeat You can select a period from among Once, Manual, Sat~Sun, Mon~Fri or Everyday. The selected weekday is displayed with the c mark. Date: You can set a date. N The Date is only available when you select Once in the Repeat option. ● Start Time You can set the Start Time. ● End Time You can set the End Time. 3. When you’ve completed all the settings, select OK. The recording of the selected channel will start at the selected time. N In the Schedule Manager screen, you can check the list of Schedule Recording items. N You can record up to 360 minutes. N You can check the recorded list in the Result List in the Schedule Manager screen or by selecting ™ → AllShare Play → Recorded TV.To delete an item in a list of scheduled viewing and Schedule Recording, follow these steps: 1. On the Schedule Manager screen, highlight an item you want to delete. 2. Open the Tools menu using your remote. 3. Select Cancel Schedules. The Cancel selected list(s)? message appears. 4. Select Yes. The selected schedule will be canceled.N Select an item in the scheduled recording list, and then press the 정보표시` button to display detailed information. You can modify or cancels the scheduled viewing and recording schedule in the detailed information window. Using the Tools menu with scheduled item ● Edit Schedule: Changes the details about the scheduled viewing and recording schedules. ● Information: You can check details about the program is scheduled viewing and recording schedules. And you can cancel and change the scheduled viewing and recording schedules. ● Edit mode: Select the items you want to cancel in the Scheduled lists. The c mark appears in the check box. ● Cancel Schedules: Cancels the scheduled viewing and recording schedules. ● Return: Return to the previous screen. Channel List Using this function, you can view channel list, program information, favorite channel, and manage schedules of timer viewing. 1. Press the 채널목록 button on your remote. The Channel List screen is displayed immediately. 2. Change a channel or channel list mode. ● Added Ch. Shows all added channels. ● Favorites 1 ~ Favorites 5 Shows all favorite channels, in up to five groups. Each group has a separate screen. N The TV displays favorite groups only if you have added favorites using Edit Favorites. Using the colored and function buttons with the Channel List ● a Antenna Switches the mode and display between Air and Cable. ● { Program View / Channel View For digital channels, switches the display between Program View and Channel View.When you select a digital channel in Channel List, select once to display a list of programs on that channel. select again to re-display the Channel View. ● l r CH Mode / Channel On Channel View screen, Toggles between the Favorites list (if you have added favorites using Edit Favorites) and the Added Ch. channel list. / On { Program View screen, you can view the program information of other channel without changing channel. ● E Watch Displays the channel you selected. If you select the following program in the Program View, you can select the Timer Viewing or Schedule Recording function, and you can also select the Cancel Schedules function in the case of a scheduled program. (for digital channels only). ● k Page Scrolls the Channel List to the next or previous page. Display Icons Used in the Channel List screens : An analog channel. : A reserved program. : A scheduled to be recorded Program. : A locked channel. Using the Schedule Viewing or Schedule Recording in Channel List (digital channels only) You can use the { Program View in Channel List to schedule a digital channel program for viewing. 1. Press the 채널목록 button on your remote. The Channel List screen appears. 2. Select a desired digital channel. 3. Select { using your remote. The TV displays program list of the selected channel. 4. Select a desired program in the program list, and then select Information using your remote. 5. On the Information screen, select the Schedule Viewing or Schedule Recording. The selected program is set to Schedule Viewing or Schedule Recording. N If you want to cancel the Schedule Viewing or Schedule Recording, follow Steps 1 through 4, and then select the Cancel Schedules. Program Information N This is only possible for digital channels. Press the 정보표시` button on your remote. You can check the information about the current program or the next program.Using buttons in the Program Information ● a Information You can use the Watching functions for programs you are currently viewing. If you select the next program, you can use the Schedule Viewing functions. N For more detailed information about Record and Schedule Recording, refer to "Recorded TV (AllShare Play)". ● l r You can check the information about the next program which will be broadcast after the current program. N The next program is only displayed if the current time is set and the relevant program information exists. Channel status icon : A reserved program. : A scheduled to be recorded Program.Memorizing Channels Antenna Menu → Channel → Antenna Before your television can memorize the available channels, you must select your TV's signal source, Air (using an antenna) or Cable. Select Air or Cable. Selecting Air or Cable 1. Select the Antenna menu.2. Select the program type received by the TV. Auto Program Menu → Channel → Auto Program The Auto Program function memorizes all channels that are available over the air or through your cable system and adds them to the Channel list. Starting the Auto Program operation1. Go to the Auto Program menu. 2. Select the Start button to start the Auto Program function. 3. Select OK when the Auto Program operation is completed. View 3D Channels Menu → Channel → View 3D Channels for LED 5500 Series : This function is not supported. Set whether to watch 3D channels or not. If you cannot find the 3D channels, set the 3D channels using the Auto Program function. If the current program supports 3D channels, an announcement appears at the bottom of the screen. Switch the channel according to the announcement to watch 3D channels. Select Off if you do not want to watch 3D channels. N If the View 3D Channels is in the Offstate, 3D channels are not displayed in the Channel List and Guide.Other Features Fine Tune Menu → Channel → Fine Tune (analog channels only) If the signal is weak or distorted, fine tune the channel manually. Scroll to the left or right until the image is clear. N Fine tuned channels that have been saved are marked with an asterisk “*” on the right-hand side of the channel number in the channel banner. N To reset fine-tuning, select the channel, select Fine Tune, and then select Reset on the Fine Tune screen.Changing the Preset Picture Mode Picture Mode Menu → Picture → Picture Mode Picture modes apply preset adjustments to the picture. N When your TV is connected to a PC via the HDMI to DVI cable, you can only select Entertain and Standard. ● Dynamic Brightens the screen. Suitable for a Basic Featurebright room. You can see the picture more sharply. ● Standard Suitable for a normal environment. ● Natural for LED TV Select this mode to view pictures in a natural mode as you actually see them and in a quality comfortable for your eyes. ● Movie Select this mode when you are watching a movie. You can view the picture comfortably even when the ambient illumination is dark or your eyes are strained. ● Entertain Select this mode when you are playing a game or you are watching a video. You can view pictures with lots of movement. N Only available when the TV is connected to a PC via the HDMI to DVI cable.Adjusting Picture Settings Backlight for LED TV / Cell Light for PDP TV Menu → Picture → Backlight / Cell Light Adjust backlight brightness to suit your preference. 20 is the brightest setting. Contrast Menu → Picture → Contrast Adjust contrast level. Values closer to 100 mean bigger light/dark contrast.Brightness Menu → Picture → Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the screen. Values closer to 100 mean brighter screen. Not as effective as Backlight / Cell Light. Sharpness Menu → Picture → Sharpness Adjust sharpness of picture. Values closer to 100 mean a sharper image. Color Menu → Picture → Color Adjust color saturation. Values closer to 100 mean more intense colors. Tint (G/R) Menu → Picture → Tint (G/R) Adjust tint levels for green and red. Values closer to 100 mean greater intensity for that color. To adjust picture quality, follow these steps: 1. Select an option you want to adjust. When you select an option, a slider screen appears. 2. Adjust the option value using your remote. N When you make change to option value, the OSD will be adjusted accordingly.N When your TV is connected to a PC via the HDMI to DVI cable, Color and Tint (G/R) is not available. N You can adjust and store Settings for each external device connected to the TV. N Lowering picture brightness reduces power consumption.Changing the Picture Size Screen Adjustment Menu → Picture → Screen Adjustment Using this function, you can make change to various picture size and aspect ratio options. ● Picture Size If you have a cable box or satellite receiver, it may have its own set of screen sizes as well. However, we highly recommend you use your TV's 16:9 mode most of the time. 16:9: Sets the picture to the 16:9 wide screen format. Zoom1: Provides moderate magnification of the picture. Sides, top, and bottom are cut off. Zoom2: Provides larger magnification of the picture. Sides, top, and bottom are cut off. Wide Fit: Enlarges the aspect ratio of the picture so it fits the entire screen. N Available with HD 1080i / 720p signals in 16:9 mode. 4:3: Sets the picture to basic (4:3) mode. N Do not set your TV to 4:3 format for a long time. The borders displayed on the left and right, or top and bottom of the screen may cause image retention (screen burn) which is not covered by the warranty.Screen Fit: When your TV inputs Digital channel(1080i, 1080p) or HDMI (720p / 1080i / 1080p) or Component (1080i / 1080p) signals, displays the full image without any cut-off. Smart View 1: Reduces the 16:9 picture by 50%. for LED TV Smart View 2: Reduces the 16:9 picture by 25%. for LED TV N Smart View 1 is enabled only in HDMI mode.N Smart View 2 is enabled only in HDMI or DTV mode. N The picture size can vary depending on the input resolution when you play content from Videos in AllShare. ● Position Adjusts the picture position. Position is only available if Picture Size is set to Zoom1, Zoom2, Wide Fit or Screen Fit. N In DTV mode, Position is not available when Picture Size is set to Screen Fit.To use the Position function after selecting Zoom1, Zoom2, Wide Fit, Screen Fit follow these steps: 1. Select the Position. 2. On the Position screen, select Position, and then move the picture to position you want using your remote. 3. When done, select Position again, and then select Close. N To reset the picture position, select Reset.Picture Sizes available by Input Source: – ATV, AV: 16:9, Zoom1, Zoom2, 4:3 – Component (480i, 480p): 16:9, Zoom1, Zoom2, 4:3 – Component (720p): 16:9, Wide Fit, 4:3 – Component (1080i, 1080p): 16:9, Wide Fit, 4:3, Screen Fit – DTV (720p): 16:9, Wide Fit, 4:3, Smart View 2 for LED TV – DTV (1080i, 1080p): 16:9, Wide Fit, 4:3, Screen Fit, Smart View 2 for LED TV – HDMI (720p, 1080i, 1080p): 16:9, Wide Fit, 4:3, Screen Fit, Smart View 1 for LED TV , Smart View 2 for LED TV N Depending on the input source, the picture size options may vary. N The available items may differ depending on the selected mode. N HD (High Definition): 16:9 - 1080i/1080p (1920x1080), 720p (1280x720) N You can adjust and store settings for each external device you have connected to an input on the TV.Changing the Picture Options Advanced Settings Menu → Picture → Advanced Settings Using this function, you can configure advanced picture settings to create your preferred picture. N Advanced Settings is available only when the Picture Mode is set to Standard or Movie mode. N When connecting a PC using the HDMI-DVI cable, you can only make changes to White Balance and Gamma. ● Dynamic Contrast Adjusts the screen contrast. ● Black Tone Darker settings make blacks look darker. ● Flesh Tone Adjusts the amount of red in skin tones. ● RGB Only Mode Displays the Red, Green and Blue colors so you can make fine adjustments to hue and saturation. ● Color Space Adjusts the range and variety of colors (the color space) available to create images. N To adjust Color, Red, Green, Blue and Reset, set the Color Space to Custom. for LED 5500 Series : This function is not supported ● White BalanceAdjusts the color temperature of the picture so that white objects look white and the overall color of the picture looks natural. R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset: Adjusts each color’s (red, green, blue) darkness. R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: Adjusts each color’s (red, green, blue) brightness. Reset: Resets the White Balance to it’s default settings. ● 10p White Balance for LED 5500 Series and PDP 550 Series : This function is not supported Controls the white balance in 10 point intervals by adjusting the red, green, and blue brightness. N Available when the Picture Mode is set to Movie and when the external input is set to all input. N Some external devices may not support this function. Interval: Select interval to adjust.Red: Adjust the red level. Green: Adjust the green level. Blue: Adjust the blue level. Reset: Resets the 10p White Balance to its default settings. ● Gamma Adjusts the primary color intensity. ● Expert Pattern for LED 5500, PDP 550 Series : This function is not supported. Use the Expert Pattern function to calibrate the picture. If the OSD menu disappears or a menu other than the Picture menu is opened, the TV saves the calibration and the Expert Pattern screen disappears. Off: Turns the Expert Pattern function off. Pattern1: This test screen demonstrates the effect of the display settings on shades of grey and black. Pattern2: This test screen demonstrates the effect of the display settings on colors. N After selecting Pattern1 or Pattern2, you can adjust any of the advanced settings for desired effect. N While the Expert Pattern is running, the TV does not output sound. N Only enabled in DTV, Component, and HDMI modes. ● xvYCC for LED 5500, PDP 550 Series : Thisi function is not supported. Setting xvYCC on increases picture detail and enlarges the color space when you are watching movies input from an external device (e.g. BD/DVD player) connected to the TV’s HDMI or Component IN jacks. N Available only when you set the Picture Mode to Movie and the external input to HDMI or Component. N Some external devices may not support this function. ● Motion LightingWhen on, the TV automatically adjusts the brightness of the screen in response to the brightness of the room. In bright light, the screen brightens. In dim light, the screen dims. N Only available in Standard mode. N This feature is not supported in 3D mode. N When you change the Backlight for LED TV / Cell Light for PDP TV , Contrast or Brightness, the TV sets the Motion Lighting to Off. Picture Options Menu → Picture → Picture Options Using this function, you can configure additional picture settings to suit your preference. N When your TV is connected to a PC via the HDMI to DVI cable, you can only make changes to Color Tone. ● Color ToneYou can control the color temperature. N Warm1 and Warm2 are deactivated when the Picture Mode is set to Dynamic. N You can adjust and store settings for each external device connected to an input on the TV. ● Digital Noise Filter If the broadcast signal received by your TV is weak, you can activate the Digital Noise Filter feature to reduce any static and ghosting that may appear on the screen. Auto Visualization: When changing analog channels, displays signal strength. N When the signal is weak, try all the options until the TV displays the best picture. N Only available for analog channels. N When the bar is green, you are receiving the best possible signal.● MPEG Noise Filter Reduces MPEG noise to provide improved picture quality. ● HDMI Black Level Lets you adjust the screen depth by selecting a black level. N Available only in HDMI mode. ● Film Mode Sets the TV so that it senses and then processes film signals from all sources automatically and adjusts the picture for optimum quality. N Available in TV, AV, Component (480i / 1080i) and HDMI (1080i). ● Auto Motion Plus for LED 6350 Series and above Removes blur and judder from scenes with larger amounts of rapid movement to provide a clearer picture. Blur Reduction: Adjusts the blur reduction level for signals input from all video sources.Judder Reduction: Adjusts the Judder reduction level for signals input from a video source through which you are playing a movie. Reset: Reset the custom settings. N The info screen on your TV displays the resolution and frequency of the incoming video signal (60 Hz). This displayed frequency is not the frequency of the picture the TV is displaying when you have Auto Motion Plus on. N If noise occurs on the screen, please set the Auto Motion Plus to Off. If the Auto Motion Plus is set to Custom, you can control Blur Reduction and Judder Reduction manually and use Reset to reset both to their default settings. N If the Auto Motion Plus is set to Demo, you can compare the difference between a picture with Auto Motion Plus On and Auto Motion Plus Off modes. ● LED Motion Plus for LED TV Removes blur and judder from scenes with large amounts of rapid movement to provide a clearer picture. N Available only when Picture Mode is set to Dynamic, Standard, and Movie. Reset Picture Menu → Picture → Reset PictureResets your current picture mode to its default settings.Using the TV with Your PC Using Your TV as a Computer (PC) Display Entering the Video Settings (Based on Windows 7) For your TV to work properly as a computer display, you must enter the correct video settings. N Depending on your version of Windows and your video card, the procedure on your PC will probably differ slightly from the procedure presented here. N However, the same basic information will apply in most cases. (If not, contact your computer manufacturer or Samsung Dealer.) 1. Click “Control Panel” on the Windows start menu. 2. Click “Appearance and Themes” in the “Control Panel” window. A display dialog box appears. 3. Click “Display”. Another display dialog box appears. 4. Click the “Settings” tab on the display dialog box. – On the Settings tab, set the correct resolution (screen size). The optimal resolution for this TV is 1920 x 1080. – If a vertical-frequency option exists on your display settings dialog box, select “60” or “60 Hz”. Otherwise, just click “OK” and exit the dialog box.Changing the Preset Sound Mode Sound Mode Menu → Sound → Sound Mode Sound modes apply preset adjustments to the sound. N If Speaker Select is set to External Speaker, the Sound Mode is disabled. ● Standard Selects the normal sound mode. ● MusicEmphasizes music over voices. ● Movie Provides the best sound for movies. ● Clear Voice Emphasizes voices over other sounds. ● Amplify Increase the intensity of high-frequency sound to allow a better listening experience for the hearing impaired.Adjusting Sound Settings Sound Effect Menu → Sound → Sound Effect N If Speaker Select is set to External Speaker, the Sound Effect is disabled. N Available only when the Sound Mode is set to Standard. ● SRS TruSurround HD This function provides a virtual 5.1 channel surround sound experience through a pair of speakers using HRTF (Head Related Transfer Function) technology. ● SRS TruDialog This function allows you to increase the intensity of a voice over background music or sound effects so that dialog can be heard more clearly. ● Equalizer The Equalizer displays a series of sliders. Use the arrow buttons to select a slider, and change the slider’s value. To Reset the Equalizer, select the Reset. A popup appears asking if you want to reset, select Yes. To exit, select Close. Balance L/R: Adjusts the balance between the right and left speaker. 100Hz / 300Hz / 1kHz / 3kHz / 10kHz (Bandwidth Adjustment): Adjusts the loudness of specific bandwidth frequencies. Reset: Resets the equalizer to its default settings. Broadcast Audio Options Menu → Sound → Broadcast Audio Options ● Preferred Language (digital channels only) Digital-TV broadcasts can simultaneously transmit many audio tracks (for example, simultaneous translations of the program into foreign languages). You can only select a language from among the ones being broadcasted. ● Auto Stereo Sets the Stereo setting to Auto or Manual. ● Multi-Track Sound The broadcasts can transmit one or more audio tracks. You can select a sound you want to listen from among the ones being broadcasted. N Multi-Track Sound may differ depending on the program being broadcast or broadcast signal. SPDIF Output Menu → Sound → SPDIF Output SPDIF (Sony Philips Digital Interface) provides digital audio output to speakers and various digital devices such as A/V Receivers and Home Theaters which reduces interference and distortion. ● Audio FormatYou can select the Digital Audio output (SPDIF) format. The available Digital Audio output (SPDIF) format may differ depending on the input source. ● Audio Delay Lets you correct timing mismatches between the audio track and the video when you are watching the TV and listening to digital audio output from the TV through an external device such as an AV receiver. When you select the Audio Delay, a slider screen appears. Adjust the option value using your remote (0ms ~ 250ms). Speaker Settings Menu → Sound → Speaker Settings ● Speaker Select If you are listening to the sound track of a broadcast or movie through an external receiver, you may hear a sound echo caused by the difference in decoding speed between the TV’s speakers and the speakers attached to your audio receiver. If this occurs, set the TV to External Speaker. N When the Speaker Select is set to External Speaker, the TV’s speakers are turned off. You will hear sound through the external speakers only. When the Speaker Select is set to TV Speaker, both the TV’s speakers and the external speakers are on. You will hear sound through both. N When the Speaker Select is set to External Speaker, the volume buttons and mute function will not operate and the sound settings will be limited. N If there is no video signal, both the TV’s speakers and the external speakers will be mute. ● Auto Volume You may experience the volume fluctuating each time you change the channel. This function automatically adjusts the volume of all channels to a similar level. Normal: Automatically adjusts the volume when changing to another channel. Night: Automatically decreases the volume. Night mode is useful when watching a program at low volume at night. N To use the volume control of a connected source device, set Auto Volume to Off. A change to the volume control of the connected source device may not be applied if Auto Volume is set to Normal or Night. Reset Sound Menu → Sound → Reset Sound Reset all sound settings to the factory defaults.Connecting to the Network Wired Network Connection There are three ways to attach your TV to your LAN using cable: N For illustrations of the three kinds of wired network connections, see your paper user's manual. – You can attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the LAN port on the back of your TV to an external Preference Featuremodem using a LAN cable. – You can attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the LAN port on the back of your TV to an IP Sharer which is connected to an external modem. Use LAN cable for the connection. – Depending on how your network is configured, you may be able to attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the LAN port on the back of your TV directly to a network wall outlet using a LAN cable. Note that the wall outlet is attached to a modem or router elsewhere in your house. N If your network requires a Dynamic IP address, you should use an ADSL modem or router that supports the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Modems and routers that support DHCP automatically provide the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values your TV needs to access the Internet so you do not have to enter them manually. Most home networks use a Dynamic IP address. N Some networks require a Static IP address. If your network requires a Static IP address, you must enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values manually when you set up the network connection. To get the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values, contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP). N You can use ADSL modems that support DHCP if your network requires a Static IP address. ADSL modems that support DHCP also let you use Static IP addresses. Wireless Network Connection N For illustrations of the three kinds of wired network connections, see your paper user's manual. N for LED 5500, 6350 Series and PDP 550 Series To connect your TV to your network wireless, you need a wireless router or modem and a Samsung Wireless LAN adapter (WIS09ABGNX, WIS12ABGNX), which you connect to your TV’s USB port. Samsung Wireless LAN adapter is sold separately and is offered by selected retailers, Ecommerce sites and Samsungparts.com. You can connect your TV to your LAN through a standard wireless router or modem. This TV supports the IEEE 802.11a/b/g and n communication protocols. Samsung recommends using IEEE 802.11n. When you play video over a network connection, the video may not play smoothly. N To use a wireless network, your TV must be connected to a wireless IP sharer (either a router or a modem). If the wireless IP sharer supports DHCP, your TV can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the wireless network. N Select a channel for the wireless IP sharer that is not currently being used. If the channel set for the wireless IP sharer is currently being used by another device nearby, this will result in interference and communication failure. N Your TV supports only the following wireless network security protocols: – Authentication Mode : WEP, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK – Encryption Type : WEP, TKIP, AES N If you select the Pure High-throughput (Greenfield) 802.11n mode and the Encryption type is set to WEP, TKIP or TKIP AES (WPS2Mixed) on your AP or wireless router, Samsung TVs will not support a connection in compliance with new Wi-Fi certification specifications. N If your wireless router supports WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), you can connect to the network via PBC (Push Button Configuration) or PIN (Personal Identification Number). WPS will automatically configure the SSID and WPA key in either mode.N If your router, modem, or device is not certified, it may not connect to the TV. N Connection Methods: You can set up the wireless network connection in four ways: – Auto Setup (Using the Auto Network Search function) – Manual Setup – WPS(PBC) – Plug & AccessNotice for LED 5500, 6350 Series and PDP 550 Series The picture may appear corrupted or have static for some channels when the TV is connected to the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter. If this occurs, establish a connection using one of the following methods or connect the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter using a USB cable in a place that is not affected by radio interference.● Method 1 for LED 5500 Series and PDP 550 Series : Connecting the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter using the USB right angle adapter. To connect the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter using the USB right angle adapter, follow these steps: 1. Connect the USB right angle adapter to the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter. 2. Connect the other end of the right angle adapter to the USB port.● Method 2 for LED 5500, 6350 Series and PDP 550 Series : Connecting the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter via an extension cable. To connect the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter using the extension cable, follow these steps: 1. Connect the extension cable to the USB port. 2. Connect the extension cable and Samsung Wireless LAN adapter.3. Attach the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter to the back of the TV near the top, using double-sided adhesive tape.Setting up the Wired Network Network Settings Menu → Network → Network Settings Set the wired or wireless network connection to use various Internet services such as Smart Hub, AllShare and perform software upgrades. Automatic Wired Network Setup You can configure your TV's wired network connection automatically when connecting your TV to a network that supports DHCP. N When connecting LAN cable, the screen pop-up appears directly to set wired network. To set up your TV’s wired network connection automatically, follow these steps: 1. Go to the Network Settings screen. (Menu → Network → Network Settings) 2. Select Start. The network test screen appears and verifies the network connection. 3. When the connection has been verified, the You are connected to the Internet. If you have any problems using online services, please contact your Internet Service Provider. message appears.N If the connection process fails, check the LAN port connection. N If the automatic process cannot find the network connection values or if you want to set the connection manually, go to the next section, "Manual Network Setup." Manual Wired Network Setup You can configure your TV's wired network connection manually when connecting your TV to a network that requires a Static IP address. N To get the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values, contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP). To set up your TV's wired network connection manually, follow these steps: 1. Go to the Network Settings screen. (Menu → Network → Network Settings) 2. Select Start. The network connection screen appears and the verification process starts. 3. Select Stop. The verification process stops. Select IP Settings on network connection screen. The IP Settings screen appears. 4. Select the IP Setting, and then set the IP Setting to Enter manually. 5. Go to the IP Address entry field, and then select the IP Address using remote. 6. Enter the first portion of the IP Address (for example, 105) into the first entry field using your remote. When done, go to the next field. 7. Enter the next portion of the IP Address. When done, go to the next field. 8. Repeat the entry process for each field in the IP Address.N If you make a mistake when entering a number, re-enter the number to correct it. 9. When done, go to the Subnet Mask fields. 10. Repeat the same entry process for Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server. 11.When done, select OK. The network test screen appears and the verification process starts. When the connection has been verified, the You are connected to the Internet. If you have any problems using online services, please contact your Internet Service Provider. message appears. Network Status Menu → Network → Network Status You can check the current network and Internet status.When the wired network connection failed... ● No network cable found. – Check that your network cable is plugged in. If it is connected, make sure that the router is turned on; if it is on, try turning if off and on again. ● IP auto setting failed. Try the following to set your IP address automatically. Or set your IP address manually by selecting IP Settings. – Ensure DHCP server is enabled on router and unplug and re-plug-in the router. – Contact your Internet Service Provider for more information. ● Unable to connect to the network. – Try the following: check if your IP address is set correctly in IP Settings. – Contact your Internet Service Provider for more information. ● Connected to your local network, but cannot connect to the Internet.– Check the DNS settings in IP Settings, or contact your Internet Service Provider to access the Internet. ● Network setup complete, but cannot connect to the Internet. – Contact your Internet Service Provider to access the Internet.Setting up the Wireless Network Network Settings Menu → Network → Network Settings Set the wired or wireless network connection to use various Internet services such as Smart Hub, AllShare and perform software upgrades. N for LED 5500, 6350 Series and PDP 550 Series You can use this function when connecting the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter. Automatic Wireless Network Setup Most wireless networks have an optional security system that requires devices that access the network to transmit an encrypted security code called an Access or Security Key. The Security Key is based on a Pass Phrase, typically a word or a series of letters and numbers of a specified length you were asked to enter when you set up wireless security for your wireless network. If you use this method of setting up the network connection, and have a Security Key for your wireless network, you will have to enter the Pass Phrase during the automatic or manual setup process. To set up your TV’s wireless network connection automatically, follow these steps:1. Go to the Network Settings screen. (Menu → Network → Network Settings) 2. Select Start. The network function searches for available wireless networks. When done, it displays a list of the available networks. 3. In the list of networks, select a network you want to connect, and then select Next. N If the wireless router is set to Hidden (Invisible), you have to select Add Network and enter the correct Network Name (SSID) and Security Key to establish the connection. 4. If the Enter security key screen appears, go to step 5. If you select a wireless router that does not have wireless security, go to step 7. 5. To set wireless security for the router, enter the Security Key (Security key or PIN). N You can enter the Security Key (Security key or PIN) using a keyboard screen. Enter the Security Key using your remote. N You should be able to find the Pass Phrase on one of the set up screens you used to set up your router or modem. 6. When done, select Next. The network connection screen appears and the verification process starts. 7. When the connection has been verified, the You are connected to the Internet. If you have any problems using online services, please contact your Internet Service Provider. message appears. N If the network does not accept the Security Key (Security key or PIN), select Retry or select IP Settings to enter the settings manually.N If you want to set up the connection manually, select IP Settings. Then, go to the next section, “Manual Network Setup”. Manual Wireless Network Setup You can configure your TV's wireless network connection manually when connecting your TV to a network that requires a Static IP address or if the automatic connection process has failed.N To get the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values, contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP). To set up your TV's wireless network connection manually, follow these steps: 1. Go to the Network Settings screen. (Menu → Network → Network Settings) 2. Select Start. The network function searches for available wireless networks. When done, it displays a list of the available networks. 3. In the list of networks, select a network you want to connect, and then select Next. N If the wireless router is set to Hidden (Invisible), you have to select Add Network and enter the correct Network Name (SSID) and Security Key to establish the connection. 4. If the Enter security key screen appears, go to step 5. If you select a wireless router that does not have wireless security, go to step 7. 5. To set wireless security for the router, enter the Security Key (Security key or PIN). N You can enter the Security Key (Security key or PIN) using a keyboard screen. Enter the Security Key using your remote. N You should be able to find the Pass Phrase on one of the set up screens you used to set up your router or modem. 6. When done, select Next. The network connection screen appears and the verification process starts. 7. Select Stop. The verification process stops. Select IP Settings on the network connection screen. The IP Settings screen appears. 8. Select the IP Setting, and then set the IP Setting to Enter manually. 9. Go to the IP Address entry field, and then select the IP Address using remote. 10. Enter the first portion of the IP Address (for example, 105) into the first entry field using your remote. When done, go to the next field. 11. Enter the next portion of the IP Address. When done, go to the next field. 12. Repeat the entry process for each field in the IP Address. N If you make a mistake when entering a number, re-enter the number to correct it. 13.When done, go to the Subnet Mask fields. 14. Repeat the same entry process for Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server. 15.When done, select OK. The network connection screen appears and the verification process starts. When the connection has been verified, the You are connected to the Internet. If you have any problems using online services, please contact your Internet Service Provider. message appears. WPS(PBC) Network SetupIf your router has a WPS(PBC) button, you can configure your TV's wireless network connection using the WPS(PBC) button more easily. To set up your TV's wireless network connection using WPS(PBC), follow these steps: 1. Go to Network Settings screen. (Menu → Network → Network Settings) 2. Select Start. The network function searches for available wireless networks. When done, it displays a list of the available networks. 3. Select the WPS(PBC). 4. Press the WPS(PBC) button on your router within 2 minutes. Your TV automatically acquires all the network setting values it needs and connects to your network. 5. The network connection screen appears, and network setup is done.Plug & Access Network Setup The Plug & Access function lets you easily connect your Samsung TV to your Samsung wireless router by using a USB memory stick to transfer the setup information from the router to the TV. If your non-Samsung wireless router does not support Plug & Access, you must connect using one of the other methods. N You can check for equipment that supports Plug & Access on http:// www.samsung.com/sec. To set up your TV's wireless network connection using Plug & Access, follow these steps: 1. Turn on the Samsung wireless router and your TV. 2. Insert a USB memory stick into the USB port in your Samsung wireless router. Check the router’s LED’s to make sure it is on (Blinking → on). 3. Take the USB memory stick out of the router, and then insert it into a USB port on your Samsung TV. The memory stick downloads the connection information. 4. Wait until the connection is automatically established. N If Plug & Access does not connect your TV to your wireless router, a popup screen appears on the screen notifying you of the failure. If you want to try using Plug & Access again, disconnect the USB memory stick, reset the AP, and then try again from Step 1. You can also choose one of the other connection setup methods. 5. The network connection screen appears, and the network setup is done. 6. Place the wireless router in a desired location. N If the wireless router’s settings change or you install a new wireless router, you must perform the Plug & Access procedure again, beginning from Step 1. Network Status Menu → Network → Network Status You can check the current network and Internet status.When the wireless network connection failed... ● Wireless network connection failed. – No wireless router selected. Go to Network Settings to select your router. ● Unable to connect to wireless router. – Try the following: check that the router is turned on, and if it is try turning it off and on again. – Check if you need to enter a security key to use the router. ● IP auto setting failed. Try the following to set your IP address automatically. Or set your IP address manually by selecting IP Settings. – Ensure DHCP server is enabled on router and unplug and re-plug-in the router. – Contact your Internet Service Provider for more information. ● Unable to connect to the network.– Try the following: check if your IP address is set correctly in IP Settings. – Contact your Internet Service Provider for more information. ● Connected to your local network, but cannot connect to the Internet. – Check the DNS settings in IP Settings, or contact your Internet Service – Provider to access the Internet. ● Network setup complete, but cannot connect to the Internet.– Contact your Internet Service Provider to access the Internet.Managing the Network Connected Devices Wi-Fi Direct Menu → Network → Wi-Fi Direct Set to connect the TV to wireless mobile devices. Using this function, you can connect wireless mobile devices to your TV directly without a router. N for LED 5500, 6350 Series and PDP 550 Series You can use this function when connecting the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter. N To use this function, your mobile device should be supported by the Wi-Fi Direct. To connect your mobile device with your TV using Wi-Fi Direct, follow these steps: N Turn on the Wi-Fi Direct device and activate its Wi-Fi Direct function. 1. Go to Wi-Fi Direct screen (Menu → Network → Wi-Fi Direct). The TV starts to search devices. 2. Turn on the Wi-Fi Direct function on your device. Select the desired Wi-Fi device. – PBC: Press the WPS(PBC) button on your Wi-Fi device within 2 minutes. Your TV automatically acquires all the network setting values it needs and connects to your network. – PIN: Input the displayed PIN on your device. N If you want to disconnect the device, select the connected Wi-Fi device, and then select Disconnect. Soft AP Menu → Network → Soft AP Using this function, you can connect the TV on your mobile devices if your mobile devices do not support Wi-Fi Direct. Set the options for connection of Wi-Fi device. ● Soft AP Turns on or off the Soft AP. When Soft AP is set to On, your mobile devices can find the TV name in Wi-Fi connection list. ● Security key Set the Security key manually using the remote control. – The security key should consist of more than 8 digits.– Input the generated security key into the device you want to connect. – If network does not operate normally, check the security key again. An incorrect security key may cause a malfunction. Using color buttons when entering the security key ● b Show security key Shows the security key. Whether to show the security key is represented by a checkbox at the top. ● a Del. Deletes the entered security key one digit at a time. ● { Space Inserts a blank space between characters when entering the security key. ● R Return Returns to the screen before entering the security key. AllShare Settings Menu → Network → AllShare Settings Selects whether to use media functions on the network. For details on set up options, refer to the “AllShare Settings” in the AllShare Play section. Device Name Menu → Network → Device NameEnter a name for this TV. This name will be shown on network remote controls and devices using AllShare Play. N A keyboard appears on the screen and you can key in a name for your TV manually using your remote control. For example, if you want to change the name to Samsung TV, select each character using your remote. When done, select Done.Setting the Time Time Menu → System → Time N The time you set will appear when you press the 정보표시` button on your remote. ● Clock Set the clock to use the various timer features of the TV. N If you disconnect the power cord, you have to set the clock again. To set the clock, follow these steps: 1. Go to Clock screen (System → Time → Clock). 2. Select Auto or Manual. – Auto: The TV will automatically download the correct time from a digital channel. N To set the clock automatically, the cable or antenna must be connected to the TV. N Since the time is automatically set by the information of each digital program, the time may differ depending on each station. N The time, which is automatically set by each station and its signal may not be precise. In this case, set the time manually. – Manual: The Clock Set screen appears. Set the Date and Timemanually. You can set the current date and time using your remote. N Available only when Clock Mode is set to Manual. ● Sleep Timer Automatically shuts off the TV after a preset period of time. (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 minutes). N Select a period of time using your remote. To cancel the Sleep Timer, select Off.● On Timer Set On Timer so that your TV turns on automatically at a time and on a day of your choosing. You can set up three separate On Timer configurations. (On Timer 1, On Timer 2, On Timer 3) N You must set the clock before you can use the On Timer. Setup: Select Off, Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or Manual. If you select Manual, you can select the days you want to activate the timer. N The c mark indicates days you’ve selected. Time: Set the time that the TV turns on automatically. Volume: Set the desired loudness. Source: To select what will be turned on when the timer setting is activated. You can set the TV to turn on a specific channel or play back contents such as video, photo or audio files located in an external device connected to the TV. N The USB device must be connected to your TV before you can select USB. Antenna (when the Source is set to TV): Select Air, DTV Air, DTV Cable, Cable. Channel (when the Source is set to TV): Select the desired channel. Music / Photo (when the Source is set to USB): Select a folder in the USB device containing music or photo files you want played when the TV turns on automatically. N If there is no music file on the USB device or you don’t select a folder containing a music file, the Timer function does not operate correctly. N If there is only one photo file in the USB, the slide show will not play. N If a folder name is too long, the folder cannot be selected. N Each USB you use is assigned its own folder. When using more than one of the same type of USB, make sure the folders assigned to each USB have different names. N We recommend that you use a USB memory stick and a multi card reader when using the On Timer. The On Timer function may not work with USB devices with a built-in battery, MP3 players, or PMPs made by some manufacturers because the TV can take too long to recognize these devices. ● Off Timer Set Off Timer so that your TV turns off automatically at a time and on a day of your choosing. You can set up three separate Off Timer configurations. (Off Timer 1, Off Timer 2, Off Timer 3) N You must set the clock before you can use the Off Timer. Setup: Select Off, Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or Manual. If you select Manual, you can choose the days you want Off Timer to turn off your TV. N The c mark indicates days you’ve selected. Time: Set the time that the TV turns off automatically.Setting the Parental Controls Security Menu → System → Security Restricts displaying specific channels to prevent children from watching adult content. You must enter the password to set or change the Security settings. N The Security settings are not allowed in HDMI or Component mode. N The password is "0-0-0-0" by default.● Channel Lock Turn the Channel Lock setting on or off. ● Change PIN Select Change PIN. Enter a 4 digit password and reenter it to confirm the password using the remote control. When the message. "PIN is changed successfully." appears, select Close. The new password is now set. Locking channels1. Select Channel in the Smart Hub. (™ → Channel) 2. Select the channel to lock in the channel list, and then select Tools by using the remote control. 3. Select Child Lock Setting. A dialog box appears where you can enter the password. 4. Enter the 4 digit password. The selected channel is locked. N If you select the locked channel, the message "Channel Locked" appears on the black screen. Unlocking channels 1. Select Channel in the Smart Hub. (™ → Channel) 2. Select Tools in the locked channel using the remote control. Select Unlock. 3. A dialog box appears where you can enter the password. Enter the specified password. 4. When you have completed entering the password, the Lock function is released. N If you forget the PIN code, press the remote control buttons in the following sequence in Standby mode, which resets the PIN to “0-0-0-0”: 조용히M → 8 → 2 → 4 → P (Power On)Economical Solutions Eco Solution Menu → System → Eco Solution ● Energy Saving Lets you adjusts the brightness of the TV in order to reduce power consumption. If you select Picture Off, the screen is turned off, but the sound remains on. Press any button except the volume button to turn on the screen.● Eco Sensor To enhance power savings, the picture settings will automatically adapt to the light in the room. N If you adjust Backlight for LED TV / Cell Light for PDP TV in the Picture menu, the Eco Sensor will be set to Off automatically. Min. Backlight for LED TV / Min Cell Light for PDP TV : When the Eco Sensor is set to On, you can manually adjust the minimum screen brightness. N If the Eco Sensor is set to On, the display brightness may change (become slightly darker or brighter) depending on the light intensity in your room. You can control the screen’s minimum brightness with the Min. Backlight / Min Cell Light function. ● No Signal Power Off To avoid unnecessary energy consumption, you can set how long you want the TV to remain on if it’s not receiving a signal. ● Auto Power Off The TV will automatically turned off when no user operation is detected for 4 hours.Picture In Picture (PIP) PIP Menu → System → PIP You can watch a program whose signal has passed through the TV’s tuner and video from one external video source simultaneously. For example, if you have a cable box connected to the Cable In jack, you can use PIP to watch programs from the cable box and a movie from a Blu-ray player attached to the HDMI In jack. N While Smart Hub is on, you cannot use the PIP. ● PIP Activate or deactivate the PIP function. ● Channel Select the channel for the sub-picture screen. ● Size Select a size for the sub-picture screen.● Position Select a position for the sub-picture screen. ● Sound Select You can choose to listen to the sound from the main picture or the sub picture. N If you turn the TV off while watching in the PIP mode, the PIP function is reset to Off. When you turn your TV on, you must turn PIP on again to watch in the PIP mode.N You may notice that the picture in the PIP screen becomes slightly unnatural when you use the main screen to view a game or karaoke. N The PIP is not supported in 3D function. N PIP Settings: The picture from the external video source will be in the main screen and the picture from the TV’s tuner will be in the PIP subpicture screen.– Main picture: Component, HDMI – Sub picture: TVUsing the TV with a Keyboard and a Mouse Device Manager Menu → System → Device Manager Using this function, you can set up input devices to use with the TV. You can check your device list and adjust the settings in this menu. N Depending on the model of the USB HID keyboard and mouse may not be compatible with your TV.● Keyboard Settings Lets you use a USB or Bluetooth keyboard with your TV. If you want to use a USB keyboard, connect it on the USB port. for LED 6350 Series above and PDP TV If you want to use a Bluetooth keyboard, connect it using the Bluetooth function. N Available only when the QWERTY keypad screen appears in the Web Browser.Select Keyboard Select which keyboard to use from your keyboard list. you can only use one keyboard, even if several are connected. Add Bluetooth Keyboard for LED 6350 Series above and PDP TV You can add the Bluetooth keyboard. Keyboard Options Sets the default options for the keyboard language and type. – Keyboard Language: Set a language for your keyboard. – Keyboard Type: Set what a type a keyboard you're using to enter text. – Switch Input Language: Select a key sequence to change switching input language ● Mouse Settings Lets you use a USB or Bluetooth mouse with your TV. If you want to use a USB mouse, connect it on the USB port. for LED 6350 Series above and PDP TV If you want to use a Bluetooth mouse, connect it using the Bluetooth function. Using your TV to use a mouse, you can use the TV's menu in the same way as on a PC. Select Mouse Select which mouse to use from your mouse list. you can only use one mouse, even if several are connected. Add Bluetooth Mouse for LED 6350 Series above and PDP TV You can add the Bluetooth mouse. Mouse Options Sets the default options for the mouse buttons. – Primary Button: Select the main button you want to use click and select on screen. – Pointer Size: Set the size of the onscreen mouse pointer. – Pointer Speed: Select the speed of the mouse pointer.Using the TV's menu with a mouse 1. Connect a USB or Bluetooth mouse on your TV. 2. Click a primary button you selected. The Simple Menu appears. 3. Click a menu you wish, and then you can use the menu to same way as on a PC.Connecting to the TV with a Samsung Audio Device for LED 6350, PDP 550 Series and above SoundShare Settings Menu → System → Device Manager → SoundShare Settings Lets you use a Samsung Audio Device with your TV. If you want to use a a Samsung Audio Device, connect it using the Bluetooth function. Using your TV with a Samsung Audio Device, you can experience TV sound more loudly and clearly. ● Add New Device Turns the SoundShare function on or off. When the Add New Device is set to Off, the connection signals from new devices are ignored. ● Samsung Audio Device list Allowed / Denied: Allows/Blocks the devices. Delete: Deletes the devices from the list. Supported Samsung Audio Device models – DA-E650 / E651 / E660 / E661 / E670 / E680 / E750 / E751 / E760 / E761 N For more detailed information about the Pairing instructions with your TV, visit Samsung homepage (http://www. samsung.com/sec). N Depending on the region, the Samsung Audio Device may not be sold.Other Features Menu Language Menu → System → Menu Language Set the menu language. 1. Select the Menu Language. 2. Choose a language you want to use among 한국어 and English. Caption (On-Screen Text Dialogue)Menu → System → Caption ● Caption You can switch the caption function on or off. If captions are not available, they will not be displayed on the screen. N The Caption feature does not work with devices connected to the TV through the Component, HDMI jacks. ● Caption Mode You can select the desired caption mode.N The availability of captions depends on the program being broadcast. Default / English / Korean: Analog subtitles are supported for analog channels. N When you are watching a program with English subtitles in Korean subtitle mode, the characters may be broken. In this case, set the Caption Mode to English. Default / Service1 ~ Service6: Digital subtitles are supported for digital channels N You can select Service1 to Service6. ● Digital Caption Options Adjusts the each option. Size: (Digital channels only)Options include Default, Small, Standard and Large. The default is Standard. Font Color: You can change the color of the letters. Options include Default, White, Black, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta and Cyan. The default is Black. Background Color: You can change the background color of the captions. Options include Default, White, Black, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta and Cyan. The default is White. Font Opacity: This adjusts the opacity of text. Options include Default, Transparent, Translucent, Solid. Background Opacity: This adjusts the opacity of the caption background. Options include Default, Transparent, Translucent, Solid. Return to Default: This option sets each Size, Foreground Color, Background Color, Foreground Opacity and Background Opacity to their default. N The availability of captions depends on the program being broadcast. N The Default setting follows the standards set by the broadcaster. N You cannot set both the Foreground Color and the Background Color to the same color. N You cannot set both the Foreground Opacity and the Background Opacity to the same color. Screen Burn Protection for PDP TV Menu → System → Screen Burn Protection To reduce the possibility of screen burn, this unit is equipped with Pixel Shift screen burn prevention technology. Pixel Shift moves the picture slightly on the screen. The Pixel Shift Time setting allows you to program the time between movements of the picture in minutes. Your TV also has the following additional screen burn protection functions: – Pixel Shift – Auto Protection Time – Scrolling– Side Gray ● Pixel Shift Using this function, you can set the TV to move pixels minutely on the PDP screen in a horizontal or vertical direction to minimize after images on the screen. Available Pixel Shift settings and optimum settings: Horizontal– Available Settings: 0 – 4 (pixels) – Optimum settings for TV/AV/ Component/HDMI: 4 Vertical – Available Settings: 0 – 4 (pixels) – Optimum settings for TV/AV/ Component/HDMI: 4 Time (minute) – Available Settings: 1 – 4 min – Optimum settings for TV/AV/ Component/HDMI: 4 minN The Pixel Shift value may differ depending on the monitor size (inches) and mode. N This function is not available in the Screen Fit mode. ● Auto Protection Time If the screen displays a still image for a certain period of time you define, the TV activates the screen saver to prevent the formation of burnt in ghost images on the screen.● Scrolling This function removes after-images on the screen by illuminating all the pixels on the PDP according to a pattern. Use this function when there are after images or symbols on the screen, especially when you displayed a still image on the screen for a long time. N The after-image removal function has to be executed for a long time (approximately 1 hour) to effectively remove after-images on the screen. If the after-image is not removed after you apply the function, repeat the function again. N Press any button to cancel this feature. ● Side Gray Lets you select the color of the sidebars your TV displays when you set the screen size to 4:3.Auto Protection Time for LED TV If the screen displays a still image for a certain period of time you define, the TV activates the screen saver to prevent the formation of burnt in ghost images on the screen. General Menu → System → General ● Game Mode When you have connected a game console such as a PlayStation™ or Xbox™ to the TV, you can enjoy a more realistic gaming experience by turning on the Game Mode function. Precautions and limitations for Game Mode – Before you disconnect the game console and connecting another external device, set Game Mode to Off.– If you display the TV menu in Game Mode, the screen shakes slightly. N Game Mode is not available when the input source is set to TV. N Set Game Mode to On only after connecting a game console. If you turn Game Mode on before you have attached the game console, you may notice slightly reduced picture quality. N If the Game Mode is set to On, the Picture Mode is set to Standard and the Sound Mode is set to Movie automatically. ● BD Wise Provides the optimal picture quality for Samsung DVD, Blu-ray and Home Theater products which support BD Wise. When the BD Wise is set to On, the picture mode is automatically changed to the optimal resolution. N Available when you connect Samsung products that support BD Wisethrough an HDMI cable to the TV. ● Menu Transparency Adjust transparency of menu box. ● Sound Feedback Your TV gives sound feedback when you use TV. Sound Feedback is enabled by default. Turn off Sound Feedback or adjust its volume. ● Panel Lock Lock or unlock all the keys on the TV Controller at once. When Panel Lock is on, The TV Controller is not operate. ● Boot Logo Displays the Samsung logo when the TV is turned on. ● Light Effect for LED 7100 Series You can turn the LED on the TV’s front panel on or off. Turn it off to save power or if the LED is too bright for you. N Set the Light Effect to Off to reduce the power consumption. N The color of light may vary depending on the model. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Menu → System → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Allows you to control all connected Samsung devices that support anynet+ with your Samsung TV’s remote. For details on set up options, refer to the “Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)” instructions. DivX® Video On DemandMenu → System → DivX® Video On Demand Shows the registration code authorized for the TV. If you connect to the DivX web site and register with 10-digit registration code, you can download the VOD activation file. Once you play it using Media Play, the registration is completed. N For more information on DivX® VOD, visit http://vod.divx.com.Support Menu e-Manual Menu → Support → e-Manual The e-Manual is built into your TV. Open the e-Manual to learn how to use your TV’s many features. N For the detailed information about the e-Manual Screen, refer to “How to view the e-Manual” in the User's Manual.Self Diagnosis Menu → Support → Self Diagnosis ● Picture Test Use to check for picture problems. Picture Test displays a high definition picture that you can examine for flaws or faults. Yes: Select Yes if the test picture does not appear or there is noise or distortion in the test picture. There may be a problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s Call Center for assistance. No: Select No if the test picture displays properly. There may be a problem with your external equipment. Please check your connections. If the problem persists, refer to the external device’s user manual. ● Sound Test Use the built-in melody to check for sound problems.N If you hear no sound from the TV’ s speakers, before performing the sound test, make sure Speaker Select is set to TV Speaker in the Sound menu, and then try the speakers again. N You will hear the melody during the test even if you have set Speaker Select to External Speaker or have muted the sound. Yes: Select Yes if you can hear sound from only one speaker or from neither speaker during the sound test. There may be a problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s Call Center for assistance. No: Select No if you can hear sound from the speakers. There may be a problem with your external equipment. Please check your connections. If the problem persists, refer to the external device’s user manual. ● Signal Information(digital channels only) Signal Information displays HD channel signal strength so you can adjust your antenna to increase signal strength and receive HD channels. ● Reset Reset all setting to factory defaults except for your network settings. To reset your TV to default setting, follow these steps:1. Go to the Reset menu. (Menu → Support → Self Diagnosis → Reset) 2. The PIN input screen appears. Enter the PIN using your remote. 3. When done, the PIN screen disappear automatically. The message All the settings will return to factory defaults except network settings. appears. 4. Select Yes. All settings have been reset. The TV will turn off and on again automatically. The Setup screen appears. For more information about Setup, see user manual. ● Troubleshooting If your TV seems to be having a problem, access the troubleshooting guide for a solution. Software Update Menu → Support → Software Update The Software Update menu lets you upgrade your TV’s software to the latest version. Current Version: This is the software version already installed in the TV. Upgrading to the Latest Version You can upgrade in five ways: – By USB – By Online – By Channel – Alternative Software – Standby Mode UpgradeN Be careful not to turn off the power until the upgrade is complete. The TV will turn off and on automatically after completing the software upgrade. When you upgrade software, all video and audio settings you have made will return to their default settings. We advise you to write down your settings so that you can easily reset them after the upgrade.● By USB To upgrade the By USB, follow these steps: 1. Visit http://www.samsung.com/sec. 2. Download the latest USB software upgrade exe archive to your computer. 3. Extracts the exe archive to your computer. You should have a single folder with the same name as the exe file.4. Copy the folder to a USB flash drive. 5. Turn on the TV, and then insert the USB flash drive into the USB port of the TV. 6. In the TV’s menu, go to Support → Software Update. 7. Select By USB. N Please be careful not to remove the USB drive until the upgrade is complete.● By Online The By Online function lets you download the upgrade software directly from the Internet into your TV and then upgrade the software in one operation. To use By Online, you must have configured your TV to connect to your network and the TV must be connected to the Internet. See the "Setting up the Wired or Wireless Network" instructions.To upgrade using the By Online, follow these steps: 1. Select the By Online. The Connecting to Server message appears. 2. If there is a download available, the Download pop-up appears with a progress bar and the download starts. 3. When the download is complete, the Upgrade Query screen appears with three choices: Upgrade Now, Upgrade Later, or Don't Upgrade.– If you select the Upgrade Now, the TV upgrades the software, turns off, and then turns on automatically. – If you do not make a selection in one minute or select the Upgrade Later, the TV stores the new upgrade software. You can upgrade the software later using the Alternative Software function. – If you select the Don't Upgrade, the TV cancels the upgrade.● By Channel Downloads and upgrades the software through the channel. Upgrading by channel 1. Select By Channel. 2. Browse to the software to upgrade. N It may take some time to browse the software depending on the TV model or signal strength.3. Upgrading after browsing. ● Alternative Software The Alternative Software option lets you upgrade using a file the TV downloaded earlier, but you decided not to install immediately, or a file downloaded by the TV in Standby Mode (See Standby Mode Upgrade on the next section). To upgrade using Alternative Software, follow these steps: 1. If upgrade software has been downloaded, you will see the software version number to the right of Alternative Software. 2. Select Alternative Software. 3. The TV displays a message asking if you want to upgrade. Select Yes. The TV begins the upgrade. 4. When the upgrade is complete, the TV turns off automatically, and then turns on. ● Standby Mode Upgrade You can set the Standby Mode Upgrade function so that the TV downloads new upgrade software when it is in Standby mode. In Standby mode, the TV is off, but its Internet connection is active. This allows the TV to download upgrade software automatically, when you are not using it. Because the TV is turned on internally, the screen may glow slightly. This phenomenon may continue for more than 1 hour until the software download is complete. To set Standby Mode Upgrade, follow these steps: Select Standby Mode Upgrade in the Software Update menu. – Off: If you select Off, a pop-up message appears when a new software upgrade is possible. – 45 min. / 06:00 am / 10:00 am / 02:00 pm / 06:00 pm: Downloads new software for the channel at a selected time. N To use the Standby Mode Upgrade function, your TV must be connected to the Internet. Contact SamsungMenu → Support → Contact Samsung View this information when your TV does not work properly or when you want to upgrade the software. You can find information regarding our call centers and how to download products and software. Remote Management Menu → Support → Remote Management The Call Center will access your Samsung Product remotely to check internal information. Remote Management can control user settings and troubleshoot a problem. Smart Hub Menu → Support → Smart Hub Smart Hub lets you connect to the Internet and enjoy variety of Internet and multimedia contents. For more information on how to use the Smart Hub, see “Smart Hub”.Using the 3D function 3D Menu → Picture → 3D for LED 5500 Series : This function is not supported. This exciting new feature enables you to view 3D content. To fully enjoy this feature, you must need a pair of Samsung 3D Active Glasses to view 3D video. Advanced FeaturesTo watch a 3D channel, the Channel → View 3D Channels setting must be set to On. N FULL HD 3D support is determined by the quality of the content. IMPORTANT HEALTH AND SAFETY INFORMATION FOR 3D PICTURES. Read and understand the following safety information before using the TV’s 3D function. [ WarningŒ Some viewers may experience discomfort while viewing 3D TV such as dizziness, nausea and headaches. If you experience any such symptom, stop viewing 3D TV, remove the 3D Active Glasses and rest. Œ Watching 3D images for an extended period of time may cause eye strain. If you feel eye strain, stop viewing 3D TV, remove your 3D Active Glasses and rest.Œ A responsible adult should frequently check on children who are using the 3D function. If there are any reports of tired eyes, headaches, dizziness, or nausea, have the child stop viewing 3D TV and rest. Œ Do not use the 3D Active Glasses for other purposes (such as general eyeglasses, sunglasses, protective goggles, etc.) Œ Do not use the 3D function or 3D Active Glasses while walking or moving around. If you use the 3D function or 3D Active Glasses while walking or moving around you can injure yourself by running into objects, tripping, or falling. ● 3D Mode Select the 3D input format. N If you want to experience the 3D effect fully, put the 3D Active Glasses on first, and then select the 3D Modefrom the list below that provides the best 3D viewing experience. Off : Turns the 3D function off. : Changes a 2D image to 3D. : Displays two images next to each other. : Displays one image above another. N The 3D Mode may differ depending on the input signal. N Some file formats may not support the .● 3D Perspective Adjust the overall 3D perspective of the on-screen image. ● Depth Adjust the overall depth. ● L/R Change Swap the left and right pictures. ● 3D → 2D Displays the image for the left eye only. N This function is deactivated when 3D Mode set to " " or " Off ".● 3D Optimize for LED TV Automatically adjusts the picture overall to provide an optimal 3D effect. Support resolution (16:9 only) HDMI 3D Format Resolution Frequency (Hz) / 1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 29.97 / 30 / 59.94 / 60 Hz Frame Packing 1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 29.97 / 30 HzComponent Resolution Frequency (Hz) 1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 29.97 / 30 / 59.94 / 60 Hz DTV Resolution Frequency (Hz) 1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60 Hz Videos / Photos (In AllShare Play)N Refer to "Supported Subtitle and AllShare Play file formats" in the Other Information section. How to watch the 3D images Some 3D modes may not be available depending on the format of the image source. To watch in 3D, you must wear 3D Active Glasses and turn the glasses on by pressing the power button.1. Go to the 3D screen. (Picture → 3D) 2. Select the 3D Mode. The 3D Mode screen appears. 3. Select the 3D Mode option for the image you want to view. The screen goes blank for a moment, and then reappears in the 3D mode you selected. N You can also access the 3D mode by pressing the X button on your remote.Read These Notes Before Using the 3D Function... Œ The 3D Mode is set to Off automatically when you access Smart Hub functions. Œ The 3D Mode is set to its memorized configuration value automatically when you change the input source. Œ Some Picture functions are disabled in 3D mode.Œ PIP is not supported in 3D mode. Œ 3D Active Glasses from Samsung’ s previous product (IR type) or other manufacturers are not be supported. Œ When the TV is initially powered on, it may take some time until the 3D display is optimized. Œ The 3D Active Glasses may not work properly if there is any other 3D product or electronic devices turned on near the glasses or TV. If there is a problem, keep other electronic devices as far away as possible from the 3D Active Glasses. Œ Be sure to stay within the viewing angle and optimum TV viewing distance when watching 3D pictures. Otherwise, you may not be able to see 3D effects properly. Œ The ideal 3D viewing distance is three times or more the height of the screen.Smart Hub Menu → Support → Smart Hub Using Smart Hub, you can stream movies, videos, and music from the Internet, access various for pay or freeof-charge applications and view them on your TV. Application content includes news, sports, weather forecasts, stock market quotes, maps, photos, and games. N You can also start this function by pressing the ™ button on the remote control. Notice Œ Samsung Electronics takes no legal responsibility for any interruption of the Smart Hub service caused by the service provider for any reason. Œ Application services may be provided in English only and the contents available may vary, depending on your area. Œ For more information about a Smart Hub service, visit the web site of the applicable service provider. Œ The Smart Hub service downloads and processes data via the Internet so that you can enjoy the Internet contents on your TV screen. If the Internet connection is unstable, the service may be delayed or interrupted. Furthermore, the player may turn off automatically in response to conditions on the Internet. If this occurs, check the Internet connection and try again. Œ The services provided are subject to change by the Smart Hub service provider without notice. Œ The Smart Hub service contents may differ depending on the player’s firmware version. Œ For pay DivX contents with copy protection can only be played through a composite, component or HDMI cable. To start Smart Hub for the first time, follow these steps: 1. Press the ™ button. 2. The Smart Hub screen appears. 3. The Privacy Policy screen appears. Select Agree. 4. The Service Update screen appears and installs a number of services and applications. When done, it closes. The applications and services downloaded are displayed on the Smart Hub screen. This may take some time. N Smart Hub may close momentarily during the installation process. N A number of screens may appear after installation. You can close them or let them close on their own. 5. To start an application, select an application using your remote. Using the Numeric Keypad Selecting – using your remote while you are using the Screen Keypad enables you to change the text fields to Korean, lower case, capitalized case, upper case, numbers and icons. You can use this Screen Keypad in a several Smart Hub applications. 1. For example, suppose that you want to input “105Chang”. 2. Select – 3 times using your remote to change the input mode from Korean to numbers. 3. Select 1, 0 and 5 in numerical order. 4. Select – 4 times using your remote to change the input mode from numbers to upper case. 5. Select 2 3 times using your remote to input C. 6. Select – 4 times using your remote to change the input mode from upper case to lower case. 7. Input the rest of “Chang” using your remote in the same way. When done, select OK. Using the QWERTY Keypad You can use this Screen Keypad in a several Smart Hub applications in same way as a keyboard. Using the colored and function buttons with the QWERTY Keypad ● a Delete All Delete all inputted character. ● b Numeric / QWERTY Toggles the keypad mode between Numeric keypad mode and QWERTY mode. N When the keypad is set to QWERTYmode, you can input characters using a USB or Bluetooth keyboard connected on the TV. ● { Space Leave a space while entering characters. ● T Settings Displays the options menu. Input Language: select an input language between Korean and English. XT9 Text Input: Turns on or off the recommended word function. ● E Enter Enter the selected character. ● R Return Return to the previous menu. ● π Prev Page Display the previous set of symbols/ icons. N Available only when the keypad screen is in symbol/icon mode (F). ● µ Next PageDisplay the next set of symbols/icons. N Available only when the keypad screen is in symbol/icon mode (F). Creating an Account To establish your own, exclusive, configuration of Smart Hub, create your own Samsung account. N You must use an e-mail address as an ID. N You can register up to 10 User Accounts. To create an account, follow these steps: 1. On the Smart Hub screen, select a using your remote. The Login screen appears. 2. Select Create Account using your remote. The Create Account screen appears. 3. Select Samsung Account. An entry screen and keypad appear. 4. Use the keypad to enter your e-mail address. This will serve as your ID. N If you have a Bluetooth or USB keyboard attached to the TV, use the keyboard to enter the e-mail address. Then, in Steps 6 through 10, use the keyboard to enter the required password. Note that after you type in the e-mail address and password, you will need to use your remote to continue. 5. When done, select OK. The Login screen reappears. 6. Select Password. The Password screen and a keypad appear. 7. Use the keypad to enter a password. The password can be any combination of letters, numbers, and symbols. N Select a using your remote to display or hide the password as you enter it.8. When done, select OK. 9. Select Confirm password. The Password screen and a keypad reappear. 10. Repeat Steps 7 and 8. 11.When done, select Create Account. The Confirmation window appears. 12. Select OK. The Continue to register service ID window appears. 13. Select OK. 14. The Link to other accounts window appears. Select the service to register. Provide your ID and password and select OK. N If you perform the Link to other accounts operation, you can use the application more easily. For more information on registering, refer to the “Settings” when configuring Smart Hub. N If you don’t have your own account and you want to create your own account, select Unregistered. 15. Select OK. Select Login when the Smart TV account window appears. The login is completed.Customizing the Home Screen ● a Login / Logout To log in to your Samsung account, follow these steps: 1. With the Smart Hub main screen displayed on your TV, select a using your remote. The Login screen appears. 2. Select the ^ next to the Samsung Account entry filed. A drop down list appears. N If you want to input your Samsung Account name manually, select the Samsung Account entry field. A keypad screen appears. Input your Samsung Account manually. When done, go to Step 4. 3. Select your ID from the list that appears. The Login screen re-appears. 4. Select Password. The Password window and a keypad appears.5. Enter your password using your remote. When done, select OK. N If you want Smart Hub to enter your password automatically, select Remember my password after you have entered your password. A c mark appears. Smart Hub will now enter your password automatically when you select or enter your ID. N If you want to log in Smart Hub automatically when Smart Hubfunction starts, select Sign me in automatically. A c mark appears. N If you forget your Samsung Account password, you can reset it. Select b using your remote. A pop-up message appears. Select OK. Smart Hub will send a guide to your e-mail address that explains how to reset your password. ● b Wallpaper You can change the background image on the Smart Hub home screen. ● { Account Manager Lets you register your service provider accounts, delete or deactivate your Samsung account. For more information about Account Manager, see "Configuring Smart Hub with the Settings Menu" in this section. N Available only when you have logged in to Smart Hub.Using the Tools menu with Smart Hub N Depending on the icons and folders displayed on the Smart Hub screen, some of the functions listed below may not appear. ● Login / Logout Log in or log out of your Samsung account. ● Wallpaper You can change the background image on the Smart Hub home screen. ● Move The Move function lets you change the screen position of an application or a folder. To use the Move function, follow these steps: 1. Select an application icon or a folder, and then open the Tools menu using your remote. 2. Select Move. A position change screen appears. 3. Move the icon using your remote. When the icon is in the position of your choice, select the icon. The application icon moves to its new location. ● Move to Folder The Move to Folder function lets you move an application to a folder. N This is only available when a folder is created in the Smart Hub. To use the Move to Folder function, follow these steps: 1. Select an application icon, and then open the Tools menu using your remote. 2. Select the Move to Folder. The Move to Folder window opens.3. Select a folder using your remote. A move finished message appears, Select OK. The message window closes. The application has been moved to the folder. N If you select an application in a folder, you can use Move to Folder to move application to the Smart Hub screen. To access an application in a Folder 1. On the Smart Hub screen, select a folder. The folder opens. 2. Select an application you want to execute. The application service starts. ● Delete The Delete function lets you delete application from Smart Hub. To use the Delete function, follow these steps:1. Select an application, and then open the Tools menu using your remote. 2. Select Delete. The message Do you want to delete selected item(s)? appears. 3. Select OK. The application is deleted. ● Lock The Lock function lets you lock some applications in Smart Hub so they cannot be opened without entering the password. N Depending on the application, this function may not be supported. To use the Lock function, follow these steps: 1. Select an application, and then open the Tools menu using your remote. 2. Select Lock. The Security window appears. 3. Enter your security PIN using the remote. If you have not created a PIN, enter “0-0-0-0”. 4. A confirmation message screen appears. Select OK. The message screen closes and a lock symbol appears to left of the application ● Unlock N Depending on the application, this function may not be supported.To use the Unlock function, follow these steps: 1. Select a locked application, and then open the Tools menu using your remote. 2. Select Unlock. The Security window appears. 3. Enter your security PIN using the remote. If you have not created a PIN, enter “0-0-0-0”. 4. A confirmation message screen appears. Select OK. The message screen closes and the lock symbol to left of the application disappears. ● New Folder The New Folder function lets you create and name new folders. You can move applications into the folders you have created. To use the New Folder function, follow these steps: 1. Open the Tools menu using your remote. 2. Select New Folder in the menu. The New Folder pop-up and a keypad screen appear. 3. Using the keypad and your remote, enter a name for the folder. 4. When done, select OK at the bottom of the QWERTY keypad screen. The New Folder screen closes and the New Folder appears on the Smart Hub screen. ● Rename Folder The Rename Folder function lets you rename folders. To use the Rename Folder function, follow these steps: 1. Select a folder, and then open the Tools menu using your remote.2. Select Rename Folder. The Rename Folder window and a keypad screen appears. 3. Enter a new name using your remote or edit the old name. 4. When done, select OK. The Rename Folder window closes and the new or revised name appears below the folder. ● InformationYou can view detailed information about the selected application. N Depending on the application, you can also lock or unlock the application on the Information screen. Configuring Smart Hub with Settings The Settings menu gives you access to Account Management, Service Manager, Reset, and About Smart Hub functions. To use these three functions, you must be logged into your Samsung Smart Hub account. To access the Settings menu, and then select a menu item, follow these steps: 1. Open the Tools menu using your remote. 2. Select Settings. The Settings window appears. 3. Select a menu item using your remote.● Account Manager The Account Manager menu contains functions that let you register your service provider accounts, change your Smart Hub password, delete or deactivate your Samsung account. Link to other accounts: If you have existing accounts with any of the providers listed by the Link to other accounts function, you can associate the provider account and the provider account password with your Samsung account. If you associate the account, you will be able to log onto the account through Smart Hub easily, without entering your account name or password. N Before register your site account, corresponding application should be installed in the Smart Hub.To use the Link to other accounts function, follow these steps: 1. In the Account Manager menu, select the Link to other accounts. The Link to other accounts window appears. 2. Select an application you want to associate with your Samsung account. 3. In the pop-up that appears, select Register. 4. In the Link to other accounts entry screen, enter your site ID and password using your remote. When done, select OK. N This is the ID and password you normally use to access your account on this application. 4. If you have entered the ID and password correctly, the Registered successfully. message appears. 5. If want to add another service application, and then repeat Steps 2 through 4 to associate another service application. 6. When done, select OK. Remove from TV Account List: Cancels all the currently registered Service Accounts that appear on the Link to other accounts screen. Deactivate Account: Deactivates your Samsung Account and deletes it and all your account settings entirely from the Smart Hub. ● Service Manager Auto Ticker: You can set Auto Ticker to come on when the TV powers. N The Ticker application provides useful News, Weather, and Stock Market information. Before you can set the Auto Ticker on, you must download the Ticker application into Smart Hub. Push Notification Settings: When on, Push Notification displays a notification message when an event takes place in an application installed on Smart Hub. The TV will display the notification message and allow you to view details of the event even while you are viewing TV. ● Reset The Reset function initializes all downloaded applications, erases all user accounts and settings from the TV, and resets all Smart Hub settings to the factory default settings. It then restarts Smart Hub as if it were starting for the first time. Your account, however, remains on the Smart Hub server. To log into your account, enter your ID and password on the Login screen. To use the Reset function, follow these steps:1. In the Settings menu, select Reset. The Reset screen appears. 2. Enter your security PIN using your remote. N The default password set is “0-0- 0-0.” N If you forget the PIN code, press the remote control buttons in the following sequence in Standby mode, which resets the PIN to “0- 0-0-0”: 조용히M → 8 → 2 → 4 →P (Power on). 3. After a few moments, Smart Hub automatically resets. The screen may go black, then Smart Hub reappears. In a few moments, it starts the reinitialization procedure. 4. To complete the re-initialization, go to Step 2 in "To start Smart Hub for the first time, follow these steps:" section of this manual. ● About Smart HubThe About Smart Hub menu contains functions that display information about Smart Hub. Detail: Lists information about Smart Hub including version number, memory usage, and the unique product ID. Terms of Service Agreement: Display the Terms of Service Agreement.Using Samsung Apps Samsung Apps ™ → Samsung Apps Samsung Apps is a store from which you can download applications to use on Samsung TV/AV equipment. You can enjoy a variety of contents such as videos, music, photos, games, useful information etc. using the downloaded applications.New applications are added regularly. N To use Samsung Apps, you should read and accept the Terms of Service Agreement. N Depending on the version of the application, the usage may differ. In this case, please follow the instructions on the screen. Using the colored and function buttons with Samsung AppsN Depending on the screen, the available buttons may differ. ● a Login / Logout Log to or log out of your Samsung account. ● b Filter by Price To toggle the view between All, Paid and Free. ● { Sort To sort the applications by Recommended, Name, Date, or Downloaded. N You can sort all categories except Most Popular. ● } View Mode Each time you select } using your remote, the View Mode toggles between basic mode and thumbnail mode. ● π / µ Scroll Move to previous or next page. ● T Tools Displays the option menu.● R Return Moves to previous menu. Using the Samsung Apps by category The following categories are available: ● Most Popular Displays the most popular applications for users. ● Videos Includes apps that provide video media such as movies, TV shows, and short length videos. ● Games Includes various game apps ● Sports Includes apps that provide sports content such as game results, images and short length video. ● Lifestyle Includes apps that provide lifestyle media services such as music, personal photo management tools, and SNS(Social Network Service). ● Information Includes apps that provide information content such as news, financial information, stock quotes, weather, etc. ● Education Includes apps that provide education contents. ● My Apps My Apps provides information about your available App cash coupon and information about the apps you have already purchased or installed on your TV. N You can purchase App cash that you can use to buy applications through http://tv.samsungapps.com. ● Help If you have questions about Samsung Apps, check this section first. To search for an application in Samsung Apps, follow these steps: 1. On the Samsung Apps screen, select Search Samsung Apps. The Search window and keypad screen appears. 2. Enter a keyword using your remote. 3. When done, select OK at the bottom of the QWERTY keypad. 4. Wait until the search result screen displays. After Samsung Apps displays the results, you can select an application you want in the search result screen. N You can find a keyword in the search history If you have searched using that keyword before. N If you have a keyboard and/or a mouse connected to your TV, you can use the mouse to select the Search Samsung Apps field and the keyboard to type in the keyword.Search ™ → Search Easily search for and access content from diverse sources (e.g. applications, Your Video, AllShare) 1. On the Smart Hub screen, select Search at the top of the screen. 2. If you want to input a search term directly, select Enter search keyword entry field. A keypad screen appears. Enter the search term using your remote. N If you want to search by category, select a category below the field using your remote. N Depending on the version of the application, the usage may differ. In this case, please follow the instructions on the screen. Using the Search function by category ● Most SearchedYou can search by selecting a key word in the key word list. The key word list displays words you frequently use for searches. ● Top Application You can search applications and services in the application list. The application list displays apps that users download frequently. ● Search History You can find the keyword in the search history list if you searched a keyword before. Using the colored and function buttons with Search ● b Refresh Refresh the Search function. ● T Tools You can set general parameters for the Search function or delete the search history.● R Return Return to the previous menu. Using the Tools menu with Search ● General Settings Keyword Recommendation: Turns the Keyword Recommendation function on or off. Search Scope: Sets a search scope. The default is allowed all application.To customize a search scope, follow these steps: 1. On the Search screen, open the Tools menu using your remote. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select an application in the Search Scope. A c mark disappears from the check box. N When you remove the c mark, you remove that application from the search scope. Only checked applications are included. 4. When done, Press the 복귀R button. ● Search History Lets you delete previously used keywords from the search history list. Also, If you select Delete All, you can delete all your search history. To delete a search history keyword, follow these steps: 1. On the Search screen, open the Toolsmenu using your remote. 2. Select Search History. 3. Select a keyword in the Keyword list. 4. Press E button on your remote. The keyword disappears from the list.Smart Tip NAVER ™ → Smart Tip NAVER Using Smart Tip NAVER, you can view related information and real-time hot issues about the current broadcast and screen and you can perform searches using keywords while watching TV. N The related information about the current broadcast is only available for digital channels. N Keywords may not be provided depending on the current screen. You can choose one of the provided keywords with the remote control. N To use this function, the product must be connected to the Internet. N Depending on the version of the application, the usage may differ. In this case, please follow the instructions on the screen. Using Color Buttons in the Smart Tips● a Hiding the Window Minimizes the Smart Tip menu bar at the bottom. If the menu bar is minimized, only the a Smart Tips are displayed on the screen. N If a pre-determined period of time has passed, the menu bar is automatically minimized. ● b NAVER Search The NAVER search window and numeric keypad appears on the screen. Enter a keyword to search with using the remote control. N If you enter a keyword, related keywords are displayed in the list at the bottom. Real-time rising keywords, Popular TV keywords, Daily rising keywords: Select an item using the remote control. The search results are listed. N If you select b Search using the remote control, the screen returns to the previous search screen. ● { Broadcast Issues The me2day window appears where you can view the real-time hot issues related to the broadcast. Using the Color Buttons in Broadcast Issues ● a View More Hot Issues The me2day window is expanded. You can view the real-time issue list using the remote control. ● E Issue Details The me2day widget is launched. N If the me2day widget is not installed, a message window appears asking you whether you want to install the widget. For more information about me2day, please visit Samsung Apps. ● R ReturnReturns to the previous screen. ● T Utility Functions Bookmark Management: You can manage weekly popular bookmarks and My Bookmarks. Related Information Category Setting: You can select a category using the remote control. The selected categories are marked with c. Auto Run Setting: You can determine whether to automatically launch the Smart Tips when the TV is turned on or not. ● E Details You can view detailed information about the provided keywords. If you select the Details button again, the Naver search results are listed. N Only when a keyword is provided, does appear in the menu bar. N You can choose one of the provided keywords with the remote control.– } Bookmarks: Saves a provided keyword in My Bookmarks. N The Bookmarks only appear in the menu bar when the Details button has been selected. ● R Return Minimizes the Smart Tips menu bar. If you select the Return button again, a message window appears asking whether you want to exit the Smart Tips. Select Yes or No.Using the Color Buttons in the Naver Search Result List N You can view the search result of each category using the remote control. ● b Search Moves to the keyword input window. The numeric keypad screen appears. You can enter another keyword. ● } PIP Sets or cancels PIP mode.N The broadcast that is currently being watched is displayed. You can change the channels using the remote control. ● R Return The Naver search result list is closed and the Naver search screen appears.Family Story ™ → Family Story Family Story feature allows you to share photos, messages, and events with your family. N Depending on the version of the application, the usage may differ. In this case, please follow the instructions on the screen. ● Create Group If you are starting Family Story for the first time, you can create a family group and invite members to join. ● Invite Members After creating a group, you can invite the family members who you want to share your family's photos and events with to join. ● Join Group If you were invited to join a family group by a family member, you can select Join Group to enjoy Family Story services.To create a family group, follow these steps: 1. On the Smart Hub screen, select Family Story. The Family Story screen appears. 2. Select Create Group. The Create and Invite pop-up appears. 3. Select OK. The Family Story agreement appears. Read the agreement, and then select I agree. N You must agree with the terms prior to using Family Story. 4. Enter a Group Name, Your Name and Your Phone Number without dashes using your remote. N If you want to add a group image, select an image box. (An external device containing photos must be connected to your TV via USB.) N * Fields marked with an asterisk are required. 5. When done, select Done. The group creation is completed. N If you want to invite members to your group, select Invite Members. If you want to go your Family Story, select Go to Family Story If you selected Invite Members, go to Step 4 in the procedure below. To invite members to your Family Story, follow these steps: 1. From the starting menu in Family Story, open the Tools menu using your remote, and then select Group Members. The Group Members screen appears. 2. Select Invite Member. The Invite popup appears. 3. Select OK. The Invite Members screen appears. 4. Select Select to enter Name.. The keypad screen appears. 5. Enter member's name using your remote. When finished, select Done. 6. Select Phone number or Samsung account ID. The keypad screen reappears. 7. Enter the prospective member's phone number or Samsung account ID using your remote. When finished, select Done. N If you want to add more prospective members, select Add Member, and repeat Steps 4 through 7. 8. When finished adding members, select Done. The Member Invitation Completed screen appears. 9. If invited by phone number, 4-digit invite code will be generated and the code need to be shared with the member. If invited by Samsung Account, the member will be notified about the invitation via e-mail. Select OK to finish.To join a group using the received invite code, follow these steps: 1. Start Family Story and accept the terms. 2. You will see a pop-up message asking about invitation type. If you were invited by phone number, please select Invite. If you were invited by Samsung account, please select Samsung Account.3. If joining by Samsung Account, a list of invitations, from your family groups will be displayed. Select Accept to join. You can select Deny if you don't want to join the inviting group. 4. If joining by Invite Code, first enter your phone number using your remote. When done, select Done. Then you will see a list of invitations from your family groups. Select Accept to join. You can select Deny if you don't want to join the inviting group. Enter the 4-digit invite code shared by your family member, and then select Done to finish. 5. Select OK. Joining your family group has been completed.Fitness ™ → Fitness The Fitness application provided by Smart Hub lets you track and manage a fitness and exercise program you create. N To use Fitness, you should be logged in Smart Hub. N Depending on the version of the application, the usage may differ. In this case, please follow the instructions on the screen.Read these notes before exercising... N Please warm-up or stretch before exercising. N Stop exercising immediately if you feel pain, or dizzy, exhausted, or short of breath. Create Your Profile When you start Fitness for the first time, you should create your own profile. On the Fitness screen, select Do you want to exit the widget?. A pop-up message appears. Select Create Profile. 1. Name: Select Password mode and Last Name to put in a new user name. The keypad screen appears. Enter your name using the remote. When done, Select OK. 2. Gender: Select your gender. 3. Search Model: Enter your birthdate using your remote. It will be used to personalize some things for you. 4. Units: Select your preferred units. The selected units will be applied all over Fitness. 5. Height: Enter your height. This will be used to calculate your body max index (BMI). 6. Weight: Enter your weight. This will be used to calculate your body max index (BMI). 7. Complete: Creation of your profile is finished. The TV displays the information of your profile and BMI. To start the Fitness, Select Enjoy Fitness. Using Fitness with categories ● Exercise Provides information on your exercise goal, current status and recommended contents. ● ProgressProvide information on your basic body profile, exercise progress, achievement your goals.Kids ™ → Kids Using this function provided by Smart Hub, lets you provides a quick launcher and the recommended list to access the kids or education-related application or contents easily and quickly. Also, it helps user (parents) to manage your kids. N Depending on the version of the application, the usage may differ. In this case, please follow the instructions on the screen. Using Kids with categories ● Playground Displays recommended contents and applications. When you select an application or content, the TV executes the application or contents immediately. N The maximum number of contents list is 40.N You can edit the contents list. For more detailed information, refer to "My Choice" in this section. N Most of the content must be downloaded from Samsung apps. To download, follow the directions on the screen. When the download is complete, press 복귀R repeatedly until the Kids app reappears. Start the contents or app by highlighting and then selecting it.● Sticker Book Displays the Sticker Books with the stickers your kids received. Also, it can be share with your Family Story. Your kids can receive the sticker through these methods: – By User (parent): You can present a sticker using the Present Stickers function in the Parents menu. – Automatically: Kids presents a sticker while the child is watching content. Creating a Sticker Book 1. If you want to create a new Sticker Book, select Filter by Price. The Create New Book screen appears. 2. Enter the Sticker Book's name using your remote. When done, select Next. 3. Select a color for the Sticker Book. When done, select Next. 4. Check the created sticker book. If you want to change a name, select Edit. If you want to change a color, select Previous. 5. When done, select Done. A new Sticker Book is created. N You can create a new sticker book. Maximum number of books is 10. N You can check arrived stickers by highlighting and selecting New Sticker. Only ten new sticker types are displayed in New Sticker at one time.● Browse All Displays the kids or education-related applications list and all contents list. N When you select an application or contents, if the application or contents has not been installed on the TV, the TV displays the corresponding download screen from the Samsung Apps screen. To use Browser All, follow these steps:1. On the Browser All screen, select a character you wish. The selected character screen appears. 2. Select the kind of contents you want. Videos: Displays the video contents of the corresponding character. Games: Displays the game contents of the corresponding character. Enjoy your TV.: Displays the e-book contents of the corresponding character.3. The detailed information screen for the selected contents appears. You can play the contents, share the contents with your Family Story, add the contents to My Choice, and give the contents a rating. N If you were purchased already, you can play the contents. If you are not purchased, you can download the contents in the Samsung Apps. ● ParentsLets you edit the Playground, give stickers to your kids, check usage time, and set the watching limit alarm. My Choice You can add or delete contents in the Playground. The Playground displays the added contents only. To add or delete contents in the Playground, follow these steps: 1. On the Parents screen, select My Choice. The My Choice screen appears. N My Choice contains content you added through the Browse All screen. 2. Select contents you want to add or delete in the list. A pop-up message appears. 3. Select Yes. 4. The selected contents is added or deleted.Present Stickers When your kids do a good job today, you can present a sticker to them. To present a sticker to your kids, follow these steps: 1. On the Parents screen, select Present Stickers. The Present Stickers screen appears. 2. Select a sticker you want to present. A pop-up message appears. 3. Select Yes. 4. Select a sticker book you want to put the sticker into, and then select Parents. N If you want to check a sticker book, select Check Now. You can check the stickers in the selected sticker book. 5. The sticker is placed in the sticker book you selected.Viewing History Lets you check how long your kids have used the app through a graph. Also, lets you check how long your kids have used each video or content item. Change a date or content title using your remote. Set Alarm Lets you set how long your kids can watch. When the time is up, the alarm window appears.To set the time your kids can watch, follow these steps: 1. On the Parents screen, select Set Alarm. The Set Alarm screen appears. 2. Select Timer. 3. Select amount of time. The alarm is set.Web Browser ™ → Web Browser Using this function provided by the Smart Hub, you can surf the Internet on your TV. 1. On the Smart Hub screen, select Web Browser. The Web Browser screen appears. 2. Surf the Internet in the same way as on a PC. N Depending on the version of the application, the usage may differ. In this case, please follow the instructions on the screen. Using the colored and function buttons with the Web Browser ● b Control Panel Shows or hides the control panel at the top of the screen. ● { Link Browsing / Pointer Browsing You can change the cursor to Link Browsing mode or Pointer Browsing mode. In Pointer Browsing mode, you use a pointer to select items on the screen in the same way you use a pointer on a computer. In Link Browsing mode, you move a blue rectangle from link to link on the screen by pressing the directional keys on your remote. Pointer Browsing is best if you have a mouse attached to the TV. Link Browsing only works if you are browsing using your remote. N When you select Pointer Browsing, you cannot use the remote to select items in the Tools Menu. N In Pointer Browsing Mode, you can use the arrow keys on your remote to move the pointer. ● } PIP Turns PIP on or off. With PIP on, you can watch TV while using the Web Browser. ● π / µ Scroll up/downYou can scroll the page up or down. N Available only when cursor is set to Link Browsing. ● T Tools Displays the Tools menu. Control Panel: Shows or hides the control panel in the top of the screen. Link Browsing / Pointer Browsing: You can change the cursor to Link Browsing mode or Pointer Browsing mode. PIP: Turns PIP on or off.PIP Settings: Lets you select where the PIP window is displayed on the screen and which sound source the TV plays, sound from the main screen (the browser) or sound from the sub screen (the PIP window). Add to Bookmark: Add the current page to your Bookmarks. Enable Grabbing / Disable Grabbing: You can move a current web page in the direction you choose. To move a web page, select a page, and then move it in the direction you wish using your remote. N Available only when the cursor is set to Pointer Browsing. ● R Return Close the Web Browser. Using the Control Panel with Web Browser The Web Browser has a series of icons across the top of the screen which provide a number of useful functions. With these icons, you can easily use the Web Browser. The icons are described below, starting with the icon on the far left of the screen. ● Back Moves to the previous web page. N If there is no previous web page, this icon will not work. ● Forward Moves to the next web page. N If there is no next web page, this icon will not work. ● Refresh / Stop Refreshes the current page or stops the current connection from loading. ● Home Page Goes to the URL you specified as your the home page. ● Zoom You can select a zoom level of 50%, 75%, 100%, 125%, 150%, 200%, 300%and Fit to screen. ● Bookmarks Displays the Bookmarks screen. You can bookmark the current page or select a favorite page to visit from the bookmark list. You can also sort by Date, Name, or Frequency. To sort, select the Sort. When you select Enter URL, you can enter in a new URL address directly using your remote. When you highlight a bookmark, the Options button appears on the right. In the Options pop-up, you can edit the selected page or delete the selected page from bookmark list. Using the Tools menu with Account Manager ● Delete All Delete all bookmark lists. ● Add to BookMarks Sets the current page as a bookmark.● Bookmark Import You can import a bookmark file saved in the other device like a PC. ● Bookmark Export You can export a bookmark file from your TV to another device connected your TV. ● History Displays the History screen. You can select a web page to visit in the History list. You can also sort by Name, Date, or Frequency. To sort, select Sort. When you select Create a New Sticker Book, you can enter in a new URL address directly using your remote or mouse. When you highlight a page, the Options button appears on the right. In the Options pop-up, you can delete the selected page from the history list or add the selected page to bookmark. N If you want to delete all entries in the history list, open the Tools menu and then select Delete All. ● URL Field Shows the URL of the current page. If you select the URL field, the URL popup appears. Using your remote, you can enter a new URL directly. ● Windows List Displays list or images of open windows (the Windows List). You can open a new page to the list (using Open new window), select and access a page in the list, select and close a page in the list, or close all pages. When you select Enter URL, you can enter in a new URL address directly using your remote. Using the Tools menu with Windows List ● Open new window Open the new web browser. A new web browser automatically displays the home page.● Close all windows Close the currently opened all Windows List. After closing all Windows List, TV opens a new web browser automatically. A new web browser automatically displays the home page. ● Search Lets you search the web. When you select the Search entry field, the Search screen appears.To search the web by word input, follow these steps: 1. On the Search screen, select the search engine. Also, you can select a different search engine. 2. Select Browse All. The keypad screen appears. 3. Enter the word you want to search using your remote. The TV searches the word by search engine.● Share Share the current web page to your Family Story. ● Options You can configure the Web Browser settings. Setting up the Web Browser Move the cursor to the top of the screen, and then select the Options icon.● Read Tool Provides an easy-to-read page by enlarging the main text. ● Approved Sites Allows to restrict your children’s access to inappropriate web pages. Therefore, this function allows access of only the registered web sites. N Every time you access the Approved Sites, the PIN screen appears and you should enter the PIN.Approved Sites feature: Turns on or off the Approved Sites. Reset password for Approved Sites.: Change the Approved Sites password. Add current site: Lets you add the currently displayed web site to the Approved Sites list. Manage Approved Sites: Lets you key in URLs to add to the Approved Sites List and delete sites from the Approved Sites list.N If you turn Approved Sites on and have not added any sites to the Clean site list, you will not be able to access any Internet sites. ● Private Browsing Enable or disable the Privacy mode. When the Privacy mode is enabled, the browser does not retain the URLs of sites you visit. If you want to enable Private Browsing, select Yes. If the Private Browsing function is running, the “Stop” icon appears in front of the URL at the top of the screen. To disable Private Browsing, select it again when Private Browsing is enabled. ● PIP Settings Lets you configure the PIP function. Position: Select a position for the PIP sub-picture. Sound Select: Select the audio source you will hear - Main or Sub - when PIP is on.● Web Browser Setting You can configure Web Browser options. Set as homepage: You can set the home page. – Most visited: Set the most frequently visited URL as the home page. – Current Page: Sets the current page as the home page. – Bookmarks: Sets the bookmarks URL as the home page. – Enter URL: Lets you key in the URL of the page you want for your home page. The keyboard works like a cell phone texting keyboard. Pop-up Block: Turns the Pop-up Block on or off. Ad Block: You can determine whether to block advertisements and select the URLs for which advertisements are blocked. – Ad Blocker: Turns the Ad Blocker on or off.– Block current page: Adds the current page to the blocked list. – Manage blocked sites: You can add a website for which advertisements should be blocked by directly keying in the URL, or you can delete a website from the list. General: You can delete your personal information. – Delete history: Deletes the website history.– Delete browsing data: Deletes Internet access information such as cookies. – Reset Settings: Reset all web browser settings to the factory defaults. – Hide Menu: Turns on or off the control panel auto-hide. Encoding: You can set the Encoding setting for web pages to Automatic or Manual. – Auto select: Turns on or off the Encoding setting for web pages automatically. – Setting: Select the Encoding settings for web pages manually. Select an encoding format from the encoding format list. Pointer: You can set the speed of the cursor when the cursor is set to Pointer Mode. – Pointer Speed: Select a pointer speed. Web Browser information: You can check the version information about the Web Browser.Skype ™ → Skype Skype created a little piece of software that makes communicating with people around the world easy and fun. With Skype you can say hello or share a laugh with anyone, anywhere. And if both of you are on Skype, it’s free. Communicate with people around the world! To use Skype, you need the Samsung TV Camera (sold separately). Other company’s TV Cameras are not compatible with Skype on your TV. N For more information, download the Skype user’s manual from “http://www.samsung.com/sec.” N Depending on the version of the application, the usage may differ. In this case, please follow the instructions on the screen.[Legal Statement] Due to the various capabilities of products featuring the Samsung Smart Hub - Content Service, as well as limitations in the available content, certain features, applications, and services may not be available on all devices or in all territories. Some features on Smart Hub may also require additional peripheral devices or membership fees that are sold separately. Please visit http:// www.samsung.com for more information on specific device information and content availability. The services and availability of content through Smart Hub are subject to change from time to time without prior notice.Using the Air Conditioner by the TV application ™ → Samsung Smart Air Conditioner Using the Samsung Smart Air Conditioner application, you can control the air conditioner in your home using the voice control function while watching TV. N Depending on the version of the application, the usage may differ. In this case, please follow the instructions on the screen. Registering the air conditioner You can select an air conditioner to be connected to the TV over the network. 1. Check if the TV and the air conditioner are connected to the same AP. 2. Search for air conditioners connected to the TV. 3. The Confirm new appliance popup window appears. Select Yes to register the air conditioner. 4. Select Yes from the found air conditioner list to run the application. 5. In the Samsung Smart Air Conditioner screen, select the air conditioner in use. N If the air conditioner that is in use is not on the screen, select b Scan again. 6. If you select the air conditioner in use, the authentication request begins. Turn the air conditioner off and select OK. The authentication process begins. 7. The authentication popup window appears. For the authentication process, turn the air conditioner on. 8. The "If the authentication is complete, you can control the air conditioner with your voice (Smart Talk)" message is displayed on the screen. Select the air conditioner that is in use from the screen. N If the air conditioner that is in use is not on the screen, select b Scan again. N To disconnect and not use the air conditioner, select { Disconnect air conditioner. N To go back to the previous step, select R Return.Controlling the air conditioner On the TV screen, you can control the air conditioner using the Voice Control function. 1. When the Voice Control function is On, start the Voice Control function with the Trigger Words ("Hi TV" or "Smart TV"). 2. Say "Air Conditioner". The available commands are listed. 3. Say a command. The air conditioner will perform that operation. Deregistering the air conditioner To stop using the air conditioner, Select { Disconnect air conditioner.AllShare Play ™ → AllShare Play Enjoy photos, music and/or movie files saved on a USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) device and/or your PC. If you activate AllShare Play, a window appears to display the available function list. After checking the functions, select Don't Show Again or Close. N To view content on a USB device, you should plug the device into a USB port on the TV. N If you want to use a USB HDD, we recommend to use a USB HDD that has a power adapter. Connecting a USB Device 1. Turn on your TV. 2. Connect a USB device containing photo, music and/or movie files to the USB port on the TV. 3. When a USB device is connected to the TV, the New device connected. window appears. Select a category you want to play among Videos, Photos and Music. N The TV may display the files on the USB device automatically if it is the only device connected. Disconnecting a USB Device Method 1: Using the TV/외부입력s button.1. Press the TV/외부입력s button. 2. Select a desired USB device, and then press the 간간간간T button. The Tools menu appears. 3. Select Safely Remove USB, and then wait until the selected USB device is disconnected. You can remove a USB device from the TV. Method 2: Using the AllShare Play home screen.1. Go to AllShare Play home screen. (™ → AllShare Play) 2. Select any category except My List, and then press the E button. 3. Select a desired USB device, and then press the 간편메뉴T button. The Tools menu appears. 4. Select Safely Remove USB, and then wait until the selected USB device is disconnected. You can remove a USB device from the TV.N To remove a USB device from the TV, we recommend use Safely Remove USB function. Read this information before using AllShare with a USB device. Restriction and Caution Œ Before connecting your device to the TV, please back up your files to prevent them from damage or loss of data. SAMSUNG is not responsible for any data file damage or data loss. Œ Connect a USB HDD to the dedicated USB (HDD 5V 1.0A) port. Œ Do not disconnect the USB device while it is loading. Œ If you connect a USB device with a USB extension cable, the TV may not recognize the USB device or read the files on the device. Œ If a USB device you connect to the TV is not recognized, the files on the device are corrupted, or a file in the list is not played, connect the USB device to a PC, format the device and check the connection. Œ If a file you deleted from the PC is still found when you run Smart Hub, use the “Empty the Recycle Bin” function on the PC to permanently delete the file.Supported Devices Œ Certain types of USB Digital camera and audio devices may not be compatible with this TV. Œ AllShare Play supports only USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) devices. MSC is a Mass Storage Class BulkOnly Transport device. Examples of MSC are Thumb drives, Flash Card Readers and USB HDD (USB HUB are not supported). Devices should be connected directly to the TV’s USB port. Œ If more than 2 PTP devices are connected, you can only use one at a time. Œ If more than two MSC devices are connected, some of them may not be recognized. A USB device that requires high power (more than 500mA or 5V) may not be supported. Œ If the TV has no input during the time set in Auto Protection Time, the Screensaver will run. Œ The power-saving mode of some external hard disk drives may be released automatically when you connect them to the TV. Œ More than 2TB USB HDD is not supported. File system and formats Œ The USB function might not work properly with unlicensed multimedia files. Œ MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) is not supported. Œ The file system supports FAT16, FAT32 and NTFS. Œ AllShare Play supports only the Sequential jpeg format. It does not support the Progressive jpeg format. Œ The higher the resolution of the image, the longer it takes to display on the screen. Œ The maximum supported JPEG resolution is 15360 X 8640 pixels. Œ If a file is corrupted or the TV does not support the file type, the Not Supported File Format. message appears. Œ If the files are sorted by Folder view, the TV can display the names of up to 1000 files in each folder. Œ If the number of files and folders saved on a USB storage device is approximately over 8000, the files and folders may not appear and some folders may not be opened. Œ The TV cannot play MP3 files with DRM that have been downloaded from a for pay site. Digital Rights Management (DRM) is a technology that supports the creation, distribution, and management of digital content in an integrated and comprehensive way, including protecting the rights and interests of content providers, preventing illegal copying of contents, and managing billings and settlements. Connecting to a PC through a network You can play pictures, music, and videos saved in your PC through a network connection in the AllShare Play mode. N For more information on how to configure your TV and connect it to your network, refer to “Setting up the Network” in this manual. N To view content located on your PC, you must have connected your TV and your PC to your LAN and downloaded and installed AllShare PC Software on your PC. N We recommend you locate both your TV and PC in the same network subnet. IP addresses have four parts, separated by periods (111.222.333.444). If your TV and PC are in the same subnet, the first 3 parts of the TV IP address and the PC IP address (111.222.333) will be the same and only the last part (the host address) will be different. The following AllShare Play functions are not supported when you are playing media from a PC connected through a network:N The Background Music On and Background Music Setting functions. N Sorting files by preference in the Photos, Music, and Videos folders. – The † or … function while a movie is playing. N DivX DRM are not supported. N Set your PC firewall program so that AllShare PC Software is a permitted program. N Depending on the Internet server, when you use AllShare Play through a network connection: – The sorting method may vary. – The Scene Search function may not be supported. – The Resume function, which resumes playing of a video, may not be supported. – The Resume function does not support multiple users. (It memorizes only the point where the most recent user stopped playing a video.) – The search function may not work depending on the content information. N You may experience file stuttering while playing a video in AllShare Play through a network connection.Using the AllShare Play AllShare Play enables you to enjoy the following services. You need to log in to your Samsung account to use web storage or social services. AllShare Play can play various contents in three ways: – Using USB Device: You can play videos, photos, or music from a connected USB device. – Using DLNA or Web storage: You can play various contents from devices connected to your home network or web storage. – Using Social Services: You can play some content from social services such as Family Story, Facebook or Picasa. N Before using Facebook or Picasa, it should be installed in the Smart Hub. N To use SugarSync, Facebook, or Picasa, you should log in to corresponding application. Alternatively, you can register your application account in to your Samsung account. To register your application account, refer to "Configuring the Smart Hub with Settings" in the Smart Hub section. N To use Family Story, you should log in to your Samsung account. Before using Family Story, you should join a group at least one more.N You can transfer a desired content to other device connected to the TV. Contents Type Supported transfer device USB DLNA, SugarSync, Family Story, Picasa, Facebook Camera DLNA DLNA USB SugarSync USB Family Story USB Picasa USB FaceBook USB Mobile device USBMy List (In AllShare Play) ™ → AllShare Play → My List Using this function, you can access the content easily and quickly. ● Recently Played Displays the videos, photos or music file list of recently played. If you have a file you want to play again, use this category. N When you play a file from the Recently Played list, and the USB device is not connected or the file is not found, the "Cannot find the file you're looking for." message appears. N Up to 48 files are listed in descending order of playing time on the basis of the time configured on the TV so that the last played file comes first. N When you try to play a file on a mobile phone, the file may not be played. ● What's NewDisplays the newly updated videos, photos or music file saved on the USB device or your PC. If you have a newly updated file you want to play, use this category. ● Playlist Displays the Playlist files saved on the USB device or your PC. If you want to play a playlist, select the playlist. The selected playlist will play immediately. N You can create up to 12 playlists.N You can add up to 100 files to a single playlist. N You can only add one type of content to a single playlist. For example, you can only add music files to a playlist that includes music files. Creating the Playlist 1. Select the desired file in the Videos, Photos, or Music file list. 2. Open the Tools menu using your remote, and then select Add to Playlist. 3. Select a file you want to add. The c mark appears in the check box. 4. Repeat Step 3 to select additional files. N To select all the files in the list, select Select All. To cancel a selection, select the file again. 5. When done, select Add to Playlist. The Add to Playlist screen appears.6. Select Create New. The Create a new playlist. screen appears. 7. Enter playlist name using your remote. 8. When done, Select Done. The newly playlist is created. To add files to playlist, follow these steps: 1. Follow Steps 1 through 4 in the “Creating the Playlist” procedure. 2. Select a playlist to add files. The files will be added to playlist you selected. To delete one or more files in the Playlist, follow these steps: 1. Select a playlist you want to edit. 2. Open the Tools menu using your remote, and then select Edit Playlist. The Edit Playlist screen appears. 3. Select a file you want to delete. The c mark appears in the check box. 4. Repeat Step 3 to select additional files. N To select all the files in the list, select Select All. To cancel a selection, select the file again. 5. When done, select Remove. A pop-up message appears. 6. Select Yes. The selected file(s) be removed in the Playlist.Videos (In AllShare Play) ™ → AllShare Play → Videos You can play video files saved on USB device and/or your PC. N For more information about the subtitle formats and codec formats, refer to "Supported Subtitle and Codec formats" in the Other Information section. Playing a Video1. On the AllShare Play screen, Select Videos. 2. Select the device you want to play. 3. Select the desired video in the file list. N If you stop the playing, you can play the video later from the point where you stopped it. N The file name appears on the top with its playing time. N If video time information is unknown, the playing time and progress bar are not displayed. N Press and hold the rewind or fastforward button for 3 seconds while a video is playing to move to the next video. Playback control button with Videos ● † / … Each time you select † or … using your remote, the playback speed change as follows. († 1 / † 2 / † 3 / … 1 / … 2 / … 3) ● l, r Jump to backward or forward from current position. ● ∑ Pause the scene. – In pause mode, select …. Each time you select … using your remote, the playback speed is reduced to „ 1/8 / „1/4 / „1/2. – In pause mode, select ∑. Each time you select ∑ using your remote, a new frame will be appear. N To return to normal speed playback, select ∂ using your remote. N The product does not play sound in stop mode. N Stop motion operates only in the forward direction. Using the Tools menu with Videos● On the file list screen, you can use the following these options: – View You can sort the file list by selecting a sort criteria you want. – Selection Play You can play by selecting the desired music file in the file list. – Send Lets you send your video files with your Web storage or other devices.N If you want to use this function, you should log in the Smart Hub. – Login / Logout You can login or logout your Smart Hub account. – Add to Playlist Lets you make your own playlist. When you use the playlist, you can play music you want to listen easily and quickly. – Go to the playlistMoves to Playlist screen. – Information Displays detailed information about the selected file. ● During playback, you can use the following these options: – Ad Block Settings Moves to the file list screen. – Play from the Beginning You can restart a video file from the beginning.– Scene Search You can use the Scene Search function during playback to view or start a movie from the scene of your choice. N If the index information is damaged or unsupported, you will not be able to use the Scene Search function. – Title Search You can move directly to another title.– Time Search Search the video or input the play time directly using your remote. – Repeat Mode You can play movie files repeatedly. – Picture Size You can adjust the picture size to your preference. – Picture Mode You can change the Picture Mode. – Sound ModeYou can change the Sound Mode. – Audio Language You can enjoy video in one of supported languages. The function is enabled only when you play streamtype files which support multiple audio formats. – Subtitle You can view a subtitle. You can select a specific language if the subtitle file contains multiple languages. N You can only select subtitles when there is a subtitle file for the video. N For supported subtitile formats, refer to the "Supported Subtitle and AllShare Play file formats" section in Other Information. – Subtitle Settings Displays the Subtitle Settings. You can set up a subtitle option. N You can only select subtitles when there is a subtitle file for the video. N For supported subtitile formats, refer to the "Supported Subtitle and AllShare Play file formats" section in Other Information. – Information Displays detailed information about the selected file. Viewing the file lists N When you use the AllShare Playfunction with your Web storage rather than a USB device, View is not supported. 1. To sort files in the file lists, select } using your remote. The View screen appears. 2. Select a sort criteria you want. ● Folder view Displays the whole folder. You can view the file name and thumbnail by selecting the folder.● Title Sorts and displays the file title in Symbol / Number / Alphabet / Special order. ● Latest Date Sorts and shows files by the latest date. ● Earliest Date Sorts and shows files by the earliest date.Send your video files Lets you send your video files with your Web storage or other devices. N If you want to use this function, you should log in the Smart Hub. 1. To send video files in the file list, open the Tools menu using your remote, and then select Send. 2. Select a video file you want to send. The c mark appears in the check box.3. Repeat Step 2 to select additional tracks. N To select all the files in the list, select Select All. To cancel a selection, select the file again. 4. When done, select Send. The Send screen appears. 5. Choose the destination device to send, and then select Send. 6. From these steps, please follow the instructions on the screen.Photos (In AllShare Play) ™ → AllShare Play → Photos Viewing a photo (or slide show) N For more information about the supported image file formats, refer to "Supported Subtitle and Codec formats" in the Other Information section. 1. On the AllShare screen, select Photos. 2. Select the device you want to play.3. Select the desired photo file in the file list. The TV displays the selected photo file. 4. To start the slide show, select ∂ using your remote. N To change a photo manually, press the l or r button on your remote. N During the slide show, all files in the file list are displayed in order, starting from the file you selected. N When watching a photo file or slide show, you can add background music if you have music files on same device. N The background music cannot be changed until the BGM has finished loading. Playback control button with Photos ● † / … The slide show speed change as follow (Slow, Normal, Fast).● l, r Change a previous or next photo. ● ∫ Return to the file list screen. ● ∂ Start the slide show. ● ∑ Pause the slide show. Using the Tools menu with Photos ● On the file list screen, you can use the following these options: – View You can sort the file list by selecting a sort criteria you want. – Selection Play You can play by selecting the desired music file in the file list. – Send Lets you send your photos with your Family Story or photo-related application.N If you want to use this function, you should log in the Smart Hub. – Login / Logout You can login or logout your Smart Hub account. – Add to Playlist Lets you make your own playlist. When you use the playlist, you can play music you want to listen easily and quickly. – Go to the playlistMoves to Playlist screen. – Information Displays detailed information about the selected file. ● When playing a photo file, you can use the following these options: – Ad Blocker Moves to the file list screen. – Start Slide Show / Stop Slide Show You can start or stop a slide show. Alternatively, select ∂ or ∑ using your remote. – Slide Show Speed You can select the slide show speed during the slide show. Alternatively, select † or … using your remote. – Background Music On / Background Music Off You can start or stop background music. – Background Music Setting You can set and select background music when watching a photo file or slide show. – Picture Mode You can change the Picture Mode. – Sound Mode You can change the Sound Mode. N Available only when the background music is set to on. – Zoom You can zoom into images in full screen mode.– Rotate you can rotate images. – Information Displays detailed information about the selected file. Viewing the file lists 1. To sort files in the file lists, select } using your remote. The View screen appears. 2. Select a sort criteria you want.● Folder view Displays the whole folder. You can view the file name and thumbnail by selecting the folder. ● Title Sorts and displays the file title in Symbol / Number / Alphabet / Special order. ● Latest Date Sorts and shows files by the latest date.● Earliest Date Sorts and shows files by the earliest date. ● Monthly Sorts and shows photo files by month. Send your photos Lets you send your photos with your Family Story or other devices. N If you want to use this function, you should log in the Smart Hub. 1. For example, suppose that you want to send with your Family Story. 2. To send photo files in the file list, open the Tools menu using your remote, and then select Send. 3. Select a photo file you want to send. The c mark appears in the check box. 4. Repeat Step 3 to select additional tracks.N To select all the files in the list, select Select All. To cancel a selection, select the file again. 5. When done, select Send. The Send screen appears. 6. Choose the destination device to send. 7. Choose the family group to share. A pop-up window appears. 8. Enter a message to send to family group you selected.N If the QWERTY keyboard screen is displayed, you can use a keyboard connected to the TV to enter the message. 9. When done, select Send.Music (In AllShare Play) ™ → AllShare Play → Music Playing Music N For more information about the supported music file formats, refer to "Supported Subtitle and Codec formats" in the Other Information section. 1. On the AllShare Play screen, select Music.2. Select the device you want to play. 3. Select the desired music file in the file list or select ∂ using your remote. N To move a previous page, select b using your remote. To move a next page, select { using your remote. N When the music is playing, you can search the music file by selecting † or … using your remote. N If the sound is abnormal when you play MP3 files, adjust the Equalizer in the Sound menu. (An over-modulated MP3 file may cause a sound problem.) N Press and hold the rewind or fastforward button for 3 seconds while a music file is playing to move to the next music file. Playback control button with Music During playback, you can use additional functions at the bottom right of the screen.● Play / Pause You can start or pause a music file. Alternatively, you can select ∂ or ∑ using your remote. ● Repeat Mode You can play movie files repeatedly. ● Shuffle You can play the music sequentially or randomly. ● Sound Mode You can change the Sound Mode.Using the Tools menu with Music ● You can use the following these options: – View You can sort the file list by selecting a sort criteria you want. – Selection Play You can play by selecting the desired music file in the file list. – Send Lets you send your music files with your Web storage, or other device. N If you want to use this function, you should log in the Smart Hub. – Login / Logout You can login or logout your Smart Hub account. – Add to Playlist Lets you make your own playlist. When you use the playlist, you can play music you want to listen easily and quickly.– Go to the playlist Moves to Playlist screen. – Encoding You can select an encoding format from the encoding format list. – Information Displays detailed information about the selected file. Playing selected music files using Music 1. Select the desired music file in the file list. 2. Open the Tools menu using your remote, and then select Selection Play. 3. Select the tracks you want to add. The c mark appears in the check box. 4. Repeat Step 3 to select additional tracks. N To select all the files in the list, select Select All. To cancel a selection, select the file again. 5. When done, select Play. The selected music files will play. Viewing the file lists N When you use the AllShare Play function with your Web storage rather than a USB device, View is not supported. 1. To sort files in the file lists, select } using your remote. The View screen appears. 2. Select a sort criteria you want. ● Folder view Displays the whole folder. You can view the file name and thumbnail by selecting the folder. ● Title Sorts and displays the file title in Symbol / Number / Alphabet / Special order. ● ArtistSorts the music file by artist in alphabetical order. ● Album Sorts the music file by album in alphabetical order. ● Genre Sorts music files by the genre. Send your music files Lets you send your music files with your Web storage or other devices.N If you want to use this function, you should log in the Smart Hub. 1. To send music files in the file list, open the Tools menu using your remote, and then select Send. 2. Select a music file you want to send. The c mark appears in the check box. 3. Repeat Step 2 to select additional tracks. N To select all the files in the list, select Select All. To cancel a selection, select the file again. 4. When done, select Send. The Send screen appears. 5. Choose the destination device to send, and then Send. 6. From these steps, please follow the instructions on the screen.Recorded TV (AllShare Play) ™ → AllShare Play → Recorded TV You need to record programs before you can play recorded TV programs. – Recording a currently broadcast program – Schedule Recording N It is recommended connecting a USB HDD (min. 5,400rpm) to enjoy recorded TV programs. However, RAID type USB HDDs are not supported.N Only USB devices that have completed the device performance test can be used for recording. To use the Tools in device list on the Recorded TV screen (digital channels only) Select the device with the contents in device list on the Recorded TV screen and run Tools using the remote control. You can use the following functions.Login / Logout: Logs in or out of the Smart Hub. Device Management: Allows you to use the Device Format, Checking Device, and Device Performance operations and displays the Default Recording Device. Information: Allows you to check the detailed information about the connected device. Safely Remove USB: Removes the USB device safely.To record a currently broadcast program (digital channels only) You can record the currently broadcast program immediately. 1. Select ∏ to record a program you are watching. 2. Select the recording duration in the top right screen and select OK. You can record up to 360 minutes. 3. When completing the recording, you can check the recording by going to ™ → AllShare Play → Recorded TV. Immediately recording the program that is currently being viewed in the EPG 1. Press the 정보표시` remote control button. 2. Select a Details. 3. To record the program you are currently watching, select Record Now. ● Making a recording reserving for an upcoming program in the EPG 1. Press the 정보표시` remote control button. 2. Press the l or r remote control button to select the next program. 3. Select a Details. 4. Select Schedule Recording. 5. The icon appears in front of the program for which a recording is reserved.Playing recorded TV programs ™ → AllShare Play → Recorded TV Select Recorded TV and the external device containing the recorded TV. The saved contents are displayed on the screen in the most recent order. To use the buttons in the recorded TV list screen ● π µ Move Page: Moves between pages.● b Device Management: Allows you to use the Device Format, Checking Device, and Device Performance operations and displays the Default Recording Device. ● } View: Sorts the list by your own criteria. ● E Play: Plays the selected contents. ● T Tools: Displays the option menu. ● R Return: Moves to previous menu.Using the Tools in the recorded TV screen ● You can set the following functions in the file list screen. – Play Current Group: Plays the contents in the selected group. – View: Sorts the list by your own criteria. – Selection Play: Selects and plays the selected contents. N You can select more than one item to play or delete.– Delete: Deletes the selected contents. – Add to Playlist: Adds the selected contents to the playlist. – Go to the playlist: Moves to the playlist. – Lock/Unlock: Locks/Unlocks the selected contents. – Device Management: Allows you to use the Device Format, Checking Device, and Device Performance operations and displays the Default Recording Device. – Device Management: Views the device information and checks & formats the device. ● You can set the following additionally when selecting content. – Rename: Renames an item. – Information: Displays the detailed information about the item. ● You can set the following functions while playing content.– Go to Recorded List: Moves to the recorded TV program list. – Play from the Beginning: Plays again from the beginning. – Scene Search: Selects a scene. – Title Search: Plays an item by selecting its title. – Time Search: If you select “Time Search”, the designated date format such as SS/MM/HH or HH/MM/SS is displayed, and you should press the lor r button on your remote. – Repeat Mode: Sets or releases the section you want to repeat. ● Off: Does not set the Repeat mode. ● Title: Plays the currently playing item twice. ● All: Repeats all content. ● Repeat A-B: Repeats the selected section. Activates the loop function from where you want to start the looping section while playing content and from where you want to end the looping section. – Picture Size: Adjusts the picture size. – Picture Mode: Selects a picture mode. – Sound Mode: Changes the sound mode – Information: Displays the detailed information about the recorded item such as the title, recording time, duration, etc.Timeshift You can pause and replay a currently broadcast TV program whenever you want just like a DVD program. N This function is only available in digital channels. Timeshift function To start the Timeshift function with the Pause function1. Select ∑ while watching a program using the remote control. 2. When the Timeshift function is activated, the screen is paused and the Timeshift progress bar is displayed. N You can check the current status of the Timeshift operation on the left side of the progress bar. Connect a USB device before using the Timeshift and Recorded TV functions. [ Recorded videos are DRM (digital rights management) protected and cannot be played on a PC or other TVs. Note that files saved on the TV cannot be used after the main board is changed. N NOTE ● We recommend using a USB HDD with at least 5,400 rpm, but a USB HDD of RAID type is not supported.● The availability of both recording and the Timeshift function may differ depending on picture quality and the free space on the hard disk drive. ● Note that if you have paused the recording the TV will automatically resume playback ● If the 50MB free memory space limit of the USB storage device is reached, the current recording process will be closed. ● During a playback or the Timeshift, the picture will be displayed according to the display settings of the TV. ● If you change the input source during recording, the screen will go blank until the change is completed. ● If the USB device has failed the Device Performance Test, the USB device must go through the Device Format and Device Performance Test again before you record with the Guide or Channel. ● The Timeshift functions can only be used with a USB storage device that completed the Device Performance Test. ● If you attempt the recording or Timeshift function with a device that did not have the Device Performance Test, the function will not start. ● If you select ∏ by the remote control while the Channel screen is being displayed or record with Schedule Recording, the TV may start or stop recording 1 or 2 seconds later than you intended due to the time needed to process the command. ● If a USB device dedicated to recording is connected, existing Timeshift or recording files that were saved abnormally will automatically be deleted. ● If you switch to external input mode during recording, the recording will continue but the ∏ function will be disabled. ● If any function that turns off the TV (Sleep Timer, Auto Power Off, etc.) is set for a time that conflicts with recording, the TV will be turned off once the recording is complete. To start the Timeshift function with the Play function 1. Select ∂ while watching a program using the remote control. 2. When the Timeshift function is activated, the Timeshift progress bar is displayed. N You can check the current status of the Timeshift operation on the left side of the progress bar. To use buttons while performing the Timeshift function ● † / … Whenever you select † or … using the remote control, the playing speed is changed as follows: († 1 † 2 → … † 6 † 7 / … 1 … 2 → … … 6 … 7) ● l rMoves to the screen 20 seconds forwards or backwards. ● ∑ Select ∑ using the remote control. This pauses the currently playing screen. – Select † or … on the paused screen using the remote control. The playing speed is changed as following. (ƒ)1/8, (ƒ)1/4, (ƒ)1/2 / („)1/8, („)1/4, („)1/2● ∫ While watching scenes that occurred in the past, select ∫ using the remote control. This moves to the currently broadcast program screen. If you select ∫ using the remote control while watching the currently broadcast program, a message window appears with the "Do you want to stop Timeshift?" message. If you select OK, the Timeshift window is closed. ● If you change the playing speed to normal, select ∂ using the remote control. N The product does not play sound in stop mode. N Stop motion operates only in the forward direction.Using the DLNA Function ™ → AllShare Play You can play media contents including videos, photos, and music saved on your mobile phones or the other devices (such as your PC) by controlling them on the TV via the network. For more information, visit “http:// www.samsung.com/sec” or contact the Samsung call center. Mobile devices may need additional software installation. For details, refer to each device’s user’s guide. N If your Samsung TV connects to a non-Samsung DLNA server, a compatibility issue may occur during video playback. N By connecting your Samsung TV to a network via AllShare Play, you can use Samsung’s original functions as follows: – Playback of various video formats (DivX, MP4, 3GPP, AVI, ASF, MKV, etc.) – Video thumbnail feature – Bookmark function (to resume video playback) – Auto-chaptering (scene navigation) – Digital content management – Compatibility with various subtitle formats (SRT, SMI, SUB, TXT, TTXT) – Search with file names– And many others AllShare Settings Menu → Network → AllShare Settings Shows a list of mobile phones or connected devices which have been set up to use AllShare Settings with this TV. N The AllShare Settings function is available in all devices which support DLNA DMC. ● Allowed / Denied: Allows/Blocks the devices. ● Delete: Deletes the devices from the list. N This function only deletes the name of the device from the list. If the deleted device is turned on or tries to connect to the TV, it may appear on the list again. To play the media contents of the devices connected to DLNA function, follow these steps:1. On the AllShare Play screen, select desired menu (Videos, Photos, Music). 2. Select DLNA. The TV displays the file list of the connected device using the DLNA function. 3. Select the desired file in the file list. The selected file will play. Playing the media contents saved on the devices 1. Connect the mobile phone or other devices which support AllShare Play function, and then play the media contents of each device. The popup screen appears on the bottom of your TV. 2. Select the Allow to accept the connected devices. The media contents of the devices can be playing on your TV. N You can find the allowed devices on the AllShare Settings.N An alarm window appears informing you that media contents (videos, photos, music) sent from a mobile phone will be displayed on your TV. The contents are played automatically 3 seconds after the alarm window appears. – If you close the alarm window using your remote when the alarm window appears, the media contents are not played.N The first time a device accesses your TV through the media function, a warning pop up window appears. Select Allow. This permits the phone to access the TV freely and use the Media function to play content. N To turn off media contents transmissions from a mobile phone, set a device to Denied in the AllShare Settings. N Contents may not play on your TV depending on their resolution and format. N The some buttons may not work depending on the type of media content. N Using the mobile device, you can control the media play. For details, refer to each mobile’s user’s guide.Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Menu → System → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Anynet+ is a function that enables you to control all connected Samsung devices that support Anynet+ with your Samsung TV’s remote. The Anynet+ system can be used only with Samsung devices that have the Anynet+ feature. To be sure your Samsung device has this feature, check if there is an Anynet+ logo on it.N You can only control Anynet+ devices using the TV’s remote control, not the buttons on the TV. N The TV remote control may not work under certain conditions. If this occurs, reselect the Anynet+ device. N The Anynet+ functions do not operate with other manufacturers’ products. N For instructions explaining how to connect Anynet+ external devices, refer to the device’s user manual. You must connect an Anynet+ device using an HDMI cable. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+ functions. N Anynet+ works when the AV device supporting Anynet+ is in the standby or on status. N Anynet+ supports up to 12 AV devices in total. Note that you can connect up to 3 devices of the same type. N However, you can connect only one Anynet+ Home Theater. To connect an Anynet+ Home Theater, connect the Home Theater to the TV using an HDMI cable then: – To hear sound from the Home Theater’s front, left and right speakers and the subwoofer only, connect a digital optical cable between the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) port on your TV and the Digital Audio Input on the Home Theater. – To hear 5.1 channel audio, connect HDMI cables to your Anynet+ DVD player, satellite box, etc. Then, connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) port on your DVD player, Satellite Box, etc. (i.e. Anynet + Device 1 or 2) directly to the Home Theater, not the TV. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) MenuThe Anynet+ menu changes depending on the type and status of the Anynet+ devices connected to the TV. ● View TV Changes Anynet+ mode to TV broadcast mode. ● Device List Shows the Anynet+ device list. ● (device_name) Menu Shows the menu of the connected device menus. E.g. if a DVD player is connected, the disc menu of the DVD player will appear. ● (device_name) Tools Shows the tools menu of the connected device. E.g. if a DVD player is connected, the tools menu of the DVD player will appear. N Depending on the device, this menu may not be available. ● (device_name) Title Menu Shows the title menu of the disc in the connected device. E.g. If a DVD player is connected, the title menu of the movie in the DVD player will appear. N Depending on the device, this menu may not be available. ● Receiver Sound is played through the receiver. Setting up Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) ● Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)To use the Anynet+ Function, Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) must be set to On. N When the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) function is disabled, all the Anynet+ related operations are deactivated ● Auto Turn Off Set an Anynet+ Device to turn off automatically when the TV is turned off. N If the Auto Turn Off is set to Yes, running external devices will turn off at the same time as the TV powers off. N May not be enabled depending on the device. ● Receiver You can listen to sound through a receiver (i.e. Home Theater) instead of the TV Speaker. Switching between Anynet+ Devices 1. Open the Tools menu using your remote, and then select Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). 2. Select Device List. The Device List screen appears. N If you cannot find a device you want, select Refresh to refresh the list. 3. Select a device, and then wait until switch to the selected device. N The Device List menu appears only when you set Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) to On in the System menu.N Switching to the selected device may take up to 2 minutes. You cannot cancel the switching operation while switching is in progress. N If you have selected an Anynet+ device using Source function and then selecting its input source, you cannot use the Anynet+ function. Make sure to switch to an Anynet+ device by using the Device List.Listening through a Receiver You can listen to sound through a receiver (i.e. Home Theater) instead of the TV Speaker. To listen to sound through a receiver, go to Receiver screen (Menu → System → Anynet+ (HDMICEC) → Receiver). Then select Receiver and set to On. N If your receiver supports audio only, it may not appear in the device list.N The receiver will work when you have properly connected the optical in jack of the receiver to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) port of the TV. N When the receiver (i.e. Home Theater) is set to On, you can hear sound output from the TV’s Optical jack. When the TV is displaying a DTV (air) signal, the TV will send out 5.1 channel sound to the receiver. When the source is a digital component such as a DVD player and it is connected to the TV via HDMI, you will hear only 2 channel sound from the receiver. Using the ARC function for LED 6350 Series above, PDP TV You can listen to sound through a receiver connected using an HDMI cable without connecting a separate optical cable. To listen to sound through a receiver using the ARC function, go to Receiver screen (Menu → System → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) → Receiver). Then select Receiver and set to On. N To use the ARC function, a receiver which supports the HDMI-CEC and ARC features must be connected to the HDMI IN 2 (ARC) port. N To disable the ARC function, set the Receiver to Off. Even if the TV transmits the ARC signal continuously, the receiver will be blocked from receiving the signal.Troubleshooting Menu → Support → e-Manual → Other Information To view a list of all troubleshooting items, go to e-Manual home screen (Menu → Support → e-Manual → Other Information) or press the 고객지원 button, and then search a desired item by selecting a chapter. N If you have other questions, call Samsung customer Service or visit Other Information"http://www.samsung.com/sec".Picture (Troubleshooting) First, perform the Picture Test and to see if your TV is properly displaying the test image (go to Support → Self Diagnosis → Picture Test). If the test image is properly displayed, the poor picture may be caused by the source or signal. Flickering and Dimming If your Samsung Television is flickering or dimming sporadically, you may need to disable some of its energy efficient features like the Eco Sensor or the Energy Saving feature. If you follow below step with your remote, you can turn these features off or on. Œ Energy Saving: System → Eco Solution → Energy Saving Œ Eco Sensor: System → Eco Solution → Eco Sensor Component Connections / Screen ColorIf you find that the color on your Samsung television’s screen is not correct or black and White, first run a Self Diagnosis on the TV to make sure there are no device issues. Œ Self Diagnosis : Support → Self Diagnosis → Picture Test If the problem does not appear in the Picture test, try making sure : Œ Your connections are all consistent. For example, if you’ve used the AV In jack on your TV, make sure you have used the AV Out jack on your video source. Œ You have connected to your devices to the correct jacks. For example, if you use the Component jacks, labeled Pb, Pr, and Y, to connect your TV and video source, make sure you have connected the blue Pb jack on the video source to the blue Pb jack on the TV, the red Pr jack on the source to the red Pr jack on the TV. Screen Brightness If you find that the colors on your Samsung TV are correct but just a little too dark or bright, try adjusting the follow settings in the Picture option of the Main menu: Œ Backlight for LED TV / Cell Light for PDP TV , Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness, Color, Tint (G/R) and so on. Go in to Picture on user Menu then try adjusting options mentioned above. Auto Motion Plus / Blur for LED 6350 Series above If you find that there is a blur or “ghostlike” appearance to the images on your television’s screen, you might be able to correct it by taking advantage of Auto Motion Plus.● Auto Motion Plus: Picture → Picture Options → Auto Motion Plus Unwanted Powering Off If your Samsung TV appears to turn off by itself, there may be an issue with either your Timer settings or your Eco friendly No Signal Power Off feature. First make sure you Sleep Timer is not accidentally set. The sleep timer turns the TV off after a certain period of time. Œ Sleep Timer: System → Time → Sleep Timer If the Sleep Timer is not activated, you may have engaged the No Signal Power Off or Auto Power Off feature. Œ No Signal Power Off : System → Eco Solution → No Signal Power Off Œ Auto Power Off: System → Eco Solution → Auto Power Off Trouble Powering OnPress the power on button on the TV or remote and the light should blink about 5 times before the TV turns on. If you find that you are having trouble powering on your Samsung television, there are a number of things to check before making a call to the service department. Œ If you happen to be using the TV as a monitor and the stand-by light only blinks for a few seconds when you press the power button, your PC is in sleep mode. To take your PC out of sleep mode, press a key on your keyboard or move the mouse. Then try turning your TV on. If you’re sure your power cord, remote control, and PC are functioning properly, you may be having a cable issue. If you have a cable or satellite box, your TV may appear to be off because the cable or satellite box is not outputting a signal. To test the signal output of your cable or satellite box, press the guide or info button on the cable or satellite box remote control. If the screen displays the guide or info data, the problem is caused by the box. Cannot Find a Channel Re-run Setup (Go to Menu → System → Setup) or run Auto Program. (Go to Menu → Channel →Auto Program). The TV image does not look as good as it did in the store. Store displays are all tuned to digital, HD (high definition) channels. If you have an analog cable/set top box, upgrade to a digital set top box. Use HDMI or Component cables to deliver HD (high definition) picture quality. N Many HD channels are up scaled from SD (Standard Definition) contents. Look for a channel that is broadcasting true HD content. Œ Cable/Satellite subscribers: Try HD channels from the channel line up. Œ Air/Cable Antenna connection: Try HD channels after performing an Auto Program. Adjust the Cable/Sat box video output resolution to 1080i or 720p.The picture is distorted The compression of video contents may cause picture distortion especially in fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies. A weak or bad quality signal can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV issue. Mobile phones used close to the TV (within 3.3 ft) may cause noise in the picture on analog and digital channels.Color is wrong or missing. If you’re using a Component connection, make sure the component cables are connected to the correct jacks. Incorrect or loose connections may cause color problems or a blank screen. The color is poor or the picture is not bright enough. Adjust the Picture options in the TV menu (go to Picture Mode / Color / Brightness / Sharpness) Adjust the Energy Saving option in the TV menu (go to System → Eco Solution → Energy Saving) Try resetting the picture to view the default picture settings (go to Picture → Reset Picture). There is a dotted line on the edge of the screen. If the Picture Size is set to Screen Fit, change it to 16:9. Change the cable/satellite box resolution. The picture is black and white. If you are using an AV composite input, connect the video cable (yellow) to the Green jack of Component on the TV. When changing channels, the picture freezes or is distorted or delayed. If the TV is connected to a cable box, try to reset the box. (Disconnect and then reconnect the AC cord and wait until the cable box reboots. It may take up to 20 minutes.) Set the output resolution of the cable box to 1080i or 720p.Sound (Troubleshooting) First, perform the Sound Test to determine if your TV audio is operating properly. (Go to Menu → Support → Self Diagnosis → Sound Test). If the audio is OK, the sound problem may be caused by the source or signal. There is no sound or the sound is too low at maximum volume. Please check the volume of the device (Cable/Sat Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc.) connected to your TV. The picture is good but there is no sound. Set the Speaker Select option to TV Speaker in the Sound menu. If you are using an external device, check the device’s audio output option. (Ex. You may need to change your cable box’s audio option to HDMI if you have the box connected to your TV using an HDMI cable.) If you are using a DVI to HDMI cable, a separate audio cable is required. If your TV has a headphone jack, make sure there is nothing plugged into it. Reboot the connected device by disconnecting, and then reconnecting device’s power cable. The speakers are making an inappropriate noise.Check cable connections. Make sure a video cable is not connected to an audio input. For antenna or cable connections, check the signal information. A low signal level may cause sound distortion. Perform the Sound Test feature. (Menu → Support → Self Diagnosis → Sound Test)3D (Troubleshooting) for LED 5500 Series : This function is not supported. The 3D Active Glasses are not working correctly Make sure the glasses are turned on. The 3D Active Glasses may not work properly if there is any other 3D product or electronic devices turned on near the glasses or TV. If there is a problem, keep other electronic devices as far away as possible from the 3D Active Glasses. The 3D images don’t look quite right. The ideal viewing distance is three times or more the height of the screen. We also recommend sitting with viewer’s eyes on a level with the screen. The batteries in the 3D glasses don’t last Turn off 3D glasses while not using them. If you leave 3D glasses on, battery lifespan is shortened.Antenna (Air / Cable) Connection (Troubleshooting) The TV is not receiving all channels. Make sure the coaxial cable is connected securely. Run Auto Program to add available channels to the channel list. Go to Menu → Channel → Auto Program then select Start. Verify the antenna is positioned correctly. No caption on digital channels. Check the Caption Setup menu. Try changing Caption Mode. Some channels may not have caption data. The picture is distorted. The compression of video contents may cause picture distortion, especially with fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies. A weak signal can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV problem.PC Connection (Troubleshooting) A Mode Not Supported message appears. Set your PC’s output resolution so it matches a resolution supported by the TV. The video is OK but there is no audio. If you are using an HDMI connection, check the audio output setting on your PC.Network Connection (Troubleshooting) The wireless network connection failed. for LED 5500, 6350 Series, and PDP 550 Series You must attach the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter to the TV to use a wireless network. Make sure the TV is connected to a wireless IP sharer (router). Software Upgrade over the network fails.Run Network Status in Network menu to confirm the connection. If you have latest Software (SW) version, SW upgrade will not proceed.Others (Troubleshooting) The product is hot. Keeping the product turned on for an extended period of time causes the panel to generate heat. Because the heat from the panel is released via the vent located in the upper part of the product, some users may find that the upper part of the product is hot to the touch after the product has been in use for an extended period of time. Care should be taken. Adults must pay special attention to children to prevent them from touching the upper part of the product when the product is turned on. Heat generation does not mean that the product is defective or has a functional problem. The product can be used as normal. Purple/green rolling horizontal bars and buzzing noise from the TV speakers with a Component cable connection. Remove the left and right audio connections from the set-top-box. If the buzzing stops, this indicates that the set-top-box has a grounding issue. Replace the Component video cables with an HDMI connection. The picture won’t display in full screen. HD channels will have black bars on either side of the screen when displaying up scaled SD (4:3) contents. Black bars will appear on the top and bottom of the screen when you watch movies that have aspect ratios different from your TV. Adjust the picture size options on your external device or the TV to full screen. A Mode Not Supported message appears. Check the supported resolution of the TV, and adjust the external device’s output resolution accordingly. Refer to the resolution settings on User manual. Caption on TV menu is grayed out. You cannot select the Caption menu if you have selected a source connected to the TV via HDMI or Component. The external device’s Caption function must also be activated.There is a plastic smell from the TV. This smell is normal and will dissipate over time. The TV Signal Information is unavailable in the Self Diagnosis menu. This function is only available for digital channels the TV receives from an Antenna / RF /Coax connection. The TV is tilted to the side.Remove the base stand from the TV and reassemble it. The channel menu is grayed out (unavailable). The Channel menu is only available when you select the TV source. Your settings are lost after 30 minutes or every time the TV is turned off. If the TV is in the Store Demo mode, it will reset audio and picture settings every 30 minutes. Change the settings from Store Demo mode to Home Use mode using the Setup procedure. Select TV in the Source using your remote, and go to Menu → System → Setup. You have intermittent loss of audio or video. Check the cable connections and reconnect them. Loss of audio or video can be caused by using overly rigid or thick cables. Make sure the cables are flexible enough for long term use. If mounting the TV to a wall, we recommend using cables with 90 degree connectors. You see small particles when you look closely at the edge of the frame of the TV. This is part of the product’s design and is not a defect. The PIP menu is not available.PIP functionality is only available when you are using an HDMI, or Component source. POP (TV’s internal banner ad) appears on the screen. Select Home Use under Setup mode. For details, refer to the Setup Feature. A cracking noise is heard from the product. The noise can be caused by the mechanical contraction or expansion of the TV exterior. It does not mean the product is damaged. Noise is continuously generated by the product. Since a TV uses a high-speed switching circuit and a lot of current, the noise from the product is not a problem. The noise level changes according to the screen brightness and the noise may be louder than a conventional CRT TV. The noise is managed on the basis of the company's strict management standards and this does not affect the performance or reliability of the product. Please note that some degree of noise is due to the inherent characteristics of a product and this will not be accepted as a reason for an exchange or refund of the product.Image Retention (Burn In) Issue. for PDP TV To minimize the possibility of screen burn, this unit is equipped with Pixel Shift screen burn reduction technology. Pixel Shift lets you set the picture so it moves slightly up and down (Vertical Line) and side to side (Horizontal Dot). The regular, slight movement of the picture reduces screen burn in.Timer Recording / Timeshift Mode (Troubleshooting) A USB storage device is not recognized, or Device Format, Checking Device or Device Performance Test failed. Check that the USB storage device is compatible, referring to the user guide for the USB device. Check that the USB storage device is not locked.Check that the USB storage device was not formatted when it was connected to the PC. Format the USB storage device after connecting it to the TV. (The formatting may fail.) If Device Performance Test or formatting fails, the USB storage device is defective or the performance may be too low to be compatible. Replace the USB storage device.A message is displayed stating that the USB storage device should be formatted. Check that the USB storage device is not locked. Recover the USB storage device using the USB recovery function The Timer Recording function is not available. Check that the USB storage device is connected.Check that the channel of the program you want to record is a recordable digital channel. The recording function will automatically stop if the broadcast signal is weak or is not detected. The Timeshift mode will not activate if the remaining space on the USB storage device is insufficient. A message is displayed stating that the performance test failed, and the Timer Recording or Timeshift function is not available. This problem occurs when a lowperformance USB storage device that does not support the recording function is used. It is recommended that you use a USB HDD storage device. It is best to use a USB HDD storage device with a speed of at least 5,400 rpm or higher. However, RAID-type USB HDD storage devices are not compatible.Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) (Troubleshooting) Anynet+ does not work. Check if the device is an Anynet+ device. The Anynet+ system supports Anynet+ devices only. You can connect only one receiver (home theater). Check if the Anynet+ device power cord is properly connected. Check the Anynet+ device’s Video/Audio/HDMI cable connections. Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ setup menu. Check whether the TV remote control is in TV mode. Check whether the remote control is Anynet+ compatible. Anynet+ doesn’t work in certain situations. (Searching channels, operating Smart Hub or Setup, etc.) If you have removed and then reconnected the HDMI cable, please make sure to search devices again or turn your TV off and on again. I want to start Anynet+. Check if the Anynet+ device is properly connected to the TV and check if the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On. (Menu → System → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)) Open the Tools menu using your remote and then select Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). Then select a menu you want. I want to exit Anynet+. Select View TV in the Anynet+ menu. Go to Source screen using your remote and select a non-Anynet+ device. The message Connecting to Anynet+ device ... appears on the screen. You cannot use the remote control when you are configuring Anynet+ or switching to a view mode. Use the remote control after the TV has completed Anynet+ configuration or has finished switching to Anynet+. The Anynet+ device does not play. You cannot use the play function when Setup is in progress. The connected device is not displayed. Check whether or not the device supports Anynet+ functions. Check whether or not the HDMI cable is properly connected. Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On. (Menu → System → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)) Search Anynet+ devices again. Anynet+ requires an HDMI connection. Make sure the device is connected to your TV with an HDMI cable. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+ functions. If the connection is terminated because there has been a power failure or the HDMI cable has been disconnected, please repeat the device scan. The TV sound is not output through the receiver. Connect the optical cable between TV and the receiver. The ARC function enables digital output of sound using the HDMI IN 2(ARC) port and can only be operated when the TV is connected to an audio receiver that supports the ARC function.AllShare Play (Troubleshooting) This file may not be playable properly. This may appear because of high bit rate of content. Content generally will play but could experience some playability issue.Smart Hub (Troubleshooting) Some application contents only appear in English. How can I change the language? The Application content language may be different from the application user interface language. The ability to change the language depends on the service provider. Some application services do not work.Check with the service provider. Refer to the help website for application service provider information. When a network error occurs, I can only use the setting menu. If network connection doesn’t work, your service might be limited, as all functions except the setting menu are needed to connect to the internet.Web Browser (Troubleshooting) 1. To open Web Browser, select Web Browser in the Smart Hub. The Web Browser may be displayed differently with PC. 2. The Web Browser is not compatible with a Java application. 3. When attempted to download a file, but the file could not be saved and an error message appeared. 4. Access may be blocked to some websites or to web browsers operated by certain businesses. 5. Playback of Flash video may be restricted. 6. E-commerce, for purchasing products online, is not supported. 7. Scrolling a web page that allows only part (and not the whole) of the page to be scrolled may cause corrupted characters. 8. ActiveX is not supported.9. Some options cannot be accessed in Tab mode. (To access such options, switch to Pointer mode.) 10. Some text may appear corrupted because the number of supported fonts is limited. 11. The response to a command on the remote or the screen display may be delayed temporarily if a web page is currently loading. 12. The loading of a web page may delay or stop with some operating systems. 13. Copy and Paste are not supported. 14.When writing emails or posting messages, some functions (Such as changing the size or colors.) may not be supported. 15. The number of bookmarks and logs that can be saved is limited. 16. The maximum number of windows that can open at the same time may vary depending on the browsing condition or TV model. 17. The web browsing speed depends on the network conditions. 18. PIP will automatically be deactivated if a video is played in the browser. Videos may not commence playback after PIP interruption and a possible refresh for the page may be required. 19. The Web Browser can play MP3 audio files only. 20. The function for importing or exporting bookmarks is compatible with bookmark files in a particular file format only. (Compatible format: Netscape-bookmarkfile- 1) 21.When you import or export the bookmark, the folder tree is not included. 22. If you export the bookmark file to an USB device connected to the TV, the bookmark file will be saved in "Samsung SmartTV Bookmark" folder.23. If the time is not set in the menu (Menu → System → Time → Clock), the history information may not be saved. 24. Visited web site history is saved in chronological order and It will be removed from the list according to oldest page accessed. 25. Some video or audio content may not play during Flash playback depending on the video/audio codec supported.26. A sudden change in the picture brightness inside the video window may affect the brightness of the surrounding stationary picture. for PDP TV 27. If you use QWERTY keyboard screen when you use Web Browser with PIP function, the PIP function turns off automatically except inputting a URL address.Supported Subtitle and AllShare Play file formats Subtitle External – MPEG-4 timed text (.ttxt) – SAMI (.smi) – SubRip (.srt) – SubViewer (.sub) – Micro DVD (.sub or .txt) – SubStation Alpha (.ssa)– Advanced SubStation Alpha (.ass) – Powerdivx (.psb) Internal – Xsub Container: AVI – SubStation Alpha Container: MKV – Advanced SubStation Alpha Container: MKV – SubRip Container: MKV– MPEG-4 timed text Container: MP4 Supported image resolutions File Extension Type Resolution *.jpg *.jpeg JPEG 15360 x 8640 *.png PNG 1920 x 1080 *.bmp BMP 1920 x 1080 *.mpo MPO 15360 x 8640Supported music file formats File Extension Type Codec Comments *.mp3 MPEG MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 *.m4a *.mpa *.aac MPEG4 AAC *.flac FLAC FLAC The Seek (jump) function is not supported. Supports up to 2 channel *.ogg OGG Vorbis Supports up to 2 channel *.wma WMA WMA WMA 9, 10 Pro supports up to 5.1 channel and M2 profile (except LBR mode of M0).Video Codec File Extension Container Video Codec Resolution Frame rate (fps) Bit rate (Mbps) Bit rate (Mbps) *.avi *.mkv *.asf *.wmv *.mp4 *.3gp *.vro *.mpg *.mpeg *.ts *.tp *.trp *.mov *.flv *.vob *.svi *.m2ts *.mts *.divx AVI MKV ASF MP4 3GP VRO VOB PS TS DIVX 3.11/4.x/5.x/6.x 1920 x 1080 6 – 30 30 AC3 LPCM ADMPCM(IMA, MS) AAC HE-AAC WMA DD+ MPEG(MP3) DTS Core G.711(A-Law, μ-Law) MPEG4 SP/ASP H.264 BP/MP/HP Motion JPEG 640 x 480 8 Window Media Video v9 1920 x 1080 MPEG2 30 MPEG1 VP6 640 x 480 4 *.webm WebM VP8 1920 x 1080 6 - 30 8 Vorbis Other Restriction N Video content will not play, or not play correctly, if there is an error in the content or the container. N Sound or video may not work if the contents have a standard bit rate/ frame rate above the compatible Frame/sec listed in the table above. N If the Index Table is in error, the Seek (Jump) function is not supported. N When you play video over a network connection, the video may not be played smoothly. N The menu may take longer to appear if the video’s bit rate exceeds 10Mbps. N Some USB/digital camera devices may not be compatible with the player. Video decoder ● Supports up to H.264, Level 4.1 ● H.264 FMO / ASO / RS, VC1 SP / MP / AP L4 are not supported. ● For all Video codecs except VP8, VP6:– Below 1280 x 720: 60 frame max – Above 1280 x 720: 30 frame max ● GMC is not supported. ● Supports only SVAF Top/Bottom and Side by Side. Audio decoder ● WMA 9, 10 Pro supports up to 5.1 channel and M2 profile (except LBR mode of M0). ● WMA lossless audio is not supported.● If Vorbis is only in Webm container, supports up to 2 channel.Anti-theft Kensington Lock A Kensington Lock is a device you can use to physically fix your TV in place when using it in a public place. You wrap the Kensington Lock’s cable around a large, immobile object and 1 2 then attach the lock to the Kensington slot on the back of the TV. The appearance and locking method may differ from the illustration below depending on the manufacturer. Refer to the manual provided with the Kensington Lock for additional information on proper use. The Kensington Lock is not supplied by Samsung. N Please find a “K” icon on the rear of the TV. The Kensington slot is beside the “K” icon. To lock the product, follow these steps: 1. Wrap the Kensington Lock cable around a large, stationary object such as desk or chair. 2. Slide the end of the cable with the lock attached through the looped end of the Kensington Lock cable. 3. Insert the locking device into the Kensington slot on the product.4. Lock the lock. N These are general instructions. For exact instructions, see the User manual supplied with the locking device. N The locking device has to be purchased separately. N The location of the Kensington slot may be different depending on the TV model.License DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 1080p, including premium content. DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration. TheaterSound HD, SRS and the symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS 2.0+Digital Out is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. ⓒ DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Open Source License Notice In the case of using open source software, Open Source Licenses are available on the product menu. Open Source License Notice is written only English. The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. Samsung Universal Print Driver Mode d’emploi imaginez les possibilitésCopyright_ 2 Copyright © 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Tous droits réservés. Le présent guide administrateur n’est fourni qu’à titre informatif. Toutes les informations communiquées ci-après sont susceptibles d’être modifiées sans préavis. Samsung Electronics ne saurait être tenu pour responsable des dommages, directs ou indirects, consécutifs à l’utilisation de ce guide. • Samsung Universal Print Driver est une marque commerciale de Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. • Samsung et le logo Samsung sont des marques commerciales de Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. • Microsoft, Windows, Internet Explorer et Windows Vista sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales de Microsoft Corporation aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d’autres pays. • L’ensemble des autres marques, produits et noms d’entreprises peuvent être la propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs. REV. 1.00Table des matières_ 3 Table des matières COPYRIGHT/2 TABLE DES MATIÈRES/3 INTRODUCTION Samsung Universal Print Driver contre pilotes spécifiques à un modèle . . . . . 4 Configuration requise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 INSTALLATION ET DÉSINSTALLATION DU PILOTE D’IMPRESSION UNIVERSEL SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER Installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver 5 Désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver 6 UTILISATION DU PILOTE D’IMPRESSION UNIVERSEL SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER Accès au pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . 7 Aperçu de la mise en page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Modification des paramètres du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Configuration de l’option de fenêtre indépendante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Configuration de l’option de recherche de l’imprimante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Recherche des périphériques d’impression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Par adresse TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Par le menu Rechercher maintenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Création d’un dossier de favoris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Aide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Impression à l’aide du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Impression de base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Changement de l’imprimante sélectionnée . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 INDEX/15Introduction_ 4 1.Introduction Le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est un pilote unique pouvant être utilisé avec différents modèles d’imprimantes. Cela permet aux utilisateurs d’accéder directement non seulement aux périphériques d’impression Samsung, mais également à une gamme de périphériques d’autres fournisseurs sans avoir à télécharger de pilotes séparés. • PDL signifie PCL et PS. • Samsung ne garantit pas la qualité des périphériques d’impression d’autres fournisseurs et des modèles Samsung non pris en charge (Cliquez sur pour consulter la liste des périphériques Samsung pris en charge). Pour les modèles Samsung non pris en charge, le pilote est automatiquement défini sur PDL par défaut utilisable. Samsung Universal Print Driver contre pilotes spécifiques à un modèle Le tableau suivant montre les différences entre le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver et les pilotes de produits spécifiques : Configuration requise La configuration minimale requise pour le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est la suivante : SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER PILOTES SPÉCIFIQUES À UN MODÈLE Interface utilisateur Interface utilisateur cohérente. Interface utilisateur incohérente. Installation • Téléchargez et installez le ficher d’installation fourni avec le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. • Installez en exécutant le fichier d’installation. • Localisez, téléchargez et installez manuellement le pilote pour chaque périphérique. • Installez via l’exécution automatique du CD ou via l’assistant Installation d’imprimante. Découverte de périphériques Localisez facilement et accédez aux périphériques suggérés parmi l’ensemble des produits d’impression Samsung. Découvrez manuellement les périphériques. Disponibilité Disponible sur le site Web Samsung. Disponible sur le CD fourni avec le produit, ou avec le pilote spécifique du produit. SYSTÈME D’EXPLOITATION CONFIGURATION REQUISE PROCESSEUR RAM ESPACE LIBRE SUR LE DISQUE DUR Windows Vista 1 GHz 1 Go 40 Go Windows XP 300 MHz ou supérieur 128 Mo de RAM ou supérieur 1,5 Go ou supérieur (1,8 Go supplémentaires pour SP2 et 900 Mo pour SP3 Windows 2000 133 Mhz 64 Mo 2 Go Windows Server 2003 550 MHz ou supérieur 256 Mo de RAM ou supérieur 2,9 Go ou supérieur Windows Server 2008 2 GHz ou plus rapide 2 Go de RAM ou supérieur 40 Go ou supérieurInstallation et désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 5 2.Installation et désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Ce chapitre vous guide pas à pas dans la procédure d’installation et de désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. Les fenêtres suivantes s’appliquent à un pilote PCL dans Windows XP. Les fenêtres peuvent varier pour un pilote PS, mais les étapes sont les mêmes. Installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Avant d’installer le pilote, vérifiez la configuration minimale requise pour votre système (Voir « Configuration requise » à la page 4). 1. Ouvrez un navigateur Web et visitez www.samsung.com. 2. Recherchez le fichier d’installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Lancez le fichier d’installation. L’assistant d’installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. 4. Cliquez sur Suivant. Au besoin, sélectionnez une langue dans la liste déroulante. Une fois la fenêtre d’installation ouverte, attendez que l’installation se termine.Installation et désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 6 5. Quand la fenêtre Installation terminée s’ouvre, cliquez sur Terminer. Pour vous inscrire en tant qu’utilisateur de périphériques Samsung et recevoir des informations du fabricant, cochez cette case et cliquez sur Terminer. Si le pilote est installé correctement, vous pouvez trouver le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver dans le dossier Imprimantes et télécopieurs. Désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Si vous voulez désinstaller le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver, suivez les étapes suivantes : 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez > Tous les programmes > Samsung Universal Print Driver > Maintenance. L’assistant d’installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. 2. Sélectionnez Supprimer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 3. Sélectionnez les composants à supprimer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4. Lorsqu’un message de confirmation s’affiche, cliquez sur Oui. 5. Une fois la désinstallation terminée, cliquez sur Terminer. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 7 3.Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Le principal objectif du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est d’installer un pilote (Samsung Universal Print Driver) et de l’utiliser avec différents périphériques d’impression. Toutefois, le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver dispose d’autres fonctions, comme la recherche de périphériques d’impression, la création d’un dossier de favoris et la vérification de l’état d’un périphérique. Accès au pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés. La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. Si aucune imprimante n’a été utilisée récemment, une fenêtre indépendante vous demandant de rechercher des imprimantes s’ouvre. Cliquez sur OK pour rechercher les imprimantes connectées. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 8 Aperçu de la mise en page 1 Barre de mise en page Inclut les options d’affichage. • : Sélectionne la mise en page de la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . Si vous choisissez Mise en page2 et que le programme Samsung Smart Panel est installé, vous pouvez voir la fenêtre d’état (numéro 4). • : Actualise toutes les informations relatives à l’imprimante dans la liste. • : Sélectionne le type de vue pour la liste des imprimantes. Vue détaillée affiche les informations relatives à l’imprimante, comme son Adresse, son Emplacement, son État et son Nom système. Vue image affiche également les informations relatives à l’imprimante, sauf dans le cas d’une image d’imprimante plus grande. Cette option n’est prise en charge que sous Windows XP (et ultérieur). • : Affiche la liste des imprimantes par groupes. Cette option n’est prise en charge que sous Windows XP (et ultérieur). • : Recherche une imprimante dans la liste en fonction d’un mot clé, comme un nom de modèle. • : Ouvre la fenêtre d’aide. • : Affiche des informations relatives au pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver.Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 9 2 Menus principaux • Récent - Imprimantes récemment utilisées : Affiche la liste des imprimantes récemment utilisées. L’imprimante utilisée le plus récemment est en haut de la liste. - Imprimantes récemment recherchées : Affiche la liste des imprimantes récemment trouvées. L’imprimante trouvée le plus récemment est en haut de la liste. • Recherche - Rechercher maintenant : Recherche les imprimantes connectées via USB ou via le réseau. - Rechercher par adresse : Recherche une imprimante en fonction de son adresse IP. • Mon imprimante - Créer un dossier favori : Crée un dossier d’imprimantes favorites. • Paramètres : Affiche les options pour les fenêtres indépendantes et les recherches. 3 Liste des imprimantes Affiche la liste des imprimantes. 4 Fenêtre d’état Affiche l’état de l’imprimante sélectionnée dans la liste. Vous devez sélectionner Mise en page2 et installer le programme Samsung Smart Panel pour voir cette fenêtre. • Mettre à jour maintenant : Met à jour les informations de l’imprimante sélectionnée. • Achat de fournitures : Ouvre le site Web d’achat de fournitures. • Guide de dépannage : Ouvre le chapitre de dépannage du mode d’emploi. Vous devez installer le programme Smart Panel du modèle que vous utilisez pour voir le guide de dépannage. • Paramètres de l’imprimante : Ouvre le Service Web SyncThru, qui propose des options de configuration et de gestion de votre imprimante. Vous ne pouvez utiliser cette option qu’avec des imprimantes réseau. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 10 Modification des paramètres du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Configuration de l’option de fenêtre indépendante Vous pouvez configurer la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver pour qu’elle s’affiche lorsque vous réalisez une impression. Il existe quatre options pour l’affichage de cette fenêtre indépendante : 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres dans le coin inférieur gauche. 2. Cliquez sur l’onglet Fenêtre contextuelle. La figure suivante montre un exemple d’onglet Fenêtre contextuelle. • Lorsque l'interface du pilote apparaît: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’affiche lorsque vous ouvrez une fenêtre Options d’impression (Propriétés). • A chaque impression: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’affiche chaque fois que vous réalisez une impression. • Seulement lors de la première impression: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’affiche uniquement la première fois que le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est sélectionné comme imprimante depuis une application. • Seulement lorsque la dernière imprimante utilisée n’est pas disponible: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver ne s’affiche que si la dernière imprimante utilisée n’est pas disponible. 3. Cliquez sur OK. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 11 Configuration de l’option de recherche de l’imprimante Pour configurer les options de recherche du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver, suivez les étapes suivantes : 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres dans le coin inférieur gauche. 2. Cliquez sur l’onglet Rechercher et sélectionnez une des options suivantes. • Rechercher uniquement les imprimantes prises en charge: Recherche uniquement les imprimantes connectées prises en charge. Cliquez sur pour voir la liste des périphériques Samsung pris en charge. • Rechercher toutes les imprimantes: Recherche toutes les imprimantes connectées. 3. Cliquez sur OK. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 12 Recherche des périphériques d’impression Par adresse TCP/IP Si vous connaissez l’adresse TCP/IP du périphérique d’impression que vous souhaitez utiliser, vous pouvez le rechercher en tapant son adresse TCP/IP. Suivez les étapes ci-dessous : 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés. La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. 4. Cliquez sur Rechercher par adresse. Une fenêtre s’ouvre. 5. Tapez l’adresse TCP/IP de votre imprimante et cliquez sur OK. Par le menu Rechercher maintenant Si vous ne connaissez pas l’adresse TCP/IP du périphérique d’impression que vous voulez utiliser, vous pouvez utiliser l’option Rechercher maintenant pour rechercher le périphérique. Suivez les étapes ci-dessous : 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver 3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés. La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. 4. Cliquez sur Rechercher maintenant. Le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver recherche les périphériques d’impression connectés. Le résultat de la recherche peut varier en fonction de l’option de recherche que vous avez sélectionnée (Voir « Configuration de l’option de recherche de l’imprimante » à la page 11.)Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 13 Création d’un dossier de favoris Pour des raisons pratiques, vous pouvez créer un dossier contenant les imprimantes que vous utilisez le plus souvent. Par exemple, si vous naviguez entre votre domicile et plusieurs sites de travail, vous pouvez créer deux dossiers d’imprimantes différents ; Domicile et Travail, puis gérer les imprimantes selon vos préférences. Pour créer un dossier de favoris, suivez les étapes suivantes : 1. Cliquez sur Créer un dossier favori. La fenêtre Ajouter un nouveau dossier de favoris s’ouvre. 2. Tapez un nom de dossier. 3. Cliquez sur OK. Un nouveau dossier est ajouté dans Mon imprimante. Pour ajouter des imprimantes à un dossier dans Mon imprimante, vous pouvez glisser-déposer le dossier ou cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris dans la liste et sélectionner Déplacer ou Copier. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 14 Aide Cliquez sur le bouton Aide ( ) en haut à droite de la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. Une fenêtre d’aide s’ouvre. Utilisez cette aide pour trouver les réponses à vos questions au sujet du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. Impression à l’aide du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Impression de base Pour imprimer un document en utilisant le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver, suivez les étapes suivantes : Les étapes suivantes montrent une impression à partir de Notepad. Les noms des menus peuvent varier en fonction de l’application que vous utilisez. 1. Ouvrez le fichier que vous souhaitez imprimer dans une application. 2. Dans la barre de menu, sélectionnez Fichier > Imprimer. 3. Sélectionnez le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver dans la liste des imprimantes. 4. Cliquez sur OK. L’impression démarre. Ou, en fonction de l’option de fenêtre indépendante (voir « Configuration de l’option de fenêtre indépendante » à la page 10) que vous avez sélectionnée, la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver peut s’ouvrir avant l’impression. Sélectionnez l’imprimante que vous souhaitez utiliser et imprimez. Changement de l’imprimante sélectionnée 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés. La fenêtre Options d’impression (Propriétés) s’ouvre. 4. Sélectionnez une autre imprimante dans la liste des imprimantes ou en effectuant une recherche (Voir « Recherche des périphériques d’impression » à la page 12). 5. Cliquez sur OK. Toutes les impressions suivantes sont alors dirigées vers la nouvelle imprimante.Index_ 15 Index A accès 7 C configuration requise 4 copyright 2 D définition 10 fenêtre indépendante 10 option de recherche 11 désinstallation 6 différence 4 dossier 13 I impression 14 installation 5 introduction 4 M mise en page 8 R recherche bouton de recherche 12 TCPIP 12 U utilisation 7 Samsung Universal Print Driver User’s Guide imagine the possibilitiesCopyright_ 2 Copyright © 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. This admin guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without any notice. Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide. • Samsung Universal Print Driver is a trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd • Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. • Microsoft, Windows, Internet Explorer and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. • All other brand, product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners. REV. 1.00Contents_ 3 Contents COPYRIGHT/2 CONTENTS/3 INTRODUCTION Samsung Universal Print Driver vs. Model specific drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER Installing Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Uninstalling Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 USING THE SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER Accessing the Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Layout overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Changing Samsung Universal Print Driver settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Setting the pop-up option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Setting the printer search option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Searching print devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 By TCP/IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 By Search Now menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Creating a favorite folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Printing with Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Basic printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Changing the selected printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 INDEX/14Introduction_ 4 1.Introduction The Samsung Universal Print Driver is a single driver that can be used with different printer models. This gives users instant access to not only Samsung print devices but also a range of other vendor's PDL based devices without the need to download separate drivers. • PDL means both PCL and PS. • Samsung does not guarantee the quality of other vendors’ printer devices and Samsung models that are not supported (Click to see the supported Samsung device list). For unsupported Samsung models, driver is automatically set to usable default PDL. Samsung Universal Print Driver vs. Model specific drivers The following table shows the differences between the Samsung Universal Print Driver and the product based drivers: System requirements Minimum system requirements for the Samsung Universal Print Driver are as follows: SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER MODEL SPECIFIC DRIVERS User interface Consistent user interface. Inconsistent user interface. Installation • Download and install with the installer file provided with the Samsung Universal Print Driver. • Install via executing the installer file. • Manually locate, download, and install driver for each device. • Install via CD autorun or Add printer wizard. Device discovery Easily locate and access suggested devices from the whole Samsung printer products. Manually discover devices. Availability Available on the Samsung web site. Available on the CD provided with the device, or the product based driver. OPERATING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS CPU RAM FREE HDD SPACE Windows Vista 1 GHz 1 GB 40 GB Windows XP 300 MHz or higher 128 MB RAM or higher 1.5 GB or higher (additional 1.8 GB in SP2 and additional 900 MB in SP3 Windows 2000 133 Mhz 64 MB 2GB Windows Server 2003 550 MHz or higher 256 MB RAM or higher 2.9 GB or higher Windows Server 2008 2 GHz or faster 2 GB RAM or higher 40 GB or higherInstalling and Uninstalling the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 5 2.Installing and Uninstalling the Samsung Universal Print Driver This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for installing and uninstalling the Samsung Universal Print Driver. The following windows are for a PCL driver in Windows XP. Windows may differ for a PS driver, but the steps are the same. Installing Samsung Universal Print Driver Before installing the driver, check the recommended minimum requirements for your system (See "System requirements" on page 4). 1. Start a web browser and go to www.samsung.com. 2. Search for the Samsung Universal Print Driver setup file. 3. Start the setup file. The Samsung Universal Print Driver Installer Wizard opens. 4. Click Next. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list. After the installation window opens, wait for installation to be completed. 5. After the Setup Completed window opens, click Finish. If you want to register yourself as a user of Samsung devices in order to receive information from Samsung, select the Installing and Uninstalling the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 6 checkbox and click Finish. If the driver is installed properly, you can find the Samsung Universal Print Driver in the Printers and Faxes folder. Uninstalling Samsung Universal Print Driver If you want to uninstall the Samsung Universal Print Driver, follow the steps below: 1. From the Windows Start menu, select > All Programs > Samsung Universal Print Driver > Maintenance. The Samsung Universal Print Driver Installer Wizard opens. 2. Select Remove and click Next. 3. Select the components you want to remove and click Next. 4. A confirmation window appears, click Yes. 5. When unistallation is completed, click Finish. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 7 3.Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver The main purpose of the Samsung Universal Print Driver is to install one driver (Samsung Universal Print Driver) and use it with different print devices. However, the Samsung Universal Print Driver has other features like searching print devices, creating a favorites folder, and checking a device’s status. Accessing the Samsung Universal Print Driver 1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes. 2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties. Samsung Universal Print Driver window opens. If there’s no recently used printer, a pop-up window asking you to search printers appears. Click OK to search connected printers. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 8 Layout overview 1 Layout bar Includes displaying options. • : Selects the layout for the Samsung Universal Print Driver window. If you choose Layout2 and installed the Samsung Smart Panel program, you can see the status window(number 4). • : Refreshes all the printer information in the list. • : Selects the view type for the printer list. Detail View shows printer information such as Address, Location, Status and System name. Image View also shows printer information except with a larger printer image. This option is only supported on Windows XP(and later). • : Displays the printer list in groups. This option is only supported on Windows XP(and later). • : Searches for a printer in the list by a keyword like a model name. • : Opens the help window. • : Shows information about the Samsung Universal Print Driver.Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 9 Changing Samsung Universal Print Driver settings Setting the pop-up option You can set the Samsung Universal Print Driver window to appear when you print. There are four options for this window to pop-up: 1. Click the Settings button on the bottom left corner. 2 Main menus • Recent - Recently Used Printers : Shows the list of recently used printers. The most recently used printer is at the top of the list. - Recently Searched Printers : Shows the list of recently found printers. The most recently found printer is at the top of the list. • Search - Search Now : Searches printers that are connected either by USB or network. - Search by Address : Searches for a printer by the printer’s IP address. • My Printer - Create a Favorite Folder : Creates a folder for favorite printers. • Settings : Displays options for pop-ups and searches. 3 Printer list Shows printer list. 4 Status window Shows status of the selected printer in the list. You need to select Layout2 and install the Samsung Smart Panel program to see this window. • Update Now : Updates the selected printer’s information. • Buy Supplies : Opens the website for buying supplies. • TroubleShooting Guide : Opens the troubleshooting chapter of the user’s guide. You need to install the Smart Panel of the model you are using to see the troubleshooting guide. • Printer Settings : Opens SyncThur Web Service, which provides options for configuring and managing your printer. You can only use this option with network printers. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 10 2. Click the Pop-up tab. A sample of Pop-up tab is shown in the following figure. • When driver UI appears: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears when you open a Printing Preferences (Properties) window. • Every time you print: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears every time you print. • Only the first time you print: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears only for the first time when Samsung Universal Print Driver is selected as the printer from an application. • Only when the last printer used is not available: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears only if the printer that was last used is not available. 3. Click OK. Setting the printer search option To set the search options for the Samsung Universal Print Driver, follow the steps below: 1. Click the Settings button on the bottom left corner. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 11 2. Click the Search tab and select one of the following options. • Search only supported printer: Searches only supported printers connected. Click to see the supported Samsung device list • Search all the printers: Searches all connected printers. 3. Click OK. Searching print devices By TCP/IP address If you know the TCP/IP address of the print device you want to use, you can search the device by typing the TCP/IP address. Follow the steps below: 1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes. 2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties. The Samsung Universal Print Driver window opens. 4. Click Search by Address. A window appears. 5. Type in the TCP/IP address of your printer and click OK. By Search Now menu If you don’t know the TCP/IP address of the print device you want to use, you can use the Search Now option to search for the device. Follow the steps below: 1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes. 2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties. Samsung Universal Print Driver window opens. 4. Click Search Now. Samsung Universal Print Driver searches the connected print devices. The search result might differ depending on the search option you have selected (See "Setting the printer search option" on page 10.) Creating a favorite folder You can create a folder with the printers you use the most for your convenience. For example, if you travel between home and work sites, you can create two different printer folders; Home and Work, and manage the printers as needed. To create a favorite folder, follow the steps below: Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 12 1. Click Create a Favorite Folder. Add new favorite folder window appears. 2. Type in a folder name. 3. Click OK. A new folder is added under My Printer. To add printers to a folder under My Printer, you can drag-and-drop the print from the list to the folder or right-click the printer in the list and select Move or Copy. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 13 Help Click the Help button ( )in the upper right of the Samsung Universal Print Driver window. A help window appears. Use this help to answer your questions about using the Samsung Universal Print Driver. Printing with Samsung Universal Print Driver Basic printing To print a document using Samsung Universal Print Driver, follow the steps below: The following steps show printing from Notepad. Menu names might differ depending on the application you are using. 1. Open the file that you want to print in an application. 2. From the menu bar select File > Print. 3. Select the Samsung Universal Print Driver from the printer list. 4. Click OK. Printing begins. Or, depending on the pop-up option (see "Setting the pop-up option" on page9) you selected, the Samsung Universal Print Driver window might appear before printing. Choose the printer you want to use and print. Changing the selected printer 1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes. 2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties. Printing Preferences (Properties) window opens. 4. Select another printer either from the printer list or by searching (See "Searching print devices" on page 11). 5. Click OK. All subsequent printing will now be directed to the new printer.Index_ 14 Index A accessing 7 C copyright 2 D difference 4 F folder 11 I installing 5 introduction 4 L layout 8 P printing 13 S search search button 11 TCP/IP 11 setting 9 pop-up window 9 search option 10 system requirements 4 U uninstalling 6 using 7 Samsung Universal Print Driver User’s Guide imagine the possibilitiesCopyright_ 2 Copyright © 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. This admin guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without any notice. Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide. • Samsung Universal Print Driver is a trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd • Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. • Microsoft, Windows, Internet Explorer and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. • All other brand, product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners. REV. 1.00Contents_ 3 Contents COPYRIGHT/2 CONTENTS/3 INTRODUCTION Samsung Universal Print Driver vs. Model specific drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER Installing Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Uninstalling Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 USING THE SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER Accessing the Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Layout overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Changing Samsung Universal Print Driver settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Setting the pop-up option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Setting the printer search option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Searching print devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 By TCP/IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 By Search Now menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Creating a favorite folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Printing with Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Basic printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Changing the selected printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 INDEX/14Introduction_ 4 1.Introduction The Samsung Universal Print Driver is a single driver that can be used with different printer models. This gives users instant access to not only Samsung print devices but also a range of other vendor's PDL based devices without the need to download separate drivers. • PDL means both PCL and PS. • Samsung does not guarantee the quality of other vendors’ printer devices and Samsung models that are not supported (Click to see the supported Samsung device list). For unsupported Samsung models, driver is automatically set to usable default PDL. Samsung Universal Print Driver vs. Model specific drivers The following table shows the differences between the Samsung Universal Print Driver and the product based drivers: System requirements Minimum system requirements for the Samsung Universal Print Driver are as follows: SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER MODEL SPECIFIC DRIVERS User interface Consistent user interface. Inconsistent user interface. Installation • Download and install with the installer file provided with the Samsung Universal Print Driver. • Install via executing the installer file. • Manually locate, download, and install driver for each device. • Install via CD autorun or Add printer wizard. Device discovery Easily locate and access suggested devices from the whole Samsung printer products. Manually discover devices. Availability Available on the Samsung web site. Available on the CD provided with the device, or the product based driver. OPERATING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS CPU RAM FREE HDD SPACE Windows Vista 1 GHz 1 GB 40 GB Windows XP 300 MHz or higher 128 MB RAM or higher 1.5 GB or higher (additional 1.8 GB in SP2 and additional 900 MB in SP3 Windows 2000 133 Mhz 64 MB 2GB Windows Server 2003 550 MHz or higher 256 MB RAM or higher 2.9 GB or higher Windows Server 2008 2 GHz or faster 2 GB RAM or higher 40 GB or higherInstalling and Uninstalling the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 5 2.Installing and Uninstalling the Samsung Universal Print Driver This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for installing and uninstalling the Samsung Universal Print Driver. The following windows are for a PCL driver in Windows XP. Windows may differ for a PS driver, but the steps are the same. Installing Samsung Universal Print Driver Before installing the driver, check the recommended minimum requirements for your system (See "System requirements" on page 4). 1. Start a web browser and go to www.samsung.com. 2. Search for the Samsung Universal Print Driver setup file. 3. Start the setup file. The Samsung Universal Print Driver Installer Wizard opens. 4. Click Next. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list. After the installation window opens, wait for installation to be completed. 5. After the Setup Completed window opens, click Finish. If you want to register yourself as a user of Samsung devices in order to receive information from Samsung, select the Installing and Uninstalling the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 6 checkbox and click Finish. If the driver is installed properly, you can find the Samsung Universal Print Driver in the Printers and Faxes folder. Uninstalling Samsung Universal Print Driver If you want to uninstall the Samsung Universal Print Driver, follow the steps below: 1. From the Windows Start menu, select > All Programs > Samsung Universal Print Driver > Maintenance. The Samsung Universal Print Driver Installer Wizard opens. 2. Select Remove and click Next. 3. Select the components you want to remove and click Next. 4. A confirmation window appears, click Yes. 5. When unistallation is completed, click Finish. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 7 3.Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver The main purpose of the Samsung Universal Print Driver is to install one driver (Samsung Universal Print Driver) and use it with different print devices. However, the Samsung Universal Print Driver has other features like searching print devices, creating a favorites folder, and checking a device’s status. Accessing the Samsung Universal Print Driver 1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes. 2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties. Samsung Universal Print Driver window opens. If there’s no recently used printer, a pop-up window asking you to search printers appears. Click OK to search connected printers. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 8 Layout overview 1 Layout bar Includes displaying options. • : Selects the layout for the Samsung Universal Print Driver window. If you choose Layout2 and installed the Samsung Smart Panel program, you can see the status window(number 4). • : Refreshes all the printer information in the list. • : Selects the view type for the printer list. Detail View shows printer information such as Address, Location, Status and System name. Image View also shows printer information except with a larger printer image. This option is only supported on Windows XP(and later). • : Displays the printer list in groups. This option is only supported on Windows XP(and later). • : Searches for a printer in the list by a keyword like a model name. • : Opens the help window. • : Shows information about the Samsung Universal Print Driver.Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 9 Changing Samsung Universal Print Driver settings Setting the pop-up option You can set the Samsung Universal Print Driver window to appear when you print. There are four options for this window to pop-up: 1. Click the Settings button on the bottom left corner. 2 Main menus • Recent - Recently Used Printers : Shows the list of recently used printers. The most recently used printer is at the top of the list. - Recently Searched Printers : Shows the list of recently found printers. The most recently found printer is at the top of the list. • Search - Search Now : Searches printers that are connected either by USB or network. - Search by Address : Searches for a printer by the printer’s IP address. • My Printer - Create a Favorite Folder : Creates a folder for favorite printers. • Settings : Displays options for pop-ups and searches. 3 Printer list Shows printer list. 4 Status window Shows status of the selected printer in the list. You need to select Layout2 and install the Samsung Smart Panel program to see this window. • Update Now : Updates the selected printer’s information. • Buy Supplies : Opens the website for buying supplies. • TroubleShooting Guide : Opens the troubleshooting chapter of the user’s guide. You need to install the Smart Panel of the model you are using to see the troubleshooting guide. • Printer Settings : Opens SyncThur Web Service, which provides options for configuring and managing your printer. You can only use this option with network printers. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 10 2. Click the Pop-up tab. A sample of Pop-up tab is shown in the following figure. • When driver UI appears: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears when you open a Printing Preferences (Properties) window. • Every time you print: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears every time you print. • Only the first time you print: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears only for the first time when Samsung Universal Print Driver is selected as the printer from an application. • Only when the last printer used is not available: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears only if the printer that was last used is not available. 3. Click OK. Setting the printer search option To set the search options for the Samsung Universal Print Driver, follow the steps below: 1. Click the Settings button on the bottom left corner. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 11 2. Click the Search tab and select one of the following options. • Search only supported printer: Searches only supported printers connected. Click to see the supported Samsung device list • Search all the printers: Searches all connected printers. 3. Click OK. Searching print devices By TCP/IP address If you know the TCP/IP address of the print device you want to use, you can search the device by typing the TCP/IP address. Follow the steps below: 1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes. 2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties. The Samsung Universal Print Driver window opens. 4. Click Search by Address. A window appears. 5. Type in the TCP/IP address of your printer and click OK. By Search Now menu If you don’t know the TCP/IP address of the print device you want to use, you can use the Search Now option to search for the device. Follow the steps below: 1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes. 2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties. Samsung Universal Print Driver window opens. 4. Click Search Now. Samsung Universal Print Driver searches the connected print devices. The search result might differ depending on the search option you have selected (See "Setting the printer search option" on page 10.) Creating a favorite folder You can create a folder with the printers you use the most for your convenience. For example, if you travel between home and work sites, you can create two different printer folders; Home and Work, and manage the printers as needed. To create a favorite folder, follow the steps below: Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 12 1. Click Create a Favorite Folder. Add new favorite folder window appears. 2. Type in a folder name. 3. Click OK. A new folder is added under My Printer. To add printers to a folder under My Printer, you can drag-and-drop the print from the list to the folder or right-click the printer in the list and select Move or Copy. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 13 Help Click the Help button ( )in the upper right of the Samsung Universal Print Driver window. A help window appears. Use this help to answer your questions about using the Samsung Universal Print Driver. Printing with Samsung Universal Print Driver Basic printing To print a document using Samsung Universal Print Driver, follow the steps below: The following steps show printing from Notepad. Menu names might differ depending on the application you are using. 1. Open the file that you want to print in an application. 2. From the menu bar select File > Print. 3. Select the Samsung Universal Print Driver from the printer list. 4. Click OK. Printing begins. Or, depending on the pop-up option (see "Setting the pop-up option" on page9) you selected, the Samsung Universal Print Driver window might appear before printing. Choose the printer you want to use and print. Changing the selected printer 1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes. 2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties. Printing Preferences (Properties) window opens. 4. Select another printer either from the printer list or by searching (See "Searching print devices" on page 11). 5. Click OK. All subsequent printing will now be directed to the new printer.Index_ 14 Index A accessing 7 C copyright 2 D difference 4 F folder 11 I installing 5 introduction 4 L layout 8 P printing 13 S search search button 11 TCP/IP 11 setting 9 pop-up window 9 search option 10 system requirements 4 U uninstalling 6 using 7 Samsung Universal Print Driver Mode d’emploi imaginez les possibilitésCopyright_ 2 Copyright © 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Tous droits réservés. Le présent guide administrateur n’est fourni qu’à titre informatif. Toutes les informations communiquées ci-après sont susceptibles d’être modifiées sans préavis. Samsung Electronics ne saurait être tenu pour responsable des dommages, directs ou indirects, consécutifs à l’utilisation de ce guide. • Samsung Universal Print Driver est une marque commerciale de Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. • Samsung et le logo Samsung sont des marques commerciales de Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. • Microsoft, Windows, Internet Explorer et Windows Vista sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales de Microsoft Corporation aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d’autres pays. • L’ensemble des autres marques, produits et noms d’entreprises peuvent être la propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs. REV. 1.00Table des matières_ 3 Table des matières COPYRIGHT/2 TABLE DES MATIÈRES/3 INTRODUCTION Samsung Universal Print Driver contre pilotes spécifiques à un modèle . . . . . 4 Configuration requise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 INSTALLATION ET DÉSINSTALLATION DU PILOTE D’IMPRESSION UNIVERSEL SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER Installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver 5 Désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver 6 UTILISATION DU PILOTE D’IMPRESSION UNIVERSEL SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER Accès au pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . 7 Aperçu de la mise en page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Modification des paramètres du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Configuration de l’option de fenêtre indépendante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Configuration de l’option de recherche de l’imprimante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Recherche des périphériques d’impression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Par adresse TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Par le menu Rechercher maintenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Création d’un dossier de favoris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Aide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Impression à l’aide du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Impression de base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Changement de l’imprimante sélectionnée . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 INDEX/15Introduction_ 4 1.Introduction Le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est un pilote unique pouvant être utilisé avec différents modèles d’imprimantes. Cela permet aux utilisateurs d’accéder directement non seulement aux périphériques d’impression Samsung, mais également à une gamme de périphériques d’autres fournisseurs sans avoir à télécharger de pilotes séparés. • PDL signifie PCL et PS. • Samsung ne garantit pas la qualité des périphériques d’impression d’autres fournisseurs et des modèles Samsung non pris en charge (Cliquez sur pour consulter la liste des périphériques Samsung pris en charge). Pour les modèles Samsung non pris en charge, le pilote est automatiquement défini sur PDL par défaut utilisable. Samsung Universal Print Driver contre pilotes spécifiques à un modèle Le tableau suivant montre les différences entre le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver et les pilotes de produits spécifiques : Configuration requise La configuration minimale requise pour le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est la suivante : SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER PILOTES SPÉCIFIQUES À UN MODÈLE Interface utilisateur Interface utilisateur cohérente. Interface utilisateur incohérente. Installation • Téléchargez et installez le ficher d’installation fourni avec le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. • Installez en exécutant le fichier d’installation. • Localisez, téléchargez et installez manuellement le pilote pour chaque périphérique. • Installez via l’exécution automatique du CD ou via l’assistant Installation d’imprimante. Découverte de périphériques Localisez facilement et accédez aux périphériques suggérés parmi l’ensemble des produits d’impression Samsung. Découvrez manuellement les périphériques. Disponibilité Disponible sur le site Web Samsung. Disponible sur le CD fourni avec le produit, ou avec le pilote spécifique du produit. SYSTÈME D’EXPLOITATION CONFIGURATION REQUISE PROCESSEUR RAM ESPACE LIBRE SUR LE DISQUE DUR Windows Vista 1 GHz 1 Go 40 Go Windows XP 300 MHz ou supérieur 128 Mo de RAM ou supérieur 1,5 Go ou supérieur (1,8 Go supplémentaires pour SP2 et 900 Mo pour SP3 Windows 2000 133 Mhz 64 Mo 2 Go Windows Server 2003 550 MHz ou supérieur 256 Mo de RAM ou supérieur 2,9 Go ou supérieur Windows Server 2008 2 GHz ou plus rapide 2 Go de RAM ou supérieur 40 Go ou supérieurInstallation et désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 5 2.Installation et désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Ce chapitre vous guide pas à pas dans la procédure d’installation et de désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. Les fenêtres suivantes s’appliquent à un pilote PCL dans Windows XP. Les fenêtres peuvent varier pour un pilote PS, mais les étapes sont les mêmes. Installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Avant d’installer le pilote, vérifiez la configuration minimale requise pour votre système (Voir « Configuration requise » à la page 4). 1. Ouvrez un navigateur Web et visitez www.samsung.com. 2. Recherchez le fichier d’installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Lancez le fichier d’installation. L’assistant d’installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. 4. Cliquez sur Suivant. Au besoin, sélectionnez une langue dans la liste déroulante. Une fois la fenêtre d’installation ouverte, attendez que l’installation se termine.Installation et désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 6 5. Quand la fenêtre Installation terminée s’ouvre, cliquez sur Terminer. Pour vous inscrire en tant qu’utilisateur de périphériques Samsung et recevoir des informations du fabricant, cochez cette case et cliquez sur Terminer. Si le pilote est installé correctement, vous pouvez trouver le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver dans le dossier Imprimantes et télécopieurs. Désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Si vous voulez désinstaller le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver, suivez les étapes suivantes : 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez > Tous les programmes > Samsung Universal Print Driver > Maintenance. L’assistant d’installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. 2. Sélectionnez Supprimer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 3. Sélectionnez les composants à supprimer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4. Lorsqu’un message de confirmation s’affiche, cliquez sur Oui. 5. Une fois la désinstallation terminée, cliquez sur Terminer. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 7 3.Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Le principal objectif du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est d’installer un pilote (Samsung Universal Print Driver) et de l’utiliser avec différents périphériques d’impression. Toutefois, le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver dispose d’autres fonctions, comme la recherche de périphériques d’impression, la création d’un dossier de favoris et la vérification de l’état d’un périphérique. Accès au pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés. La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. Si aucune imprimante n’a été utilisée récemment, une fenêtre indépendante vous demandant de rechercher des imprimantes s’ouvre. Cliquez sur OK pour rechercher les imprimantes connectées. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 8 Aperçu de la mise en page 1 Barre de mise en page Inclut les options d’affichage. • : Sélectionne la mise en page de la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . Si vous choisissez Mise en page2 et que le programme Samsung Smart Panel est installé, vous pouvez voir la fenêtre d’état (numéro 4). • : Actualise toutes les informations relatives à l’imprimante dans la liste. • : Sélectionne le type de vue pour la liste des imprimantes. Vue détaillée affiche les informations relatives à l’imprimante, comme son Adresse, son Emplacement, son État et son Nom système. Vue image affiche également les informations relatives à l’imprimante, sauf dans le cas d’une image d’imprimante plus grande. Cette option n’est prise en charge que sous Windows XP (et ultérieur). • : Affiche la liste des imprimantes par groupes. Cette option n’est prise en charge que sous Windows XP (et ultérieur). • : Recherche une imprimante dans la liste en fonction d’un mot clé, comme un nom de modèle. • : Ouvre la fenêtre d’aide. • : Affiche des informations relatives au pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver.Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 9 2 Menus principaux • Récent - Imprimantes récemment utilisées : Affiche la liste des imprimantes récemment utilisées. L’imprimante utilisée le plus récemment est en haut de la liste. - Imprimantes récemment recherchées : Affiche la liste des imprimantes récemment trouvées. L’imprimante trouvée le plus récemment est en haut de la liste. • Recherche - Rechercher maintenant : Recherche les imprimantes connectées via USB ou via le réseau. - Rechercher par adresse : Recherche une imprimante en fonction de son adresse IP. • Mon imprimante - Créer un dossier favori : Crée un dossier d’imprimantes favorites. • Paramètres : Affiche les options pour les fenêtres indépendantes et les recherches. 3 Liste des imprimantes Affiche la liste des imprimantes. 4 Fenêtre d’état Affiche l’état de l’imprimante sélectionnée dans la liste. Vous devez sélectionner Mise en page2 et installer le programme Samsung Smart Panel pour voir cette fenêtre. • Mettre à jour maintenant : Met à jour les informations de l’imprimante sélectionnée. • Achat de fournitures : Ouvre le site Web d’achat de fournitures. • Guide de dépannage : Ouvre le chapitre de dépannage du mode d’emploi. Vous devez installer le programme Smart Panel du modèle que vous utilisez pour voir le guide de dépannage. • Paramètres de l’imprimante : Ouvre le Service Web SyncThru, qui propose des options de configuration et de gestion de votre imprimante. Vous ne pouvez utiliser cette option qu’avec des imprimantes réseau. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 10 Modification des paramètres du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Configuration de l’option de fenêtre indépendante Vous pouvez configurer la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver pour qu’elle s’affiche lorsque vous réalisez une impression. Il existe quatre options pour l’affichage de cette fenêtre indépendante : 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres dans le coin inférieur gauche. 2. Cliquez sur l’onglet Fenêtre contextuelle. La figure suivante montre un exemple d’onglet Fenêtre contextuelle. • Lorsque l'interface du pilote apparaît: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’affiche lorsque vous ouvrez une fenêtre Options d’impression (Propriétés). • A chaque impression: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’affiche chaque fois que vous réalisez une impression. • Seulement lors de la première impression: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’affiche uniquement la première fois que le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est sélectionné comme imprimante depuis une application. • Seulement lorsque la dernière imprimante utilisée n’est pas disponible: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver ne s’affiche que si la dernière imprimante utilisée n’est pas disponible. 3. Cliquez sur OK. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 11 Configuration de l’option de recherche de l’imprimante Pour configurer les options de recherche du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver, suivez les étapes suivantes : 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres dans le coin inférieur gauche. 2. Cliquez sur l’onglet Rechercher et sélectionnez une des options suivantes. • Rechercher uniquement les imprimantes prises en charge: Recherche uniquement les imprimantes connectées prises en charge. Cliquez sur pour voir la liste des périphériques Samsung pris en charge. • Rechercher toutes les imprimantes: Recherche toutes les imprimantes connectées. 3. Cliquez sur OK. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 12 Recherche des périphériques d’impression Par adresse TCP/IP Si vous connaissez l’adresse TCP/IP du périphérique d’impression que vous souhaitez utiliser, vous pouvez le rechercher en tapant son adresse TCP/IP. Suivez les étapes ci-dessous : 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés. La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. 4. Cliquez sur Rechercher par adresse. Une fenêtre s’ouvre. 5. Tapez l’adresse TCP/IP de votre imprimante et cliquez sur OK. Par le menu Rechercher maintenant Si vous ne connaissez pas l’adresse TCP/IP du périphérique d’impression que vous voulez utiliser, vous pouvez utiliser l’option Rechercher maintenant pour rechercher le périphérique. Suivez les étapes ci-dessous : 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver 3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés. La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. 4. Cliquez sur Rechercher maintenant. Le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver recherche les périphériques d’impression connectés. Le résultat de la recherche peut varier en fonction de l’option de recherche que vous avez sélectionnée (Voir « Configuration de l’option de recherche de l’imprimante » à la page 11.)Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 13 Création d’un dossier de favoris Pour des raisons pratiques, vous pouvez créer un dossier contenant les imprimantes que vous utilisez le plus souvent. Par exemple, si vous naviguez entre votre domicile et plusieurs sites de travail, vous pouvez créer deux dossiers d’imprimantes différents ; Domicile et Travail, puis gérer les imprimantes selon vos préférences. Pour créer un dossier de favoris, suivez les étapes suivantes : 1. Cliquez sur Créer un dossier favori. La fenêtre Ajouter un nouveau dossier de favoris s’ouvre. 2. Tapez un nom de dossier. 3. Cliquez sur OK. Un nouveau dossier est ajouté dans Mon imprimante. Pour ajouter des imprimantes à un dossier dans Mon imprimante, vous pouvez glisser-déposer le dossier ou cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris dans la liste et sélectionner Déplacer ou Copier. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 14 Aide Cliquez sur le bouton Aide ( ) en haut à droite de la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. Une fenêtre d’aide s’ouvre. Utilisez cette aide pour trouver les réponses à vos questions au sujet du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. Impression à l’aide du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Impression de base Pour imprimer un document en utilisant le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver, suivez les étapes suivantes : Les étapes suivantes montrent une impression à partir de Notepad. Les noms des menus peuvent varier en fonction de l’application que vous utilisez. 1. Ouvrez le fichier que vous souhaitez imprimer dans une application. 2. Dans la barre de menu, sélectionnez Fichier > Imprimer. 3. Sélectionnez le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver dans la liste des imprimantes. 4. Cliquez sur OK. L’impression démarre. Ou, en fonction de l’option de fenêtre indépendante (voir « Configuration de l’option de fenêtre indépendante » à la page 10) que vous avez sélectionnée, la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver peut s’ouvrir avant l’impression. Sélectionnez l’imprimante que vous souhaitez utiliser et imprimez. Changement de l’imprimante sélectionnée 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés. La fenêtre Options d’impression (Propriétés) s’ouvre. 4. Sélectionnez une autre imprimante dans la liste des imprimantes ou en effectuant une recherche (Voir « Recherche des périphériques d’impression » à la page 12). 5. Cliquez sur OK. Toutes les impressions suivantes sont alors dirigées vers la nouvelle imprimante.Index_ 15 Index A accès 7 C configuration requise 4 copyright 2 D définition 10 fenêtre indépendante 10 option de recherche 11 désinstallation 6 différence 4 dossier 13 I impression 14 installation 5 introduction 4 M mise en page 8 R recherche bouton de recherche 12 TCPIP 12 U utilisation 7 CLP-320 Series Color Laser Printer User’s Guide imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product. Copyright_ 2 copyright © 2010 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice. Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide. • Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. • Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows Server 2008 R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. • TrueType, LaserWriter, and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. • All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations. Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information. REV. 4.00Contents_ 3 contents 19 About this user’s guide 21 Features of your new product INTRODUCTION 23 23 Machine overview 23 Front view 24 Rear view 25 Control panel overview 26 Understanding the control panel 26 Status/ Toner LEDs 26 Wireless LED 26 Introducing the useful buttons 26 Print screen button 27 Demo print button 27 Cancel button 27 WPS button 27 Power button GETTING STARTED 28 28 Setting up the hardware 28 Location 28 Printing a demo page 28 Supplied software 29 System requirements 29 Microsoft® Windows® 29 Macintosh 30 Linux 30 Installing USB connected machine’s driver 30 Windows 31 Macintosh 32 Linux 33 Sharing your machine locally 33 Windows 33 Macintosh NETWORK SETUP (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/ CLP-326W ONLY) 34 34 Network environment 34 Introducing useful network programs 34 SyncThru™ Web Service 34 SyncThru™ Web Admin Service 34 SetIP 34 Using a wired network 35 Printing network configuration report 35 Setting IP address 35 IPv4 configuration 36 IPv6 configuration 36 Restoring factory default settings using SyncThru™ Web Service 37 Installing network connected machine’s driver 37 Windows 38 Macintosh 39 Linux WIRELESS NETWORK SETUP (CLP-325W(K)/326W ONLY) 40 40 Getting started 40 Choosing your network connection 40 Wireless network name and network key 40 Choosing the wireless network installation type 40 From the control panelcontents Contents_ 4 40 From the computer 40 Setting a wireless network with the WPS button 41 Setting a wireless network with the WPS button 41 Setting a wireless network from the computer 41 Setting a wireless network with USB cable 46 Setting a wireless network with network cable 48 Completing the installation 48 Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off 48 Troubleshooting 48 Solving problems that might occur during setting up the wireless setting and installing the machine driver 49 Solving other problems BASIC SETUP 50 50 Altitude adjustment 50 Setting the default tray and paper 50 From your computer 51 Using the power saving feature 51 Changing font setting (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/ /CLP- 326W only) 51 Setting the humidity mode MEDIA AND TRAY 52 52 Selecting print media 52 Guidelines for selecting the print media 52 Media sizes supported in each mode 53 Changing the tray size 54 Loading paper in the tray 54 In the tray 55 Manual feeding in the tray 56 Printing on special media 57 Envelopes 57 Transparencies 57 Labels 58 Card stock/Custom-sized paper 58 Letterhead/Preprinted paper 58 Recycled paper 58 Glossy photo 58 Matte photo 58 Setting the paper size and type 58 Using the output support PRINTING 59 59 Introducing useful software program 59 Samsung AnyWeb Print 59 Samsung Easy Color Manager 59 Printer driver features 59 Printer driver 59 Basic printing 60 Canceling a print job 60 Opening printing preferences 60 Using a favorite setting 61 Using help 61 Using special print features 61 Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper 61 Printing posters 61 Printing booklets (Manual)contents Contents_ 5 62 Printing on both sides of the paper (Manual) 62 Change percentage of your document 62 Fitting your document to a selected paper size 62 Using watermarks 63 Using overlay 63 Graphics tab options 64 Changing the default print settings 64 Setting your machine as a default machine 65 Printing to a file (PRN) 65 Macintosh printing 65 Printing a document 65 Changing printer settings 66 Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper 66 Linux printing 66 Printing from applications 67 Printing files 67 Configuring printer properties MANAGEMENT TOOLS 68 68 Introducing useful management tools 68 Using SyncThru™ Web Service 68 To access SyncThru™ Web Service 68 SyncThru™ Web Service overview 69 E-mail notification setup 69 Setting the system administrator information 69 Using the Smart Panel program 69 Understanding Smart Panel 70 Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings 70 Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator 70 Opening the Unified Driver Configurator 70 Printers configuration window 71 Ports configuration MAINTENANCE 72 72 Printing a machine report 72 Cleaning a machine 72 Cleaning the outside 72 Cleaning the inside 73 Storing the toner cartridge 73 Toner cartridge storage 74 Handling instructions 74 Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge 74 Estimated cartridge life 74 Tips for moving & storing your machine TROUBLESHOOTING 75 75 Redistributing toner 75 Tips for avoiding paper jams 76 Clearing paper jams 76 In the tray 76 Inside the machine 76 In the paper exit area 78 Solving other problems 78 System problems 78 Power problems 79 Paper feeding problems 80 Printing problems 81 Printing quality problemscontents Contents_ 6 84 Common Windows problems 84 Common Linux problems 85 Common Macintosh problems SUPPLIES 86 86 How to purchase 86 Available supplies 86 Maintenance parts 86 Replacing the toner cartridge 87 Replacing the imaging unit 89 Replacing the waste toner container SPECIFICATIONS 90 90 Hardware specifications 90 Environmental specifications 90 Electrical specifications 92 Print media specifications CONTACT SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE 94 GLOSSARY 96 INDEX 102Safety information_ 7 safety information These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and others, and to prevent any potential damage to your machine. Be sure to read and understand all of these instructions before using the machine. Use common sense for operating any electrical appliance and whenever using your machine. Also, follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the accompanying literature. After reading this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference. Important safety symbols This section explains the meanings of all icons and signs in the user's guide. These safety symbols are in order, according to the degree of danger. Explanation of all icons and signs used in the User’s Guide: Warning Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death. Caution Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage. Do not attempt. Do not disassemble. Do not touch. Unplug the power cord from the wall socket. Make sure the machine is grounded to prevent electric shock. Call the service center for help. Follow directions explicitly. Operating environment Warning Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is not grounded. ► This could result in electric shock or fire. Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power cord. ► Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy object could result in electric shock or fire. Do not place anything on top of the machine (water, small metal or heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes, etc.). ► This could result in electric shock or fire. Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not handle the plug with wet hands. ► This could result in electric shock or fire. Safety information_ 8 Caution During an electrical storm or for a period of non-operation, remove the power plug from the electrical outlet. ► This could result in electric shock or fire. If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not attempt to force it in. ► Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this could result in electric shock. Be careful, the paper output area is hot. ► Burns could occur. Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC interface cords. ► This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to your pet. If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel. ► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions have been followed, unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel. ► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance, unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel. ► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. Operating method Caution Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing. ► It can cause damage to the machine. When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the paper output area may get hot. Do not allow children to touch. ► Burns can occur. Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper tray. ► You may get injured. When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers or sharp metal objects. ► It can damage the machine. Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening. ► This could result in elevated component temperatures which can cause damage or fire. Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray. ► It can damage the machine. Be care when replacing paper or removing jammed paper. ► New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts. This machine's power interception device is the power cord. ► To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from the electrical outlet. If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke, makes strange noises, or generates an odd odor, immediately turn off the power switch and unplug the machine. ► This could result in electric shock or fire. Safety information_ 9 Installation / Moving Warning Do not place the machine in an area with dust, humidity or water leaks. ► This could result in electric shock or fire. Caution Before moving the machine, turn the power off and disconnect all cords. Then lift the machine: • If the machine weighs under 20 kg (44.09lb), lift with 1 person. • If the machine weighs 20 kg (44.09lb) - 40kg (88.18lb), lift with 2 people. • If the machine weighs more than 40 kg (88.18lb), lift with 4 or more people. ► The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage. Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight location, such as a closet. ► If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire. Do not place the machine on an unstable surface. ► The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage. Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical outlet. ► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. The machine should be connected to the power level which is specified on the label. ► If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using, contact the electrical utility company. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords. ► This can diminish performance, and could result in electric shock or fire. Use only No.26 AWG a a. AWG: American Wire Gauge or larger, telephone line cord, if necessary. ► Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine. Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters (6 feet) with a 140V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG or larger. ► Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could result in electric shock or fire. Maintenance / Checking Caution Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the inside of the machine. Do not clean the machine with benzene, paint thinner or alcohol; do not spray water directly into the machine. ► This could result in electric shock or fire. Keep cleaning supplies away from children. ► Children could get hurt.Safety information_ 10 Supply usage Caution Do not disassemble the toner cartridge. ► Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested. When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep them away from children. ► Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested. Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner cartridge or fuser unit. ► This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable fire. Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause damage to the machine. ► In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a service fee will be charged. When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper, be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes. ► Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested. When toner gets on your clothing, do not use hot water to wash it. ► Hot water sets toner into fabric. Use cold water. When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or cleaning the inside, do not operate the machine. ► You could get injured. Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by yourself. ► It can damage the machine. Call a certified technician when the machine needs repair. Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean from dust or water. ► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's guide provided with the machine. ► Otherwise, you could damage the machine. Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with screws. ► The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service technician.Regulatory information_ 11 regulatory information This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with several regulatory statements. Laser Safety Statement The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1:1993 + A1:1997 + A2:2001. Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service condition. • Wavelenght: 800 nm • Beam divergence - Paraller: 12 degrees - Perpendicular: 30 degrees • Maximum power or energy output: 5 mW WARNING Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes. When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons: Ozone Safety During normal operation, this machine produces ozone. The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator. However, it is advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area. If you need additional information about ozone, contact your local Samsung dealer.Regulatory information_ 12 Power Saver This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use. When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time, power consumption is automatically lowered. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://www.energystar.gov. Recycling Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner. China only Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems) This marking shown on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. Radio Frequency Emissions FCC Information to the User This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference, and • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:Regulatory information_ 13 • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help. Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Canadian Radio Interference Regulations This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and Science Canada. Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada. United states of america Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15 Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in your printer system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices. Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label. The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not include extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are on. The power output of the wireless device (or devices), which may be embedded in your printer, is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the FCC. This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it. Contact manufacturer for service. FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use: While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W/cm2 may be exceeded at distances close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must maintain a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times. This device cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna. Turkey only Russia onlyRegulatory information_ 14 Germany only Replacing the Fitted Plug (for UK Only) Important The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the fuse, you must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover. Contact the people from you purchased the machine. The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal 13 amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded plug. If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away. You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket. Important warning: You must earth this machine. The wires in the mains lead have the following color code: • Green and Yellow: Earth • Blue: Neutral • Brown: Live If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do the following: You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E” or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or green. You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or colored black. You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L” or colored red. You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board. Declaration of Conformity (European Countries) Approvals and Certifications The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable 93/68/EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated: CLP-320 Series: Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC), EMC Directive (2004/108/EC) CLP-325W(K): R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC) The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www.samsung.com/printer, go to Support > Download center and enter your printer (MFP) name to browse the EuDoC. January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment. January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC (92/31/EEC), approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility. March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. representative.Regulatory information_ 15 European Radio Approval Information (for products fitted with EU-approved radio devices) Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band, may be present (embedded) in your printer system which is intended for home or office use. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices. Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark with a Notified Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label. The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European Commission through the R&TTE directive. European States qualified under wireless approvals: EU Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France (with frequency restrictions), Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, The Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden and the U.K. EEA/EFTA countries Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway and Switzerland European States with restrictions on use: EU In France, the frequency range is restricted to 2446.5-2483.5 MHz for devices above 10 mW transmitting power such as wireless EEA/EFTA countries No limitations at this time Regulatory Compliance Statements Wireless Guidance Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in your printer system. The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device. Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in the specific country sections (or country group sections). The wireless devices in your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label. If the country you will be using the wireless device in, is not listed, contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements. Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be allowed. The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time. Because the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your printer) emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use. Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken to minimize human contact during normal operation. As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting. This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of common restrictions are listed below: Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane. IEEE 802.11 (also known as wireless Ethernet) and Bluetooth communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless communication. In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices, ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device. Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices. Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling between countries with your system, check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of a wireless device in the destination country. If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields are in place and the system is fully assembled. Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it. Contact manufacturer for service.Regulatory information_ 16 OpenSSL License Copyright (c) 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)". 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without Prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)". THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Original SSLeay License Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related. 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)". THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact manufacturer Technical Support for additional information.Regulatory information_ 17 LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence. China onlyRegulatory information_ 18About this user’s guide_ 19 about this user’s guide This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during actual usage. It is a valuable resource for both novice and professional users for the proper installation and use of the machine. •Read the safety information before using the machine. •If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting chapter (See "Troubleshooting" on page 75). •Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter (See "Glossary" on page 96). •Illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. •The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows XP. Convention Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably as below. • Document is synonymous with original. • Paper is synonymous with media or print media. • Machine refers to printer or MFP. The following table offers the conventions of this guide. Convention Description Example Bold For texts on the display or button names on the machine. Cancel Note Provides additional information or details for the machine function and feature. The date format may differ from country to country. Caution Contains information you can use to protect the machine from possible mechanical damage or malfunction. Do not touch the surface of the drum located in the toner cartridge or imaging unit. Footnote Provides additional information on certain words or a phrase. a. pages per minute (“Cross-reference”) Refers you to additional detailed information. (See "Finding more information" on page 20)About this user’s guide_ 20 Finding more information You can find information about setting up and using your machine in the following resources, either as a print-out or on screen. Material name Description Quick Installation Guide This guide provides information on setting up your machine. This guide is provided in the box with the printer. User’s Guide This guide provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your machine’s full features, maintaining your machine, troubleshooting, and replacing supplies. Machine Driver Help This help provides you with help information about the printer driver and instructions for setting up the options for printing (See "Using help" on page 61). Samsung website If you have Internet access, you can get help, support, machine drivers, manuals and order information from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com/printer. Downloadable software You can download useful software programs from the Samsung website. • SyncThru™ Web Admin Service: convenient for network administrators who need to manage many machines simultaneously. This program is for network model only. (http://solution.samsungprinter.com) • Samsung AnyWeb Print: helps personal users to screen-capture the website screen in Windows Internet Explorer easily. (http://solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/anywebprint) • Samsung Easy Color Manager: helps Samsung color laser printer users to adjust color as they like. (http://solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/colormanager)Features of your new product_ 21 features of your new product Your new machine is equipped with a number of special features that improve the quality of the documents you print. Special Features Print with excellent quality and speed • You can print in a full range of colors using cyan, magenta, yellow and black. • You can print with a resolution of up to 2400 x 600 dpi effective output. • Your machine prints A4-sized paper at up to 16 ppm and Letter-sized paper at up to 17 ppm in black and white mode and 4 ppm in color mode. Handle many different types of printable material • The tray holds up to 150 sheet of plain paper in various sizes. • You can load different custom-size print media in the tray. Create professional documents (Windows only) • Print Watermarks. You can customize your documents with words such as “Confidential” (See "Using watermarks" on page 62). • Print Posters. The text and pictures of each page of your document are magnified and printed across the sheet of paper and can then be taped together to form a poster (See "Printing posters" on page 61). • You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain paper (See "Using overlay" on page 63). Save time and money • To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper (See "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper" on page 61). • This machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when not in use. • To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper (Manual) (See "Printing on both sides of the paper (Manual)" on page 62). Print in various environments • You can print with Windows as well as Linux and Macintosh OS systems. • Your machine is equipped with a Hi-Speed USB 2.0 interface. • Your machine comes with a built-in network interface, Ethernet 10/100 BaseTX. (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only) • Your machine comes with a built-in network Interface 802.11 b/g/n wireless LAN. (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only) IPv6 (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only) The machine supports IPv6 (See "IPv6 configuration" on page 36).Features of your new product_ 22 Features by models The machines are designed to support all of your document needs from printing to more advanced networking solutions for your business. Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on models or countries. Features by models include: FEATURES CLP-320(K) CLP-321 CLP-325(K) CLP-326 CLP-320N(K) CLP-321N CLP-325W(K) CLP-326W Hi-Speed USB 2.0 ● ● ● Network Interface Ethernet 10/100 BaseTX wired LAN ● ● Network Interface 802.11 b/g/n wireless LAN a a.Depending on your country, wireless LAN cards may not be available. Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought your printer. ● Duplex (2-sided) printing (Manual) ● ● ● ( ●: Included, Blank: Not available) Introduction_ 23 1.introduction This chapter gives you an overview of your machine. This chapter includes: • Machine overview • Control panel overview • Understanding the control panel Machine overview Front view 1 2 31 5 7 6 8 9 10 4 This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model. 1 Output tray (face down) 6 Front cover 2 Output support 7 Front cover release button 3 Top cover 8 Toner cartridges 4 Control panel 9 Waster toner container 5 Tray 10 Imaging unitIntroduction_ 24 Rear view 1 3 5 4 2 This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model. 1 Rear cover release button 4 USB port 2 Rear cover 5 Network port a a.CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N only. 3 Power receptacleIntroduction_ 25 Control panel overview This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model. 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 [1] CLP-320(K)/CLP-321/CLP-325(K)/ CLP-326/CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N 1 Toner LEDs Shows the status of each toner cartridge (See "Status/ Toner LEDs" on page 26). 2 Power button You can turn the power on and off with this button (See "Power button" on page 27). 3 Cancel button Stops an operation at any time and there are more functions (See "Cancel button" on page 27). 4 Status LED Shows the status of your machine (See "Status/ Toner LEDs" on page 26). 5 Print Screen a a.CLP-320(K)/CLP-321/CLP-325(K)/ CLP-326 only. Prints the displayed screen of your monitor (See "Print screen button" on page 26). Demo Print b b.CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N only. Prints a demo page (See "Demo print button" on page 27). [2] CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W 1 Toner LEDs Shows the status of each toner cartridge (See "Status/ Toner LEDs" on page 26). 2 Power button You can turn the power on and off with this button (See "Power button" on page 27). 3 Cancel button Stops an operation at any time and there are more functions (See "Cancel button" on page 27). 4 Status LED Shows the status of your machine (See "Status/ Toner LEDs" on page 26). 5 Wireless LED Shows the status of wireless network. When the LED on, the machine is connected wirelessly (See "Wireless LED" on page 26). 6 WPS button If your wireless access point supports WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™), you can configure the wireless network connection easily without a computer (See "Setting a wireless network with the WPS button" on page 41).Introduction_ 26 Understanding the control panel Status/ Toner LEDs The color of the LEDs indicates the machine's current status. LED Status Toner LEDs Description Online/E rror ( ) Off All LEDs off The machine is off-line. Solid green All LEDs off The machine is online and can receive data from a computer. Slowly blinking green All LEDs off When the Status LED blinks green slowly, the machine is receiving data from a computer. Quickly blinking green All LEDs off When the Status LED blinks green quickly, the machine is printing data. Solid green Correspondi ng LED blinks red Each toner cartridge is near the end of its life. Correspondi ng LED blinks red successively The machine is warming up. Solid red All LEDs off • The cover is open. Close the cover. • There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray. • The machine has stopped due to a major error. • The machine is experiencing system problems requiring service, such as LSU error, fuser error, or ITB error. Contact the service representative. Correspondi ng LED is solid red • A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life a a.Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19798. The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval, graphics, media type and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED is on and the printer stops printing. . It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). • The machine cannot recognize the status of toner cartriges and the supplies information. Open and close the cover and check if the machie can operate properly. If the problem persists, turn the power off and on. Blinks red Correspondi ng LED is solid red • A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared. When the problem is cleared, the machine resumes. • A small amount of toner is left in the cartridge. The estimated cartridge life a of toner is close. Prepare a new cartridge for replacement. You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner in the cartridge (See "Redistributing toner" on page 75). Jam ( ) Lights orange All LEDs off A paper jam has occurred (See "Clearing paper jams" on page 76). Samsung does not recommend using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as one that is refilled or remanufactured. Samsung cannot guarantee a non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty. All printing errors will be appear in the Smart Panel program window. If the problem persists, call for service (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 69). Wireless LED Wireless LED status Description Blue Off ( ) Wireless network is disconnected. On ( ) Wireless network is connected. Slowly blinks ( ) The machine starts connecting to a wireless network. Quickly blinks ( ) • The machine is connecting to access point (or wireless router). • Wireless network connection is being disconnected. Introducing the useful buttons Print screen button (CLP-320(K)/CLP-321/CLP-325(K)/ CLP-326 only) By pressing the Print screen ( ) button, you can do the following functions. LED Status Toner LEDs DescriptionFunction Description Printing the active window Press this button and the green LED will start blinking. When the green LED stops blinking, release the button. Printing the whole monitor screen Press this button and the green LED will start blinking. Release the button while it’s blinking. Introduction_ 27 •The page will be printed on the default page like A4 or Letter. •You can only use this function with a USB-connected machine. •Print screen can only be used with Windows and Macintosh operating systems. •You can use this function only when the Smart Panel program is installed. Demo print button (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N only) It prints a demo page by pressing this button only. The printed page shows the color print quality potential and overall print characteristics of the machine. Cancel button By pressing the Cancel ( ) button, you can do the following functions. Function Description Printing demo page (CLP-325W(K)/ CLP-326W only) In ready mode, press and hold this button for about 2 seconds until the status LED blinks slowly, and release (See "Printing a demo page" on page 28). Printing configuration sheets In ready mode, press and hold this button for about 5 seconds until the status LED blinks quickly, and release (See "Printing a machine report" on page 72). Canceling print job Press Cancel ( ) button during printing. The red LED blinks while the print job is cleared from both the machine and the computer and then the machine returns to ready mode. This may take some time depending on the size of the print job. WPS button (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only) This feature automatically detects which WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™) mode your access point uses. By pushing a button on the wireless LAN router / access point and the machine, you can setup the wireless network and security settings (See "Setting a wireless network with the WPS button" on page 41). Power button This button must be used to turn the machine on/off. Turning on the machine 1.Plug in the power cord. 2.Press Power ( ) button on the control panel. If you want to turn the power off, press and hold this button for about 3 seconds.Getting started_ 28 2.getting started This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the USB connected machine and software. This chapter includes: • Setting up the hardware • Printing a demo page • Supplied software • System requirements • Installing USB connected machine’s driver • Sharing your machine locally Setting up the hardware This section shows the steps to set up the hardware as is explained in the Quick Installation Guide. Make sure you read the Quick Installation Guide first and follow the steps below. Location 1. Select a stable location. Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow extra space to open cover(s) and tray(s). The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat, cold and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table. Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1,000 m (3,281 ft). Refer to the altitude setting to optimize your printing (See "Altitude adjustment" on page 50). Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline greater than 2 mm (0.08 inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be affected. 2mm (0.08 in) 2mm (0.08 in) 2. Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items. 3. Remove tape holding the machine securely. 4. Load paper (See "Loading paper in the tray" on page 54). 5. Make sure that all cables are connected to the machine. 6. Turn the machine on (See "Turning on the machine" on page 27). This machine will not operate when the power main fails. Printing a demo page Print a demo page to make sure that the machine is operating correctly. To print a demo page In ready mode, press and hold the Cancel ( ) button for 2 seconds, then release. (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only) Also, you can use the Demo page ( ) button for printing a demo page. This button is supported on CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N only. Supplied software After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer, you must install the printer software. If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS user, install the software from the supplied CD. If you are a Linux OS user, download the software from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com/printer) and install. Machine software is occasionally updated for reasons like the release of new operating system and etc. If needed, download the latest version from the Samsung website. (www.samsung.com/printer)OS Contents Windows • Printer driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features. • Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing. • Printer Settings Utility: This program allows you to set up printer’s other options from your computer. • SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP addresses. (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only) Macintosh • Printer Driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features. • Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing. • Printer Settings Utility: This program allows you to set up printer’s other options from your computer. • SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP addresses. (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only) Linux • Unified Linux Driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features. • Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing. • Printer Settings Utility: This program allows you to set up printer’s other options from your computer. • SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP addresses. (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only) Getting started_ 29 System requirements Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following requirements: Microsoft® Windows® Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems. OPERATING SYSTEM Requirement (recommended) CPU RAM free HDD space Windows® 2000 Intel® Pentium® II 400 MHz (Pentium III 933 MHz) 64 MB (128 MB) 600 MB Windows® XP Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (256 MB) 1.5 GB Windows Server® 2003 Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (512 MB) 1.25 GB to 2 GB Windows Server® 2008 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz) 512 MB (2048 MB) 10 GB Windows Vista® Intel® Pentium® IV 3 GHz 512 MB (1024 MB) 15 GB Windows® 7 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher 1 GB (2 GB) 16 GB • Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme). • DVD-R/W Drive Windows Server® 2008 R2 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster) 512 MB (2048 MB) 10 GB •Internet Explorer® 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems. •Administrator rights are required to install the software. •Windows Terminal Services is compatible with this machine. Macintosh OPERATING SYSTEM Requirements (recommended) CPU RAM free HDD space Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.4 • Intel® Processors • PowerPC G4/ G5 • 128 MB for a PowerPC based Mac (512 MB) • 512 MB for a Intel-based Mac (1 GB) 1 GB Mac OS X 10.5 • Intel® Processors • 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4/ G5 512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB Mac OS X 10.6 • Intel® Processors 1 GB (2 GB) 1 GB OPERATING SYSTEM Requirement (recommended) CPU RAM free HDD spaceGetting started_ 30 Linux Item Requirement (recommended) Operating system RedHat® Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit) Fedora Core 2~10 (32/64 bit) SuSE Linux 9.1 (32 bit) OpenSuSE® 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1 (32/64 bit) Mandrake 10.0, 10.1 (32/64 bit) Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 (32/64 bit) Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10 (32/64 bit) SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/64 bit) Debian 3.1, 4.0, 5.0 (32/64 bit) CPU Pentium® IV 2.4 GHz (Intel Core™2) RAM 512 MB (1024 MB) Free HDD space 1 GB (2 GB) Installing USB connected machine’s driver A locally connected machine is a machine directly connected to your computer by a USB cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following steps below and go on to installing network connected machine’s driver (See "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 37). Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 m (10 ft.). Windows You can install the machine software using the typical or custom method. The following steps below are recommended for most users who use a machine directly connected to your computer. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the computer and powered on. If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” window appears during the installation procedure, click Cancel in close the window. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. •The software CD should automatically run and an installation window will appear. •If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD-ROM drive. Click OK. •If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run. Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK. •If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account Control window. 3. Select Install now. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list. • For CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W, you can access Wireless Setting and Installation menu. The Wireless Setting and Installation allows you to install a wireless network to connect to the machine with USB cable (See "Setting a wireless network with USB cable" on page 41). •The Advanced Installation has two options, Custom Installation and Install Software Only. The Custom Installation allows you to select the machine’s connection and choose individual component to install. The Install Software Only allows you to install the supplied software such as Smart Panel. Follow the guide in the window. 4. Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the License Agreement. Then, click Next. The program searches for the machine. If your machine is not found in the network or locally, the following Getting started_ 31 window will appear. •Check if you want to install the software without connection of the printer. -Check this option to install this program without a machine connected. In this case, the print a test page window will be skipped, and completes the installation. •Search again When you press this button, the firewall notice window appears. -Turn off the firewall and Search again. For Window operating system, click Start > Control Panel > Windows Firewall, and inactivate this option. For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide. -Turn off the firewall from the third party's program beside the operating system. Refer to the manual provided by individual programs. •Direct Input The Direct Input allows you to search a specific machine on the network. -Search by IP address: Enter the IP address or the host name. Then click Next. To verify your machine’s IP address, print a network configuration report (See "Printing a machine report" on page 72). -Search by network path: To find a shared machine (UNC Path), enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button. Then click Next. •Help If your machine is not connected to the computer or network, This help button gives you the detailed information about how to connect the machine. 5. The searched machines will be shown on the screen. Select the one you wish to use and click Next. If the driver searched only one machine, the confirmation window appears. 6. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test page. Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 8. 7. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes. If not, click No to reprint it. 8. If you want to register your machine on Samsung website, click On-line Registration. If your machine is not connected yet to the computer, click How to connect?. How to connect? gives detailed information about how to connect the machine. Follow the instructions in the window. 9. Click Finish. If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to repair or reinstall the driver. a)Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and powered on. b)From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Maintenance. c)Select the option you wish to execute, then follow the instruction on the window. Macintosh The software CD that came with your machine provides you with the Driver files that allow you to use the CUPS driver or PostScript driver (only available when you use a machine, which supports the PostScript driver) for printing on a Macintosh computer. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 6. Enter the password and click OK. 7. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue. 8. Read the license agreement and click Continue. 9. Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. 10. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to install. 11.When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, click Continue. 12. Select the installation type you want and click OK. •Typical installation for a local printer: Installs default components for a device that is directly connected to user’s computer. •Typical installation for a network printer: Installs software for a device that is on the network. The SetIP program automatically runs. If the machine has already configured network information, close the SetIP program. Go to the next step. •Wireless Setting and Installation : For CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W, you can access Wireless Setting and Installation menu. The Wireless Setting and Installation allows you to install a wireless network to connect to the machine with USB cable (See "Setting a wireless network with USB cable" on page 41). 13. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation. After the installation is finished, click Quit or Restart. 14. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility. •For Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6, open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 15. Click Add on the Printer List. •For Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6, click the “+” icon; a display window will pop-up. 16. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the USB tab. •For Mac OS X10.4, click Default Browser and find the USB Getting started_ 32 connection. •For Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6, click Default and find the USB connection. 17. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name. •For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model. •For Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print Using. Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default machine. 18. Click Add. If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh. a)Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. b)Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. c)Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. d)Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. e)Double-click the Installer OS X icon. f)Enter the password and click OK. g)The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue. h)Read the license agreement and click Continue. i)Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. j)Select Uninstall and click Uninstall. k)When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, Click Continue. l)When the uninstall is done, click Quit. Linux You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to install the printer software. Follow the steps below to install the software. Installing the Unified Linux Driver 1.Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2.When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the Login field and enter the system password. You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator. 3.From the Samsung website, download the Unified Linux Driver package to your computer. 4.Right-click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract the package. 5.Double click cdroot > autorun. 6.When the welcome screen appears, click Next. 7.When the installation is complete, click Finish. The installation program added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience. If you have any difficulties, consult the on screen help that is available through your system menu or from the driver package Windows applications, such as Unified Driver Configurator. Installing the Smart Panel 1.Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2.When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the Login field and enter the system password. You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator. 3.From the Samsung website, download the Smart Panel package to your computer. 4.Right-click the Smart Panel package and extract the package. 5.Double click cdroot > Linux > smartpanel > install.sh. Installing the Printer Settings Utility 1.Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2.When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the Login field and enter the system password. You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator. 3.From the Samsung website, download the Printer Settings Utility package to your computer. 4.Right-click the Printer Settings Utility package and extract the package. 5.Double click cdroot > Linux > psu > install.sh. If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. Follow the steps below to uninstall the driver for Linux. a)Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. b)When the Administrator Login window appears, type in “root” in the Login field and enter the system password. You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer driver. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator.Getting started_ 33 c)Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal screen appears, type in: [root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/ [root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh d)Click Uninstall. e)Click Next. f)Click Finish. Sharing your machine locally Follow the steps below to set up computers to share your machine locally. If the Host computer is directly connected to the machine with a USB cable and is also connected to the local network environment, the client computer connected to the local network can use the shared machine through the host computer to print. 2 1 1 Host computer A computer which is directly connected to the machine by USB cable. 2 Client computers Computers which use the machine shared through the host computer. Windows Setting up a host computer 1.Install your printer driver (See "Installing USB connected machine’s driver" on page 30, "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 37). 2.Click the Windows Start menu. 3.For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. •For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes. •For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. •For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers. •For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 4.Right-click the printer icon. 5.For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, press Properties. For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printer properties. If Printer properties item has a ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with the selected printer. 6.Select the Sharing tab. 7.Check Change Sharing Options. 8.Check the Share this printer checkbox. 9.Fill in the Share Name field. Click OK. Setting up a client computer 1.Install your printer driver (See "Installing USB connected machine’s driver" on page 30, "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 37). 2.Click the Windows Start menu. 3.Select All programs > Accessories > Windows Explorer. 4.Enter the IP address of the host computer in the address bar and press Enter in your keyboard. In case host computer requires a User name and Password, fill in User ID and password of the host computer account. 5.Right-click the printer icon you want to share and select Connect. 6.If a set up complete message appears, click OK. 7.Open the file you want to print and start printing. Macintosh The following steps are for Mac OS X 10.5~10.6. Refer to Mac Help for other OS versions. Setting up a host computer 1.Install your printer driver (See "Macintosh" on page 31). 2.Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 3.Select the printer to share in the Printers list. 4.Select Share this printer. Setting up a client computer 1.Install your printer driver (See "Macintosh" on page 31). 2.Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 3.Click the “+” icon. A display window showing the name of your shared printer appears. 4.Select your machine and click Add.Network setup (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 34 3.network setup (clp-320n(k)/clp-321n/clp-325w(k)/clp-326w only) This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the network connected machine and software. This chapter includes: • Network environment • Introducing useful network programs • Using a wired network • Installing network connected machine’s driver Network environment You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine. You can set up the basic network settings through the machine's control panel or network setting programs. The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine: Item Requirements Network interface • Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX • 802.11 b/g/n wireless LAN (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only) Network operating system • Windows 2000/Server 2003 /Server 2008/XP/Vista/7/Server 2008 R2 • Various Linux OS • Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.6 Network protocols • TCP/IPv4 • DHCP, BOOTP • DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP • Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP • SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec • TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec) See "IPv6 configuration" on page 36. Wireless security • Authentication: Open System, Shared Key, WPA Personal, WPA2 Personal (PSK) • Encryption: WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES Introducing useful network programs There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in network environment. For the network administrator especially, managing several machines on the network is possible. Before using the programs below, set the IP address first. SyncThru™ Web Service Web server embedded on your network machine, which allows you to: • Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments. • Customize machine settings. See "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 68. SyncThru™ Web Admin Service A web-based machine management solution for network administrators. SyncThru™ Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate internet access. Download this program from http://solution.samsungprinter.com. SetIP This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol. • See "IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Windows)" on page 35. • See "IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh)" on page 35. • See "IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Linux)" on page 36. TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program. Using a wired network You must set up the network protocols on your machine to use it on your network. This chapter will show you how this is easily accomplished. You can use network after connecting network cable to a corresponding port on your machine.Network setup (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 35 Printing network configuration report You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine's control panel that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help you to set up a network and troubleshoot problems. To print the report: In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s MAC address and IP address. For example: • MAC Address: 00:15:99:41:A2:78 • IP Address: 192.0.0.192 Setting IP address Firstly, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements. In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located on the network. In a few situations the IP address must be set manually. This is called a static IP and is often required in corporate Intranets for security reasons. • DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained above. If the report shows that the IP address has changed, the assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in the report. • Static IP assignment: Use SetIP program to change the IP address from your computer. In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network administrator to set this address for you. IPv4 configuration IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Windows) This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. A MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report. For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following: 1.Open Start > Control Panel. 2.Double click Security Center. 3.Click Firewall. 4.Disable the firewall. Installing the program 1.Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM provided with your machine. When the driver CD runs automatically, close that window. 2.Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents your CD-ROM drive.) 3.Double-click Application > SetIP. 4.Double-click Setup.exe to install this program. 5.Select a language, then click Next. 6.Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation. Starting the program 1.Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2.Turned on the machine. 3.From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung Printers > SetIP > SetIP. 4.Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP configuration window. 5.Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding. •MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8. •IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer. For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150, enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer’s address.) •Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask. •Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway. 6.Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are correct. 7.Click Exit to close the SetIP program. 8.If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh) For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following: The path and UIs may differ by Mac OS version. Refer to the Mac OS manual. 1.Open System Preferences. 2.Click Security. 3.Click the Firewall menu. 4.Turn firewall off. The following instructions may vary for your model. 1.Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2.Insert the Installation CD-ROM, and open the disk window, select MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPApplet.html. 3.Double click the file and Safari will automatically open, then select Trust. The browser will open the SetIPApplet.html page that shows the printer’s name and IP address information. 4.Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP configuration window. 5.Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding. •MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For Network setup (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 36 example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8. •IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer. For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150, enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer’s address.) •Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask. •Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway. 6.Select Apply, then OK, and OK again. The printer will automatically print the configuration report. Confirm that all the settings are correct. Quit Safari. You may close and eject the installation CD-ROM. If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. You have successfully changed the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway. IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Linux) SetIP program should be automatically installed during the printer driver installation. The path and UIs may differ by Linux OS version. Refer to the Linux OS manual to turn firewall off. 1.Print the machine’s network configuration report to find your machine’s MAC address. 2.Open the /opt/Samsung/mfp/share/utils/. 3.Double click the SetIPApplet.html file. 4.Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window. 5.Enter the network card’s MAC address, IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and then click Apply. When you enter the MAC address, enter it without a colon(:). 6.The machine prints the network configuration report. Confirm all the settings are correct. 7.Close the SetIP program. IPv6 configuration TCP/IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher. If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network setting to the factory defaults and try again (See "Restoring factory default settings using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 36). To use the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the IPv6 address. The machine is provided with IPv6 feature on. 1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2. Turn on the machine. 3. Print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control panel that will check IPv6 addresses. 4. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers > Add Printer. 5. Click Add a local printer on the Add Printer windows. 6. Follow the instruction on the window. If the machine does not work in the network environment, activate IPv6. Refer to the next section followed by. Printing network configuration report You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine's control panel that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help you to set up a network and troubleshooting problems. To print the report: In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s MAC address and IP address. For example: •MAC Address: 00:15:99:41:A2:78 •IP Address: 192.0.0.192 Setting IPv6 addresses Machine supports following IPv6 addresses for network printing and managements. •Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address. (Address starts with FE80.) •Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network router. •Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server. •Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user. Manual address configuration 1.Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL (See "SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 34). For IPv4, enter the IPv4 address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2.When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network Settings. 3.Click TCP/IPv6. 4.Enable the Manual Address In the TCP/IPv6 section. 5.Select the Address/Prefix and click the Add button, then the router prefix will automatically be entered into the address field. Enter the rest of address. (ex: 3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA. “A” is the hexadecimal 0 through 9, A through F.) 6.Click the Apply button. Installing printer driver Driver installation for network printer in IPv6 network environment is same as TCP/IPv4 (See "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 37). Select TCP/IP Port and when the list of machines are displayed, simply select your machine's IPv6 address. Using SyncThru™ Web Service 1.Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL. 2.Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Link-local Address, Stateless Address, Stateful Address, Manual Address) from Network Configuration Report. 3.Enter the IPv6 addresses. (ex: http://[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701]) Address must be enclosed in '[]' brackets. Restoring factory default settings using SyncThru™ Web Service 1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari or Firefox and enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser window. For example, 2. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service. 3. Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.Network setup (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 37 A log-in page appears. 4. Type in the ID and Password then click Login. If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the below default ID and password. •ID: admin •Password: sec00000 5. When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Settings > Network Settings > Restore Default. 6. Click Clear for network. 7. Turn off and restart machine to apply settings. Installing network connected machine’s driver You must install the printer driver software for printing. The software includes drivers, applications, and other user friendly programs. Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed. All applications should be closed on your computer before beginning installation. Windows This is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. Follow the steps below: 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered on. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. •The software CD should automatically run and an installation window appear. •If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD-ROM drive. Click OK. •If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run. Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK. •If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account Control window. 3. Select Install now. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list. • For CLP-325W(K)/, you can access Wireless Setting and Installation menu. The Wireless Setting and Installation allows you to install a wireless network to connect to the machine with USB cable (See "Setting a wireless network with USB cable" on page 41). •The Advanced Installation has two options, Custom Installation and Install Software Only. The Custom Installation allows you to select the machine’s connection and choose individual component to install. The Install Software Only allows you to install the supplied software such as Smart Panel. Follow the guide in the window. 4. Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the License Agreement. Then, click Next. The program searches the machine. If your machine is not found in the network or locally, the following window will appear. •Check if you want to install the software without connection of the printer. -Check this option to install this program without a machine connected. In this case, the print a test page window will be skipped, and completes the installation. •Search again When you press this button, the firewall notice window appears;Network setup (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 38 -Turn off the firewall and Search again. For Window operating system, click Start > Control Panel > Windows Firewall, and inactivate this option. For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide. -Turn off the firewall from the third party's program beside the operating system. Refer to the manual provided by individual programs. •Direct Input The Direct Input allows you to search a specific machine on the network. -Search by IP address: Enter the IP address or the host name. Then click Next. To verify your machine’s IP address, print a network configuration report (See "Printing a machine report" on page 72). -Search by network path: To find a shared machine (UNC Path), enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button. Then click Next. •Help If your machine is not connected to the computer or network, This help button gives you the detailed information about how to connect the machine. 5. The searched machines will be shown on the screen. Select the one you wish to use and click Next. If the driver searched only one machine, the confirmation window appears. 6. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test page. Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 8. 7. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes. If not, click No to reprint it. 8. If you want to register your machine on Samsung website, click On-line Registration. If your machine is not connected yet to the computer, click How to connect?. How to connect? gives detailed information about how to connect the machine. Follow the instructions in the window. 9. Click Finish. •After the driver setup, you may enable firewall. •If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to repair or reinstall the driver. a)Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and powered on. b)From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Maintenance. c)Select the option as you wish, follow the instruction on the window. Macintosh 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 6. Enter the password and click OK. 7. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue. 8. Read the license agreement and click Continue. 9. Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. 10. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. •If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to install. 11. The message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears. Click Continue. 12. Select the installation type you want and click OK. •Typical installation for a local printer: Installs default components for a device that is directly connected to user’s computer. •Typical installation for a network printer: Installs software for a device that is on the network. The SetIP program automatically runs. If the machine has already configured network information, close the SetIP program. Go to the next step. •Wireless Setting and Installation : For CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W, you can access Wireless Setting and Installation menu. The Wireless Setting and Installation allows you to install a wireless network to connect to the machine with USB cable (See "Setting a wireless network with USB cable" on page 41). 13. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation. After the installation is finished, click Quit or Restart. 14. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility. •For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 15. Click Add on the Printer List. •For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click the “+” icon; a display window will pop-up. 16. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the IP Printing tab. •For Mac OS X 10.4, click IP Printer. •For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click IP. 17. Select Socket/HP Jet Direct in Printer Type. When printing a document containing many pages, printing performance may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer Type option. 18. Enter the machine’s IP address in the Printer Address field. 19. Enter the queue name in the Queue Name field. If you cannot determine the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue first. 20. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name. •For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model. •For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print Using. Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default machine. 21. Click Add. If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh. a)Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. b)Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.Network setup (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 39 c)Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. d)Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. e)Double-click the Installer OS X icon. f)Enter the password and click OK. g)The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue. h)Read the license agreement and click Continue. i)Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. j)Select Uninstall and click Uninstall. k)When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, Click Continue. l)When the uninstall is done, click Quit. Linux You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to install the printer software. To install other software: •See "Installing the Smart Panel" on page 32. •See "Installing the Printer Settings Utility" on page 32. Installing the Unified Linux Driver 1.Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set. 2.From the Samsung website, download the Unified Linux Driver package to your computer. 3.Right-click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract the package. 4.Double click cdroot > autorun. 5.The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue. 6.The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next. 7.Select Network printer and click Search button. 8.The Printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field. 9.Select your machine and click Next. 10.Input the printer description and Next 11.When the add printer is done, click Finish. 12.When the install is done, click Finish. Add network Printer 1.Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator. 2.Click Add Printer… 3.The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next. 4.Select Network printer and click the Search button. 5.The printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field. 6.Select your machine and click Next. 7.Input the printer description and Next 8.When the add printer is done, click Finish.Wireless network setup (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 40 4.wireless network setup (clp-325w(k)/clp-326w only) This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the wireless network connected machine and software. This chapter includes: • Getting started • Choosing the wireless network installation type • Setting a wireless network with the WPS button • Setting a wireless network from the computer • Setting a wireless network from the computer • Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off • Troubleshooting For more information about the network environment, network programs, and installing a network connected machine’s driver, refer to the following chapters: •See "Network environment" on page 34. •See "Introducing useful network programs" on page 34. •See "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 37. Getting started Choosing your network connection Typically, you can only have one connection between your computer and the machine at a time. There are two types of network connections to consider: • Wireless network without access Point (Ad-Hoc mode) • Wireless network with an access Point (Infrastructure mode) Infrastructure mode This is an environment generally used for homes and SOHOs (Small Office/ Home Office). This mode uses an access point to communicate with the wireless machine. • See "Installing the machine on a wireless network with an access point (Windows)" on page 42. • See "Installing the machine on a wireless network with an access point (Macintosh)" on page 44. Ad-Hoc mode This mode does not use an access point. The wireless computer and wireless machine communicates directly. • See "Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc wireless network (Windows)" on page 43. • See "Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc wireless network (Macintosh)" on page 45. After choosing your configuration, follow the simple directions for your computer’s operating system, but first locate the software CD supplied with the machine before proceeding. Wireless network name and network key Wireless networks require higher security, so when an access point is first set up, a network name (SSID), the type of security used, and a Network Key are created for the network. Locate this information before proceeding with the machine installation. Choosing the wireless network installation type There are various ways to install the wireless network to connect to the machine. You can install a wireless network from the machine’s control panel or the computer. For most users, we recommend using the WPS ( ) button to configure the wireless network settings. From the control panel • WPS ( ) : If your machine and an access point (or wireless router) support Wi-Fi Protected Setup™(WPS), you can easily configure the wireless network settings by pressing the WPS ( ) button on the control panel. (See "Setting a wireless network with the WPS button" on page 41). From the computer From the compurter, we recommend using a USB cable with the program provided in the supplied software CD. • With a USB cable: You can simply set up a wireless network using the program on the supplied software CD. Only Windows and Macintosh operating system are supported (See "Setting a wireless network with USB cable" on page 41). You can also install a wireless network in Printer Settings Utility with a USB cable after installing the driver (Windows and Macintosh operating systems are supported). • With a network cable: You can set up a wireless network using the SyncThru™ Web Service program (See "Setting a wireless network with network cable" on page 46). Setting a wireless network with the WPS button You can install a wireless network with the WPS ( ) button. After compleleting the wireless network connection, you need to install a machine driver to print from an application (See "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 37).Wireless network setup (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 41 Setting a wireless network with the WPS button If your machine and an access point (or wireless router) support Wi-Fi Protected Setup™(WPS), you can easily configure the wireless network settings by pressing the WPS ( ) button on the control panel. If you want to use the wireless network using the infrastructure mode, make sure that the network cable is disconnected from the machine. Using the WPS (PBC) button or entering the PIN number from the computer to connect to the Access Point varies depending on the access point (or wireless router) you are using. Refer to the user's guide of the access point (or wireless router) you are using. Items to prepare You need to ensure you have the following items ready to use: •Check if the access point (or wireless router) supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS). •Check if your machine supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS). •Networked computer (PIN mode only) Choosing your network connection There are two methods to connect your machine to a wireless network using the WPS ( ) button on the control panel. The Push Button Configuration (PBC) method allows you to connect your machine to a wireless network by pressing both the WPS ( ) button on the control panel of your machine and the WPS (PBC) button on a Wi-Fi Protected Setup™(WPS)-enabled access point (or wireless router) respectively. The Personal Identification Number (PIN) method helps you connect your machine to a wireless network by entering the supplied PIN information on a Wi-Fi Protected Setup™(WPS)-enabled access point (or wireless router). Factory default in your machine is PBC mode, which is recommended for a typical wireless network environment. Connecting to a wireless network in PBC mode To connect your machine to the wireless network in PBC mode, follow the following steps: You need to check the status of the wireless LED. 1.Press and hold the WPS ( ) button on the control panel for about 2 - 4 seconds until the status LED blinks quickly. • : The light blinks slowly on wireless LED. The machine starts connecting to the wireless network. The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you press the PBC button on access point (or wireless router). 2. : Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router). The wireless LED blinks in the order below: a) : The light blinks fast on the wireless LED. The machine is connecting to the access point (or wireless router). b) : When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network, the wireless LED light stays on. Connecting to the wireless network in PIN mode To connect your machine to the wireless network, follow the following steps: You need to check the status of the wireless LED. 1.The network configuration report including PIN number must be printed. In ready mode, press and hold the Cancel ( ) button on the control panel for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s PIN number. 2.Press and hold the WPS ( ) button on the control panel for more than 4 seconds until the status LED on. • : The light blinks slowly on the wireless LED. The machine starts connecting to access point (or wireless router). 3.You need to enter eight-digit PIN number within two minutes to the computer which is connected to the access point (or wireless router). The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you enter the eight-digit PIN number The wireless LED blinks in the order below: a) : The light blinks fast on the wireless LED. The machine is connecting to the access point (or wireless router). b) : When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network, the wireless LED light stays on. Re-connecting to the wireless network When the wireless function is off, the machine automatically tries to re-connect to the access point (or wireless router) with the previously used wireless connection settings and address. In the following cases, the machine automatically re-connects to the wireless network: •The machine is turned off and on again. •The access point (or wireless router) is turned off and on again. Canceling a wireless network connection process To cancel the wireless network connection function when the machine is connecting to the wireless network, press and release the Cancel ( ) button on the control panel. You need to wait 2 minuites to re-connect the wireless network. Disconnecting a wireless network connection To disconnect the wireless network connection, press the WPS ( ) button on the control panel for more than two seconds. •When the Wi-Fi Network is in idle mode: The machine is immediately disconnected from the wireless network, and the wireless LED is off. •When the Wi-Fi Network is being used: While the machine waits until the current job is finished, the light blinks fast on the wireless LED. Then, the wireless network connection is automatically disconnected. The wireless LED is off. When the Wi-Fi Network is disconnected, press the WPS ( ) button on the control panel. The Wi-Fi network is on and the setting a wireless network begins. Setting a wireless network from the computer You can install a wireless network a USB cable or a network cable from the computer. Setting a wireless network with USB cable See your network administrator, or the person that set up your wireless network, for information about your network configuration.Wireless network setup (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 42 Installing the machine on a wireless network with an access point (Windows) Items to prepare Ensure you have the following items ready. • Access point • Network-connected computer • Software CD that was provided with your machine • The machine installed with a wireless network interface • USB cable Creating the infrastructure network in Windows When the items are ready, follow the steps below: 1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine. 2.Turn on your computer, access point, and machine. 3.Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. •The software CD should automatically run and an installation window appear. •If the installation window does not appear, click on Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive. Click on OK. •If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7, or Windows Server 2008 R2 click on Start > All programs > Accessories > Run. Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter that represents your drive and click on OK. •If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7, or Windows Server 2008 R2, click on Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click on Continue or Yes in the User Account Control window. 4.Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option. •Install Now: If you have already set up the wireless network, click on this button to install the machine driver to use the wireless network machine. If you have not set up the wireless network, click on the Wireless Setting and Installation button to set up the wireless network before you click on this button. •Wireless Setting and Installation: Configure the wireless network settings of your machine with a USB cable then install the machine driver. Only for the users who have not set up the wireless connection before. 5.Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the License Agreement. Then, click on Next. 6.The software searches the wireless network. If the search has failed, you may check if the USB cable is properly connected between the computer and machine, and follow the instructions on the window. 7.After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select the name (SSID) of the access point you are using and click on Next. If you cannot find out the network name you want to choose, or if you want to set the wireless configuration manually, click on Advanced Setting. •Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of access point you want (SSID is case-sensitive). •Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure. •Authentication: Select an authentication type. Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be used, depending on the need for data security. Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network. WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the print server based on WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key (generally called Pre- Shared Key pass phrase) which is manually configured on the access point and each of its clients. •Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES, TKIP AES). •Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value. •Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key value. •WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key Index. The wireless network security window appears when the access point has security setting. The wireless network security window appears. The window may differ according to its security mode, WEP, or WPA. •In case of WEP Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and enter WEP security key. Click on Next. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key. •In case of WPA Enter the WPA shared key and click on Next. WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key that changes automatically at regular intervals. WPA also uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) and AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) for data encryption. 8.The window shows the wireless network settings and check if the settings are right. Click on Next. •For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in the window. However, if it shows Static, click on Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to DHCP. •For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in the window. However, if it shows DHCP, click on Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine. Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the computer’s network configuration information. If the computer is set to DHCP, you Wireless network setup (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 43 must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address. For example: If computer’s network information is as shown below: -IP address: 169.254.133.42 -Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 Then, the machine’s network information should be as below: -IP address: 169.254.133. 43 -Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.) -Gateway: 169.254.133.1 9.When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine. Click on Next. 10.The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. Select Yes if you accept the current settings and continue the setup procedure. Select No if you want to return to the beginning screen. Then, click on Next. 11.Click on Next when the Confirm Printer Connection window appears. 12.Select the components to be installed. Click on Next. After selecting the components, you can also change the machine name, set the machine to be shared on the network, set the machine as the default machine, and change the port name of each machine. Click on Next. 13.After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you want to print a test page, click on Print a test page. Otherwise, just click on Next and go to step 15. 14.If the test page prints out correctly, click on Yes. If not, click on No to reprint it. 15.To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information from Samsung, click on On-line Registration. 16.Click on Finish. Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc wireless network (Windows) If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine wirelessly to your computer by setting up an Ad-Hoc wireless network by following the simple steps below. Items to prepare Ensure you have the following items ready: • Network-connected computer • Software CD that was provided with your machine • The machine installed with a wireless network interface • USB cable Creating the Ad-Hoc network in Windows When the items are ready, follow the steps below: 1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine. 2.Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine. 3.Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. •The software CD should automatically run and an installation window appear. •If the installation window does not appear, click on Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive. Click on OK. •If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7, or Windows Server 2008 R2 click on Start > All programs > Accessories > Run. Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter that represents your drive and click on OK. •If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7, or Windows Server 2008 R2, click on Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click on Continue or Yes in the User Account Control window. 4.Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option. •Install Now: If you have set the wireless network, click on this button to install the machine driver to use the wireless network machine. If you have not set the wireless network, click on Wireless Setting and Installation button to set the wireless network before you click on this button. •Wireless Setting and Installation: Configure the wireless network settings of your machine with a USB cable then install the machine driver. Only for users who have not set up the wireless connection before. 5.Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the License Agreement. Then, click on Next. 6.The software searches the wireless network. If the software has failed to search the network, check if the USB cable is connected properly between the computer and machine, and follow the instruction on the window. 7.After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your machine has searched appears. If you want to use the Samsung default ad-hoc setting, select the last wireless network on the list, Network Name(SSID) is portthru and Signal is Printer Self Network. Then, click on Next. If you want to use other ad-hoc settings, select another wireless network from the list. If you want to change ad-hoc settings click on the Advanced Setting button. •Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name you want (SSID is case-sensitive). •Operation Mode: Select Ad-hoc. •Channel: Select the channel. (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz). •Authentication: Select an authentication type. Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be used, depending on the need for data security. Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a Wireless network setup (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 44 proper WEP key can access the network. •Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128). •Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value. •Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key value. •WEP Key Index: If you are using the WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key Index. The wireless network security window appears when the ad-hoc network has security setting. The wireless network security window appears. Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click on Next. •WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key. 8.The window showing the wireless network setting appears. Check the settings and click on Next. Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the wireless network setting should also be Static. If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use the Static wireless network setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address. •For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. However, if it shows Static, click on Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP address automatically (DHCP). •For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. However, if it shows DHCP, click on Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine. For example: If computer’s network information is as shown below: -IP address: 169.254.133.42 -Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 Then, the machine’s network information should be as below: -IP address: 169.254.133. 43 -Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.) -Gateway: 169.254.133.1 9.When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine. Click on Next. If the Change PC Network Setting window appears, follow the steps on the window. Click on Next if you are finished the computer’s wireless network settings. If you set the computer’s wireless network on DHCP, it will take several minutes to receive the IP address. 10.The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. Select Yes if you accept the current settings and continue the setup procedure. Select No if you want to return to the beginning screen. Then, click on Next. 11.Click on Next when the Confirm Printer Connection window appears. 12.Select the components to be installed. Click on Next. After selecting the components, you can also change the machine name, set the machine to be shared on the network, set the machine as the default machine, and change the port name of each machine. Click on Next. 13.After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you want to print a test page, click on Print a test page. Otherwise, just click on Next and go to step 15. 14.If the test page prints out correctly, click on Yes. If not, click on No to reprint it. 15.To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information from Samsung, click on On-line Registration. 16.Click on Finish. Installing the machine on a wireless network with an access point (Macintosh) Items to prepare Ensure you have the following items ready: • Access point • Network-connected computer • Software CD that was provided with your machine • The machine installed with a wireless network interface • USB cable Creating the infrastructure network in Macintosh When the items are ready, follow the steps below: 1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine. 2.Turn on your computer, access point, and machine. 3.Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 4.Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 5.Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 6.Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 7.Enter the password and click on OK. 8.The Samsung Installer window opens. Click on Continue. 9.Read the license agreement and click on Continue. 10.Click on Agree to agree to the license agreement. 11.The Samsung Installer window opens. Click on Continue. 12.Select Easy Install and click on Install. Easy Install is recommended for most users. All compoenets necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual operations will be installed. 13.Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option. 14.The software searches the wireless network. If the search has failed, you may check if the USB cable is connected between the computer and machine properly, and Wireless network setup (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 45 follow the instructions in the window. 15.After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select the name (SSID) of the access point you are using and click on Next. When you set the wireless configuration manually, click on Advanced Setting. •Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of access point you want (SSID is case-sensitive). •Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure. •Authentication: Select an authentication type. Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be used, depending on the need for data security. Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network. WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the print server based on WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key (generally called Pre- Shared Key pass phrase) that is manually configured on the access point and each of its clients. •Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES, TKIP AES) •Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value. •Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key value. •WEP Key Index: If you are using the WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key Index. The wireless network security window appears when the access point has security setting. The wireless network security window appears. The window may differ according to its security mode: WEP or WPA. •In case of WEP Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and enter WEP security key. Click on Next. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key. •In case of WPA Enter the WPA shared key and click on Next. WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key that changes automatically at regular intervals. WPA also uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) and AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) for data encryption. 16.The window shows the wireless network setting and check if settings are right. Click on Next. •For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in the window. However, if it shows Static, click on Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to DHCP. •For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in the window. However, if it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine. Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the computer’s network configuration information. If the computer is set to DHCP, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address. For example: If computer’s network information is as shown below: -IP address: 169.254.133.42 -Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 Then, the machine’s network information should be as below: -IP address: 169.254.133. 43 -Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.) -Gateway: 169.254.133.1 17.The wireless network connects according to the network configuration. 18.When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine. 19.Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation. After the installation is finished, click on Quit or Restart. Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc wireless network (Macintosh) If you do not have a access point (AP), you may still connect the machine wirelessly to your computer by setting up an Ad-Hoc wireless network by following these simple directions. Items to prepare Ensure you have following items ready: • Network-connected computer • Software CD that provided with your machine • The machine installed with a wireless network interface • USB cable Creating the Ad-Hoc network in Macintosh When the items are ready, follow these steps: 1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine. 2.Turn on your computer and machine. 3.Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 4.Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 5.Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 6.Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 7.Enter the password and click on OK. 8.The Samsung Installer window opens. Click on Continue. 9.Read the license agreement and click on Continue. 10.Click on Agree to agree to the license agreement. 11.Select Easy Install and click on Install. Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual operations will be installed. 12.Click on Wireless Setting and Installation. 13.The software searches the wireless network devices. If the search has failed, you may check if the USB cable is connected between the computer and machine properly, and follow the instruction on the window. 14.After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your machine has searched appears. If you want to use the Samsung default ad-hoc setting, select the last wireless network on the list, which Network Name(SSID) is portthruWireless network setup (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 46 and Signal is Printer Self Network. Then, click on Next. If you want to use other ad-hoc settings, select another wireless network from the list. If you want to change ad-hoc settings click the Advanced Setting button. •Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name you want (SSID is case-sensitive). •Operation Mode: Select Ad-hoc. •Channel: Select the channel (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz). •Authentication: Select an authentication type. Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be used, depending on the need for data security. Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network. •Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128). •Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value. •Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key value. •WEP Key Index: If you are using the WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key Index. The wireless network security window appears when the ad-hoc network has security setting. The wireless network security window appears. Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click on Next. •WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key. 15.The window showing the wireless network setting appears. Check the settings and click on Next. Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the wireless network setting should also be Static. If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static wireless network setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address. •For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. However, if it shows Static, click on Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP address automatically (DHCP). •For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. However, if it shows DHCP, click on Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine. For example: If computer’s network information is as shown below: -IP address: 169.254.133.42 -Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 Then, the machine’s network information should be as below: -IP address: 169.254.133. 43 -Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.) -Gateway: 169.254.133.1 16.The wireless network connects according to the network configuration. 17.When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine. 18.Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation. After the installation is finished, click on Quit or Restart. Setting a wireless network with network cable Your machine is a network compatible machine. To enable your machine to work with your network you will need to perform some configuration procedures. •After compleleting the wireless network connection, you need to install a machine driver to print from an application (See "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 37). •See your network administrator, or the person that set up your wireless network, for information about your network configuration. Preparing items Ensure you have following items ready: • Access point • Network-connected computer • Software CD that was provided with your machine • The machine installed with a wireless network interface • Network cable Setting IP address Firstly, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements. In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located on the network. In a few situations the IP address must be set manually. This is called a static IP and is often required in corporate intranets for security reasons. •DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained above. If the report shows that the IP address has changed, the assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in the report. •Static IP assignment: Use SetIP program to change the IP address from your computer. In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network administrator to set this address for you. Printing a network configuration report You can identify the network settings of your machine by printing a network configuration report. To print the report: In ready mode, press and hold the Cancel ( ) button for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s MAC address and IP address.Wireless network setup (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 47 For example: •MAC Address: 00:15:99:41:A2:78 •IP Address: 192.0.0.192 IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows) This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. A MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report. For using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following: 1.Open Start > All programs > Control Panel. 2.Double click on Security Center. 3.Click on Windows Firewall. 4.Disable the firewall. Installing the program 1.Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM provided with your machine. When the driver CD runs automatically, close that window. 2.Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents your CD-ROM drive.) 3.Double-click Application > SetIP. 4.Double-click Setup.exe to install this program. 5.Select a language, then click on Next. 6.Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation. Starting the program 1.Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2.Turn on the machine. 3.From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung Printers > SetIP > SetIP. 4.Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP configuration window. 5.Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding. •MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8. •IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer. For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150, enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer’s address.) •Subnet Mask: Enter the subnet mask. •Default Gateway: Enter the default gateway. 6.Click on Apply, and then click on OK. The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are correct. 7.Click on Exit to close the SetIP program. 8.If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. IP setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh) For using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following: The path and UIs may differ by Mac OS version. Refer to the Mac OS manual. 1.Open System Preferences. 2.Click on Security. 3.Click on the Firewall menu. 4.Turn the firewall off. The following instructions may vary for your model. 1.Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2.Insert the Installation CD-ROM, and open the disk window, select MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPApplet.html. 3.Double click the file and Safari will automatically open, then select Trust. The browser will open the SetIPApplet.html page that shows the printer’s name and IP address information. 4.Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP configuration window. 5.Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding. •MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8. •IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer. For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150, enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer’s address.) •Subnet Mask: Enter the subnet mask. •Default Gateway: Enter the default gateway. 6.Select Apply, then OK, and OK again. The printer will automatically print the configuration report. Confirm that all the settings are correct. Quit Safari. You may close and eject the installation CD-ROM. If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. You have successfully changed the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway. Configuring the machine’s wireless network Before starting you will need to know the network name(SSID) of your wireless network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your wireless environment, please ask the person who has set up your network. To configure wireless parameters, you can use SyncThru™ Web Service. Using SyncThru™ Web Service Before starting wireless parameter configuration, check the cable connection status. Wireless network setup (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 48 1.Check whether or not the network cable is connected to the machine. If not, connect the machine with a standard network cable. 2.Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari or Firefox and enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser window. For example, 3.Click on Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website. A log-in page appears. 4.Type in the ID and Password then click on Login. If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the below default ID and password. •ID: admin •Password: sec00000 5.When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click on Network Settings. 6.Click on Wireless > Wizard. Wizard will help you setup the wireless network configuration. However, if you want to set the wireless network directly, select Custom. 7.Select the one Network Name(SSID) in the list. •SSID: SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a wireless network, access points, and wireless devices attempting to connect to a specific wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is case-sensitive. •Operation Mode: Operation Mode refers to the type of wireless connections (See "Wireless network name and network key" on page 40). -Ad-hoc: Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with each other in a peer-to-peer environment. -Infrastructure: Allows wireless devices to communicate with each other through an access point. If your network’s Operation Mode is Infrastructure, select the SSID of the access point. If the Operation Mode is Ad-hoc, select the machine’s SSID. Note that “portthru” is the default SSID of your machine. 8.Click on Next. If the wireless security setting window appears, enter the registered password (network key) and click on Next. 9.The confirmation window appears, please check your wireless setup. If the setup is right, click on Apply. Disconnect the network cable (standard or network). Your machine should then start communicating wirelessly with the network. In case of Ad-hoc mode, you can use a wireless LAN and wired LAN simultaneously. Completing the installation After you have installed your Samsung wireless network printer, print another copy of the Network Configuration Report and keep it for future reference. You are now ready to use your new Samsung wireless printer on your network. If the wireless network seems to not be working, set all the network setting to the factory defaults and try again (See "Restoring factory default settings using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 36). Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off You can turn the Wi-Fi network on/off with SyncThru™ Web Service. The factory default is on. To turn default mode, follow the following steps: 1. Check whether the network cable is connected to the machine. If not, connect the machine with a standard network cable. 2. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari or Firefox and enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser window. For example, 3. Click on Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website. A log-in page appears. 4. Type in the ID and Password then click on Login. If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the below default ID and password. •ID: admin •Password: sec00000 5. When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click on Network Settings. 6. Click on Wireless > Custom. You can also turn the Wi-Fi network on/off. Troubleshooting Solving problems that might occur during setting up the wireless setting and installing the machine driver Printers Not Found •Your machine may not be turned on. Turn on your computer and the machine. •USB cable is not connected between your computer and machine. Connect machine to your computer using the USB cable. •The machine does not support a wireless network. Check the machine's user's guide included on the software CD supplied with your machine and prepare a wireless network machine. Connecting Failure - Not Found SSID •The machine is unable to search the network name (SSID) you have selected or entered. Check the network name (SSID) on your access point and try connecting again. •Your access point is not turned on. Turn on your access point. Connecting Failure - Invalid Security •You configured security incorrectly. Check the configured security on your access point and machine. Connecting Failure - General Connection Error •Your computer is not receiving a signal from your machine. Check the USB cable and your machine’s power. Connecting Failure - Connected Wired Network •Your machine is connected with a wired network cable. Remove the wired network cable from your machine.Wireless network setup (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 49 PC Connection Error •The configured network address is unable to connect between your computer and machine. -For a DHCP network environment The print receives the IP address automatically (DHCP) when computer is configured to DHCP. -For a Static network environment The machine uses the static address when the computer is configured to static address. For example: If computer’s network information is as shown below: -IP address: 169.254.133.42 -Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 Then, the machine’s network information should be as below: -IP address: 169.254.133. 43 -Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.) -Gateway: 169.254.133.1 Solving other problems If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the following: For information on the access point (or wireless router), refer to its own user's guide. • Your computer, access point (or wireless router), or machine may not be turned on. • Check the wireless reception around the machine. If the reception is far from the machine or there is an obstacle, you might have difficulty receiving the signal. • Cycle the power for the access point (or wireless router), machine, and computer. Sometimes cycling the power can recover network communication. • Check whether firewall software (V3 or Norton) is blocking the communication. If the computer and the machine is connected on the same network and it cannot be searched, firewall software might be blocking the communication. Refer to the user's guide for the software to turn it off and try searching for the machine again. • Check whether the machine's IP address is allocated correctly. You can check the IP address by printing the network configuration report. • Check whether the access point (or wireless router) has a configured security (password). If it has a password, refer to the access point (or wireless router) administrator. • Check whether the machine's IP address. Reinstall the machine driver and change the settings to connect to the machine on the network. Due to the characteristics of DHCP, the allocated IP address could change if the machine is not used for a long time or if the access point has been reset. • Check the wireless environment. You might not be able to connect to the network in the infrastructure environment where you need to type in a user's information before connecting to access point (or wireless router). • This machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g/n and Wi-Fi. Other wireless communication (Bluetooth) is not supported. • When using the Ad-hoc mode, for operating systems such as Windows Vista, you might need to set the wireless connection setting every time you use the wireless machine. • You cannot use infrastructure mode and Ad-hoc mode at the same time for Samsung wireless network machines. • The machine is within the range of the wireless network. • The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the wireless signal. Remove any large metal objects between the access point (or wireless router) and the machine. Make sure the machine and wireless access point (or wireless router) are not separated by poles, walls, or support columns containing metal or concrete. • The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may interfere with the wireless signal. Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal, including a microwave oven and some Bluetooth devices.Basic setup_ 50 5.basic setup After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine’s default settings. Refer to the next section if you would like to set or change values. This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the machine. This chapter includes: • Altitude adjustment • Setting the default tray and paper • Using the power saving feature • Changing font setting (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/ /CLP-326W only) Altitude adjustment The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information will guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality of print. Before you set the altitude value, determine the altitude where you are. 0 4,000 m (13,123 ft) 3,000 m (9,842 ft) 2,000 m (6,561 ft) 1,000 m (3,280 ft) 4 3 2 1 1 High 1 2 High 2 3 High 3 4 Normal You can altitude adjustment in Printer Settings Utility. 1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 69). Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Smart Panel. 2. Click Printer Setting. 3. Select necessary options in the Altitude Adjustment drop-down list. 4. Click the Apply button. If your machine is connected to a network, SyncThru™ Web Service screen appears automatically. This can also be adjusted via SyncThru™ Web Service. Setting the default tray and paper You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing job. From your computer Windows 1.Click the Windows Start menu. 2.For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. •For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes. •For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. •For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers. •For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3.Right-click on your machine. 4.For Windows Server 2003/Server 2008/XP/Vista, press Printing Preferences. For Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printing Preferences. If Printing Preferences item has a ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with the selected printer. 5.Click Paper tab. 6.Select options such as number of copies, paper size or paper type. 7.Press OK. If you want to use special-sized paper such as a billing paper, select Edit... in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). Macintosh Macintosh does not support this function. Macintosh users need to change the default setting manually each time they want to print using other settings. 1.Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print. 2.Open the File menu and click Print. 3.Go to Paper Feed pane. 4.Set appropriate tray from which you want to print. 5.Go to Paper pane. 6.Set paper type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print. 7.Click Print to print. Linux 1.Open Terminal Program 2.When the Terminal screen appears, type in the following: [root@localhost root]# lpr Basic setup_ 51 3.Select Printer and click Properties… 4.Click Advanced tab. 5.Select tray (source) and its options, such as paper size and type. 6.Press OK. Using the power saving feature When you will not be using the machine for a while, you can use this feature to save power. You change power save in Printer Settings Utility. 1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 69). Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Smart Panel. 2. Click Printer Setting. 3. Click Setting > Power Save. Select the appropriate value from the drop-down list, and then click Apply. Changing font setting (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/ /CLP-326W only) Your machine has preset font setting depending on your region or country. If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition, such as the DOS environment, you can change the font setting as follows: 1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 69). Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Smart Panel. 2. Click Printer Setting. 3. Click Emulation. 4. Confirm if PCL is selected in Emulation Setting. 5. Click Setting. 6. Select your preferred font in the Symbol set list. 7. Click Apply. Following information shows the proper font list for corresponding languages. •Russian: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic •Greek: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek •Arabic & Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864, Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic Setting the humidity mode Print quality is affected by humidity levels. Paper may be damp if your location is a humid area: set the humidity mode. 1. Ensure that you have installed the printer driver with the provided Printer Software CD. 2. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X. 3. Click Printer Setting. If your machine is connected to the network, you can set the humidity mode via SyncThru™ Web Service. 4. Click Setting > Humidity. Select the appropriate value from the drop-down list, and then click Apply.Media and tray_ 52 6.media and tray This chapter introduces you how to load originals and print media into your machine. This chapter includes: • Selecting print media • Changing the tray size • Loading paper in the tray • Printing on special media • Setting the paper size and type • Using the output support Selecting print media You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meets the guidelines for use with your machine and from the appropriate tray. Guidelines for selecting the print media Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user’s guide may cause the following problems: • Poor print quality • Increased paper jams • Premature wear on the machine. • Permanent fuser damage, not covered under warranty. Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following: • The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are described later in this section. • Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for your project. • Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper, more vibrant images. • Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp the printing looks on the paper. •Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of the sheets characteristics, improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels, or other variables over which cannot be controlled. •Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it meets the required specifications in this user’s guide and meets your output requirements. •Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause problems or require repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Samsung’s warranty or service agreements. •Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could cause damage to the machine. •Using inflammable print media can cause a fire. •Use designated print media (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). The use of inflammable media or foreign materials left in the printer may lead to overheating of the unit and, in rare cases may cause a fire. Media sizes supported in each mode Mode Size Type Source Simplex printing For details about paper size, see "Print media specifications" on page 92. For details about paper type, see "Print media specifications" on page 92. Tray Duplex printing (Manual) a a.75 to 90 g/m² (20-24 lbs bond) only Letter, Legal, Oficio, US Folio, A4, ISO B5, JIS B5, Executive, A5, A6 Plain, Thick, Cotton, Color, Preprinted, Recycled, CardStock, Archive TrayMedia and tray_ 53 Changing the tray size To load different sizes of paper, such as Legal-sized paper, you need to adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray. To change the tray size to other size, you must adjust the paper length/width guides properly. 3 2 1 4 1 Paper extend lever 2 Paper cover 3 Paper length guide 4 Paper width guide 1. Pull the tray out of the machine. Open the paper cover and remove paper from the tray if necessary. 2. Pressing and unlatching the guide lock in the tray, pull the tray out manually. 1 3. Place paper with the side you want to print facing up. 4. Slide the paper length guide until it lightly touches the end of the paper stack. Squeeze the paper width guide and slide it to the edge of the paper stack without causing it to bend. For paper smaller than Letter-sized, return the paper guides to their original positions and adjust the paper length guide and paper width guide. If the paper that you need to print is shorter than length 222 mm (8.74 inches), press and unlatch the guide lock in the tray, push the tray in manually. Adjust the paper length guide and paper width guide. 1 2 •Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the materials to warp. •If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper jams.Media and tray_ 54 •Do not use a paper with more than 6 mm (0.24 inch.) curl. 5. Close the paper cover. 6. Slide the tray back into the machine until it clicks. 7. Set the paper type and size for the tray ("Setting the paper size and type" on page 58). If you experience problems with paper feeding, check whether the paper meets the media specifications. Then, try placing one sheet at a time in tray (See "Print media specifications" on page 92 or see "Printing on special media" on page 56). The tray is preset to Letter or A4 size, depending on your country. To change the size to A4 or Letter, you must adjust the lever and paper width guide properly. 1. Pull the tray out of the machine. Open the paper cover and remove paper from the tray if necessary. 2. If you want to change the size to Letter, hold the lever at the back of the tray, and rotate the lever clockwise. LTR A4 3. Squeeze the paper width guide and slide it to the edge of the lever. LTR A4 If you want to change the size to A4, first move the paper width guide to left and rotate the lever counterclockwise. If you force the lever, it could damage the tray. Loading paper in the tray In the tray 1. Pull out the paper tray. Adjust the tray size to the media size you are loading (See "Changing the tray size" on page 53). 2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading the paper. 3. Place the paper with the side you want to print facing up. 4. Squeeze the tray paper guides and adjust them to the width and length of the paper. Do not force them too much or the paper will be bent result in a paper jam or skew. 5. Close the paper cover.Media and tray_ 55 6. Insert the tray back into the machine. 7. To print in application, open an application and start the print menu. 8. Open Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 9. Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences and select an appropriate paper type, size and source. 10. Press OK. 11. Start printing in application. If you experience problems with paper feeding, check whether the paper meets the media specification. Then, try placing one sheet at a time in the tray (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). The tray is preset to Letter or A4 size, depending on your country. To change the size to A4 or Letter, you must adjust the lever and paper width guide properly. 1. Pull the tray out of the machine. Open the paper cover and remove paper from the tray if necessary. 2. If you want to change the size to Letter, hold the lever at the back of the tray, and rotate the lever clockwise. LTR A4 3. Squeeze the paper width guide and slide it to the edge of the lever. LTR A4 If you want to change the size to A4, first move the paper width guide to left and rotate the lever counterclockwise. If you force the lever, it could damage the tray. Manual feeding in the tray To load different sizes of paper such as envelope, transparency, labels or custom-sized paper, you need to adjust the paper guides for manual feeding in the tray. To use manual feeding in the tray, you must adjust the paper length/width guide properly. Tips on using the manual feeding method Tips on manual feeding in the tray •If you select Manual Feeder for Source from your software application, you need to press Cancel ( ) button each time you print a page. Load only one type, size and weight of print media at a time in the tray. •To prevent paper jams, do not add media while printing. This also applies to other types of print media. •Print media should be loaded face up with the top edge going into the tray first and be placed in the center of the tray. •Always load the use recommended print media only to avoid paper jams and print quality problems (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). •Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes and labels before loading them into the tray. 1.Pull the tray out of the machine. Open the paper cover and remove paper from the tray if necessary. 2.Place paper with the side you want to print facing up. 3.Squeeze the tray paper width guided and adjust them to the width of the paper until it lightly touches the end of the paper stack. Do not force too much, or the paper will bend resulting in a paper jam or skew. For paper smaller than Letter-sized, return the paper guides to their original positions and adjust the paper length guide and paper width Media and tray_ 56 guide. If the paper that you need to print is shorter than length 222 mm (8.74 inches), press and unlatch the guide lock in the tray, push the tray in manually. Adjust the paper length guide and paper width guide. 1 2 •Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the materials to warp. •If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper jams. •Do not use a paper with more than 6 mm (0.24 inch.) curl. 4.Close the paper cover. 5.Slide the tray back into the machine until it clicks. 6.To print in application, open an application and start the print menu. 7.Open Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 8.Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select an appropriate paper type. For example, if you want to use a label, set the paper type to Label. 9.Select Manual Feeder in paper source, then press OK. 10.Start printing in application. If you are printing multiple pages, load the next sheet after the first page prints out, and press the Cancel ( ) button. Repeat this step for every page to be printed. Printing on special media The table below shows the available special media for each tray. When using special media, we recommend you feed one paper at a time. Check the maximum input number of media for each tray (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). Types Tray Manual feeding in the tray Plain ● ● Thick ● ● Thin ● ● Cotton ● ● Color ● ● Preprinted ● ● Recycled ● ● Envelope ● Transparency ● Labels ● CardStock ● Bond ● Archive ● Glossy Photo ● Matte Photo ● ( ●: Supported, Blank: Not supported) The following media types are shown in the Printing Preferences. This paper type option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray. Selecting the appropriate media will let you get the best printout quality. Selecting inappropriate media can result in poor print quality. • Plain: Normal plain paper. Select this type if your printing on 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond). • Thick: 90 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lbs bond) thick paper. • Thin: 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lbs bond) thin paper. • Cotton: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) cotton paper. • Color: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) color-backgrounded paper. • Preprinted: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) preprinted/letterhead paper. • Recycled: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) recycled paper. When you use recycled paper, printouts might be wrinkled and/or jamming may occur due to excessive curl. • Envelope: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) envelope. • Transparency: 0.104 to 0.124 mm (0.004094 to 0.004882 inches) transparency paper. • Labels: 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lbs bond) label.Media and tray_ 57 • CardStock: 105 to 163 g/m2 (28 to 43 lbs bond) cardstock. • Bond: 105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lbs bond) bond. • Archive: 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond). If you need to keep the print-out for a long time, such as for archives. • Glossy Photo: 111 to 220 g/m2 (30 to 58 lbs bond) glossy photo paper. • Matte Photo: 111 to 220 g/m2 (30 to 58 lbs bond) matte photo paper. Envelopes Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes. To print an envelope, place it flap side down with the stamp area on the top left side. • When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors: -Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g/m2 otherwise, jams may occur. -Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm (0.24 inch.) curl, and should not contain air. -Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, either damaged. -Temperature: Use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the machine during operation. • Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp-and well-creased folds. • Do not use stamped envelopes. • Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining, self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials. • Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes. • Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope. 1 2 1 Acceptable 2 Unacceptable • Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine’s fusing temperature about 170°C (338 °F) for 0.1 second. The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams and may even damage the fuser. • For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm (0.59 inch.) from the edges of the envelope. • Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet. Transparencies To avoid damaging the machine, use only transparencies designed for laser printers. In case of color printing using transparencies, the picture quality would be lower than mono printing when the printouts are used on the overhead projector. • Transparencies used in the machine must be able to withstand machine’s fusing temperature. • Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine. • Do not leave unused transparencies in the paper tray for long periods of time. Dust and dirt may accumulate on them, resulting in spotty printing. • To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle transparencies carefully. • To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged sunlight. • Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any torn edges. • Do not use transparencies that separate from the backing sheet. • To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other, do not let the printed sheets stack up as they are begin printed out. • Recommended media: Xerox 3R91331 (A4), Xerox 3R2780 (Letter) Base type transparency (ex. Xerox 3R91331) results in better image and paper handling quality than paper backed (ex. Xerox 3R3028) or removable stripe (3R3108) ones. •Transparency with static electricity can cause image quality problems. •Depending on the selection or storage conditions of the transparency, jam or image scratch might occur. Labels To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser machines. • When selecting labels, consider the following factors: -Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at your machine’s fusing temperature (about 170°C (338 °F)). -Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing serious jams. -Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm (0.51 inch.) of curl in any direction. -Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation. • Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels. Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components.Media and tray_ 58 • Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine. • Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged. Card stock/Custom-sized paper • Do not print on media smaller than 76 mm (3.00 inches) wide or 152.4 mm (6.00 inches) long. • In software applications, set margins at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches) away from the edges of the material. Letterhead/Preprinted paper Single-sided double-sided Face up AAAAA Face down AAAAA • Letterhead/ Preprinted paper must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine’s fusing temperature for 0.1 second. Check your machine’s specification to view the fusing temperature about 170°C (338 °F). • Letterhead/ Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect machine rollers. • Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage. • Before you load letterhead/preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted paper, reducing print quality. Recycled paper When loading recycled paper, printed side should be facing up with an uncurled edge at the front. If you experience problems with paper feed, turn the paper around. Note that print quality is not guaranteed. • Recycled paper must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine’s fusing temperature for 0.1 second. Check your machine’s specification to view the fusing temperature about 170°C(338 °F). • Recycled paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect machine rollers. • Before you load recycled paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off recycled paper, reducing print quality. Glossy photo Load one paper in the tray at a time, glossy side facing up. • Recommended media: Glossy paper (Letter) for this machine by HP Brochure Paper (Product: Q6611A). • Recommended media: Glossy paper (A4) for this machine by HP Superior Paper 160 glossy (Product: Q6616A). Matte photo Load one paper in the tray at a time, side to be printed facing up. Setting the paper size and type After loading paper in the paper tray, you need to set the paper size and type using the printer driver. Follow these steps to make your changes permanent. The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online help. 1. Click the Start button on the computer screen. 2. Select Printers and Faxes. 3. Right-click on the printer icon and select Printing Preferences. 4. Click the Paper tab and change the setting on Paper Options. 5. Click OK. Using the output support The printed pages stack on the output tray, and the output support will help the printed pages align. 1 Output support If you continuously print many pages, the surface of the output tray may become hot. Be careful not to touch the surface, and especially keep children away from the surface.Printing_ 59 7.printing This chapter explains common printing tasks. This chapter includes: • Introducing useful software program • Printer driver features • Basic printing • Opening printing preferences • Using help • Using special print features • Changing the default print settings • Setting your machine as a default machine • Printing to a file (PRN) • Macintosh printing • Linux printing The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows XP. Introducing useful software program Samsung AnyWeb Print This tool helps you to screen-capture, preview, scrap and print the screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily, when you use the ordinary program. Click Start > All programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung AnyWeb Print > Download the latest version to link the website where the tool is available for the download. This tool is available only for Windows operating systems. Samsung Easy Color Manager This program helps users to adjust color as they like. You can adjust the printout color as they see them on the monitor. The adjusted color can be stored on the printer driver and applied to printouts. Click Start > All programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung Easy Color Manager > Download the latest version to link the website where the tool is available for the download. This tool is available only for Windows and Macintosh operating systems. (http://solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/colormanager) Printer driver features Your printer drivers support the following standard features: • Paper orientation, size, source, and media type selection • Number of copies In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer drivers: Some models or operating systems may not support some of the feature(s) in the following table. Printer driver Feature Windows Print quality option ● Poster printing ● Multiple pages per sheet ● Booklet printing (manual) ● Fit to page printing ● Reduce and enlarge printing ● Watermark ● Overlay ● Double-sided printing (manual) ● ( ●: Supported, Blank: Not supported) Basic printing Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application you use. •Your Printing Preferences window that appears in this user’s guide may differ depending on the machine in use. However, the composition of the Printing Preferences window is similar. Check the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine. Refer to the OS compatibility section of Printer Specifications (See "System requirements" on page 29). •When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a warning mark, , or . An exclamation mark ( ) means you can select that certain option but it is not recommended, and ( ) mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine’s settings or environment. The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing from various Windows applications. Macintosh basic printing, see "Macintosh printing" on page 65. Linux basic printing, see "Linux printing" on page 66. The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows XP. Your Printing Preferences window may differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are using. Printing_ 60 1. Open the document you want to print. 2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears. 3. Select your machine from the Select Printer list. You can select the basic print settings including the number of copies and the print range from the Print window. To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print window to change the print setting (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 4. To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window. If you are using Windows Internet Explorer, the Samsung AnyWeb Print too will save your time for screen-captured images or printing the image. Click Start > All programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung AnyWeb Print to link the website where the tool is available for the download. Canceling a print job If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as follows. 1. Click the Windows Start menu. 2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. •For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes. •For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. •For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers. •For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. For Windows 2000, XP, Server 2003, Vista and Server 2008, double-click your machine. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, right-click your printer icon > context menus > See what’s printing. If See what’s printing item has a ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer. 4. From the Document menu, select Cancel. You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon ( ) in the Windows task bar. You can also cancel the current job by pressing Cancel ( ) button on the control panel. Opening printing preferences You can preview the settings you selected on the upper right of the Printing Preferences. 1. Open the document you want to print. 2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears. 3. Select your machine from the Select Printer. 4. Click Properties or Preferences. Using a favorite setting The Presets option, which is visible on each of the preferences tab except for the Samsung tab, allows you to save the current preferences for future use. To save a Presets item: 1. Change the settings as needed on each tab. 2. Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box.Printing_ 61 3. Click Add. When you save Presets, all current driver settings are saved. If you click Add, the Add button changes to the Update button. Select more options and click Update, settings will be added to the Presets you made. To use a saved setting, select it from the Presets drop-down list. The machine is now set to print according to the setting you selected. To delete saved settings, select it from the Presets drop-down list and click Delete. You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by selecting Default Preset from the Presets drop-down list. Using help Click the question mark on the upper-right corner of the window and click on the topic you want to know about. Then a pop-up window appears with information about that option's feature which is provided from the driver. If you want to search information via a keyword, click the Samsung tab in the Printing Preferences window, and enter a keyword in the input line of the Help option. To get information about supplies, driver update or registration and so on, click appropriate buttons. Using special print features Special print features include: • "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper" on page 61. • "Printing posters" on page 61. • "Printing booklets (Manual)" on page 61. • "Printing on both sides of the paper (Manual)" on page 62. • "Change percentage of your document" on page 62. • "Fitting your document to a selected paper size" on page 62. • "Using watermarks" on page 62. • "Using overlay" on page 63. • "Graphics tab options" on page 63. Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2. Click the Basic tab, select Multiple Pages Per Side in the Type drop-down list. 3. Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet (2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) in the Pages per Side drop-down list. 4. Select the page order from the Page Order drop-down list, if necessary. 5. Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet. 6. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source and Type. 7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Printing posters This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4, 9 or 16 sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster-size document. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2. Click the Basic tab, select Poster Printing in the Type drop-down list. 3. Select the page layout you want. Available layouts: •Poster 2x2: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 4 pages. •Poster 3x3: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 9 pages. •Poster 4x4: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 16 pages. 4. Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to make it easier to paste the sheets together. 5. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type. 6. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. 7. You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together. Printing booklets (Manual) This feature prints your document on both sides of a paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet. If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio or Oficio sized print media. 8 9 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access the Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2. Click the Basic tab, select Booklet Printing from the Type drop-down list. 3. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type. The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. In order to find out the available paper size for this feature, select the available paper size in the Size option on the Paper tab. If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically canceled. Select only available paper. (paper without or mark). 4. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. 5. After printing, fold and staple the pages.Printing_ 62 Printing on both sides of the paper (Manual) You can print on both sides of a paper (duplex). Before printing, decide how you want your document oriented. You can use this feature with Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio or Oficio sized paper (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). We recommend not to print on both sides of special media, such as labels, envelopes, or thick paper. It may cause a paper jam or damage the machine. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2. Click the Advanced tab. 3. From the Double-Sided Printing (Manual) section, select the binding option you want. •None •Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding. •Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in calendars. 4. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type. 5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. If your machine does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the printing job manually. The machine prints every other page of the document first. After that, a message appears on your computer. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the printing job. Change percentage of your document You can change the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by typing in a percentage you want. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2. Click the Paper tab. 3. Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box. You can also click the up/down arrows to select the scaling rate. 4. Select the Size, Source, and Type in Paper Options. 5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Fitting your document to a selected paper size This feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the document size. This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document. A 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2. Click the Paper tab. 3. Select the paper size you want from the Fit to Page. 4. Select the Size, Source and Type in Paper Options. 5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Using watermarks The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document. There are several predefined watermarks that come with the machine. They can be modified, or you can add new ones to the list. Using an existing watermark 1.To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2.Click the Advanced tab, and select the desired watermark from the Watermark drop-down list. You will see the selected watermark in the preview image. 3.Click OK or Print until you exit the print window. Creating a watermark 1.To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2.From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. 3.Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box. You can enter up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview window. When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark prints on the first page only. 4.Select watermark options. You can select the font name, style, size, and shade from the Font Attributes section, as well as set the angle of the watermark from the Message Angle section. 5.Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermarks list.Printing_ 63 6.When you have finished, click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. To stop printing the watermark, select None from the Watermark drop-down list. Editing a watermark 1.To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2.Click the Advanced tab, select Edit... from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. 3.Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options. 4.Click Update to save the changes. 5.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Deleting a watermark 1.To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2.Click the Advanced tab, select Edit... from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. 3.Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. 4.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Using overlay An overlay is content you store on your hard disk drive that can be superimposed over any document you print. An overlay is often used to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the machine, instead you can just print the letterhead overlay on your document. Creating a new page overlay To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay file containing your content. 1.Create or open a document containing the content you want to use in a new page overlay. Position the items exactly where you want them to appear when they are added to the original. 2.To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 3.Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit... from the Text drop-down list. The Edit Overlay window appears. 4.In the Edit Overlay window, click Create. 5.In the Save As window, type a name of up to eight characters in the File name box. Select the destination path, if necessary. (The default is C:\FormOver.) 6.Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List. 7.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. 8.The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk drive. The overlay document size must match same as the document you print. Do not create an overlay with a watermark. Using a page overlay After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with your document. To print an overlay with a document: 1.Create or open the document you want to print. 2.To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 3.Click the Advanced tab. 4.Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list. 5.If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop-down list, select Edit... from the list and click Load. Select the overlay file you want to use. If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when you access the Open window. After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the Overlay List box. 6.If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If this box is checked, a message window appears each time you submit a document for printing, asking you to confirm that you wish to print an overlay on your document. If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the overlay automatically prints with your document. 7.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. The selected overlay prints over your document. The resolution of the overlay document must match the resolution of the original print job. Deleting a overlay You can delete page overlays that you no longer use. 1.In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab. 2.Select Edit... in the Overlay drop-down list. 3.Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box. 4.Click Delete. 5.When the confirming message window appears, click Yes. 6.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Graphics tab options Use the following Graphics options to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs. •The options you can select may vary depending on your printer model. •If the option is grayed out or not shown, that option is not applicable with the printer language you are using. To change the printer language: 1.Click the Windows Start menu. 2.For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. -For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes. -For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. -For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Printing_ 64 Sound > Devices and Printers. -For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3.Select the your machine’s driver and right-click to open Properties. 4.In printer driver properties, select Device Options. 5.Select necessary options in the Printer Language drop-down list. Adjusting color If you feel the color difference between the printout and monitor, you may change the color setting such as color contrast or color level. The printer driver provides graphic options to adjust the print quality for specific printing needs. 1.To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2.Click the Graphics tab. Refer to the online help for each option’s information provided from the Printing Preferences. •Color Mode: You can choose color options between Color or Grayscale. Setting to Color typically produces the best possible print quality for color document. If you want to print a color document in gray scale, select Grayscale. Black Optimization allows you to print in high quality black. If you use this option, it might take longer to print. To adjust color manually, select Advanced in Color Mode. Simply slide the color balance slider in the Levels tab to adjust color, or select Matching tab for driver provided color correction for general image processing. •Advanced: You can set advanced settings by clicking the Advanced button. (PCL driver only) •Font/ Text: Select Darken Text to print text darker than on a normal document. Use All Text Black to prints solid black, regardless of the color it appears on the screen. •Raster Compression: This option determines the compression level of images for transferring data from computer to a printer. If you set this option to Maximum, the printing speed will be high, but the printing quality will be low. (PCL driver only) •Graphic Controller: It allows you to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving readability and align each color channel registration in color printing mode. -Grayscale Enhancement: It allows users to preserve the details of nature photos, and improve contrast and readability among gray scaled colors, when printing color documents in grayscale. (PCL driver only) -Fine Edge: It allows you to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving readability. •Toner Save: Adjusting this option extends the life of your toner cartridges and reduces your cost per page without a significant reduction in print quality. -You can move the slider from No Saving to Maximum Saving to reduce toner consumption. 3.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Adjusting the sharpness and smoothness Screen options This option affect the resolution and clarity of your color output. The three screen options are Normal, Enhanced and Detailed. 1.To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2.Click the Graphics tab then select Advanced in Color Mode. 3.Select the Matching tab. 4.Select necessary options in the Screen. •Printer default: Follows the set value of Screen mode from the printer. •Normal: This mode will generate printouts with smooth tone over the entire page. •Enhanced: This mode will generate printouts with sharp texts and smooth graphic/photo objects in the page. •Detailed: This mode will generate printouts with sharp details over the entire page. 5.Select OK. Changing the default print settings Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in the software application first, and change any remaining settings using the printer driver. 1. Click the Windows Start menu. 2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. •For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes. •For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. •For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers. •For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. Right-click your machine. 4. For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, press Printing Preferences. For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printing preferences. If Printing preferences item has a ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with the selected printer. 5. Change the settings on each tab. 6. Click OK. If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in Printing Preferences. Setting your machine as a default machine 1. Click the Windows Start menu. 2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. •For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes. •For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. •For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers. •For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. Select your machine. 4. Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer. For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, if Set as default Printing_ 65 printer item has a ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with the selected printer. Printing to a file (PRN) You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file. You can print the document to a file instead of routing it directly to a printer. The document is saved with the printer formating, such as font selection and color specifications, in a .prn file that can be printed on another printer. To save a print job as a file: 1. Check the Print to file box at the Print window. 2. Click Print. 3. Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK. For example c:\Temp\file name. If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in Documents and Settings or Users. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are using. Macintosh printing This section explains how to print using a Macintosh. You need to set the print environment before printing. • USB connected, see "Macintosh" on page 31. • Network connected, see "Macintosh" on page 38. Printing a document When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer driver setting in each application you use. Follow the steps below to print from a Macintosh: 1. Open an application and select the file you want to print. 2. Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some applications). 3. Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options, and make sure that your machine is selected. Click OK. 4. Open the File menu and click Print. 5. Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you want to print. 6. Click Print. Changing printer settings You can use advanced printing features when using your machine. Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine name, which appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer properties window is similar to the following. •The setting options may differ depending on models and Macintosh OS versions. •The following panes may differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are using. Layout The Layout dialog provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on one sheet of paper. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the following features. •Pages per Sheet: This option determines how many pages to be printed on one page (See "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper" on page 66). •Layout Direction: This option allows you to select the printing direction on a page similar to the examples on UI. •Border: This option allows you to print a border around each page on the sheet. •Reverse Page Orientation: This option allows you to rotate paper 180 degrees. Printing_ 66 Graphics The Graphics dialog provides options for selecting Quality and Color Mode. Select Graphics from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the graphic features. •Quality: This option allows you to select the printing resolution. The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics. A higher setting will also increase the time it takes to print a document. •Color Mode: You can set the color options. Setting to Color typically produces the best possible print quality for color documents. If you want to print a color document in grayscale, select Grayscale. Printer Features Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print. This will let you get the best quality printout. If you load a different type of print material, select the corresponding paper type. Printer Settings Set Toner Save option to extend the life of your toner cartridge and reduces your cost per page without a significant reduction in print quality. • Printer Setting: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the setting you’ve made from the machine. • On: Select this option to allow the printer to use less toner on each page. • Off: If you do not need to save toner when printing a document, select this option. To access above feature: 1. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility. • For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 2. Select your printer, and click on Show info button. • For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, select your printer and click on Options & Supplies button. 3. Click on Installable Options menu from the drop-down list in Printer info window. • For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, move to Driver tab. Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages. 1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu. 2. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper. 3. Select the other options you want to use. 4. Click Print, then the machine prints the selected the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper. Linux printing Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It means that the features are not supported. Printing from applications There are several Linux applications that allow you to print using the Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You can print using any of these applications. 1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu. 2. Select Print directly using LPR. 3. From the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your machine from the printer list and click Properties.Printing_ 67 4. Change the print job properties using the following four tabs displayed at the top of the window. •General: This option allows you to change the paper size, the paper type, and the orientation of the documents. It adds start and end banners, and changes the number of pages per sheet. •Text: This option allows you to specify the page margins and set the text options such as spacing or columns. •Graphics: This option allows you to set image options that are used when printing images/files such as color options, image size or image position. •Advanced: This option allows you to set the print resolution, paper source and special print features. If an option is grayed out, it means that the grayed out option is not supported by your machine. Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other applications for odd-even printing. 5. Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window. 6. Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing. 7. The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the status of your print job. To abort the current job, click Cancel. Printing files You can print many different types of files on your machine using the standard CUPS way, directly from the command line interface. The CUPS LPR utility allows you to do that. But the drivers package replaces the standard LPR tool by a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program. To print any document file: 1. Type lpr from the Linux shell command line and press Enter. The LPR GUI window appears. When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select file(s) to print window appears first. Just select any files you want to print and click Open. 2. From the LPR GUI window, select your machine from the list, and change the print job properties. 3. Click OK to start printing. Configuring printer properties Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers configuration, you can change the various properties for your printer. 1. Open the Unified Driver Configurator. If necessary, switch to Printers configuration. 2. Select your machine from the available printers list and click Properties. 3. The Printer Properties window opens. The following five tabs display at the top of the window: •General: This option allows you to change the printer location and name. The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers configuration. •Connection: This option allows you to view or select another port. If you change the machine port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use, you must re-configure the machine port in this tab. •Driver: Allows you to view or select another printer driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default device options. •Jobs: This option shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to cancel the selected job and select the Show completed jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list. •Classes: This option shows the class that your machine is in. Click Add to Class to add your machine to a specific class or click Remove from Class to remove the machine from the selected class. 4. Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties window.Management tools_ 68 8.management tools This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine. This chapter includes: • Introducing useful management tools • Using SyncThru™ Web Service • Using the Smart Panel program • Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator Introducing useful management tools The programs below help you to use your machine conveniently. • "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 68. • "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 69. • "Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator" on page 70. Using SyncThru™ Web Service Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for SyncThru™ Web Service. If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via SyncThru™ Web Service, an embedded web server. Use SyncThru™ Web Service to: • View the machine’s device information and check its current status. • Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters. • Change printer preference. • Set the email notifications advising of the machine’s status. • Get support for using the machine. To access SyncThru™ Web Service 1. Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2. Your machine’s embedded website opens. Logging into SyncThru™ Web Service Before configuring options in SyncThru™ Web Service, you need to log-in as an administrator. You can still use SyncThru™ Web Service without logging in but you won’t have access to Settings tab and Security tab. 1.Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website. A log-in page appears. 2.Type in the ID and Password then click Login. If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the below default ID and password. •ID: admin •Password: sec00000 SyncThru™ Web Service overview Some tabs may not appear depending on your model. Information tab This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can check things, such as remaining amount of toner. You can also print reports such as an error report and so on. •Active Alerts: This item allows you to check the alerts occurred in the machine and their severity. •Supplies: This item allows you to check how many pages are printed and amount of toner left in the cartridge. •Usage Counters: This item allows you to check the usage count by print types: simplex, duplex. •Current Settings: This item allows you to check the machine and network information. •Print information: This item allows you to print reports such as system related reports, e-mail address and font reports. Settings tab This tab allows you to set configurations provided by your machine and network. You need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab. •Machine Settings tab: This tab allows you to set options provided by your machine. -System: You can set settings related to your machine. -Printer: You can set settings related to printing jobs. -E-mail Notification: You can set e-mail notification feature and e-mail address of recipients who will receive the notification. •Network Settings tab: This tab allows you to view and change the network environment. You can set things, such as TCP/IP, network protocols and so on. -SNMP: You can exchange of management information between network devices using SNMP. -Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP): You can set the outgoing e-mail server. -Restore Default: You can restore default network settings. Security tab This tab allows you to set system and network security information. You need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab. •System Security: You can set the system administrator’s information and also enable or disable machine features. •Network Security: You can set settings for HTTPs, IPSec, IPv4/IPv6 filtering, 802.1x, Authentication servers. Maintenance tab This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and setting contact information for sending emails. You can also connect to Samsung website or download drivers by selecting the Link menu. •Firmware Upgrade: You can upgrade your machine’s firmware.Management tools_ 69 •Contact Information: You can view the contact information. •Link: You can view the links to useful sites where you can download or check information. E-mail notification setup You can receive emails about your machine’s status by setting this option. By setting information such as IP address, host name, e-mail address and SMTP server information, the machine status (toner cartridge shortage or machine error) will be sent to a certain person's e-mail automatically. This option may be used more frequently by a machine administrator. 1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2. Your machine’s embedded website opens. 3. Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website. A log-in page appears. 4. Type in the ID and Password then click Login. If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the below default ID and password. •ID: admin •Password: sec00000 5. From the Settings tab, select Machine Settings > E-mail Notification. If you haven’t configured outgoing server environment, go to Settings > Network Settings > Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP) to configure network environment before setting e-mail notification. 6. Click Add button to add e-mail notification user. Set the recipient name and e-mail address(es) with notification items you want to receive an alert for. 7. Click Apply. If the firewall is activated, the e-mail may not be sent successfully. In that case, contact the a network administrator. Setting the system administrator information Set the system administrator information. This setting is necessary for using the e-mail notification option. 1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2. Your machine’s embedded website opens. 3. Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website. A log-in page appears. 4. Type in the ID and Password then click Login. If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the below default ID and password. •ID: admin •Password: sec00000 5. From the Security tab, select System Security > System Administrator 6. Enter the name of the administrator, phone number, location and E-mail address. 7. Click Apply. Using the Smart Panel program Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine status, and allows you to customize the machine’s settings. For Windows and Macintosh, Smart Panel is installed automatically when you install the machine software. For Linux, you can download Smart Panel from the Samsung website (See "Installing the Smart Panel" on page 32). To use this program, your computer has to meet the following system requirements: •Windows. Check that your computer’s CPU, RAM and HDD meet or exceed specification (See "System requirements" on page 29). •Mac OS X 10.3 or higher. Check that your computer’s CPU, RAM and HDD meet or exceed specification (See "System requirements" on page 29). •Linux. Check that your computer’s CPU, RAM and HDD meet or exceed specification (See "System requirements" on page 29). •Internet Explorer version 5.0 or higher for flash animation in HTML Help. If you need to know the exact model number of your machine, you can check the supplied software CD. Understanding Smart Panel If an error occurs while printing, you can check the error from the Smart Panel. You can also launch Smart Panel manually. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (in Windows), or Notification Area (in Linux). Windows Double-click this icon in Windows. Linux Click this icon in Linux. Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Smart Panel. •If you have already installed more than one Samsung machine, first select the correct machine model you want in order to access the corresponding Smart Panel. Right-click (in Windows or Linux) the Smart Panel icon and select your machine. •The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this user’s guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use. In case of Mac OS 10.3 1. Click Print & Fax in System Preferences. 2. Click Set up Printers.... 3. Select printer in list and double click it. 4. Click Utility. In case of Mac OS 10.4 1. Click Print & Fax in System Preferences. 2. Select printer in list and click Printer Queue…. 3. Click Utility. In case of Mac OS 10.5 1. Click Print & Fax in System Preferences. 2. Select printer in list and click Open Printer Queue…. 3. Click Utility. In case of Mac OS 10.6Management tools_ 70 1. Click Print & Fax in System Preferences. 2. Select printer in list and click Open Printer Queue…. 3. Click Printer Setup. 4. Click Utility tab. 5. Click Open Printer Utility. The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the machine, the estimated level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s), and various other types of information. You can also change settings. 1 Toner Level View the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s). The machine and the number of toner cartridge(s) shown in the above window may differ depending on the machine in use. Some machines do not have this feature. 2 Buy Now Order replacement toner cartridge(s) online. 3 User’s Guide View the User’s Guide. This button changes to Troubleshooting Guide when error occurs. You can directly open the troubleshooting section in the user’s guide. 4 Printer Setting Configure various machine settings in the Printer Settings Utility window. Some machines do not have this feature. If you connect your machine to a network, the SyncThru™ Web Service window appears instead of the Printer Settings Utility window. 5 Driver Setting Set all of the machine options you need in the Printer Preferences window. This feature is available only for Windows (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings Right-click (in Windows or Linux) the Smart Panel icon and select Options. Select the settings you want from the Options window. Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator The Unified Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring machine devices. You need to install Unified Linux Driver to use Unified Driver Configurator (See "Installing the Unified Linux Driver" on page 32). After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the Unified Driver Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop. Opening the Unified Driver Configurator 1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop. You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified Driver > Unified Driver Configurator. 2. Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding configuration window. 1 Printers Configuration 2 Ports Configuration To use the on screen help, click Help. 3. After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the Unified Driver Configurator. Printers configuration window Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes. Printers tab View the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the machine icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window. 1 Switches to Printers configuration. 2 Shows all of the installed machine. 3 Shows the status, model name and URI of your machine.Management tools_ 71 The printer control buttons are, as follows: •Refresh: Renews the available machines list. •Add Printer: Allows you to add a new machines. •Remove Printer: Removes the selected machine. •Set as Default: Sets the current selected machine as a default machine. •Stop/Start: Stops/starts the machine. •Test: Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is working properly. •Properties: Allows you to view and change the printer properties. Classes tab The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes. 1 Shows all of the machine classes. 2 Shows the status of the class and the number of machines in the class. •Refresh: Renews the classes list. •Add Class: Allows you to add a new machine class. •Remove Class: Removes the selected machine class. Ports configuration In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the status of each port, and release a port that is stalled in a busy state when its owner has terminated the job for any reason. 1 Switches to Ports configuration. 2 Shows all of the available ports. 3 Shows the port type, device connected to the port, and status. • Refresh: Renews the available ports list. • Release port: Releases the selected port.Maintenance_ 72 9.maintenance This chapter provides information about maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge. This chapter includes: • Printing a machine report • Cleaning a machine • Storing the toner cartridge • Tips for moving & storing your machine Printing a machine report You can print a configuration page to view current printer settings, or to help troubleshoot printer problems. In ready mode, press and hold the Cancel ( ) button for about 5 seconds, then release. A configuration page prints out. Cleaning a machine If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep the most optimum printing quality. •Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or other strong substances can discolor or distort the cabinet. •If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner, we recommend that you use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful if inhaled. Cleaning the outside Clean the machine cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine. Cleaning the inside During the printing process, paper, toner and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems such as toner specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears or reduces these problems. 1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. 2. Press the release button, completely open the front cover. 3. Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the cartridge from the machine. 4. Pull the waste toner container out of the machine using its handle. 5. Pull the imaging unit out of the machine using the groove on the front of the imaging unit. •Do not touch the green surface of the drum located in the imaging unit. Use the handle on the imaging unit to avoid touching this Maintenance_ 73 area. •Be careful not to scratch the surface of the imaging unit. •If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes, the imaging unit can be exposed to light. This will cause damage to the imaging unit. Close the front cover should the installation need to be halted for any reason. 6. With a dry lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the toner cartridges area and their cavities. After cleaning, let the machine to dry completely. •If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash it in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. •If your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner, we recommend you to use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows into the air then might be harmful to you. 7. Holding the groove on the front of the imaging unit, push imaging unit into the machine. 8. Insert the waste toner container into position and then push it to make sure that it is firmly seated in place. 9. Slide the toner cartridge back into the machine. 10. Reinstall all the compartments into the machine and close the front cover. If the front cover is not completely closed, the machine will not operate. 11. Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on. Storing the toner cartridge Toner cartridge storage Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light, temperature, and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow the recommendations to ensure the optimum performance, highest quality, and longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge. Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in; this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions. The toner cartridge should remain in its original, unopened package until installation – If original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet. Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is removed from the printer, always store the cartridge according to the following guidelines: • Inside the protective bag from the original package. • Store lying flat (not standing on end) with the same side facing up as if was installed in the machine. • Do not store consumable in any of the following conditions: -Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F). -Humidity range less than 20% and not greater than 80%.Maintenance_ 74 -An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature. -Direct sunlight or room light. -Dusty places. -A car for a long period of time. -An environment where corrosive gases are present. -An environment with salty air. Handling instructions • Do not touch the surface of the photoconductive drum in the cartridge. • Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock. • Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this can cause internal damage and toner spillage. Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non-Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges. Samsung’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or non-Samsung brand toner cartridge. Estimated cartridge life Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print yield may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating environment, printing interval, media type, and/or media size. For example, if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the toner is high and you may need to change the cartridge more often. Tips for moving & storing your machine • When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can cause damage to the machine or reduce print quality. • When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely.Troubleshooting_ 75 10.troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error. This chapter includes: • Redistributing toner • Tips for avoiding paper jams • Clearing paper jams • Solving other problems Redistributing toner It is possible that colored images may be printed with incorrect colors due to flawed mixing of toner colors when one of the colored toner cartridges is low on toner. You can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the toner. The Smart Panel program window appears on the computer telling you which cartridge is low on toner (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 69). 1. Press the release button, completely open the front cover. 2. Grasp the handle on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the cartridge from the machine. 3. Holding both handles on the toner cartridge, thoroughly rock it from side to side to evenly distribute the toner. If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash it in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. 4. Slide the toner cartridge back into the machine. 5. Close the front cover. Make sure the cover is securely latched. If the front cover is not completely closed, the machine will not operate. Tips for avoiding paper jams By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided. When a paper jam occurs, refer to the guidelines below (See "Clearing paper jams" on page 76. • Follow the procedures on "Changing the tray size" on page 53. Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly. • Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray. • Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing. • Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading. • Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.Troubleshooting_ 76 • Do not mix paper types in a tray. • Use only recommended print media ("Setting the paper size and type" on page 58). • Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing up in the tray. Clearing paper jams To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and carefully. Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the jam. If a paper jam occurs, the status LED on the control panel lights orange. Find and remove the jammed paper. If paper is jammed in the paper feed area, follow the next steps to release the jammed paper. In the tray Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. 1. Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine. If the paper does not eject, go to the next step. 2. Pull out the tray. 3. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out. If the paper does not eject when you pull, or if you do not see the paper in this area, check the fuser area around the toner cartridge (See "Inside the machine" on page 76). 4. Insert the tray back into the machine until it snaps into place. Printing automatically resumes. Inside the machine Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. The fuser area is hot. Be careful when removing paper form this area to prevent getting your fingers burnt. 1. Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine. If the paper does not eject, go to the next step. 2. To remove the jammed paper, open the rear cover. 3. Carefully remove the jammed paper by pulling in the direction as shown below. Most of the jammed paper can be removed in this step. Do not touch the fuser inside the inner cover. It is hot and could cause burns. Be careful when removing paper from this area to prevent getting your fingers burnt. If the paper does not eject when you pull, or if you do not see the paper in this area, check the paper exit area (See "In the paper exit area" on page 76). 4. Close the rear cover. Make sure that it is securely closed. Printing automatically resumes. In the paper exit area Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. The fuser area is hot. Be careful when removing paper form this area to prevent getting your fingers burnt.Troubleshooting_ 77 1. Gently pull the paper out the output tray. If you do not see the jammed paper or if there is any resistance when you pull, stop and go to the next step. 2. To remove the jammed paper, open the rear cover. 3. Carefully remove the paper by pulling in the direction as shown below. Most of the jammed paper can be removed in this step. If you cannot find the jammed paper, of if there is any resistance removing the paper, go to the next step. If the paper tears, make sure that all of the paper fragments are removed from the machine. 4. Push the fuser levers upwards. The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper form the machine. 5. Open the top cover and inner cover. 2 1 6. Holding the inner cover open, carefully take the jammed paper out the machine. The inner cover will then close automatically. Do not touch the fuser inside the inner cover. It is hot and could cause burns. Be careful when removing paper from this area to prevent getting your fingers burnt.Troubleshooting_ 78 7. Close the top cover. Make sure that it is securely closed. 8. Push the fuser levers downwards. 9. Open and then close the rear cover or front cover to resume printing. Solving other problems The following chart lists some trouble conditions that may occur and the recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is corrected. If the problem persists, contact a service representative. Other problems include: • See "System problems" on page 78. • See "Power problems" on page 78. • See "Paper feeding problems" on page 79. • See "Printing problems" on page 80. • See "Printing quality problems" on page 81. • See "Common Windows problems" on page 84. • See "Common Linux problems" on page 84. • See "Common Macintosh problems" on page 85. System problems Condition Suggested solutions The red error light is on. Turn the machine on/off. If the problem persists, contact a service representative (See "Contact SAMSUNG worldwide" on page 94”). The machine is experiencing problems that require service such as LSU error or fuser error. Power problems Click this link to open an animation about power problems.Condition Suggested solutions The machine is not receiving power, or the connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly. • Plug in the power cord and press Power ( ) button on the control panel. • Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it. -For Local Printing - For Network (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/ CLP-326W only) Troubleshooting_ 79 Paper feeding problems Condition Suggested solutions Paper jams during printing. Clear the paper jam (See "Clearing paper jams" on page 76). Paper sticks together. • Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper. • Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together, replace with a new stack. Multiple sheets of paper do not feed. Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray. Load paper of only one type, size and weight. Paper does not feed into the machine. • Remove any obstructions from inside the machine. • Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly. • There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. • The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). The paper keeps jamming. • There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. • An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • There may be debris inside the machine. Open the front cover and remove any debris. Transparencies stick together in the paper exit. Use only transparencies specifically designed for laser printers. Remove each transparency as it exits from the machine. Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly. Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes. Condition Suggested solutionsTroubleshooting_ 80 Printing problems Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions The machine does not print. The machine is not receiving power. Check the power cord connections. The machine is not selected as the default machine. Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows. Check the machine for the following: • The front cover is not closed. Close the front cover. • Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam (See "Clearing paper jams" on page 76). • No paper is loaded. Load paper (See "Loading paper in the tray" on page 54). • The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the toner cartridge. If a system error occurs, contact a service representative. The connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly. Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it. The connection cable between the computer and the machine is defective. If possible, attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job. You can also try using a different machine cable. The port setting is incorrect. Check the Windows printer setting to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct port. If the computer has more than one port, make sure that the machine is attached to the correct one. The machine may be configured incorrectly. Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). The printer driver may be incorrectly installed. Repair the machine software (See "Installing USB connected machine’s driver" on page 30, "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 37). The machine is malfunctioning. • Check the LEDs on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a system error. If the error cannot be cleared, contact a service representative. • Checking an error message is also possible from the Smart Panel on your computer (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 69). The document size is so big that the hard disk space of the computer is insufficient to access the print job. Allocate more hard disk space on your computer for spooling, and try printing. The output tray is full. It can hold up to 80 (80 g/m2 ) sheets of plain paper. Once the paper is removed from the output tray, the machine resumes printing. If the machine is used for a long time continuously, the printing speed could be slowed down, or the machine could pause to cool down. Wait for the machine to cool down. Printing automatically resumes after the machine is cooled down. The machine selects print materials from the wrong paper source. The paper option that was selected in the Printing Preferences may be incorrect. For many software applications, the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab within the Printing Preferences. Select the correct paper source. (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). A print job is extremely slow. The job may be very complex. Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings. Half the page is blank. The page orientation setting may be incorrect. Change the page orientation in your application. See the printer driver help screen. The paper size and the paper size settings do not match. Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray. Or, ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use. Condition Possible cause Suggested solutionsTroubleshooting_ 81 Printing quality problems If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, you may notice a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the problem. The machine prints, but the text is wrong, garbled, or incomplete. The machine cable is loose or defective. Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect. Try a print job that you have already printed successfully. If possible, attach the cable and the machine to another computer that you know works and try a print job. Finally, try a new machine cable. The wrong printer driver was selected. Check the application’s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected. The software application is malfunctioning. Try printing a job from another application. The operating system is malfunctioning. Exit Windows and reboot the computer. Turn the machine off and back on again. If you are in a DOS environment, the font setting for your machine may be set incorrectly. See "Changing font setting (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-32 5W(K)/ /CLP-326W only)" on page 51. Pages print, but they are blank. The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner. Redistribute the toner, if necessary. If necessary, replace the toner cartridge. The file may have blank pages. Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages. Some parts, such as the controller or the board, may be defective. Contact a service representative. The machine does not print PDF file correctly. Some graphics, text, or illustrations are missing. Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products. Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options. It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image. Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions The print quality of photos is not good. Images are not clear. The resolution of the photo is very low. Reduce the photo size. If you increase the photo size in the software application, the resolution will be reduced. Before printing, the machine emits vapor near the output tray. Using damp paper can cause vapor during printing. This is not a problem. Just keep printing. The machine does not print special- sized paper, such as billing paper. The Paper size and paper size setting do not match. Set the correct paper size in the Edit... in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). The printed billing paper is curled. The paper type setting does not match. Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab, and set type to Thick (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). The printed paper is curled. Paper curl occurs dut to many different factors such as temperature humidity, paper type, high coverage printing, etc. Use the Paper Curl Reduction option. Go to Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60), click Advanced tab, and click the Paper Curl Reduction check box. This option will optimize environmental factors to reduce the paper curl level. Condition Suggested solutions Light or faded print • If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page, the toner supply is low. You may be able to temporarily extend the toner cartridge life (See "Redistributing toner" on page 75). If this does not improve the print quality, install a new toner cartridge. • The paper may not meet paper specification; for example, the paper is too moist or too rough (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too low. Adjust the print resolution. See the help screen of the printer driver. • A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning (See "Cleaning the inside" on page 72). • The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU by opening and closing the front cover several times and if the problem still occurs call the contact a service representative. Condition Possible cause Suggested solutionsTroubleshooting_ 82 The top half of the paper is printed lighter than the rest of the paper The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper. • Change the printer option and try again. Go to the Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled. Toner specks • The paper may not meet specification; for example, the paper is too moist or too rough (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • The paper path may need cleaning (See "Cleaning the inside" on page 72). Dropouts If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the page. • A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the job. • The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of paper (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper. • Change the printer option and try again. Go to printer properties, click the Paper tab and set type to Thick Paper (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). • If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative. White Spots White spots appear on the page. • The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from the paper falls to the inner devices within the machine, which means the transfer belt may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine. Contact a service representative. • The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service representative. Condition Suggested solutions Vertical lines If black vertical streaks appear on the page: • The imaging unit has probably been scratched. Remove the imaging unit and install a new one (See "Replacing the imaging unit" on page 87). If white vertical streaks appear on the page: • The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU by opening and closing the front cover several times and if the problem still occurs call the contact a service representative. Color or Black background If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable: • Change to a lighter weight paper (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • Check the machine’s environment: very dry (low humidity) or high humidity (higher than 80% RH) conditions can increase the amount of background shading. • Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). Toner smear • Clean the inside of the machine. See "Cleaning the inside" on page 72. • Check the paper type and quality. See "Print media specifications" on page 92. • Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86. Vertical repetitive defects If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals: • The toner cartridge may be damaged. If a repetitive mark occurs on the page, print a cleaning sheet several times to clean the cartridge. After the printout, if you still have the same problems, remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). • Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages. • The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service representative. Condition Suggested solutionsTroubleshooting_ 83 Background scatter A Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page. • The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a fresh ream of paper. Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture. • If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side. Printing on seams can cause problems. • If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page, adjust the print resolution through your software application or the printer properties. Toner particles are around bold characters or pictures The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper. • Change the printer option and try again. Go to the Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled. Misformed characters • If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try a different paper (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). Page skew • Ensure that the paper is loaded properly. • Check the paper type and quality (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • Ensure that the paper or other material is loaded correctly and the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack. Condition Suggested solutions Curl or wave • Ensure that the paper is loaded properly. • Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl ( See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray. Wrinkles or creases • Ensure that the paper is loaded properly. • Check the paper type and quality (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray. Back of printouts are dirty • Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine (See "Cleaning the inside" on page 72). Solid Color or Black pages A • The toner cartridge may not be installed properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it. • The toner cartridge may be defective and need replacing. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). • The machine may require repair. Contact a service representative. Loose toner • Clean the inside of the machine (See "Cleaning the inside" on page 72). • Check the paper type and quality (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). • If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative. Condition Suggested solutionsTroubleshooting_ 84 Common Windows problems Condition Suggested solutions “File in Use” message appears during installation. Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the startup group, then restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver. “General Protection Fault”, “Exception OE”, “Spool 32”, or “Illegal Operation” messages appear. Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing again. “Fail To Print”, “A printer timeout error occurred” messages appear. These messages may appear during printing. Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing. If the message appears in ready mode or after printing has been completed, check the connection and/or whether an error has occurred. Refer to the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages. Common Linux problems Character Voids A Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black: • If you are using transparencies, try another type of transparency. Because of the composition of transparencies, some character voids are normal. • You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it over. • The paper may not meet paper specifications (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). Horizontal stripes If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear: • The toner cartridge may be installed improperly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it. • The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative. Curl If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine: • Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray. • Change the printer option and try again. Go to printer properties, click Paper tab and set type to Thin Paper. Refer to the "Opening printing preferences" on page 60 for details. An unknown image repetitively appears on a next few sheets or loose toner, light print, or contamination occurs. Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft.) or above. The high altitude may affect the print quality such as loose toner or light imaging. You can set this option through Printer Setting Utility (See "Altitude adjustment" on page 50). Condition Suggested solutions condition Suggested solutions The machine does not print. • Check if the printer driver is installed in your system. Open Unified Driver Configurator and switch to the Printers tab in Printers configuration window to look at the list of available machines. Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list. If not, open Add new printer wizard to set up your device. • Check if the machine is started. Open Printers configuration and select your machine on the printers list. Look at the description in the Selected printer pane. If its status contains Stopped string, press the Start button. After that normal operation of the machine should be restored. The “stopped” status might be activated when some problems in printing occur. For instance, this could be an attempt to print a document when the port is claimed by a scanning application. • Ensure the port is not busy. Since functional components of machine (printer and scanner) share the same I/O interface (port), the situation of simultaneous access of different user applications to the same port is possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device. The other user will encounter “device busy” response. You should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your machine. In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application. If this is the case, you should either wait for completion of the current job or press the Release port button, if you are sure that the present application is not functioning properly. • Check if your application has special print option such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified in the command line parameter, then remove it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select “print” -> “Setup printer” and edit command line parameter in the command item. • The CUPS (Common UNIXPrinting System) version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2 (cups-1.1.21) has a problem with ipp (Internet Printing Protocol) printing.Use the socket printing instead of ipp or install a later version of CUPS (cups-1.1.22 or higher).Troubleshooting_ 85 Refer to the Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages. Common Macintosh problems condition Suggested solutions The machine does not print PDF files correctly. Some parts of graphics, text, or illustrations are missing. Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options. It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image. The document has printed, but the print job has not disappeared from the spooler in Mac OS X 10.3.2. Update your Mac OS to OS Mac OS X 10.3.3. or higher. Some letters are not displayed normally during the Cover page printing. Mac OS cannot create the font during the Cover page printing. The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on the Cover page. When printing a document in Macintosh with Acrobat Reader 6.0 or higher, colors print incorrectly. Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader. Refer to the Macintosh User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Macintosh error messages. Some color images come out all black. This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU Ghostscript version 7.05) when the base color space of the document is indexed color space and it is converted through CIE color space. Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System, you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 7.06 or later. You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www.ghostscript.com. Some color images come out in unexpected color. This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU Ghostscript version 7.xx) when the base color space of the document is indexed RGB color space and it is converted through CIE color space. Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System, you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 8.xx or later. You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www.ghostscript.com. The machine does not print whole pages, and output is printed on half the page. It is a known problem that occurs when a color machine is used on version 8.51 or earlier of Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and has been reported to bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug 688252. The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v. 8.52 or above. Download the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this problem. I encounter the “Cannot open port device file” error when printing a document. Avoid changing print job parameters (via LPR GUI, for example) while a print job is in progress. Known versions of CUPS server break the print job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning. Since Unified Linux Driver locks the mfp port while printing, the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this situation occurs, try to release the mfp port by selecting Release port in Port configuration window. condition Suggested solutions condition Suggested solutionsSupplies_ 86 11.supplies This chapter provides information about purchasing supplies and maintenance parts available for your machine. This chapter includes: • How to purchase • Available supplies • Maintenance parts • Replacing the toner cartridge • Replacing the imaging unit • Replacing the waste toner container Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available accessories. How to purchase To order Genuine Samsung supplies, accessories and, maintenance parts, contact your local Samsung dealer or the authorized retailer where you purchased your machine. You can also visit www.samsung.com/supplies, select your country/region, and obtain information on calling for service. Available supplies When supplies reach their lifespan, you can order the following types of supplies for your machine: Type Average yield a a.Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. Standard yield toner cartridge • Average continuous black cartridge yield: 1,500 standard pages (Black) • Average continuous color cartridge yield: 1,000 standard pages (Yellow/Magenta/Cy an) K407(CLT-K407S): Black C407(CLT-C407S): Cyan M407(CLT-M407S): Magenta Y407(CLT-Y407S): Yellow Region A b b.Region A: Albania, Austria, Belgium, Bosnia, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Macedonia, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland and UK K4072(CLT-K4072S): Black C4072(CLT-C4072S): Cyan M4072(CLT-M4072S): Magenta Y4072(CLT-Y4072S): Yellow Region B c c. Region B: Bangladesh, China, India, and Nepal K4073(CLT-K4073S): Black C4073(CLT-C4073S): Cyan M4073(CLT-M4073S): Magenta Y4073(CLT-Y4073S): Yellow Imaging Unit Approx. 24,000 images d d.Image counts based on one color on each page. If you print documents in full color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black), the life of this item will be reduced by 25%. CLT-R407 Waste toner container Approx. 10,000 images d CLT-W409 To replace a toner cartridge, see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86. Depending on the options and percentage of image area, job mode used, the toner cartridge’s lifespan may differ. You must purchase supplies, including toner cartridges, in the same country where you purchased your machine. Otherwise, supplies will be incompatible with your machine since the system configurations vary from country to country. Samsung does not recommend using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured. Samsung cannot guarantee non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty. Maintenance parts To purchase maintenance parts, contact the source where you bought the machine. Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized service provider, dealer, or the retailer where you bought the machine. The warranty does not cover the replacement of any maintenance parts once it has reached its “Average Yield”. Maintenance parts are replaced at specific intervals to avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts, see table below. The purpose of which is to maintain your machine in top working condition. The maintenance parts below should be replaced when the life span of each item has been met. Parts Average yield a a.It will be affected by operating system used, computing performance, application software, connecting method, media type, media size and job complexity. Fuser unit Approx. 50,000 pages (B&W)/ 12,500 pages (Color) Transfer roller Approx. 50,000 pages (B&W)/ 12,500 pages (Color) Transfer belt (ITB) Approx. 50,000 pages (B&W)/ 12,500 pages (Color) Paper feed roller Approx. 50,000 pages Replacing the toner cartridge Click this link to open an animation about replacing a toner cartridge. The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each one: yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C) and black (K). Part nameSupplies_ 87 A toner cartridge has reached its estimated cartridge life. The printer stops printing. Also, the Smart Panel program window appears on the computer telling you to replace the cartridge (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 69). At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. Check the model number for the toner cartridge used in your machine (See "Available supplies" on page 86). Samsung does not recommend using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured. Samsung cannot guarantee non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality or damages it can cause to the machine. Also service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty. 1. Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool. 2. Press the release button, completely open the front cover. 3. Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the cartridge from the machine. 4. Take a new toner cartridge out of its package. 5. Pull out the hopper sheet from a new toner cartridge. 6. Holding both handles a new toner cartridge, thoroughly rock it from side to side to evenly distribute the toner. 7. Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface as shown below and remove the protecting cover. If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash it in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. 8. Make sure that the color of the toner cartridge matches the color slot and then grasp the handles on the toner cartridge. Insert the cartridge until it clicks into place. 9. Close the front cover. Make sure the cover is securely latched and then turn the machine on. If the front cover is not completely closed, the machine will not operate. Replacing the imaging unit When the life span of the imaging unit has expired, the Smart Panel program window appears on the computer, indicating the imaging unit needs to be placed. Otherwise, your machine stops printing.Supplies_ 88 1. Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool. 2. Press the release button, completely open the front cover. 3. Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the cartridge from the machine. 4. Pull the waste toner container out of the machine using its handle. 5. Pull the imaging unit out of the machine using the groove on the front of the imaging unit. 6. Take a new imaging unit out of its package. •Don’t use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the imaging unit package. You could damage the surface of the imaging unit. •Be careful not to scratch the surface of the imaging unit. •To prevent damage, do not expose the imaging unit to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper to protect it if necessary. 7. Holding the groove on the front of the imaging unit, push imaging unit into the machine. 8. Insert the waste toner container into position and then push it to make sure that it is firmly seated in place. 9. Slide the toner cartridge back into the machine. 10. Close the front cover firmly. If the front cover is not completely closed, the machine will not operate. Please make sure all toner cartridges are installed properly. If any toner cartridge is installed improperly, the front cover do not close. 11. Turn the machine on.Supplies_ 89 Each LED blinks red in a repeated order. Wait for about 1.5 minutes for your machine to get ready. Replacing the waste toner container When the life span of the waster toner container has expired, the Smart Panel program window appears on the computer, indicating the waste toner container needs to be replaced. Otherwise, your machine stops printing. 1. Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool. 2. Open the front cover. 3. Pull the waste toner container out of the machine using its handle. Make sure that you lay the waste toner container on a flat surface so that the toner dose not spill. 4. Remove the container’s cap from the container as shown below and use it to close the waste toner container opening. 2 1 Do not tilt or turn over the container. 5. Take a new waste toner container out of its package. 6. Insert the new container into position and then push it to make sure that it is firmly seated in place. 7. Close the front cover firmly. If the front cover is not completely closed, the machine will not operate. Please, make sure all toner cartridges are installed properly. If any toner cartridge is installed improperly, the front cover do not close. 8. Turn the machine on.Specifications_ 90 12.specifications This chapter covers the machine’s primary specifications. This chapter includes: • Hardware specifications • Environmental specifications • Electrical specifications • Print media specifications The specification values are listed below: specification are subject to change without notice: See www.samsung.com/printer for possible changes in information. Hardware specifications Item Description Dimension Height 243 mm (9.57 inches) Depth 313 mm (12.32 inches) Width 388 mm (15.28 inches) Weight Machine with consumables 11 Kg (24.25 lbs) Package weight Paper 1.50 Kg (3.31 lbs) Plastic 0.45 Kg (0.99 lbs) Wireless a a.CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only. Module CLX-NWA20L Environmental specifications Item Description Noise Level a a.Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: machine basic installation, A4 paper, simplex printing. Ready mode Background noise level Printing mode Less than 45 dBA (Color printing) Less than 47 dBA (Black and White printing) Temperature Operation 10 to 32 °C (50 to 89.6 °F) Storage (Packed) 0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F) Humidity Operation 20 to 80% RH Storage (Packed) 10 to 90% RH Electrical specifications Power requirements are based on the country/region where the device is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. Doing so might damage the device and void the product warranty.Item Description Power rating a a.See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of current for your machine. 110 volt models AC 110 - 127 V 220 volt models AC 220 - 240 V Power consumption Average operating mode Less than 350 W Ready mode Less than 60 W Power save mode • CLP-320(K)/CLP-321/CLP-325(K)/ CLP-326: Less than 5 W • CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N: Less than 6 W • CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W: Less than 7 W Power off mode Less than 0.45 W Specifications_ 91Specifications_ 92 Print media specifications Type Size Dimensions Weight a a.If media weight is over 120 g/m2 (32 lbs bond), load a paper into the tray one by one. Plain paper Letter 216 x 279 mm (8.50 x 11.00 inches) 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond). 130 sheets of 80 g/m2 (21 lbs bond) paper for the tray. Legal 216 x 356 mm (8.50 x 14.00 inches) US Folio 216 x 330 mm (8.50 x 13.00 inches) A4 210 x 297 mm (8.26 x 11.69 inches) Oficio 216 x 343 mm (8.50 x 13.50 inches) JIS B5 182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches) ISO B5 176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches) Executive 184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches) A5 148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches) A6 105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches) Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.50 inches) 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) for manual feeding in the tray. 5 sheets for manual feeding in the tray. No. 10 105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.50 inches) DL 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches) C5 162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.02 inches) C6 114 x 162 mm (4.49 x 6.38 inches) No.9 98 x 225 mm (3.87 x 8.87 inches) 6 3/4 92 x 165 mm (3.62 x 6.50 inches) Thick paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 90 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lbs bond) for manual feeding in the tray. 5 sheets for manual feeding in the tray. Thin paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lbs bond) for manual feeding in the tray. Labels c c. Smoothness: 100 to 250 (sheffield). This means the numeric level of smoothness. Letter, A4 Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lbs bond) for manual feeding in the tray. Card stock PostCard 101.60 x 152.4 mm (4 x 6 inches) 105 to 163 g/m2 (28 to 43 lbs bond) for manual feeding in the tray. e f Transparency d d.Recommended media: Transparency for a color laser printer by Xerox 3R91331 (A4), Xerox 3R2780 (Letter). e.Recommended media: 0.104 to 0.124 mm (0.004094 to 0.004882 inches) transparency paper. f. In case of color printing using transparencies, the picture quality would be lower than mono printing when the printouts are used on the overhead projector. Letter, A4, Refer to the Plain paper section - 1 sheet for manual feeding in the tray Glossy Photo g Letter, A4 Refer to the Pain paper section 111 to 220 g/m2 (30 to 58 lbs bond) for manual feeding in the tray. Matte Photo Letter, A4, PostCard 4 x 6 Refer to the Pain paper section 111 to 220 g/m2 (30 to 58 lbs bond) for manual feeding in the tray. Minimum size (custom) 76 x 152.4 mm (3.00 x 6.00 inches) 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lbs bond) Maximum size (custom) 216 x 356 mm (8.50 x 14.02 inches) Capacity b b.Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness and environmental conditions. Specifications_ 93 g.Recommended media: Glossy paper (Letter) for this machine by HP Brochure Paper (Product: Q6611A). Glossy paper (A4) for this machine by HP Superior Paper 160 glossy (Product: Q6616A).Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 94 contact samsung worldwide If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact the Samsung customer care center. Country/Regio n Customer Care Center Web Site ARGENTINE 0800-333-3733 www.samsung.com ARMENIA 0-800-05-555 AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www.samsung.com AUSTRIA 0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.07/min) www.samsung.com AZERBAIJAN 088-55-55-555 BAHRAIN 8000-4726 BELARUS 810-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.ua www.samsung.com/ua_ru BELGIUM 02-201-24-18 www.samsung.com/be (Dutch) www.samsung.com/be_fr (French) BRAZIL 0800-124-421 4004-0000 www.samsung.com CANADA 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com CHILE 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com CHINA 400-810-5858 010-6475 1880 www.samsung.com COLOMBIA 01-8000112112 www.samsung.com COSTA RICA 0-800-507-7267 www.samsung.com CZECH REPUBLIC 800-SAMSUNG (800-726786) www.samsung.com Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis Florenc, Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8 DENMARK 70 70 19 70 www.samsung.com ECUADOR 1-800-10-7267 www.samsung.com EGYPT 0800-726786 EIRE 0818 717100 www.samsung.com EL SALVADOR 800-6225 www.samsung.com ESTONIA 800-7267 www.samsung.com KAZAKHSTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_ru KYRGYZSTAN 00-800-500-55-500 FINLAND 030-6227 515 www.samsung.com FRANCE 01 48 63 00 00 www.samsung.com GERMANY 01805 - SAMSUNG (726-7864 € 0,14/min) www.samsung.com GEORGIA 8-800-555-555 GUATEMALA 1-800-299-0013 www.samsung.com HONDURAS 800-7919267 www.samsung.com HONG KONG (852) 3698-4698 www.samsung.com/hk www.samsung.com/hk_en/ HUNGARY 06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com INDIA 3030 8282 1800 110011 1800 3000 8282 1800 266 8282 www.samsung.com INDONESIA 0800-112-8888 021-5699-7777 www.samsung.com ITALIA 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com JAMAICA 1-800-234-7267 www.samsung.com JAPAN 0120-327-527 www.samsung.com JORDAN 800-22273 KSA 9200-21230 www.samsung.com BAHRAIN 8000-4726 LATVIA 8000-7267 www.samsung.com LITHUANIA 8-800-77777 www.samsung.com LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 www.samsung.com MALAYSIA 1800-88-9999 www.samsung.com MEXICO 01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com MOLDOVA 00-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.ua www.samsung.com/ua_ru NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) (€ 0,10/min) www.samsung.com NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786) www.samsung.com NICARAGUA 00-1800-5077267 www.samsung.com NORWAY 815-56 480 www.samsung.com PANAMA 800-7267 www.samsung.com Country/Regio n Customer Care Center Web SiteContact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 95 PHILIPPINES 1800-10-SAMSUNG (726-7864) 1-800-3-SAMSUNG (726-7864) 1-800-8-SAMSUNG (726-7864) 02-5805777 www.samsung.com POLAND 0 801 1SAMSUNG (172678) 022-607-93-33 www.samsung.com PORTUGAL 80820-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com PUERTO RICO 1-800-682-3180 www.samsung.com QATAR 800-2255 REP. DOMINICA 1-800-751-2676 www.samsung.com RUSSIA 8-800-555-55-55 www.samsung.ru SINGAPORE 1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com SLOVAKIA 0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com SPAIN 902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172 678) www.samsung.com SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com SWITZERLAND 0848-SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF 0.08/min) www.samsung.com SYRIA 1825-22-73 TADJIKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 TAIWAN 0800-329-999 www.samsung.com THAILAND 1800-29-3232 02-689-3232 www.samsung.com TRINIDAD & TOBAGO 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com TURKEY 444 77 11 www.samsung.com U.A.E 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com U.K 0845 SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com U.S.A 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com UKRAINE 8-800-502-000 www.samsung.ua www.samsung.com/ua_ru Country/Regio n Customer Care Center Web Site UZBEKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_ru VENEZUELA 0-800-100-5303 www.samsung.com VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www.samsung.com Country/Regio n Customer Care Center Web SiteGlossary_ 96 glossary The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this user’s guide. 802.11 802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802). 802.11b/g/n 802.11b/g/n can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices. Access point Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks (WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals. ADF An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once. AppleTalk AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking. BIT Depth A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white. BMP A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform. BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system. CCD Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine. Collation Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies. Control Panel A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of the machine. Coverage It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as the coverage. CSV Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft Excel, has become a de facto standard throughout the industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms. DADF A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper. Default The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state, reset, or initialized. DHCP A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.Glossary_ 97 DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data, received fax data. DLNA The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a standard that allows devices on a home network to share information with each other across the network. DMPr The Digital Media Printer (DMPr) is a device that allows printing in DLNA home network. The DMPr prints a page by combining images with an Extensible HyperText Markup Language (XHTML) template. DNS The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks, such as the Internet. Dot Matrix Printer A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter. DPI Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size. DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. Duplex A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle. Duty Cycle Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day. ECM Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise. Emulation Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another. An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like the first system. Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its internal state. Ethernet Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present. EtherTalk A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking. FDI Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine. FTP A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol (such as the Internet or an intranet). Fuser Unit The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It consists of a heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer. Gateway A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network. Grayscale A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of gray. Halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots.Glossary_ 98 HDD Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces. IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity. IEEE 1284 The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral (for example, a printer). Intranet A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization's information or operations with its employees. Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website. IP address An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard. IPM The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute. IPP The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones. IPX/SPX IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN). ISO The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards. ITU-T The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication. ITU-T No. 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile transmissions. JBIG Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other images. JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web. LDAP The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/IP. LED A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine. MAC address Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks. MFP Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a scanner and etc. MH Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes. Glossary_ 99 MMR Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.6. Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information. MR Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and transmitted. NetWare A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack. Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX. OPC Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape. An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage in the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning mechanism, and paper. Originals The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but which is not itself copied or derived from something else. OSI Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications. OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical. PABX A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise. PCL Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal, dot matrix printer, and laser printers. PDF Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format. PostScript PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an interpreter to generate an image. Printer Driver A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer. Print Media The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used in a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier. PPM Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute. PRN file An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies many tasks. Protocol A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints. PS See PostScript. PSTN The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is usually routed through the switchboard. RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA (authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage network access. Resolution The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi, the greater the resolution. SMB Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications Glossary_ 100 between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-process communication mechanism. SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-server protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server. SSID Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a maximum length of 32 characters. Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host address. TCP/IP The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run. TCR Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions. TIFF Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications. Toner Cartridge A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be fused by by a combination of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper. TWAIN An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be initiated from within the program. It is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems. UNC Path Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a UNC path is: \\\\ URL Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located. USB Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals. Watermark A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting. WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one end point to another. WIA Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant scanner. WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi) computer networks, which was created to improve upon the security features of WEP. WPA-PSK WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the wireless access point (WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced security. WPS The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for establishing a wireless home network. If your wireless access point supports WPS, you can configure the wireless network connection easily without a computer.Glossary_ 101 XPS XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language (PDL) and a new document format, which has benefits for portable document and electronic document, developed by Microsoft. It is an XML-based specification, based on a new print path and a vector-based device-independent document format.Index_ 102 index A adjusting tray size 50 B booklet printing 61 booklets 61 buttons cancel 27 demo print 27 power 27 print screen 26 wps 27 C change percentage of your document 62 cleaning inside 72 outside 72 cleaning a machine 72 control panel 25 convention 19 curled 84 D duplex printing (manual) printer driver 62 F favorites settings, for printing 60 features 21 machine features 90 power saving feature 51 supplied software 28 font setting 51 front view 23 G glossary 96 J jam tips for avoiding paper jams 75 L LED status/toner 26 wireless 26 Linux common Linux problems 84 driver installation for network connected 39 printer properties 67 printing 66 supplied software 29 system requirements 30 unified driver configurator 70 loading special media 56 M Macintosh common Macintosh problems 85 driver installation for network connected 38 printing 65 sharing a machine locally 33 system requirements 29 using SetIP 35, 47 manual tray using special media 56 N network driver installation Linux 39 Macintosh 38 Windows 37 installing environment 34 introducing network programs 34 IPv4 configuration 35 IPv6 configuration 36 SetIP program 35, 47 using a wired network 34 N-up printing Macintosh 66 Windows 61 O overlay printing create 63 delete 63 print 63 P paper changing the size 53 paper type setting 58 placing a machine adjusting the altitude 50 spacing 28 poster 61 power saver using power save mode 51 print media card stock 58 envelope 57 glossy paper 58 labels 57 output support 92 special media 56 transparency 57 print quality problems, solve 81 print resolution set Linux 67 print resolution, set Macintosh 66 printer driver features 59 printer properties Linux 67 printing changing the default print settings 64 fitting your document to a selected paper size 62 Linux 66 Macintosh 65 multiple pages on one sheet of paper Macintosh 66 Windows 61 poster 61Index_ 103 printing a document Windows 59 printing to a file 65 Printing a demo page 28 printing a document Linux 66 Macintosh 65 printing a machine report 72 problem, solve printing quality 81 problems paper feeding problems 79 R regulatory information 11 S safety information 7 symbols 7 service contact numbers 94 SetIP program 35, 47 Smart Panel font setting 51 general information 69 specifications general 90 print media 92 supplies available supplies 86 estimated toner cartridge life 74 ordering 86 replacing toner cartridge 86 SyncThru Web Service general information 68 T toner distributing 75 toner cartridge estimated life 74 handling instructions 74 non-Samsung and refilled 74 replacing the cartridge 86 storing 73 tray adjusting the width and length 53 turning on the machine 27 U understanding the control panel 26 cancel button 27 USB cable driver installation 30 using help 61 using overlay in windows 63 using watermarks in windows 62 W watermark create 62 delete 63 edit 63 print 62 Windows common Windows problems 84 driver installation for network connected 37 printing 59 sharing a machine locally 33 system requiremnets 29 using SetIP 35, 47 wireless WPS button 41 wireless network network cable 46 USB cable 41 wps PIN 41 CLP-320 Series Imprimante laser couleur Mode d'emploi imaginez les possibilités Merci d’avoir fait l’acquisition d’un produit Samsung. Copyright_ 2 Copyright © 2010 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Tous droits réservés. Le présent mode d’emploi n’est fourni qu’à titre informatif. Toutes les informations communiquées ci-après sont susceptibles d’être modifiées sans préavis. Samsung Electronics ne saurait être tenu pour responsable des dommages, directs ou indirects, consécutifs à l’utilisation de ce mode d’emploi. • Samsung et le logo Samsung sont des marques commerciales de Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. • Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7 et Windows 2008 Server R2 sont soit des marques déposées soit des marques commerciales de Microsoft Corporation. • TrueType, LaserWriter et Macintosh sont des marques commerciales d’Apple Computer, Inc. • Les autres noms de produit et de marque sont des marques commerciales de leurs propriétaires respectifs. Reportez-vous au fichier « LICENSE.txt » du CD-ROM fourni pour consulter les informations de licence Open Source. REV. 4.00Table des matières_ 3 Table des matières COPYRIGHT 2 TABLE DES MATIÈRES 3 7 Informations en matière de sécurité 12 Informations légales 21 A propos de ce mode d’emploi 23 Caractéristiques de votre nouvel appareil INTRODUCTION 25 25 Description de l’appareil 25 Vue avant 26 Vue arrière 27 Vue d’ensemble du panneau de commande 28 Le panneau de commande 28 Voyants d’état/de toner 28 Voyant sans fil 29 Présentation des touches utiles 29 Bouton Impr. écran 29 Bouton d’impression de page de démonstration 29 Touche Annuler 29 Bouton WPS 29 Bouton Alimentation PRISE EN MAIN 30 30 Configuration du matériel 30 Emplacement 30 Impression d’une page de démonstration 30 Logiciel fourni 31 Configuration requise 31 Microsoft ® Windows ® 31 Macintosh 32 Linux 32 Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté via USB 32 Windows 33 Macintosh 34 Linux 35 Partage local de l’appareil 35 Windows 36 Macintosh CONFIGURATION DU RÉSEAU (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/ CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W UNIQUEMENT) 37 37 Environnement réseau 37 Présentation des programmes réseau utiles 37 SyncThru™ Web Service 37 SyncThru™ Web Admin Service 37 SetIP 37 Utilisation d’un réseau câblé 38 Impression d’un rapport de configuration réseau 38 Création d’une adresse IP 38 Configuration IPv4 39 Configuration IPv6 40 Restauration des paramètres par défaut définis en usine à l’aide du SyncThru™ Web Service 40 Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté au réseau 40 WindowsTable des matières Table des matières_ 4 41 Macintosh 42 Linux CONFIGURATION DU RÉSEAU SANS FIL (CLP-325W(K)/ CLP-326W UNIQUEMENT) 44 44 Instructions de démarrage 44 Choisir votre connexion réseau 44 Nom du réseau sans fil et clé réseau 44 Choix du type d’installation réseau sans fil 44 À partir du panneau de commande 44 Depuis l’ordinateur 45 Paramétrage d’un réseau sans fil avec le bouton WPS 45 Paramétrage d’un réseau sans fil avec le bouton WPS 46 Paramétrage d’un réseau sans fil à partir de l’ordinateur 46 Configuration d’un réseau sans fil avec un câble USB 51 Configuration d’un réseau sans fil avec un câble réseau 53 Fin de l’installation 53 Activation/désactivation du réseau Wi-Fi 53 Dépannage 53 Résolution des problèmes pouvant survenir lors de la configuration des paramètres sans fil et de l’installation du pilote de l’appareil 54 Résolution d’autres problèmes CONFIGURATION DE BASE 55 55 Réglage de l’altitude 55 Réglage du bac et du papier par défaut 55 A partir de votre ordinateur 56 Utilisation de la fonctionnalité d’économie d’énergie 56 Modification des paramètres de police (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP- 325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement) 56 Réglage du mode humidity SUPPORTS ET BACS 57 57 Sélection du support d’impression 57 Recommandations pour sélectionner le support d’impression 57 Formats de support pris en charge dans chaque mode 58 Modification du format du bac 59 Chargement de papier dans le bac 59 Dans le bac 60 Alimentation manuelle dans le bac 62 Impression sur supports spéciaux 62 Enveloppes 62 Transparents 63 Étiquettes 63 Papiers cartonnés ou de format personnalisé 63 Papier à en-tête/papier pré-imprimé 63 Papier recyclé 64 Photo brillante 64 Photo mate 64 Réglage du type et du format de papier 64 Utilisation du support de sortie papier IMPRESSION 65 65 Présentation d’un programme utile 65 Samsung AnyWeb Print 65 Samsung Easy Color Manager 65 Fonctions des pilotes d’impression 65 Pilote d’impression 65 Impression de baseTable des matières Table des matières_ 5 66 Annulation d’une impression 66 Ouverture des préférences d’impression 66 Utilisation d’un réglage favori 67 Utilisation de l’aide 67 Utilisation des fonctions d’impression spéciales 67 Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille 67 Impression d’affiches 68 Impression de brochures (manuelle) 68 Impression recto verso (manuelle) 68 Modification des proportions de votre document 68 Impression d’un document sur un format de papier donné 69 Impression de filigranes 69 Utilisation de la surimpression 70 Options de l’onglet Graphiques 71 Modification des réglages d’impression par défaut 71 Définition de votre appareil comme appareil par défaut 71 Impression dans un fichier (PRN) 72 Impression Macintosh 72 Impression d’un document 72 Modification des paramètres de l’imprimante 73 Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille 73 Impression Linux 73 Impression à partir d’applications 74 Impression de fichiers 74 Configuration des propriétés de l’imprimante OUTILS DE GESTION 75 75 Présentation des outils de gestion utiles 75 Utilisation de l’alerte SyncThru™ Web Service 75 Pour accéder à SyncThru™ Web Service 75 Présentation de SyncThru™ Web Service 76 Configuration des notifications par e-mail 76 Définition des informations pour l’administrateur système 76 Utilisation du programme Smart Panel 76 Présentation de Smart Panel 77 Modification des paramètres du programme Smart Panel 78 Utilisation du configurateur de pilote unifié Linux 78 Ouverture d’Unified Driver Configurator 78 Fenêtre Printers configuration 79 Ports configuration MAINTENANCE 80 80 Impression d’un journal de l’appareil 80 Nettoyage d’un appareil 80 Nettoyage de l’extérieur 80 Nettoyage de l’intérieur 82 Stockage de la cartouche de toner 82 Stockage de la cartouche de toner 82 Instructions de manipulation 82 Utilisation de cartouches de toner d’une autre marque que Samsung et rechargées 82 Durée de vie estimée d’une cartouche 82 Conseils pour déplacer et ranger l’appareilTable des matières Table des matières_ 6 DÉPANNAGE 83 83 Redistribution du toner 83 Astuces pour éviter les bourrages papier 84 Résolution des bourrages papier 84 Dans le bac 84 À l’intérieur de l’appareil 85 Dans la zone du bac de sortie 87 Résolution d’autres problèmes 87 Problèmes liés au système 87 Problèmes d’alimentation 88 Problèmes d’alimentation papier 88 Problèmes d’impression 90 Problèmes de qualité d’impression 93 Problèmes Windows courants 94 Problèmes Linux courants 95 Problèmes Macintosh courants FOURNITURES 96 96 Comment commander 96 Consommables disponibles 96 Pièces de rechange 97 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner 98 Remplacement de l’unité d’imagerie 99 Remplacement du récupérateur de toner usagé CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES 101 101 Caractéristiques techniques du matériel 101 Caractéristiques techniques environnementales 102 Caractéristiques techniques électriques 103 Spécifications des supports d’impression CONTACT SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE 104 GLOSSAIRE 106 INDEX 112Informations en matière de sécurité_ 7 Informations en matière de sécurité Ces avertissements et précautions sont inclus afin d’éviter des blessures pour vous et d’autres personnes, ainsi que pour éviter des dommages potentiels à votre appareil. Veillez à lire et à comprendre toutes ces instructions avant d’utiliser l’appareil. Faites preuve de bon sens lors de l’utilisation d’appareils électriques et chaque fois que vous utilisez votre appareil. Observez en outre toutes les mises en garde et instructions mentionnées sur le produit et dans la documentation qui l’accompagne. Une fois que vous avez lu cette section, conservez-la pour pouvoir vous y reporter par la suite. Importante symboles de sécurité Cette section explique la signification des icônes et des signes de ce guide de l’utilisateur. Ces symboles de sécurité sont dans l’ordre, suivant le degré de danger. Explication des icônes et des signes utilisés dans le guide de l’utilisateur : Avertissement Situations dangereuses ou à risques pouvant entraîner des blessures graves ou la mort. Mise en garde Situations dangereuses ou à risques pouvant entraîner des blessures légères ou des dommages matériels. Ne pas essayer. Ne pas démonter. Ne pas toucher. Débranchez la prise d’alimentation de la prise murale. Assurez-vous que votre appareil est branché sur une prise de courant reliée à la terre. Contactez le service de maintenance pour obtenir de l’aide. Suivez les instructions à la lettre.Informations en matière de sécurité_ 8 Environnement d’exploitation Avertissement Ne pas utiliser si le câble d’alimentation électrique est endommagé ou si la prise électrique n’est pas reliée à la terre. ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Ne pliez pas le câble d’alimentation électrique et ne placez pas d’objets lourds dessus. ► Le fait de marcher sur le câble d’alimentation électrique ou de l’écraser avec un objet lourd peut occasionner une décharge électrique ou un incendie. Ne rien poser sur l’appareil (eau, objets métalliques, objets lourds, bougies, cigarettes allumées, etc.). ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Ne retirez pas la fiche en tirant sur le câble ; ne manipulez pas la prise avec des mains mouillées. ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Si l’appareil surchauffe, libère de la fumée, émet des bruits étranges, ou produit une odeur bizarre : coupez immédiatement l’interrupteur d’alimentation et débranchez l’appareil. ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Mise en garde Pendant un orage ou pendant une période de non-fonctionnement, retirez la fiche d’alimentation de la prise de courant. ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Si la fiche n’entre pas facilement dans la prise, ne forcez pas pour l’insérer. ► Appelez un électricien pour changer la prise de courant, sous peine de décharge électrique possible. Faites attention, la zone de sortie papier est chaude. ► Vous pouvez vous brûler. Veillez à ce qu’aucun animal domestique ne ronge les cordons d’alimentation, de téléphone et d’interface PC. ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie et/ou de blessure pour votre animal domestique. Si on a laissé tomber l’appareil, ou si le boîtier semble endommagé, débranchez toutes les connexions de l’appareil et demandez une assistance auprès du personnel de service qualifié. ► Dans le cas contraire, il y a un risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Si l’appareil ne fonctionne pas correctement après avoir suivi ces instructions, débranchez toutes les connexions de l’appareil et demandez une assistance auprès du personnel de service qualifié. ► Dans le cas contraire, il y a un risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Si l’appareil présente un changement visible et brusque du niveau de performance, débranchez toutes les connexions de l’appareil et demandez une assistance auprès du personnel de service qualifié. ► Dans le cas contraire, il y a un risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie.Informations en matière de sécurité_ 9 Méthode d’utilisation Mise en garde Ne tirez pas avec force sur la feuille durant l’impression. ► Vous risquez d’endommager l’appareil. Lors de l’impression de grandes quantités, la partie inférieure de la zone de sortie papier peut devenir chaude. Ne laissez pas des enfants y toucher. ► Vous pouvez vous brûler. Faites attention de ne pas mettre la main entre l’appareil et le bac d’alimentation papier. ► Vous pourriez vous blesser. Lorsque vous retirez du papier coincé, évitez d’utiliser des objets métalliques pointus. ► Cela pourrait endommager l’appareil. N’obstruez pas l’orifice de ventilation et n’y poussez pas d’objets. ► La température des composants risquerait d’augmenter et pourrait provoquer des dommages ou un incendie. Ne laissez pas le papier s’empiler sur le réceptacle de sortie. ► Cela pourrait endommager l’appareil. Faites attention lorsque vous remplacez du papier ou que vous retirez du papier coincé. ► Les bords d’une feuille neuve sont tranchants et peuvent provoquer des coupures douloureuses. Le dispositif d’interruption d’’alimentation de cet appareil est son câble d’alimentation électrique. ► Pour couper l’alimentation, retirez le câble d’alimentation électrique de la prise électrique. Informations en matière de sécurité_ 10 Installation/déplacement Avertissement Ne placez pas l’appareil dans un endroit poussiéreux, humide ou sujet à des fuites d’eau. ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Mise en garde Avant de déplacer l’appareil, éteignez-le et débranchez tous les cordons. Puis levez l’appareil: •si le poids de l’appareil est inférieur à 20 kg, une seule personne suffit ; •si le poids de l’appareil est de 20 kg, deux personnes sont nécessaires ; •si le poids de l’appareil est supérieur à 40 kg, 4 personnes sont nécessaires. ► L’appareil pourrait tomber et être endommagé ou blesser quelqu’un. Ne couvrez pas l’appareil et ne le placez pas dans un endroit confiné comme un placard. ► Si l’appareil n’est pas bien ventilé, il y a un risque d’incendie. Ne placez pas l’appareil sur une surface instable. ► L’appareil pourrait tomber et être endommagé ou blesser quelqu’un. Branchez directement le câble d’alimentation électrique dans une prise de courant correctement reliée à la terre. ► Dans le cas contraire, il y a un risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. L’appareil doit être connecté au niveau de puissance indiqué sur l’étiquette. ► En cas de doute et si vous voulez vérifier le niveau de puissance utilisé, contactez le service d’électricité. Ne branchez pas un trop grand nombre d’appareils électriques sur une même prise murale ou sur une même rallonge. ► Une prise surchargée réduit les performances et constitue une source potentielle d’incendie et de décharges électriques. Utilisez exclusivement du câble AWG N°26 a a.AWG : American Wire Gauge, calibrage américain normalisé des fils. ou un câble de téléphone plus grand, si nécessaire. ► Dans le cas contraire, vous risquez d’endommager l’appareil. Pour un fonctionnement sûr, utilisez le câble d’alimentation électrique fourni avec votre appareil. Si vous utilisez un câble de plus de 2 mètres avec un appareil 140 V, le calibre doit être 16 AWG ou plus grand. ► Dans le cas contraire, l’appareil peut être endommagé et il y a un risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie.Informations en matière de sécurité_ 11 Entretien/contrôle Mise en garde Débranchez l’appareil de la prise secteur avant de nettoyer l’intérieur. Ne nettoyez pas l’appareil avec du benzène, du diluant pour peinture ou de l’alcool ; ne pulvérisez pas de l’eau directement dans l’appareil. ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Gardez les produits de nettoyage hors de portée des enfants. ► Ils peuvent se blesser. Lorsque vous effectuez une tâche dans l’appareil pour remplacer des consommables ou nettoyer l’intérieur, ne le faites pas fonctionner. ► Vous pourriez vous blesser. Ne démontez pas, ne réparez pas et ne remontez pas l’appareil vous-même. ► Cela pourrait endommager l’appareil. Appelez un technicien agréé lorsque l’appareil doit être réparé. Gardez le câble d’alimentation et la surface de contact de la fiche exempts de poussière ou d’eau. ► Dans le cas contraire, il y a un risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Pour nettoyer et faire fonctionner l’appareil, respectez à la lettre le guide d’utilisateur fourni avec l’appareil. ► Dans le cas contraire, vous pourriez endommager l’appareil. Ne retirez jamais les couvercles ou protections fixés avec des vis. ► L’appareil doit exclusivement être réparé par un technicien de maintenance Samsung. Utilisation des consommables Mise en garde Ne démontez pas la cartouche de toner. ► Les particules de toner peuvent être dangereuses si vous les inhalez ou les ingérez. Lorsque vous rangez les consommables comme les cartouches de toner, gardez-les hors de portées de enfants. ► Les particules de toner peuvent être dangereuses si vous les inhalez ou les ingérez. Ne brûlez aucun consommable comme une cartouche de toner ou une unité de chauffe. ► Cela pourrait provoquer une explosion ou déclencher un incendie incontrôlable. L’utilisation de consommables recyclés, comme le toner, peut endommager l’appareil. ► En cas de dommage lié à l’utilisation de consommables recyclés, des frais seront imputés. Lorsque vous changez la cartouche de toner ou que vous retirez un papier bloqué, faites attention de ne pas vous salir ou salir vos vêtements avec le toner. ► Les particules de toner peuvent être dangereuses si vous les inhalez ou les ingérez. Si du toner se dépose sur vos vêtements, n’utilisez pas d’eau chaude pour les laver. ► L’eau chaude fixe le toner sur le tissu. Utilisez de l’eau froide. Informations légales_ 12 Informations légales Cet appareil est conçu pour un environnement de travail normal et certifié avec plusieurs déclarations légales. Avertissement relatif à la sécurité laser Cette imprimante est certifiée conforme aux spécifications DHHS 21 CFR, chapitre 1, sous-chapitre J pour les produits laser de classe I(1) aux États-Unis, et certifiée dans les autres pays comme un produit laser de classe I, conformément aux spécifications IEC 60825-1:1993 + A1:1997 + A2:2001. Les produi